C-ClassOperator's Manual

Order no. 6515 0935 13 Part no. 2055844601 Edition C-2015

É2055844601FËÍ2055844601

C-Clas

sOperat

or'sM

anual

Publication detailsInternet

Further information about Mercedes-Benzvehicles and about Daimler AG can be foundon the following websites:http://www.mbusa.com (USA only)http://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canadaonly)

Editorial office

©Daimler AG: Not to be reprinted, translatedor otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part,without written permission from Daimler AG.

Vehicle manufacturer

Daimler AGMercedesstraße 13770327 StuttgartGermany

SymbolsRegistered trademarks:RBluetooth® is a registered trademark ofBluetooth SIG Inc.RDTS is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc.RDolby and MLP are registered trademarksof DOLBY Laboratories.RBabySmart™, ESP® and PRE-SAFE® areregistered trademarks of Daimler AG.RHomeLink® is a registered trademark ofJohnson Controls.RiPod® and iTunes® are registered trade-marks of Apple Inc.RBurmester is a registered trademark ofBurmester Audiosysteme GmbH.RMicrosoft® and Windows media® are reg-istered trademarks of Microsoft Corpora-tion.RSIRIUS is a registered trademark of SiriusXM Radio Inc.RHD Radio is a registered trademark of iBiq-uity Digital Corporation.RGracenote® is a registered trademark ofGracenote, Inc.RZAGATSurvey® and related brands are reg-istered trademarks of ZagatSurvey, LLC.

In this Operator's Manual you will find the fol-lowing symbols:

G WARNINGWarning notes make you aware of dangerswhich could pose a threat to your health orlife, or to the health and life of others.

H Environmental noteEnvironmental notes provide you with infor-mation on environmentally aware actions ordisposal.

! Notes on material damage alert you todangers that could lead to damage to yourvehicle.

i Practical tips or further information thatcould be helpful to you.

X This symbol indicates an instructionthat must be followed.

X Several of these symbols in succes-sion indicate an instruction with sev-eral steps.

(Ypage)

This symbol tells you where you canfind more information about a topic.

YY This symbol indicates a warning or aninstruction that is continued on thenext page.

Dis‐Dis‐playplay

This font indicates a display in themultifunction display/COMAND dis-play.

Parts of the software in the vehicle are pro-tected by copyright © 2005The FreeType Projecthttp://www.freetype.org. All rightsreserved.

As at 29.10.2013

Welcome to the world of Mercedes-BenzWe urge you to read this Operator's Manualcarefully and familiarize yourself with thevehicle before driving. For your own safetyand a longer vehicle life, follow the instruc-tions and warning notices in this manual.Ignoring them could result in damage to thevehicle or personal injury to you or others.Vehicle damage caused by failure to followinstructions is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.The equipment or product designation of yourvehicle may vary depending on:RmodelRorderRcountry specificationRavailabilityMercedes-Benz therefore reserves the rightto introduce changes in the following areas:RdesignRequipmentRtechnical featuresThe equipment in your vehicle may thereforediffer from that shown in the descriptions andillustrations.The following are integral components of thevehicle:ROperator's ManualRMaintenance BookletREquipment-dependent supplementsKeep these documents in the vehicle at alltimes. If you sell the vehicle, always pass alldocuments on to the new owner.You can also use the C‑Class Guide smart-phone App:

Apple® iOS

Android™

Please note that the Mercedes-Benz GuidesApp may not yet be available in your country.The technical documentation team atDaimler AG wishes you safe and pleasantmotoring.Mercedes-Benz USA, LLCMercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.A Daimler Company

2055844601 É2055844601FËÍ

Index ....................................................... 4

Introduction ......................................... 22

At a glance ........................................... 31

Safety ................................................... 41

Opening and closing ........................... 79

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors .. 107

Lights and windshield wipers .......... 123

Climate control ................................. 137

Driving and parking .......................... 155

On-board computer and displays .... 229

Stowage and features ...................... 297

Maintenance and care ...................... 323

Roadside Assistance ........................ 339

Wheels and tires ............................... 357

Technical data ................................... 395

Contents 3

1, 2, 3 ...12 V socket

see Sockets360° camera

Cleaning ......................................... 335Function/notes ............................. 211

4ETSsee ETS/4ETS (Electronic Trac-tion System)

4MATIC (permanent four-wheeldrive) .................................................. 199

AABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

Display message ............................ 251Function/notes ................................ 66Important safety notes .................... 66Warning lamp ................................. 286

AccidentAutomaticmeasures after an acci-dent ................................................. 59

Activating/deactivating coolingwith air dehumidification ................. 143Active Blind Spot Assist

Activating/deactivating (on-board computer) ............................ 246Display message ............................ 273Function/information .................... 221

Active Lane Keeping AssistActivating/deactivating (on-board computer) ............................ 246Display message ............................ 272Function/information .................... 224

Active Parking AssistDetecting parking spaces .............. 203Display message ............................ 273Exiting a parking space .................. 205Function/notes ............................. 202Important safety notes .................. 202Parking .......................................... 204

ADAPTIVE BRAKE ................................. 74Adaptive Brake Assist

Function/notes ................................ 70Adaptive Damping System (ADS) ..... 198

Adaptive Highbeam AssistDisplay message ............................ 267Function/notes ............................. 127Switching on/off ........................... 128

Additional speedometer ................... 248Additives (engine oil) ........................ 400AGILITY SELECT switch

Automatic transmission ................. 167Climate control (3-zone automaticclimate control) ............................. 142Climate control (dual-zone auto-matic climate control) .................... 140

Air bagsDeployment ..................................... 56Display message ............................ 263Front air bag (driver, frontpassenger) ....................................... 49Important safety notes .................... 48Introduction ..................................... 48Knee bag .......................................... 50PASSENGER AIR BAG indicatorlamps ............................................... 43Side impact air bag .......................... 50Window curtain air bag .................... 51

Air-conditioning systemsee Climate control

AIRMATICDisplay message ............................ 271Function/notes ............................. 197

AIRPANEL (cleaning instructions) .... 334Air vents

Important safety notes .................. 152Rear ............................................... 153Setting ........................................... 152Setting the center air vents ........... 152Setting the side air vents ............... 153

AlarmATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 76Switching off (ATA) .......................... 76Switching the function on/off(ATA) ................................................ 76

Alarm systemsee ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)

Anti-lock Braking systemsee ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

Anti-Theft Alarm systemsee ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)

4 Index

ArmrestStowage compartment .................. 300

Ashtray ............................................... 309Assistance display (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 243Assistance menu (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 244ASSYST PLUS

Displaying a service message ........ 329Hiding a service message .............. 328Notes ............................................. 328Resetting the service interval dis-play ................................................ 329Service message ............................ 328Special service requirements ......... 329

ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)Activating/deactivating ................... 76Function ........................................... 76Switching off the alarm .................... 76

ATTENTION ASSISTActivating/deactivating ................. 246Display message ............................ 271Function/notes ............................. 216

Authorized Mercedes-Benz Centersee Qualified specialist workshop

Authorized workshopsee Qualified specialist workshop

AUTO lightsDisplay message ............................ 266see Lights

Automatic car wash (care) ............... 330Automatic engine start (ECOstart/stop function) .................................... 161Automatic engine switch-off (ECOstart/stop function) .......................... 161Automatic headlamp mode .............. 124Automatic transmission

Accelerator pedal position ............. 167AGILITY SELECT switch .................. 167Changing gear ............................... 167DIRECT SELECT lever ..................... 164Display message ............................ 280Drive program ................................ 168Drive program display .................... 166Driving tips .................................... 167Emergency running mode .............. 171Engaging drive position .................. 166

Engaging neutral ............................ 165Engaging park position automati-cally ............................................... 165Engaging reverse gear ................... 165Engaging the park position ............ 164Kickdown ....................................... 167Manual shifting .............................. 169Overview ........................................ 164Problem (malfunction) ................... 171Pulling away ................................... 160Starting the engine ........................ 159Steering wheel paddle shifters ...... 169Transmission position display(DIRECT SELECT lever) ................... 166Transmission positions .................. 166

Automatic transmission emer-gency mode ....................................... 171

BBackup lamp

Changing bulbs .............................. 132Bag hook ............................................ 304BAS (Brake Assist System) ................. 67BAS PLUSwith Cross-Traffic Assist(Brake Assist PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist)

Function/notes ................................ 67Important safety notes .................... 67

Battery (SmartKey)Checking .......................................... 84Important safety notes .................... 83Replacing ......................................... 84

Battery (vehicle)Charging ........................................ 347Display message ............................ 268Important safety notes .................. 345Jump starting ................................. 349

Beltsee Seat belts

Blind Spot AssistActivating/deactivating (on-board computer) ............................ 246Display message ............................ 273Notes/function .............................. 217see Active Blind Spot Assist

Box (trunk) ......................................... 304

Index 5

Brake Assistsee BAS (Brake Assist System)

Brake fluidDisplay message ............................ 258Notes ............................................. 401

Brake force distribution, elec-tronic

see EBD (electronic brake forcedistribution)

Brake lampsDisplay message ............................ 265

BrakesABS .................................................. 66Adaptive Brake Assist ...................... 70BAS .................................................. 67BAS PLUS with Cross-TrafficAssist ............................................... 67Brake fluid (notes) ......................... 401Display message ............................ 251EBD .................................................. 73Hill start assist ............................... 160HOLD function ............................... 196Important safety notes .................. 180Maintenance .................................. 181Parking brake ................................ 176Riding tips ...................................... 180Warning lamp ................................. 285

Breakdownsee Flat tiresee Towing away

Brightness control (instrumentcluster lighting) ................................... 32Bulbs

see Replacing bulbsButtons on the steering wheel ......... 231

CCalifornia

Important notice for retail cus-tomers and lessees .......................... 24

Calling up a malfunctionsee Display messages

Camerasee 360° camera

Carsee Vehicle

Care360° camera ................................. 335AIRPANEL ...................................... 334Carpets .......................................... 337Car wash ........................................ 330Display ........................................... 336Exhaust pipe .................................. 335Exterior lights ................................ 333Gear or selector lever .................... 336Interior ........................................... 336Matte finish ................................... 332Notes ............................................. 329Paint .............................................. 332Plastic trim .................................... 336Power washer ................................ 331Rear view camera .......................... 334Roof lining ...................................... 337Seat belt ........................................ 337Seat cover ..................................... 337Sensors ......................................... 334Steering wheel ............................... 336Trim pieces .................................... 336Washing by hand ........................... 331Wheels ........................................... 333Windows ........................................ 333Wiper blades .................................. 333Wooden trim .................................. 336

Cargo tie down rings ......................... 303Car key

see SmartKeyCD player/CD changer (on-boardcomputer) .......................................... 241Center console

Lower section .................................. 37Upper section .................................. 36

Central lockingLocking/unlocking (SmartKey) ........ 81

Changing bulbsHigh-beam headlamps ................... 132Low-beam headlamps .................... 131Reversing lamps ............................ 132Turn signals (front) ......................... 132Turn signals (rear) .......................... 132

Child-proof locksImportant safety notes .................... 64Rear doors ....................................... 65

6 Index

ChildrenIn the vehicle ................................... 59Restraint systems ............................ 61Special seat belt retractor ............... 60

Child seatForward-facing restraint system ...... 64LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seatanchors ............................................ 62On the front-passenger seat ............ 63Rearward-facing restraint system .... 64Top Tether ....................................... 62

Cigarette lighter ................................ 309Cleaning

Mirror turn signal ........................... 334Climate control

Automatic climate control (3-zone) .............................................. 141Controlling automatically ............... 144Cooling with air dehumidification .. 143Defrosting the windows ................. 148Defrosting the windshield .............. 147Dual-zone automatic climate con-trol ................................................. 139ECO start/stop function (3-zoneautomatic climate control) ............. 142ECO start/stop function (dual-zone automatic climate control) .... 139Important safety notes .................. 138Indicator lamp ................................ 144Information about using auto-matic climate control ..................... 142Information about using dual-zoneautomatic climate control .............. 139Ionization ....................................... 152Overview of systems ...................... 138Perfume atomizer .......................... 150Problems with cooling with airdehumidification ............................ 144Problem with the rear windowdefroster ........................................ 149Rear control panel ......................... 141Refrigerant ..................................... 402Refrigerant filling capacity ............. 403Setting the air distribution ............. 146Setting the airflow ......................... 146Setting the air vents ...................... 152Setting the climate mode ............... 145

Setting the temperature ................ 145Switching air-recirculation modeon/off ............................................ 149Switching on/off ........................... 142Switching residual heat on/off ...... 149Switching the rear windowdefroster on/off ............................ 148Switching the synchronizationfunction on and off ........................ 147

Climate control systemAutomatic engine start .................. 161Automatic engine switch-off .......... 161Climate control (3-zone automaticclimate control) ............................. 142Deactivating/activating ................. 162Important safety notes .................. 161Introduction ................................... 161

CockpitOverview .......................................... 32

COLLISION PREVENTION ASSISTPLUS

Activating/deactivating ................. 245Display message ............................ 258Operation/notes .............................. 69

COMAND displayCleaning ......................................... 336

Combination switch .......................... 126Consumption statistics (on-boardcomputer) .......................................... 237Convenience box ............................... 304Convenience closing feature .............. 99Convenience opening feature ............ 98Coolant (engine)

Checking the level ......................... 327Display message ............................ 267Filling capacity ............................... 402Important safety notes .................. 401Temperature display in the instru-ment cluster .................................. 231Temperature display in the on-board computer ............................. 244Warning lamp ................................. 291

Coolingsee Climate control

Copyright ............................................. 29

Index 7

Cornering light functionDisplay message ............................ 264Function/notes ............................. 127

Crash-responsive emergency light-ing ....................................................... 130Crosswind Assist ................................. 73Cruise control

Cruise control lever ....................... 184Deactivating ................................... 185Display message ............................ 276Driving system ............................... 183Function/notes ............................. 183Important safety notes .................. 183Setting a speed .............................. 185Storing and maintaining currentspeed ............................................. 184

Cup holderCenter console .............................. 307Important safety notes .................. 306Rear compartment ......................... 307

Customer Assistance Center(CAC) ..................................................... 27Customer Relations Department ....... 27

DData

see Technical dataDaytime running lamps

Display message ............................ 266Function/notes ............................. 124Switching on/off (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 247

Declarations of conformity ................. 26Diagnostics connection ...................... 26Digital speedometer ......................... 237DIRECT SELECT lever

Automatic transmission ................. 164Display

see Display messagessee Warning and indicator lamps

Display messagesASSYST PLUS ................................ 328Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 250Driving systems ............................. 271Engine ............................................ 267General notes ................................ 250

Hiding (on-board computer) ........... 250Introduction ................................... 250Lights ............................................. 264Safety systems .............................. 251SmartKey ....................................... 282Tires ............................................... 277Vehicle ........................................... 280

Distance recorder ............................. 236Distance warning (warning lamp) .... 293Distance warning function

Function/notes ................................ 69DISTRONIC PLUS

Activating ....................................... 188Activation conditions ..................... 188Cruise control lever ....................... 187Deactivating ................................... 192Display message ............................ 274Displays in the multifunction dis-play ................................................ 191Driving tips .................................... 192Function/notes ............................. 185Important safety notes .................. 186Selecting ........................................ 187Setting the specified minimumdistance ......................................... 191

DoorsAutomatic locking (switch) ............... 88Central locking/unlocking(SmartKey) ....................................... 81Control panel ................................... 39Display message ............................ 281Emergency locking ........................... 89Emergency unlocking ....................... 88Important safety notes .................... 87Opening (from inside) ...................... 87

Drinking and driving ......................... 178Drive program

Automatic transmission ................. 168Display (DIRECT SELECT lever) ...... 166

Driver's doorsee Doors

Driving abroadMercedes-Benz Service ................. 329Symmetrical low beam .................. 124

Driving Assistance package ............. 221Driving on flooded roads .................. 182

8 Index

Driving safety systemBAS PLUS with Cross-TrafficAssist ............................................... 67

Driving safety systemsABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ....... 66ADAPTIVE BRAKE ............................. 74Adaptive Brake Assist ...................... 70BAS (Brake Assist System) .............. 67COLLISION PREVENTION ASSISTPLUS ................................................ 69Distance warning function ............... 69EBD (electronic brake force distri-bution) ............................................. 73ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro-gram) ............................................... 71ETS/4ETS (Electronic TractionSystem) ........................................... 72Important safety information ........... 66Overview .......................................... 66PRE-SAFE® Brake ............................. 74STEER CONTROL ............................. 76

Driving systems360°camera .................................. 211Active Blind Spot Assist ................. 221Active Lane Keeping Assist ............ 224Active Parking Assist ..................... 202AIRMATIC ...................................... 197ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 216Blind Spot Assist ............................ 217Cruise control ................................ 183Display message ............................ 271DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 185DISTRONIC PLUS with SteeringAssist and Stop&Go Pilot ............... 194Driving Assistance package ........... 221HOLD function ............................... 196Lane Keeping Assist ...................... 219Lane Tracking package .................. 217PARKTRONIC ................................. 199Rear view camera .......................... 207

Driving tipsAutomatic transmission ................. 167Brakes ........................................... 180Break-in period .............................. 156DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 192Downhill gradient ........................... 180Drinking and driving ....................... 178

Driving abroad ............................... 124Driving in winter ............................. 182Driving on flooded roads ................ 182Driving on wet roads ...................... 182Exhaust check ............................... 178Fuel ................................................ 178General .......................................... 178Hydroplaning ................................. 182Icy road surfaces ........................... 182Limited braking efficiency on sal-ted roads ....................................... 181Snow chains .................................. 361Symmetrical low beam .................. 124The first 1000 miles (1500 km) ..... 156Wet road surface ........................... 181

DVD videoOperating (on-board computer) ..... 241

EEASY-ENTRY feature

Function/notes ............................. 116EASY-EXIT feature

Function/notes ............................. 116EASY-PACK trunk box ....................... 304EBD (electronic brake force distri-bution)

Display message ............................ 254Function/notes ................................ 73

ECO displayFunction/notes ............................. 179On-board computer ....................... 236

ECO start/stop functionClimate control (dual-zone auto-matic climate control) .................... 140General information ....................... 161

Electronic Stability Programsee ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)

EmergencyAutomaticmeasures after an acci-dent ................................................. 59

Emergency releaseDriver's door .................................... 88Trunk ............................................... 97Vehicle ............................................. 88

Emergency Tensioning DevicesActivation ......................................... 56

Index 9

Emissions controlService and warranty information .... 23

EngineCheck Engine warning lamp ........... 291Display message ............................ 267ECO start/stop function ................ 161Engine number ............................... 397Irregular running ............................ 163Jump-starting ................................. 349Starting problems .......................... 163Starting the engine with theSmartKey ....................................... 159Starting with the Start/Stop but-ton ................................................. 159Switching off .................................. 175Tow-starting (vehicle) ..................... 354

Engine electronicsProblem (malfunction) ................... 163

Engine oilAdding ........................................... 326Additives ........................................ 400Checking the oil level ..................... 325Checking the oil level using thedipstick .......................................... 325Display message ............................ 269Filling capacity ............................... 400Notes about oil grades ................... 400Notes on oil level/consumption .... 325Viscosity ........................................ 400

ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro-gram)

Characteristics ................................. 72Deactivating/activating ................... 72Display message ............................ 251ETS/4ETS ........................................ 72Function/notes ................................ 71General notes .................................. 71Important safety information ........... 72Warning lamp ................................. 288

ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction Sys-tem) ...................................................... 72Exhaust

see Exhaust pipeExhaust check ................................... 178Exhaust pipe

Cleaning ......................................... 335

Exterior lightingCleaning ......................................... 333see Lights

Exterior mirrorsAdjusting ....................................... 118Dipping (automatic) ....................... 119Folding in/out (automatically) ....... 118Folding in/out (electrically) ........... 118Out of position (troubleshooting) ... 119Setting ........................................... 118Storing settings (memory func-tion) ............................................... 121Storing the parking position .......... 119

Eyeglasses compartment ................. 299

FFeatures ............................................. 306Filler cap

see Fuel filler flapFlat tire

Changing a wheel/mounting thespare wheel ................................... 381MOExtended tires .......................... 341Preparing the vehicle ..................... 341TIREFIT kit ...................................... 342

Floormats ........................................... 322Fording

On flooded roads ........................... 182Fuel

Additives ........................................ 399Consumption information .............. 399Consumption statistics .................. 237Displaying the current consump-tion ................................................ 236Displaying the range ...................... 236Driving tips .................................... 178Fuel gauge ....................................... 33Grade (gasoline) ............................ 398Important safety notes .................. 398Problem (malfunction) ................... 174Refueling ........................................ 171Tank content/reserve fuel ............. 398

Fuel filler flapOpening ......................................... 172

Fuel levelCalling up the range (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 236

10 Index

Fuel tankCapacity ........................................ 398Problem (malfunction) ................... 174

FusesAllocation chart ............................. 356Before changing ............................. 354Dashboard fuse box ....................... 355Fuse box in the engine compart-ment .............................................. 355Fuse box in the front-passengerfootwell .......................................... 355Fuse box in the trunk ..................... 356Important safety notes .................. 354

GGarage door opener

Clearing the memory ..................... 321General notes ................................ 318Important safety notes .................. 319Opening/closing the garage door .. 321Programming (button in the rear-view mirror) ................................... 319

Gasoline ............................................. 398Genuine parts ...................................... 22Glove box ........................................... 299

HHandbrake

see Parking brakeHANDS-FREE ACCESS .......................... 93Hazard warning lamps ...................... 127Headlamps

Cleaning system (notes) ................ 402Fogging up ..................................... 128see Automatic headlamp mode

Head restraintsAdjusting ....................................... 111Adjusting (electrically) ................... 112Adjusting (manually) ...................... 111Adjusting (rear) .............................. 112Installing/removing (rear) .............. 112

Head-up displayAdjusting the brightness ................ 247Function/notes ............................. 233Important safety notes .................. 233Setting the position ....................... 247

Storing settings (memory func-tion) ............................................... 121Switching on or off ......................... 234Switching the display on/off ......... 246

Heatingsee Climate control

High beam flasher ............................. 126High-beam headlamps

Adaptive Highbeam Assist ............. 127Changing bulbs .............................. 132Display message ............................ 265Switching on/off ........................... 126

Hill start assist .................................. 160HOLD function

Activating ....................................... 197Deactivating ................................... 197Display message ............................ 274Function/notes ............................. 196

HoodClosing ........................................... 325Display message ............................ 281Important safety notes .................. 324Opening ......................................... 324

Horn ...................................................... 32Hydroplaning ..................................... 182

IIgnition lock

see Key positionsImmobilizer .......................................... 76Indicator and warning lamps

COLLISION PREVENTION ASSISTPLUS .............................................. 293

Indicator lampssee Warning and indicator lamps

Indicatorssee Turn signals

Insect protection on the radiator .... 325Instrument cluster

Overview .......................................... 33Warning and indicator lamps ........... 34

Instrument cluster lighting .............. 230Interior lighting

Control ........................................... 129Emergency lighting ........................ 130

Index 11

Overview ........................................ 129Reading lamp ................................. 129

JJack

Using ............................................. 382Jump starting (engine) ...................... 349

KKEYLESS-GO

Convenience closing feature ............ 99Deactivation ..................................... 81Locking ............................................ 81Unlocking ......................................... 81

Key positionsSmartKey ....................................... 157Start/Stop button .......................... 157

KickdownDriving tips .................................... 167

Knee bag .............................................. 50

LLamps

see Warning and indicator lampsLane Keeping Assist

Activating/deactivating (on-board computer) ............................ 246Display message ............................ 272Function/information .................... 219see Active Lane Keeping Assist

Lane Tracking package ..................... 217LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seatanchors ................................................ 62License plate lamp (display mes-sage) ................................................... 265Light function, active

Display message ............................ 266Lights

Adaptive Highbeam Assist ............. 127Automatic headlamp mode ............ 124Cornering light function ................. 127Driving abroad ............................... 124Fogged up headlamps .................... 128Hazard warning lamps ................... 127High beam flasher .......................... 126

High-beam headlamps ................... 126Light switch ................................... 124Low-beam headlamps .................... 125Parking lamps ................................ 126Rear fog lamp ................................ 125Setting exterior lighting ................. 124Standing lamps .............................. 126Switching the daytime runninglamps on/off (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 247Turn signals ................................... 126see Interior lightingsee Replacing bulbs

Light sensor (display message) ....... 266Loading guidelines ............................ 298Locking

see Central lockingLocking (doors)

Automatic ........................................ 88Emergency locking ........................... 89From inside (central locking but-ton) .................................................. 87

Locking centrallysee Central locking

Low-beam headlampsChanging bulbs .............................. 131Display message ............................ 264Setting for driving abroad (sym-metrical) ........................................ 124Switching on/off ........................... 125

Lumbar supportAdjusting the 4-way lumbar sup-port ................................................ 112

MM+S tires ............................................ 360Maintenance

see ASSYST PLUSMalfunction message

see Display messagesMatte finish (cleaning instruc-tions) .................................................. 332mbrace

Call priority .................................... 314Display message ............................ 258Downloading destinations(COMAND) ..................................... 315

12 Index

Downloading routes ....................... 318Emergency call .............................. 312General notes ................................ 310Geo fencing ................................... 318Locating a stolen vehicle ............... 317MB info call button ........................ 314Remote vehicle locking .................. 316Roadside Assistance button .......... 313Search & Send ............................... 315Self-test ......................................... 311Speed alert .................................... 318System .......................................... 311Triggering the vehicle alarm ........... 318Vehicle remote malfunction diag-nosis .............................................. 317Vehicle remote unlocking .............. 316

Mechanical keyFunction/notes ................................ 83Inserting .......................................... 83Locking vehicle ................................ 89Removing ......................................... 83Unlocking the driver's door .............. 88

Memory card (audio) ......................... 241Memory function

Seats, steering wheel, exteriormirrors ........................................... 120

Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive360°camera .................................. 211Active Blind Spot Assist ................. 221Active Lane Keeping Assist ............ 224Active Parking Assist ..................... 202ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 216Blind Spot Assist ............................ 217DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 185DISTRONIC PLUS with SteeringAssist and Stop&Go Pilot ............... 194General notes ................................ 183Lane Keeping Assist ...................... 219PARKTRONIC ................................. 199PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occu-pant protection) ............................... 58PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatoryoccupant protection PLUS) .............. 58Rear view camera .......................... 207

Message memory (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 250

Messagessee Display messagessee Warning and indicator lamps

Mirrorssee Exterior mirrorssee Rear-view mirrorsee Vanity mirror (in the sun visor)

Mirror turn signalCleaning ......................................... 334

Mobile phoneMenu (on-board computer) ............ 242

Modifying the programming(SmartKey) ........................................... 82MOExtended tires .............................. 341Mounting wheels

Lowering the vehicle ...................... 386Mounting a new wheel ................... 385Preparing the vehicle ..................... 381Raising the vehicle ......................... 382Removing a wheel .......................... 385Securing the vehicle against roll-ing away ........................................ 382

MP3Operation ....................................... 241

Multifunction displayFunction/notes ............................. 233Permanent display ......................... 248

Multifunction steering wheelOperating the on-board computer .. 231Overview .......................................... 35

NNavigation

Menu (on-board computer) ............ 238Notes on breaking-in a new vehi-cle ....................................................... 156

OOccupant Classification System(OCS)

Conditions ....................................... 51Faults ............................................... 55

Index 13

Operation ......................................... 52System self-test ............................... 54

Occupant safetyAutomaticmeasures after an acci-dent ................................................. 59Children in the vehicle ..................... 59Important safety notes .................... 43Pets in the vehicle ........................... 65PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occu-pant protection) ............................... 58Seat belt .......................................... 44

OCSConditions ....................................... 51Faults ............................................... 55Operation ......................................... 52System self-test ............................... 54

Odometer ........................................... 236Oil

see Engine oilOn-board computer

Assistance graphic menu ............... 243Assistance menu ........................... 244Displaying a service message ........ 329Display messages .......................... 250DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 191Factory settings ............................. 249Head-up display ............................. 233Important safety notes .................. 230Instrument cluster menu ............... 248Lights menu ................................... 247Media menu ................................... 240Menu overview .............................. 235Message memory .......................... 250Navigation menu ............................ 238Operation ....................................... 231Radio menu ................................... 240Service menu ................................. 244Settings menu ............................... 244Standard display ............................ 236Telephone menu ............................ 242Trip menu ...................................... 236Video DVD operation ..................... 241

Opening and closing the side trimpanels ................................................. 132Operating safety

Declaration of conformity ................ 26Important safety notes .................... 25

Operating systemsee On-board computer

Operator's ManualOverview .......................................... 23Vehicle equipment ........................... 23

Outside temperature display ........... 231Overhead control panel ...................... 38Override feature

Rear side windows ........................... 65

PPaint code number ............................ 396Paintwork (cleaning instructions) ... 332Panic alarm .......................................... 42Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel

Important safety notes .................. 101Opening/closing ............................ 103Problem (malfunction) ................... 106Resetting ....................................... 105

ParkingImportant safety notes .................. 174Parking brake ................................ 176Position of exterior mirror, front-passenger side ............................... 119Rear view camera .......................... 207see PARKTRONIC

Parking aidActive Parking Assist ..................... 202see Exterior mirrorssee PARKTRONIC

Parking assistancesee PARKTRONIC

Parking brakeDisplay message ............................ 254Electric parking brake .................... 176Warning lamp ................................. 290

Parking lampsSwitching on/off ........................... 126

PARKTRONICDeactivating/activating ................. 201Driving system ............................... 199Function/notes ............................. 199Important safety notes .................. 199Problem (malfunction) ................... 202

14 Index

Range of the sensors ..................... 199Warning display ............................. 200

PASSENGER AIR BAGIndicator lamps ................................ 43

PASSENGER AIR BAG indicatorlamp

Problem (malfunction) ................... 263Perfume atomizer

Operating ....................................... 150Perfume vial ................................... 150Problem (malfunction) ................... 152

Pets in the vehicle ............................... 65Plastic trim (cleaning instruc-tions) .................................................. 336Power washers .................................. 331Power windows

see Side windowsPRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupantprotection)

Display message ............................ 259Operation ......................................... 58

PRE-SAFE® BrakeActivating/deactivating ................. 245Display message ............................ 259Function/notes ................................ 74Important safety notes .................... 74Warning lamp ................................. 293

PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatoryoccupant protection PLUS)

Operation ......................................... 58Protection against theft

ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 76Immobilizer ...................................... 76

Protection of the environmentGeneral notes .................................. 22

Pulling awayAutomatic transmission ................. 160Hill start assist ............................... 160

QQualified specialist workshop ........... 26

RRadiator cover ................................... 325Radio

Selecting a station ......................... 240

Radio-wave reception/transmis-sion in the vehicle

Declaration of conformity ................ 26Reading lamp ..................................... 129Rear compartment

Setting the airflow ......................... 146Setting the air vents ...................... 153Setting the temperature ................ 145

Rear fog lampSwitching on/off ........................... 125

Rear lampssee Lights

Rear seat (folding the backrest for-wards/back) ...................................... 302Rear seats

Display message ............................ 281Rear view camera

Cleaning instructions ..................... 334Function/notes ............................. 207Switching on/off ........................... 208

Rear-view mirrorAnti-glare (manual) ........................ 117Dipping (automatic) ....................... 119

Rear window blind ............................ 308Rear window defroster

Problem (malfunction) ................... 149Switching on/off ........................... 148

Recuperation display ........................ 236Refrigerant (air-conditioning sys-tem)

Important safety notes .................. 402Refueling

Fuel gauge ....................................... 33Important safety notes .................. 171Refueling process .......................... 172see Fuel

Remote controlGarage door opener ....................... 318Programming (garage dooropener) .......................................... 319

Replacing bulbsGeneral notes ................................ 130Important safety notes .................. 130Overview of bulb types .................. 130Removing/replacing the cover(front wheel arch) .......................... 131

Reporting safety defects .................... 27

Index 15

Reserve (fuel tank)see Fuel

Reserve fuelDisplay message ............................ 270Warning lamp ................................. 291

Residual heat (climate control) ........ 149Restraint system

Display message ............................ 260Introduction ..................................... 42Warning lamp ................................. 290Warning lamp (function) ................... 43

Reversing featurePanorama sliding sunroof .............. 102Roller sunblinds ............................. 104Side windows ................................... 97Sliding sunroof ............................... 102Trunk lid ........................................... 91

Reversing lamps (display mes-sage) ................................................... 266Roadside Assistance (breakdown) .... 24Roller sunblind

Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel .................................. 104Rear side windows ......................... 308Rear window .................................. 308

Roller sunblinds (panorama roofwith power tilt/sliding panel)

Operating ....................................... 105Roof carrier ........................................ 306Roof lining and carpets (cleaningguidelines) ......................................... 337Roof load (maximum) ........................ 403

SSafety

Children in the vehicle ..................... 59Child restraint systems .................... 61Occupant Classification System(OCS) ............................................... 51see Operating safety

Safety systemsee Driving safety systems

Seat beltsAdjusting the driver's and front-passenger seat belt ......................... 47Adjusting the height ......................... 46

center rear-compartment seat ......... 47Cleaning ......................................... 337Correct usage .................................. 45Fastening ......................................... 46Important safety guidelines ............. 44Introduction ..................................... 44Releasing ......................................... 47Warning lamp ................................. 284Warning lamp (function) ................... 48

SeatsAdjusting (electrically) ................... 110Adjusting (manually and electri-cally) .............................................. 110Adjusting the 4-way lumbar sup-port ................................................ 112Adjusting the head restraint .......... 111Cleaning the cover ......................... 337Correct driver's seat position ........ 108Important safety notes .................. 109Seat heating .................................. 112Seat heating problem .................... 114Seat ventilation .............................. 114Seat ventilation problem ................ 115Storing settings (memory func-tion) ............................................... 121Switching seat heating on/off ....... 112Switching seat ventilation on/off .. 114

Selector leverCleaning ......................................... 336see Automatic transmission

Sensors (cleaning instructions) ....... 334Service menu (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 244Service products

Brake fluid ..................................... 401Coolant (engine) ............................ 401Engine oil ....................................... 400Fuel ................................................ 397Important safety notes .................. 397Refrigerant (air-conditioning sys-tem) ............................................... 402Washer fluid ................................... 402

SettingsFactory (on-board computer) ......... 249On-board computer ....................... 244

Side impact air bag ............................. 50

16 Index

Side marker lamp (display mes-sage) ................................................... 266Side windows

Cleaning ......................................... 333Convenience closing feature ............ 99Convenience opening feature .......... 98Important safety information ........... 97Opening/closing .............................. 98Problem (malfunction) ................... 101Resetting ......................................... 99

Sliding sunroofOpening/closing ............................ 102Resetting ....................................... 103see Panorama roof with powertilt/sliding panel

SmartKeyChanging the battery ....................... 84Changing the programming ............. 82Checking the battery ....................... 84Convenience closing feature ............ 99Convenience opening feature .......... 98Display message ............................ 282Door central locking/unlocking ....... 81Important safety notes .................... 80KEYLESS-GO start function .............. 82Loss ................................................. 85Mechanical key ................................ 83Overview .......................................... 80Positions (ignition lock) ................. 157Problem (malfunction) ..................... 85Starting the engine ........................ 159

Snow chains ...................................... 361Sockets

Center console .............................. 310General notes ................................ 310Rear compartment ......................... 310

Specialist workshop ............................ 26Special seat belt retractor .................. 60Speed, controlling

see Cruise controlSpeedometer

Activating/deactivating the addi-tional speedometer ........................ 248Digital ............................................ 237In the Instrument cluster ................. 33

Segments ...................................... 231Selecting the unit of measure-ment .............................................. 248see Instrument cluster

Standing lampsDisplay message ............................ 266Switching on/off ........................... 126

Start/Stop buttonStarting the engine ........................ 159

Start/stop functionsee ECO start/stop function

Starting (engine) ................................ 159STEER CONTROL .................................. 76Steering

Warning lamps ............................... 295Steering (display message) .............. 281Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot(DISTRONIC PLUS)

Display message ............................ 276Steering assistant STEER CON-TROL

see STEER CONTROLSteering wheel

Adjusting (electrically) ................... 116Adjusting (manually) ...................... 115Button overview ............................... 35Buttons (on-board computer) ......... 231Cleaning ......................................... 336EASY ENTRY/EXIT feature ............. 116Important safety notes .................. 115Paddle shifters ............................... 169Storing settings (memory func-tion) ............................................... 121

Steering wheel paddle shifters ........ 169Stowage areas ................................... 298Stowage compartments

Armrest (under) ............................. 300Center console .............................. 299Cup holders ................................... 306Door ............................................... 300Eyeglasses compartment ............... 299Glove box ....................................... 299Important safety information ......... 298Map pockets .................................. 300Rear ............................................... 300Stowage net ................................... 300

Stowage net ....................................... 300

Index 17

Stowage well beneath the trunkfloor .................................................... 305Summer tires

In winter ........................................ 360Sun visor ............................................ 307Suspension tuning

AIRMATIC ...................................... 198Switching air-recirculation modeon/off ................................................. 149

TTachometer ........................................ 231Tail lamps

Display message ............................ 265see Lights

Tank contentFuel gauge ....................................... 33

Technical dataCapacities ...................................... 397Information .................................... 396Tires/wheels ................................. 386Vehicle data ................................... 403

TelephoneAccepting a call (multifunctionsteering wheel) .............................. 242Display message ............................ 282Introduction ................................... 242Menu (on-board computer) ............ 242Number from the phone book ........ 243Redialing ........................................ 243Rejecting/ending a call ................. 242

TemperatureCoolant (display in the instrumentcluster) .......................................... 231Coolant (display in the on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 244Outside temperature ...................... 231Setting (climate control) ................ 145

Through-loading feature ................... 301TIREFIT kit .......................................... 342Tire pressure

Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 365Checking manually ........................ 365Display message ............................ 277Important safety notes .................. 365Maximum ....................................... 364

Notes ............................................. 363Not reached (TIREFIT) .................... 344Reached (TIREFIT) .......................... 344Recommended ............................... 361

Tire pressure loss warning sys-tem

General notes ................................ 368Important safety notes .................. 368Restarting ...................................... 369

Tire pressure monitorChecking the tire pressure elec-tronically ........................................ 367Function/notes ............................. 365General notes ................................ 365Important safety notes .................. 365Radio type approval for the tirepressure monitor ........................... 368Restarting ...................................... 367Warning lamp ................................. 294Warning message .......................... 367

TiresAspect ratio (definition) ................. 380Average weight of the vehicleoccupants (definition) .................... 379Bar (definition) ............................... 378Changing a wheel .......................... 381Characteristics .............................. 378Checking ........................................ 359Curb weight (definition) ................. 380Definition of terms ......................... 378Direction of rotation ...................... 381Display message ............................ 277Distribution of the vehicle occu-pants (definition) ............................ 381DOT, Tire Identification Number(TIN) ............................................... 378DOT (Department of Transporta-tion) (definition) ............................. 379GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)(definition) ..................................... 379GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) (def-inition) ........................................... 379GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-ing) (definition) .............................. 379Important safety notes .................. 358Increased vehicle weight due tooptional equipment (definition) ...... 379Kilopascal (kPa) (definition) ........... 379

18 Index

Labeling (overview) ........................ 375Load bearing index (definition) ...... 380Load index ..................................... 377Load index (definition) ................... 379Maximum loaded vehicle weight(definition) ..................................... 379Maximum load on a tire (defini-tion) ............................................... 380Maximum permissible tire pres-sure (definition) ............................. 380Maximum tire load ......................... 377Maximum tire load (definition) ....... 380MOExtended tires .......................... 360Optional equipment weight (defi-nition) ............................................ 380PSI (pounds per square inch) (def-inition) ........................................... 380Replacing ....................................... 381Service life ..................................... 360Sidewall (definition) ....................... 380Speed rating (definition) ................ 379Storing ........................................... 381Structure and characteristics(definition) ..................................... 378Summer tires in winter .................. 360Temperature .................................. 374TIN (Tire Identification Number)(definition) ..................................... 380Tire bead (definition) ...................... 380Tire pressure (definition) ................ 380Tire pressures (recommended) ...... 379Tire size (data) ............................... 386Tire size designation, load-bearingcapacity, speed rating .................... 375Tire tread ....................................... 359Tire tread (definition) ..................... 380Total load limit (definition) ............. 381Traction ......................................... 374Traction (definition) ....................... 380Tread wear ..................................... 374Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards ...................................... 373Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards (definition) .................... 379Wear indicator (definition) ............. 380Wheel and tire combination ........... 388Wheel rim (definition) .................... 379see Flat tire

Top Tether ............................................ 62Towing away

Important safety guidelines ........... 351Installing the towing eye ................ 352Notes for 4MATIC vehicles ............ 354Removing the towing eye ............... 353With both axles on the ground ....... 353With the rear axle raised ................ 353

Towing eye ......................................... 340Tow-starting

Emergency engine starting ............ 354Important safety notes .................. 351

Transfer case ..................................... 171Transmission

see Automatic transmissionTransmission position display ......... 166Transmission position display(DIRECT SELECT lever) ...................... 166Transporting the vehicle .................. 353Trim pieces (cleaning instruc-tions) .................................................. 336Trip computer (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 237Trip odometer

Calling up ....................................... 236Resetting (on-board computer) ...... 237

TrunkEmergency release .......................... 96Important safety notes .................... 90Locking separately ........................... 96Opening/closing (automaticallyfrom inside) ...................................... 95Opening/closing (automaticallyfrom outside) ................................... 92Opening/closing (from outside,HANDS-FREE ACCESS) .................... 93Opening/closing (manually fromoutside) ............................................ 91Opening (automatically frominside) .............................................. 95Opening (automatically from out-side) ................................................. 93

Trunk lidDisplay message ............................ 280Obstacle recognition ........................ 91Opening/closing .............................. 90Opening dimensions ...................... 403

Index 19

Trunk load (maximum) ...................... 403Turn signals

Changing bulbs (front) ................... 132Changing bulbs (rear) .................... 132Display message ............................ 264Switching on/off ........................... 126

Type identification platesee Vehicle identification plate

UUnlocking

Emergency unlocking ....................... 88From inside the vehicle (centralunlocking button) ............................. 87

VVanity mirror (in the sun visor) ........ 308Vehicle

Correct use ...................................... 27Data acquisition ............................... 28Display message ............................ 280Equipment ....................................... 23Individual settings .......................... 244Limited Warranty ............................. 27Loading .......................................... 369Locking (in an emergency) ............... 89Locking (SmartKey) .......................... 81Lowering ........................................ 386Maintenance .................................... 24Operating safety .............................. 25Parking for a long period ................ 177Pulling away ................................... 160Raising ........................................... 382Reporting problems ......................... 27Securing from rolling away ............ 382Towing away .................................. 351Transporting .................................. 353Unlocking (in an emergency) ........... 88Unlocking (SmartKey) ...................... 81Vehicle data ................................... 403

Vehicle dataRoof load (maximum) ..................... 403Trunk load (maximum) ................... 403

Vehicle dimensions ........................... 403Vehicle emergency locking ................ 89

Vehicle identification numbersee VIN

Vehicle identification plate .............. 396Vehicle level

AIRMATIC ...................................... 198Display message ............................ 271

Vehicle maintenancesee ASSYST PLUS

Vehicle tool kit .................................. 340Video

Operating the DVD ......................... 241VIN ...................................................... 396

WWarning and indicator lamps

ABS ................................................ 286Brakes ........................................... 285Check Engine ................................. 291Coolant .......................................... 291Distance warning ........................... 293ESP® .............................................. 288ESP® OFF ....................................... 289Overview .......................................... 34Parking brake ................................ 290PASSENGER AIR BAG ...................... 43Reserve fuel ................................... 291Restraint system ............................ 290Seat belt ........................................ 284Steering ......................................... 295Tire pressure monitor .................... 294

Warranty .............................................. 23Washer fluid

Display message ............................ 282Wheel and tire combination

see TiresWheel bolt tightening torque ........... 386Wheel chock ...................................... 382Wheels

Changing a wheel .......................... 381Checking ........................................ 359Cleaning ......................................... 333Important safety notes .................. 358Interchanging/changing ................ 381Mounting a new wheel ................... 385Mounting a wheel .......................... 381Removing a wheel .......................... 385

20 Index

Storing ........................................... 381Tightening torque ........................... 386Wheel size/tire size ....................... 386

Window curtain air bagDisplay message ............................ 261Operation ......................................... 51

Windowssee Side windows

WindshieldDefrosting ...................................... 147

Windshield washer fluidsee Windshield washer system

Windshield washer systemAdding washer fluid ....................... 327Notes ............................................. 402

Windshield wipersProblem (malfunction) ................... 136Replacing the wiper blades ............ 134Switching on/off ........................... 133

Winter drivingImportant safety notes .................. 360Slippery road surfaces ................... 182Snow chains .................................. 361

Winter operationRadiator cover ............................... 325Summer tires ................................. 360

Winter tiresM+S tires ....................................... 360

Wiper bladesCleaning ......................................... 333Important safety notes .................. 134Replacing ....................................... 134Replacing (windshield) ................... 134

Wooden trim (cleaning instruc-tions) .................................................. 336Workshop

see Qualified specialist workshop

Index 21

Protection of the environment

General notes

H Environmental noteDaimler's declared policy is one of compre-hensive environmental protection.The objectives are for the natural resourcesthat form the basis of our existence on thisplanet to be used sparingly and in a mannerthat takes the requirements of both natureand humanity into account.You too can help to protect the environmentby operating your vehicle in an environmen-tally responsible manner.Fuel consumption and the rate of engine,transmission, brake and tire wear are affectedby these factors:Roperating conditions of your vehicleRyour personal driving styleYou can influence both factors. You shouldbear the following in mind:Operating conditions:Ravoid short trips as these increase fuel con-sumption.Ralways make sure that the tire pressuresare correct.Rdo not carry any unnecessary weight.Rremove roof racks once you no longer needthem.Ra regularly serviced vehicle will contributeto environmental protection. You shouldtherefore adhere to the service intervals.Ralways have service work carried out at aqualified specialist workshop.

Personal driving style:Rdo not depress the accelerator pedal whenstarting the engine.Rdo notwarmup the enginewhen the vehicleis stationary.Rdrive carefully and maintain a safe distancefrom the vehicle in front.Ravoid frequent, sudden acceleration andbraking.

Rchange gear in good time and use each gearonly up toÔ of its maximum engine speed.Rswitch off the engine in stationary traffic.Rkeep an eye on the vehicle's fuel consump-tion.

Environmental concerns and recom-mendationsWherever the operating instructions requireyou to dispose of materials, first try to regen-erate or re-use them. Observe the relevantenvironmental rules and regulations whendisposing of materials. In this way you willhelp to protect the environment.

Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts

H Environmental noteDaimler AG also supplies reconditionedmajorassemblies and parts which are of the samequality as new parts. They are covered by thesame Limited Warranty entitlements as newparts.

! Air bags and Emergency Tensioning Devi-ces, as well as control units and sensors forthese restraint systems, may be installed inthe following areas of your vehicle:RdoorsRdoor pillarsRdoor sillsRseatsRcockpitRinstrument clusterRcenter consoleDo not install accessories such as audiosystems in these areas. Do not carry outrepairs or welding. You could impair theoperating efficiency of the restraint sys-tems.Have aftermarket accessories installed at aqualified specialist workshop.

22 Introduction

You could jeopardize the operating safety ofyour vehicle if you use parts, tires and wheelsas well as accessories relevant to safetywhich have not been approved by Mercedes.This could lead to malfunctions in safety-rel-evant systems, e.g. the brake system. Useonly genuine Mercedes-Benz parts or parts ofequal quality. Only use tires, wheels andaccessories that have been specificallyapproved for your vehicle.Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are subject tostrict quality control. Every part has been spe-cifically developed, manufactured or selectedfor and adapted to Mercedes-Benz vehicles.Only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts shouldtherefore be used.More than 300,000 different genuineMercedes-Benz parts are available forMercedes-Benz models.All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers main-tain a supply of genuineMercedes-Benz partsfor necessary service and repair work. In addi-tion, strategically located parts delivery cen-ters provide quick and reliable parts service.Always specify the vehicle identification num-ber (VIN) when ordering genuine Mercedes-Benz parts (Y page 396).

Operator's Manual

Vehicle equipmentThis Operator's Manual describes all modelsand all standard and optional equipment ofyour vehicle available at the time of going toprint. Country-specific differences are possi-ble. Bear in mind that your vehicle may notfeature all functions described here. This alsoapplies to safety-relevant systems and func-tions. The equipment in your vehicle maytherefore differ from that shown in thedescriptions and illustrations.The original purchase agreement lists all sys-tems installed in your vehicle.Should you have any questions concerningequipment and operation, please consult anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

The Operator's Manual and MaintenanceBooklet are important documents and shouldbe kept in the vehicle.

Service and vehicle operation

WarrantyThe implied warranty for your vehicle appliesin accordance with the warranty terms andconditions in the Service and Warranty Infor-mation booklet.Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center willreplace and repair all factory-installed parts inaccordancewith the followingwarranty termsand conditions:RNew Vehicle Limited WarrantyREmission System WarrantyREmission Performance WarrantyRCalifornia, Connecticut, Maine, Massachu-setts, New York, Pennsylvania, RhodeIsland and Vermont Emission Control Sys-tem WarrantyRState warranty enforcement laws (lemonlaws)

Replacement parts and accessories are cov-ered by the Mercedes-Benz Parts and Acces-sories warranties. These are available at anyauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

i Should you lose your Service and War-ranty Information booklet, have an author-ized Mercedes-Benz Center arrange for areplacement. The new Service and War-ranty Information booklet will be posted toyou.

Introduction 23

Z

Information for customers in Califor-niaUnder California law you may be entitled to areplacement of your vehicle or a refund of thepurchase price or lease price, if after a rea-sonable number of repair attemptsMercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or its author-ized repair or service facilities fail to fix one ormore substantial defects or malfunctions inthe vehicle that are covered by its expresswarranty. During the period of 18 monthsfrom original delivery of the vehicle or theaccumulation of 18,000miles (approximately29,000 km) on the odometer of the vehicle,whichever occurs first, a reasonable numberof repair attempts is presumed for a retailbuyer or lessee if one or more of the followingoccurs:(1) the same substantial defect or malfunc-

tion results in a condition that is likely tocause death or serious bodily injury if thevehicle is driven, that defect or malfunc-tion has been subject to repair two ormore times, and you have directly noti-fied Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC in writingof the need for its repair,

(2) the same substantial defect or malfunc-tion of a less serious nature than cate-gory (1) has been subject to repair four ormore times and you have directly notifiedus in writing of the need for its repair, or

(3) the vehicle is out of service by reason ofrepair of the same or different substantialdefects or malfunctions for a cumulativetotal of more than 30 calendar days.

Please send your written notice to:Mercedes-Benz USA, LLCCustomer Assistance CenterOne Mercedes DriveMontvale, NJ 07645-0350

MaintenanceThe Service and Warranty Booklet describesall the necessary maintenance work whichshould be done at regular intervals.Always have the Service and Warranty Book-let with you when you bring the vehicle to anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The ser-vice advisor will record every service for youin the Service and Warranty Booklet.

Roadside AssistanceThe Mercedes-Benz Roadside AssistanceProgramoffers technical help in the event of abreakdown. Calls to the toll-free RoadsideAssistance Hotline are answered by ouragents 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372)(USA)1-800-387-0100 (Canada)For additional information, refer to theMercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Pro-gram brochure (USA) or the "Roadside Assis-tance" section in the Service and Warrantybooklet (Canada). You will find both in yourvehicle literature portfolio.

Change of address or change of own-ershipIn the event of a change of address, pleasesend us the "Notification of Address Change"in the Service and Guarantee booklet or sim-ply call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assis-tance Center (USA) at the hotline number1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) orCustomer Service Center (Canada) at1-800-387-0100. This will assist us in con-tacting you in a timely manner should theneed arise.If you sell your Mercedes, please leave theentire literature in the vehicle so that it isavailable to the next owner.If you have purchased a used car, please sendus the "Notification of Used Car Purchase" in

24 Introduction

the Service and Guarantee booklet or simplycall the Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter (USA) at the hotline number1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) orCustomer Service (Canada) at1-800-387-0100.

Vehicle operation outside the USAand CanadaIf you plan to operate your vehicle in foreigncountries, please be aware that:Rservice facilities or replacement parts maynot be readily available.Runleaded fuel for vehicles with a catalyticconvertermay not be available. Leaded fuelmay cause damage to the catalytic con-verter.Rthe fuel may have a considerably loweroctane rating. Unsuitable fuel can causeengine damage.

Some Mercedes-Benz models are availablefor delivery in Europe through our EuropeanDelivery Program. For details, consult anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center or write toone of the following addresses.In the USAMercedes-Benz USA, LLCEuropean Delivery DepartmentOne Mercedes DriveMontvale, NJ 07645-0350In CanadaMercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.European Delivery Department98 Vanderhoof AvenueToronto, Ontario M4G 4C9

Operating safety

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you do not have the prescribed service/maintenance work or any required repairs

carried out, this can result in malfunctions orsystem failures. There is a risk of an accident.Always have the prescribed service/mainte-nance work as well as any required repairscarried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGFlammable material such as leaves, grass ortwigsmay ignite if they come into contactwithhot parts of the exhaust system. There is a riskof fire.When driving off road or on unpaved roads,check the vehicle's underside regularly. Inparticular, remove parts of plants or otherflammable materials which have becometrapped. In the case of damage, contact aqualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGModifications to electronic components, theirsoftware as well as wiring can impair theirfunction and/or the function of other net-worked components. In particular, systemsrelevant to safety could also be affected. As aresult, these may no longer function as inten-ded and/or jeopardize the operating safety ofthe vehicle. There is an increased risk of anaccident and injury.Never tamper with the wiring as well as elec-tronic components or their software. Youshould have all work to electrical and elec-tronic equipment carried out at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

If you make any changes to the vehicle elec-tronics, the general operating permit is ren-dered invalid.

! There is a risk of damage to the vehicle if:Rthe vehicle becomes stuck, e.g. on a highcurb or an unpaved roadRyou drive too fast over an obstacle, e.g. acurb or a hole in the roadRa heavy object strikes the undercarriageor parts of the chassis

Introduction 25

Z

In situations like this, the body, the under-carriage, chassis parts, wheels or tirescould be damaged without the damagebeing visible. Components damaged in thisway can unexpectedly fail or, in the case ofan accident, no longer withstand the strainthey are designed to.If the underbody paneling is damaged,combustible materials such as leaves,grass or twigs can gather between theunderbody and the underbody paneling. Ifthese materials come in contact with hotparts of the exhaust system, they can catchfire.In such situations, have the vehiclechecked and repaired immediately at aqualified specialist workshop. If on con-tinuing your journey you notice that drivingsafety is impaired, pull over and stop thevehicle immediately, paying attention toroad and traffic conditions. In such cases,visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Declarations of conformity

Vehicle components which receiveand/or transmit radio wavesUSA: "The wireless devices of this vehiclecomply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Oper-ation is subject to the following two condi-tions: 1) These devices may not cause harm-ful interference, and 2) These devices mustaccept any interference received, includinginterference that may cause undesired oper-ation. Changes ormodifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible for com-pliance could void the user’s authority tooperate the equipment."Canada: "The wireless devices of this vehiclecomply with Industry Canada license-exemptRSS standard(s). Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) These devicesmay not cause interference, and (2) Thesedevices must accept any interference, includ-ing interference that may cause undesiredoperation of the device."

Diagnostics connectionThe diagnostics connection is only intendedfor the connection of diagnostic equipment ata qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGIf you connect equipment to the diagnosticsconnection in the vehicle, it may affect theoperation of the vehicle systems. As a result,the operating safety of the vehicle could beaffected. There is a risk of an accident.Do not connect any equipment to a diagnos-tics connection in the vehicle.

G WARNINGObjects in the driver's footwell can restrict thepedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.The operating and road safety of the vehicle isjeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.Make sure that all objects in the vehicle arestowed correctly, and that they cannot enterthe driver's footwell. Install the floormatssecurely and as specified in order to ensuresufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not useloose floormats and do not place floormats ontop of one another.

! If the engine is switched off and equip-ment on the diagnostics connection isused, the starter battery may discharge.

Connecting equipment to the diagnosticsconnection can lead to emissions monitoringinformation being reset, for example. Thismay lead to the vehicle failing to meet therequirements of the next emissions test dur-ing the main inspection.

Qualified specialist workshopAn authorized Mercedes-Benz Center is aqualified specialist workshop. It has the nec-essary specialist knowledge, tools and quali-fications to correctly carry out the workrequired on your vehicle. This is especially thecase for work relevant to safety.

26 Introduction

Observe the notes in the Maintenance Book-let.Always have the following work carried out atan authorized Mercedes-Benz Center:Rwork relevant to safetyRservice and maintenance workRrepair workRalterations, installation work and modifica-tionsRwork on electronic components

Correct useIf you remove any warning stickers, you orothers could fail to recognize certain dangers.Leave warning stickers in position.Observe the following information when driv-ing your vehicle:Rthe safety notes in this manualRthe Technical Data section in this manualRtraffic rules and regulationsRlaws and safety standards pertaining tomotor vehicles

Problems with your vehicleIf you should experience a problem with yourvehicle, particularly one that you believe mayaffect its safe operation, we urge you to con-tact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centerimmediately to have the problem diagnosedand rectified. If the problem is not resolved toyour satisfaction, please discuss the problemagain with a Mercedes-Benz Center or con-tact us at one of the following addresses.In the USACustomer Assistance CenterMercedes-Benz USA, LLCOne Mercedes DriveMontvale, NJ 07645-0350In CanadaCustomer Relations DepartmentMercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.

98 Vanderhoof AvenueToronto, Ontario M4G 4C9

Reporting safety defectsUSA only:The following text is published as required ofmanufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S.Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the"National Traffic andMotor Vehicle Safety Actof 1966".If you believe that your vehicle has a defectwhich could cause a crash or could causeinjury or death, you should immediatelyinform the National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) in addition to notify-ing Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it mayopen an investigation, and if it finds that asafety defect exists in a group of vehicles, itmay order a recall and remedy campaign.However, NHTSA cannot become involved inindividual problems between you, yourdealer, or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.To contact NHTSA, you may call the VehicleSafety Hotline toll-free at1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); goto http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street,SW., Washington, DC 20590.You can also obtain other information aboutmotor vehicle safety fromhttp://www.safercar.gov

Limited Warranty! Follow the instructions in this manualabout the proper operation of your vehicleas well as about possible vehicle damage.Damage to your vehicle that arises fromculpable contraventions against theseinstructions is not covered either by theMercedes-Benz Limited Warranty or by theNew or Used-Vehicle Warranty.

Introduction 27

Z

Data stored in the vehicle

Data recordingThis vehicle is capable of recording diagnosticinformation relating to vehicle operation,mal-functions, and user settings. This may includeinformation about the performance or statusof various systems, including but not limitedto, engine, throttle, steering or brake sys-tems, that is stored and can be read out withsuitable devices, particularly when the vehi-cle is serviced. The data obtained is used toproperly diagnose and service your vehicle orto further optimize and develop vehicle func-tions.

COMAND/mbraceIf the vehicle is equipped with COMAND ormbrace, additional data about the vehicle’soperation, the use of the vehicle in certainsituations, and the location of the vehiclemaybe compiled through COMAND or thembracesystem.For additional information please refer to theCOMAND User Manual and/or the mbraceTerms and Conditions.

Event data recordersThis vehicle is equipped with an event datarecorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDRis to record data that will assist in under-standing how a vehicle’s systems performedin certain crash or near crash-like situations,such as during air bag deployment or whenhitting a road obstacle. The EDR is designedto record data related to vehicle dynamicsand safety systems for a short period of time,typically 30 seconds or less.The EDR in this vehicle is designed to recordsuch data as:Rhow various systems in your vehicle areoperatingRwhether or not the driver and passengerseat belts are fastened

Rhow far (if at all) the driver is depressing theaccelerator and/or brake pedal andRhow fast the vehicle is travelingThis data can help provide a better under-standing of the circumstances in whichcrashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data isrecorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivialcrash situation occurs; no data is recorded bythe EDR under normal driving conditions andno personal data (e.g., name, gender, age,and crash location) are recorded. However,other parties, such as law enforcement, cancombine the EDR data with the type of per-sonal identification data routinely acquiredduring a crash investigation.To read data recorded by an EDR, specialequipment is required, and access to the vehi-cle or the EDR is needed. In addition to thevehicle manufacturer, other parties that havethe special equipment, such as law enforce-ment, can read the information by accessingthe vehicle or the EDR.EDR data may be used in civil and criminalmatters as a tool in accident reconstruction,accident claims, and vehicle safety. Since theCrash Data Retrieval CDR tool that is used toextract data from the EDR is commerciallyavailable, Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC("MBUSA") expressly disclaims any and all lia-bility arising from the extraction of this infor-mation by unauthorized Mercedes-Benz per-sonnel.MBUSA will not share EDR data with otherswithout the consent of the vehicle owners or,if the vehicle is leased, without the consent ofthe lessee. Exceptions to this representationinclude responses to subpoenas by lawenforcement; by federal, state or local gov-ernment; in connection with or arising out oflitigation involving MBUSA or its subsidiariesand affiliates; or, as required by law.Warning: The EDR is a component of theRestraint System Module. Tampering with,altering, modifying or removing the EDR com-ponent may result in a malfunction of theRestraint System Module and other systems.

28 Introduction

State laws or regulations regarding EDRs thatconflict with federal regulation are pre-emp-ted. This means that in the event of such con-flict, the federal regulation governs. As ofFebruary 2013, 13 states have enacted lawsrelating to EDRs.

Information on copyright

General informationInformation on license for free and open-source software used in your vehicle and itselectronic components is available on the fol-lowing website:http://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource

Introduction 29

Z

30

Cockpit ................................................. 32Instrument cluster .............................. 33Multifunction steering wheel ............. 35Center console .................................... 36Overhead control panel ...................... 38Door control panel .............................. 39

31

Ataglance

Cockpit

Function Page

: Steering wheel paddleshifters 169

; Combination switch 126

= Horn

? Instrument cluster 33

A DIRECT SELECT lever 164

B Climate control systems 138

C Overhead control panel 38

D Control panel for COMANDand vehicle functions 36

E Ignition lock 157Start/Stop button 157

F Adjusts the steering wheel 115

G Cruise control lever 184

Function Page

H Electric parking brake 176

I Diagnostics connection 26

J Opens the hood 324

K Light switch 124

L Control panel for:Activating Steering Assist 194Switching on Active LaneKeeping Assist 224Deactivating PARKTRONIC 199Switching on 360° camera 211Switching on the head-updisplay 233Vehicles without a driverassistance system: map/coin holder

32 CockpitAt

aglance

Instrument cluster

Displays

Function Page

: Speedometer

; Multifunction display 233

= Tachometer 231

Function Page

? Coolant temperature dis-play 231

A Fuel gauge

Instrument cluster 33

Ataglance

Warning and indicator lamps

Function Page

: å ESP® OFF 288

; ÷ ESP® 288

= · Distance warning 293

? Ð Power steering 295

A #! Turn signals 126

B ! Electric parking brake(yellow) 290

C ! ABS 286

D ; Check Engine 291

E Electric parking brake (red) 290F USA only! Canada only

F Brakes (red) 285$ USA onlyJ Canada only

G ? Coolant 291

Function Page

H J Brakes (yellow) 285

I 6 Restraint system 42

J ü Seat belt 284

K K High-beam head-lamps 126

L L Low-beam head-lamps 125

M 8 Reserve fuel 291

N T Parking lamps,license plate and instru-ment cluster lighting 126

O N This lamphas no func-tion

P R Rear fog lamps 125

Q h Tire pressure monitor 294

34 Instrument clusterAt

aglance

Multifunction steering wheel

Function Page

: Multifunction display 233

; Audio 20/COMAND Onlinedisplay; see the separateoperating instructions

= ~

Rejects or ends a call 242Exits phone book/redialmemory6

Makes or accepts a callSwitches to the redialmem-oryWX

Adjusts the volume8

Muteó

Switches on the Voice Con-trol System; see the sepa-rate operating instructions

Function Page

? ò

Calls up the main menu9:

Selects a menu/submenuor scrolls through lists 231a

Confirms your selection 231Hides display messages 250%

Back 231ñ

Switches off the Voice Con-trol System; see the sepa-rate operating instructions

Multifunction steering wheel 35

Ataglance

Center console

Center console, upper section

Function Page

: Climate control systems 138

; £ Hazard warninglamps 127

= Vehicle functions/systemsettings button (see theseparate Operator's Man-ual)

? Telephone button (see theseparate Operator's Man-ual)

A PASSENGER AIR BAG indi-cator lamp 43ATA indicator lamp 76

Function Page

B Analog clock

C Media button (see the sep-arate Operator's Manual)

D Radio button (see the sep-arate Operator's Manual)

E Navigation button (see theseparate Operator's Man-ual)

F þ Inserts/removes aCD/DVD; see the separateOperator's Manual)

36 Center consoleAt

aglance

Center console, lower section

Function Page

: Cup holder 306

; Adjusts the volume/mute(see the separate Opera-tor's Manual)

= Switches audio/COMANDon/off; see the separateOperator's Manual

? è ECO start/stop func-tion 161

A Touchpad (see the separateOperator's Manual)

B Stowage compartment 298

Function Page

C u Rear window rollersunblind 308

D É Sets the vehicle level 197

E AGILITY SELECT switch 167

F Back button (see the sepa-rate Operator's Manual)

G Audio 20/COMAND con-troller (see the separateOperator's Manual)

H g Switches to the favor-ites button (see the sepa-rate Operator's Manual)

Center console 37

Ataglance

Overhead control panel

Function Page

: p Switches the left-hand reading lamp on/off 129

; | Switches the auto-matic interior lighting con-trol on/off 129

= G SOS button (mbracesystem) 312

? c Switches the frontinterior lighting on/off 129

A u Switches the rearinterior lighting on/off 129

B p Switches the right-hand reading lamp on/off 129

C ï MB Info call button(mbrace system) 314

D Eyeglasses compartment 299

Function Page

E 3 Opens/closes thepanorama roof with powertilt/sliding panel 103Opens/closes the rollersunblinds 104

F Rear-view mirror 117

G Buttons for the garage dooropener 319

H Microphone for mbrace(emergency call system),telephone and the VoiceControl System; see theseparate operating instruc-tions

I F Roadside Assistancecall button (mbrace sys-tem) 313

38 Overhead control panelAt

aglance

Door control panel

Function Page

: r45=Stores settings for the seat,exterior mirrors and steer-ing wheel 120

; Adjusts the seats electri-cally 110

= c Seat heating 112

? s Seat ventilation 114

A Opens the door 87

B %& Unlocks/locksthe vehicle 87

C W Opens/closes therear left side window 97

D WOpens/closes the leftside window 97

Function Page

E 7Zª\Adjusts and folds the exte-rior mirrors in/out electri-cally 118

F W Opens/closes theright side window 97

G W Opens/closes therear right side window 97

H n Override feature forthe controls in the rearcompartment 65

I p Opens/closes thetrunk lid 95

Door control panel 39

Ataglance

40

Useful information .............................. 42Panic alarm .......................................... 42Occupant safety .................................. 42Children in the vehicle ........................ 59Pets in the vehicle .............................. 65Driving safety systems ....................... 66Protection against theft ..................... 76

41

Safety

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optional equip-ment of your vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's Manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions.

i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops (Y page 26).

Panic alarm

X To activate: press! button: for atleast one second.An alarm sounds and the exterior lightingflashes.

X To deactivate: press! button:again.

orX Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.or, in vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-func-tion or KEYLESS‑GOX Press the Start/Stop button.The SmartKey must be in the vehicle.

Occupant safety

Restraint system: introductionThe restraint system reduces the risk of vehi-cle occupants coming into contact with partsof the vehicle's interior in the event of anaccident. The restraint system can alsoreduce the forces to which vehicle occupantsare subjected during an accident.The restraint system comprises:RSeat belt systemRAir bagsRChild restraint systemRChild seat securing systemsThe components of the restraint systemworkin conjunction with each other. They can onlydeploy their protective function if, at all times,all vehicle occupants:Rhave fastened their seat belts correctly(Y page 45)Rhave adjusted their seat and head restraintproperly (Y page 109).

As the driver, you also have to make sure thatthe steering wheel is adjusted correctly.Observe the information relating to the cor-rect driver's seat position (Y page 108).You also have tomake sure that an air bag caninflate properly if deployed (Y page 48).An air bag supplements a correctly fastenedseat belt and is an additional safety deviceproviding increased protection for vehicleoccupants in appropriate accident situations.For example, if, in the event of an accident,the protection offered by the seat belt is suf-ficient, the air bags are not deployed. Whenan accident occurs, only the air bags thatincrease protection in that particular accidentsituation are deployed. However, seat beltsand air bags generally do not protect againstobjects penetrating the vehicle from the out-side.Information on restraint system operationcan be found under "Triggering of the Emer-gency Tensioning Device and air bags"(Y page 56).

42 Occupant safetySafety

For more information about children travelingwith you in the vehicle and on child restraintsystems, see "Children in the vehicle"(Y page 59).

Important safety notes

G WARNINGModifications to the restraint system maycause it to no longer work as intended. Therestraint system may then not perform itsintended protective function andmay fail in anaccident or trigger unexpectedly, for example.This poses an increased risk of injury or evenfatal injury.Never modify parts of the restraint system.Never tamper with the wiring, the electroniccomponents or their software.If it is necessary tomodify an air bag system toaccommodate a person with disabilities, con-tact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center fordetails. USA only: for further information con-tact our Customer Assistance Center at1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1‑800‑367‑6372).

Restraint system warning lampThe functions of the restraint system arechecked after the ignition is switched on andat regular intervals while the engine is run-ning. Therefore, malfunctions can be detec-ted in good time.The 6 restraint system warning lamp inthe instrument cluster lights upwhen the igni-tion is switched on. It goes out no later than afew seconds after the engine is started. Thecomponents of the restraint system are inoperational readiness.A malfunction has occurred if the 6restraint system warning lamp:Rdoes not light up after the ignition isswitched onRdoes not go out after a few seconds withthe engine runningRlights up again while the engine is running

G WARNINGIf restraint system is malfunctioning, restraintsystem components may be triggered unin-tentionally or might not be triggered at all inthe event of an accident with a high rate ofvehicle deceleration. This can affect the Emer-gency Tensioning Device or air bag, for exam-ple. This poses an increased risk of injury oreven fatal injury.Have the restraint system checked andrepaired in a qualified specialist workshop assoon as possible.

PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp

PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp:and PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp; are part of the Occupant Classifica-tion System (OCS).The indicator lamps display the status of thefront-passenger front air bag.RPASSENGER AIR BAG ON: lights up: thefront-passenger front air bag is enabled. If,in the event of an accident, all deploymentcriteria are met, the front-passenger frontair bag is deployed.RPASSENGER AIR BAG OFF; lights up: thefront-passenger front air bag is deactiva-ted. They will then not be deployed in theevent of an accident.

Occupant safety 43

Safety

Z

Depending on the person in the front-passenger seat, the front-passenger front airbag must either be disabled or enabled; seethe following points. You must make sure ofthis both before and during a journey.RChildren in a child restraint system:whether the front-passenger front air bag isenabled or deactivated depends on theinstalled child restraint system, and the ageand size of the child. Therefore, be sure toobserve the notes on the "Occupant clas-sification system (OCS)" (Y page 51) andon "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 59).There you will also find instructions onbackwards- and forwards-facing childrestraint systems on the front-passengerseat.RAll other persons: depending on the clas-sification of the person in the front-passenger seat, the front-passenger frontair bag is enabled or deactivated(Y page 51). Be sure to observe the noteson "Seat belts“ (Y page 44) and "Air bags"(Y page 48). There you can also find infor-mation on the correct seat position.

Seat belts

IntroductionA correctly fastened seat belt is the mosteffective means of restraining the movementof vehicle occupants in the event of an acci-dent or overturn. This reduces the risk ofvehicle occupants coming into contact withparts of the vehicle interior or being thrownfrom the vehicle. Furthermore, the seat belthelps to keep the vehicle occupants in thebest position in relation to the air bag.The seat belt system consists of:RSeat beltsREmergency Tensioning Devices for thefront seat belts and the outer seat belts inthe rear compartmentRBelt force limiters for the front seat beltsand the outer seat belts in the rear

If the seat belt is pulled quickly or suddenlyfrom the belt sash guide, the inertia reellocks. The belt strap cannot be pulled out fur-ther.Emergency Tensioning Devices tighten theseat belts in an accident, pulling them closeagainst the occupant's body. They do not,however, pull vehicle occupants backtowards the backrest.Emergency Tensioning Devices do not cor-rect an incorrect seat position or incorrectlyworn seat belts.When activated, the belt force limiters reducethe force exerted by the seat belt on the vehi-cle occupants.The belt force limiters for the front seats aresynchronized with the front air bags, whichabsorb part of the deceleration force. Thismakes it possible to reduce the forces towhich vehicle occupants are subjected duringan accident.

! If the front-passenger seat is unoccupied,do not insert the belt tongue into the buckleof the front-passenger seat. This may oth-erwise lead to the triggering of the Emer-gency Tensioning Device in the event of anaccident, which will then need to bereplaced.

Important safety notesThe use of seat belts and child restraint sys-tems is required by law in:Rall 50 statesRthe U.S. territoriesRthe District of ColumbiaRall Canadian provincesEven where this is not required by law, allvehicle occupants should correctly fastentheir seat belts before starting the journey.

G WARNINGIf the seat belt is incorrectly fastened, it can-not protect as intended. Furthermore, anincorrectly fastened seat belt can cause addi-tional injury, for example, in an accident, dur-

44 Occupant safetySafety

ing braking or when abruptly changing direc-tion. This poses an increased risk of injury oreven fatal injury.Make sure that all vehicle occupants areseated properly with a correctly fastened seatbelt.

G WARNINGThe seat belt does not offer the intended levelof protection if you have not moved the back-rest to an almost vertical position. When brak-ing or in the event of an accident, you couldslide underneath the seat belt and sustainabdomen or neck injuries, for example. Thisposes an increased risk of injury or even fatalinjury.Adjust the seat properly before beginningyour journey. Always ensure that the backrestis in an almost vertical position and that theshoulder section of your seat belt is routedacross the center of your shoulder.

G WARNINGPersons under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height cannotfasten the seat belt correctly without an addi-tional suitable restraint system. If the seatbelt is incorrectly fastened, it cannot protectas intended. Furthermore, an incorrectly fas-tened seat belt can cause additional injury, forexample, in an accident, during braking or anabrupt change of direction. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.For this reason, always secure persons under5 ft (1.50 m) in height in suitable restraintsystems.

If a child younger than 12 years and under 5 ft(1.50 m) in height is traveling in the vehicle:Ralways secure the child in a child restraintsystem suitable for this Mercedes-Benzvehicle. The child restraint system must beappropriate to the age, weight and size ofthe childRalways observe the instructions and safetynotes in the "Children in the vehicle" sec-tion of this Operator's Manual

(Y page 59) in addition to the childrestraint system manufacturer's installa-tion instructionsRbe sure to observe the instructions andsafety notes on the "Occupant classifica-tion system (OCS)" (Y page 51)

G WARNINGThe seat belts may not perform their intendedprotective function if:Rthey are damaged, modified, extremelydirty, bleach or dyedRthe seat belt buckle is damaged orextremely dirtyRthe Emergency Tensioning Devices, beltanchorages or inertia reels have beenmodi-fied

Seat belts may sustain non-visible damage inan accident, e.g. due to glass splinters. Modi-fied or damaged seat belts may tear or fail,e.g. in an accident. Modified Emergency Ten-sioning Devices could accidentally trigger orfail to deploy when necessary. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.Never modify the seat belts, Emergency Ten-sioning Devices, belt anchorages or inertiareels. Make sure that the seat belts areundamaged, not worn out and clean. Follow-ing an accident, have the seat belts checkedimmediately at a qualified specialist work-shop.

Only use seat belts that have been approvedfor your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. Any suchmodifications could invalidate the vehicle'sgeneral operating permit.

Proper use of the seat beltsObserve the safety notes on the seat belt(Y page 44).All vehicle occupants must be wearing theseat belt correctly before beginning the jour-ney. Also make sure that all vehicle occu-pants are always wearing the seat belt cor-rectly while the vehicle is in motion.

Occupant safety 45

Safety

Z

When fastening the seat belt, always makesure that:Rthe seat belt tongue is only inserted to thebelt buckle belonging to that seat.Rthe seat belt is tight across your body.Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a wintercoat.Rthe seat belt is not twisted.Only then can the forces which occur bedistributed over the area of the belt.Rthe shoulder section of the belt is alwaysrouted across the center of your shoulder.The shoulder section of the belt must notcome into contact with your neck or berouted under your arm. Where possible,adjust the seat belt to the appropriateheight.Rthe lap belt passes tightly and as low downas possible across your lap.The lap belt must always be routed acrossyour hip joints and not across your abdo-men. This applies particularly to pregnantwomen. If necessary, push the lap beltdown to your hip joint and pull it tight usingthe shoulder section of the belt.Rthe seat belt is not routed across sharp,pointed or fragile objects.If you have such items located on or in yourclothing, e.g. pens, keys or eyeglasses,store these in a suitable place.Ronly one person is using a seat belt at atime.Infants and children must never travel sit-ting on the lap of a vehicle occupant. In theevent of an accident, they could be crushedbetween the vehicle occupant and seatbelt.Robjects are never secured with a seat belt ifthe seat belt is also being used by one of thevehicle's occupants.

Seat belts are only intended to secure andrestrain vehicle occupants. Always observethe "Loading guidelines" for securing objects,luggage or loads (Y page 298).

Fastening and adjusting the seat beltsPlease take note of the safety notes on seatbelts (Y page 44) and the notes on their cor-rect use (Y page 45).If the center rear seat belt is used, observethe information about the seat belt for thecenter rear seat (Y page 47).

X Adjust the seat (Y page 108).The seat backrest must be in an almostupright position.

X Pull the seat belt smoothly out of belt outlet= and engage belt tongue; in buckle:.The driver's and front-passenger's seatbelts are automatically pulled taut asrequired, see “Belt adjustment”(Y page 47).

X If necessary, pull upwards on the shouldersection of the seat belt to tighten the beltacross your body.

46 Occupant safetySafety

The shoulder section of the belt must alwaysrun over the center of the shoulder. Adjust thebelt outlet if necessary.X To raise: slide the belt outlet upwards.The belt outlet engages in various posi-tions.

X To lower: slide the belt outlet downward,pressing belt outlet release catch:.

X Once the desired position has beenreached, release belt outlet releasecatch: and ensure the belt outletengages in place.

All seat belts in the vehicle, except the driv-er's seat belt, are equippedwith a special seatbelt retractor to secure child restraint sys-tems properly. Further information can befound under "Special seat belt retractor"(Y page 60).

Seat belt for the center rear seatIf the left-hand rear seat backrest is foldeddown and back up again, the rear center seatbelt may lock. The seat belt can then not bepulled out.X To release the rear center seat belt: pullthe seat belt out approximately 1 in(25 mm) at the belt outlet on the backrestand then release it again.The seat belt is retracted and released.

Releasing seat belts

! Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolledup. Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tonguewill be trapped in the door or in the seatmechanism. This could damage the door,the door trim panel and the seat belt. Dam-aged seat belts can no longer fulfill theirprotective function and must be replaced.Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

X Press release button:, hold belttongue; firmly and guide it back towardsbelt outlet=.

Seat belt adjustmentThe seat-belt adjustment is an integral part ofthe PRE-SAFE® convenience function. Thisfunction adjusts the driver's and front-passenger seat belt to the upper body of theoccupants.The belt strap is tightened slightly when:Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the buckleandRthe ignition is switched onThe seat-belt adjustment will apply a certaintightening force if any slack is detectedbetween the vehicle occupant and the seatbelt. Do not hold on to the seat belt tightlywhile it is adjusting.You can switch the seat-belt adjustment onand off using COMAND or Audio 20. Informa-tion on activating and deactivating the seat-belt adjustment function can be found in theDigital Operator's Manual or in the separateCOMAND or Audio 20 operating instructions.

Occupant safety 47

Safety

Z

Belt warning for the driver and frontpassengerThe7 seat belt warning lamp in the instru-ment cluster is a reminder that all occupantsmust fasten their seat belts. It may light upcontinuously or flash. In addition, there maybe a warning tone.Regardless of whether the driver's and front-passenger seat belts have already been fas-tened, the 7 seat belt warning lamp lightsup for six seconds each time the engine isstarted. If, after six seconds, the driver orfront-passenger seat belt has not been fas-tened and the doors are closed, the7 seatbelt warning lamp lights up. As soon as thedriver's and front-passenger seat belts arefastened or a front door is opened again, the7 seat belt warning lamp goes out.If the driver's seat belt is not fastened afterthe engine is started, an additional warningtone will sound. This warning tone stops aftersix seconds or when the driver's seat belt isfastened.If the vehicle's speed exceeds 15 mph(25 km/h) once and the driver's and front-passenger seat belts are not fastened, awarning tone sounds. A warning tone alsosounds with increasing intensity for60 seconds or until the driver or frontpassenger have fastened their seat belts.If the driver or front passenger unfasten theirseat belts during the journey, the seat beltwarning is activated again.

i For more information on the 7 seatbelt warning lamp, see "Warning and indi-cator lamps in the instrument cluster, seatbelts" (Y page 284).

Air bags

IntroductionThe installation point of an air bag can be rec-ognized by the AIR BAG symbol.An air bag complements the correctly fas-tened seat belt. It is no substitute for the seat

belt. The air bag provides additional protec-tion in applicable accident situations.Not all air bags are deployed in an accident.The different air bag systems function inde-pendently from one another (Y page 56).However, no system available today can com-pletely eliminate injuries and fatalities.It is also not possible to rule out a risk of injurycaused by an air bag due to the high speed atwhich the air bag must be deployed.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you do not sit in the correct seat position,the air bag cannot protect as intended andcould even cause additional injury whendeployed. This poses an increased risk ofinjury or even fatal injury.To avoid hazardous situations, always makesure that all of the vehicle's occupants:Rhave fastened their seat belts correctly,including pregnant womenRare sitting correctly andmaintain the great-est possible distance to the air bagsRfollow the following instructionsAlways make sure that there are no objectsbetween the air bag and the vehicle's occu-pants.

RAdjust the seats properly before beginningyour journey. Always make sure that theseat is in an almost upright position. Thecenter of the head restraint must supportthe head at about eye level.RMove the driver's and front-passengerseats as far back as possible. The driver'sseat position must allow the vehicle to bedriven safely.ROnly hold the steering wheel on the out-side. This allows the air bag to be fullydeployed.RAlways lean against the backrest while driv-ing. Do not lean forwards or lean againstthe door or side window. You may other-

48 Occupant safetySafety

wise be in the deployment area of the airbags.RAlways keep your feet in the footwell infront of the seat. Do not put your feet on thedashboard, for example. Your feet may oth-erwise be in the deployment area of the airbag.RFor this reason, always secure persons lessthan 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitable restraintsystems. Up to this height, the seat beltcannot be worn correctly.

If a child is traveling in your vehicle, alsoobserve the following notes:RAlways secure children under 12 years ofage and less than 5 ft (1.50 m) in height insuitable child restraint systems.RChild restraint systems should be installedon the rear seats.ROnly secure a child in a rearward-facingchild restraint system to the front-passenger seat when the front-passengerfront air bag is disabled. If the PASSENGERAIR BAGOFF indicator lamp is permanentlylit, the front-passenger front air bag is dis-abled (Y page 43).RAlways observe the instructions and safetynotes on the "Occupant Classification Sys-tem (OCS)" (Y page 51) and on "Childrenin the vehicle" (Y page 59) in addition tothe child restraint system manufacturer'sinstallation instructions.

Objects in the vehicle interior may pre-vent the air bag from functioning cor-rectly. Before starting your journey and toavoid risks resulting from the speed of the airbag as it deploys, make sure that:Rthere are no people, animals or objectsbetween the vehicle occupants and an airbag.Rthere are no objects between the seat, doorand B-pillar.Rno hard objects, e.g. coat hangers, hang onthe grab handles or coat hooks.Rno accessories, such as cup holders, areattached to the vehicle within the deploy-

ment area of an air bag, e.g. to doors, sidewindows, rear side trim or side walls.Rno heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objectsare in the pockets of your clothing. Storesuch objects in a suitable place.

G WARNINGIf you modify the air bag cover or affix objectssuch as stickers to it, the air bag can no longerfunction correctly. There is an increased riskof injury.Never modify an air bag cover or affix objectsto it.

G WARNINGSensors to control the air bags are located inthe doors. Modifications or work not per-formed correctly to the doors or door panel-ing, as well as damaged doors, can lead to thefunction of the sensors being impaired. The airbags might therefore not function properlyany more. Consequently, the air bags cannotprotect vehicle occupants as they aredesigned to do. There is an increased risk ofinjury.Never modify the doors or parts of the doors.Always have work on the doors or door pan-eling carried out at a qualified specialist work-shop.

Front air bags

Driver's air bag: inflates in front of thesteering wheel; front-passenger front airbag; inflates in front of and above the glovebox.

Occupant safety 49

Safety

Z

The front air bags for the front seats offeradditional protection for the head and thorax.The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF andPASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lampsinform you about the status of the front-passenger front air bag (Y page 43).Front-passenger front air bag; will onlydeploy if:Rthe system, based on the OCS weight sen-sor readings, detects that the front-passenger seat is occupied (Y page 51).The PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicatorlamp lights up (Y page 52)Rthe restraint system predicts a highseverity of an accident

Driver's knee bag

Driver's knee bag: inflates underneath thesteering column. The driver's knee bag isalways deployed along with the driver's frontair bag.The driver's knee bag on the driver's seatoffers additional protection for the thigh,knee and lower leg.

Side impact air bags

G WARNINGUnsuitable seat covers could restrict or evenprevent the deployment of the air bags inte-grated into the seats. Consequently, the airbags cannot protect vehicle occupants asthey are designed to do. In addition, the func-tion of the Occupant Classification System

(OCS) could be restricted. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.You should only use seat covers that havebeen approved for the respective seat byMercedes-Benz.

Front side impact air bags: and rear sideimpact air bags; deploy next to the outerbolster of the seat backrest.When deployed, the side impact air bag offersadditional thorax protection. However, it doesnot protect the:RheadRneckRarmsIn the event of a side impact, the side impactair bag is deployed on the side on which theimpact occurs.The side impact air bag on the front-passenger side (front) deploys in the follow-ing situations:Rthe OCS system detects that the front-passenger seat is occupied orRthe belt tongue is engaged in the beltbuckle of the front-passenger seat

If the belt tongue is engaged in the beltbuckle, the side impact air bag on the front-passenger side deploys if an appropriate acci-dent situation occurs. In this case, deploy-ment is independent of whether the front-passenger seat is occupied or not.

50 Occupant safetySafety

Window curtain air bags

Window curtain air bags: are integratedinto the side of the roof frame and deployed inthe area from the A-pillar to the C-pillar.When deployed, the window curtain air bagenhances the level of protection for the head.However, it does not protect the chest orarms.In the event of a side impact, the window cur-tain air bag is deployed on the side on whichthe impact occurs.If the system determines that they can offeradditional protection to that provided by theseat belt, a window curtain air bag may bedeployed in other accident situations(Y page 56).

Occupant Classification System(OCS)

IntroductionThe Occupant Classification System (OCS)categorizes the person in the front-passengerseat. Depending on that result, the front-passenger front air bag is either enabled ordeactivated.The system does not deactivate:Rthe side impact air bagRthe window curtain air bagRthe Emergency Tensioning Devices

PrerequisitesTo be classified correctly, the front passengermust sit:Rwith the seat belt fastened correctlyRin an almost upright position with theirback against the seat backrestRwith their feet resting on the floor, if possi-ble

If the front passenger does not observe theseconditions, OCS may produce a false classi-fication, e.g. because the front passenger:Rtransfers their weight by supporting them-selves on a vehicle armrestRsits in such a way that their weight is raisedfrom the seat cushion

If it is absolutely necessary to install a childrestraint system on the front-passenger seat,be sure to observe the correct positioning ofthe child restraint system. Never placeobjects under or behind the child restraintsystem, e.g. cushions. The entire base of thechild restraint systemmust always rest on theseat cushion of the front-passenger seat. Thebackrest of the forwards-facing child restraintsystemmust, as far as possible, be resting onthe backrest of the front-passenger seat.The child restraint systemmust not touch theroof or be put under strain by the headrestraint. Adjust the angle of the seat back-rest and the head restraint position accord-ingly.Only then can OCS be guaranteed to functioncorrectly. Always observe the child restraintsystem manufacturer's installation instruc-tions.

Occupant safety 51

Safety

Z

Occupant Classification System opera-tion (OCS)

: PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp; PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lampThe indicator lamps inform you whether thefront-passenger front air bag is deactivated orenabled.X Press the Start/Stop button once or twice,or turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 inthe ignition lock.The system carries out a self-diagnosis.

The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF andPASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lampsmust light up simultaneously for approx-imately six seconds.The indicator lamps display the status of thefront-passenger front air bag.RPASSENGER AIR BAG ON: lights up: thefront-passenger front air bag is enabled. If,in the event of an accident, all deploymentcriteria are met, the front-passenger frontair bag is deployed.RPASSENGER AIR BAG OFF; lights up: thefront-passenger front air bag is deactiva-ted. They will then not be deployed in theevent of an accident.

If the status of the front-passenger front airbag changes while the vehicle is in motion, anair bag displaymessage appears in the instru-ment cluster (Y page 263). When the front-passenger seat is occupied, always pay atten-tion to the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON andPASSENGERAIRBAGOFF indicator lamps. Beaware of the status of the front-passenger

front air bag both before and during the jour-ney.

G WARNINGIf the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp is lit, the front-passenger front air bag isdisabled. It will not be deployed in the event ofan accident and cannot perform its intendedprotective function. A person in the front-passenger seat could then, for example, comeinto contact with the vehicle's interior, espe-cially if the person is sitting too close to thedashboard. This poses an increased risk ofinjury or even fatal injury.When the front-passenger seat is occupied,always ensure that:Rthe classification of the person in the front-passenger seat is correct and the front-passenger front air bag is enabled or disa-bled in accordance with the person in thefront-passenger seatRthe front-passenger seat has been movedback as far back as possible.Rthe person is seated correctly.Make sure, both before and during the jour-ney, that the status of the front-passengerfront air bag is correct.

G WARNINGIf you secure a child in a rearward-facing childrestraint system on the front-passenger seatand the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicatorlamp is lit up, the front-passenger front air bagmay deploy in an accident. The child could bestruck by the air bag. This poses an increasedrisk of injury or even fatal injury.Make sure that the front-passenger front airbag has been disabled. The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit.

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp remains off and/or the PASSENGER AIRBAGON indicator lamp lights up, do not installa rearward-facing child restraint system onthe front-passenger seat. You can find moreinformation on OCS under "Problemswith the

52 Occupant safetySafety

Occupant Classification System"(Y page 55).

G WARNINGIf you secure a child in a forward-facing childrestraint system on the front-passenger seatand you position the front-passenger seat tooclose to the dashboard, in the event of anaccident, the child could:Rcome into contact with the vehicle's inte-rior if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi-cator lamp is lit, for exampleRbe struck by the air bag if the PASSENGERAIR BAG ON is lit up

This poses an increased risk of injury or evenfatal injury.Always move the front-passenger seat as farback as possible and fully retract the seatcushion length. Always make sure that theshoulder belt strap is correctly routed fromthe vehicle belt sash guide to the shoulderbelt guide on the child restraint system. Theshoulder belt strap must be routed forwardsand downwards from the vehicle belt sashguide. If necessary, adjust the vehicle beltsash guide and the front-passenger seataccordingly. Always observe the childrestraint system manufacturer's installationinstructions.

If OCS determines that:Rthe front-passenger seat is unoccupied, thePASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamplights up after the system self-test andremains lit. This indicates that the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated.Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by achild of up to 12 months old, in a standardchild restraint system, the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp lights up after thesystem self-test and remains lit. This indi-cates that the front-passenger front air bagis deactivated.But in the case of a 12-month-old child, in astandard child restraint system, thePASSENGER AIR BAG ON can light up per-manently after the system self-test. This

indicates that the front-passenger front airbag is activated. The result of the classifi-cation is dependent on, among other fac-tors, the child restraint system and thechild's stature. It is recommended that youinstall the restraint system on a suitablerear seat.Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by aperson of smaller stature (e.g. a teenageror small adult), either the PASSENGER AIRBAG ON or PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi-cator lamp lights up and remains lit afterthe system self-test depending on theresult of the classification.- if the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicatorlamp lights up, move the front-passengerseat as far back as possible. Alterna-tively, a person of smaller stature can siton a rear seat.

- if the PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF indicatorlamp is lit, a person of smaller statureshould not use the front-passenger seat.

Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by anadult or a person of a stature correspond-ing to that of an adult, the PASSENGER AIRBAG ON indicator lamp lights up after thesystem self-test and remains lit. This indi-cates that the front-passenger front air bagis activated.

If children are traveling in the vehicle, be sureto observe the notes on "Children in the vehi-cle" (Y page 59).When OCS is malfunctioning, the red 6restraint system warning lamp in the instru-ment cluster and the PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF indicator lamp light up simultaneously.The front-passenger front air bag is deactiva-ted in this case and does not deploy during anaccident. Have the system checked by quali-fied technicians as soon as possible. Consultan authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Thefront-passenger seat should only be repairedat an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.If the front-passenger seat, the seat cover orthe seat cushion is damaged, have the nec-

Occupant safety 53

Safety

Z

essary repair work carried out at an author-ized Mercedes-Benz Center.For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-mends that you only use seat accessoriesthat have been approved by Mercedes-Benz.If the driver's air bag deploys, this does notmean that the front-passenger front air bagwill also deploy. The Occupant ClassificationSystem (OCS) categorizes the occupant in thefront-passenger seat. Depending on thatresult, the front-passenger front air bag iseither enabled or deactivated.

System self-test

G DANGERIf both the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF andPASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps donot light up during the system self-test, thesystem is malfunctioning. The front-passenger front air bag might be triggeredunintentionally or might not be triggered at allin the event of an accident with high deceler-ation. This poses an increased risk of injury oreven fatal injury.In this case the front-passenger seat may notbe used. Do not install a child restraint systemon the front-passenger seat. Have the Occu-pant Classification System (OCS) checkedand repaired immediately at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

G DANGERIf the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp remains lit after the system self-test, thefront-passenger front air bag is disabled. It willnot be deployed in the event of an accident. Inthis case, the front-passenger front air bagcannot perform its intended protective func-tion, e.g. when a person is seated in the front-passenger seat.That person could, for example, come intocontact with the vehicle's interior, especiallyif the person is sitting too close to the dash-board. This poses an increased risk of injury oreven fatal injury.

When the front-passenger seat is occupied,always ensure that:Rthe classification of the person in the front-passenger seat is correct and the front-passenger front air bag is enabled or disa-bled in accordance with the person in thefront-passenger seatRthe person is seated properly with a cor-rectly fastened seatbeltRthe front-passenger seat has been movedback as far back as possible

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp remains lit when it should not, the front-passenger seat may not be used. Do notinstall a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. Have the Occupant Classifi-cation System (OCS) checked and repairedimmediately at a qualified specialist work-shop.

G WARNINGObjects between the seat surface and thechild restraint system could affect OCS oper-ation. This could result in the front-passengerair bag not functioning as intended during anaccident. This poses an increased risk ofinjury or even fatal injury.Do not place any objects between the seatsurface and the child restraint system. Theentire base of the child restraint system mustalways rest on the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest of the forwards-facing child restraint system must, as far aspossible, be resting on the backrest of thefront-passenger seat. Always comply with thechild restraint system manufacturer's instal-lation instructions.

After the system self-test, the PASSENGERAIR BAG OFF or PASSENGER AIR BAG ONindicator lamp display the status of the front-passenger front air bag (Y page 52).For more information about the OCS, see"Problems with the Occupant ClassificationSystem" (Y page 55).

54 Occupant safetySafety

Problems with the Occupant Classification System (OCS)Be sure to observe the notes on "System self-test" (Y page 54).

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicatorlamp lights up andremains lit, eventhough the front-passenger seat is occu-pied by an adult or aperson of a stature cor-responding to that of anadult.

The classification of the person on the front-passenger seat isincorrect.X Make sure the conditions for a correct classification of the per-son on the front-passenger seat are met (Y page 51).

X If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit, thefront-passenger seat may not be used.

X Have OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicatorlamp does not light upand/or does not stayon.The front-passengerseat is:RunoccupiedRoccupied by theweight of a child upto 12 months old in achild restraint sys-tem

OCS is malfunctioning.X Make sure there is nothing between the seat cushion and thechild seat.

X Make sure that the entire base of the child restraint system restson the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest ofthe forwards-facing child restraint system must, as far as pos-sible, be resting on the backrest of front-passenger seat. If nec-essary, adjust the position of the front-passenger seat.

X Make sure that the seat cushion length is fully retracted.X When installing the child restraint system, make sure that theseat belt is tight. Do not pull the seat belt tight with the front-passenger seat adjustment. This could result in the seat belt andthe child restraint system being pulled too tightly.

X Check the installation of the child restraint system.Make sure that the head restraint does not apply a load to thechild restraint system. If necessary, adjust the head restraintaccordingly.

X Make sure that no objects are applying additional weight ontothe seat.

X If the PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF indicator lamp remains off and/or the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp lights up, do notinstall a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. It isrecommended that you install the restraint system on a suitablerear seat.

X Have OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

Occupant safety 55

Safety

Z

Deployment of Emergency TensioningDevices and air bags

Important safety notes

G WARNINGThe air bag parts are hot after an air bag hasbeen deployed. There is a risk of injury.Do not touch the air bag parts. Have adeployed air bag replaced at a qualified spe-cialist workshop as soon as possible.

G WARNINGA deployed air bag no longer offers any pro-tection and cannot provide the intended pro-tection in an accident. There is an increasedrisk of injury.Have the vehicle towed to a qualified special-ist workshop in order to have a deployed airbag replaced.

It is important for your safety and that of yourpassenger to have deployed air bags replacedand to have any malfunctioning air bagsrepaired. This will help to make sure the airbags continue to perform their protectivefunction for the vehicle occupants in theevent of a crash.

G WARNINGPyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devicesthat have been deployed are no longer opera-tional and are unable to perform their inten-ded protective function. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.Therefore, have pyrotechnic Emergency Ten-sioning Devices which have been triggeredimmediately replaced at a qualified specialistworkshop.

An electric motor is used by PRE-SAFE® totrigger the tightening of the seat belt in haz-ardous situations. This procedure is reversi-ble.If Emergency Tensioning Devices or air bagsare deployed, youwill hear a bang, and a smallamount of powder may also be released. The6 restraint systemwarning lamp lights up.

Only in rare cases will the bang affect yourhearing. The powder that is released gener-ally does not constitute a health hazard, but itmay cause short-term breathing difficulties inpeople with asthma or other respiratory prob-lems. To avoid this, youmay wish to get out ofthe vehicle or open the windows as soon as itis safe to do so.Air bags and pyrotechnic Emergency Tension-ing Devices (ETDs) contain perchlorate mate-rial, which may require special handling andregard for the environment. National guide-lines must be observed during disposal. InCalifornia, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm.

Method of operationDuring the first stage of a collision, therestraint system control unit evaluates impor-tant physical data relating to vehicle deceler-ation or acceleration, such as:RdurationRdirectionRintensityBased on the evaluation of this data, therestraint system control unit deploys theEmergency Tensioning Devices during a fron-tal or rear collision.An Emergency Tensioning Device can only bedeployed, if:Rthe ignition is switched onRthe components of the restraint system areoperational; see "Restraint system warninglamp" (Y page 43)Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the buckle onthe respective front-passenger seat

The Emergency Tensioning Devices in therear compartment are deployed independ-ently of the lock status of the seat belts.

56 Occupant safetySafety

If the restraint system control unit detects amore severe accident, further components ofthe restraint system are activated independ-ently of each other in certain frontal collisionsituations:RFront air bags and driver's knee bagRWindow curtain air bag, if the system deter-mines that deployment can offer additionalprotection to that provided by the seat belt

The front-passenger front air bag is activatedor deactivated depending on the person onthe front-passenger seat. The front-passenger front air bag can only deploy in anaccident if the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indi-cator lamp is lit. Observe the information onthe PASSENGER AIR BAG indicatorlamps(Y page 43).Your vehicle has two-stage front air bags.During the first deployment stage, the frontair bag is filled with propellant gas to reducethe risk of injuries. The front air bag is fullydeployed with the maximum amount of pro-pellant gas if a second deployment thresholdis reached within a few milliseconds.The deployment threshold of the EmergencyTensioning Devices and the air bag are deter-mined by evaluating the rate of vehicle decel-eration or acceleration which occurs at vari-ous points in the vehicle. This process is pre-emptive in nature. Deployment should takeplace in good time at the start of the collision.The rate of vehicle deceleration or accelera-tion and the direction of the force are essen-tially determined by:Rthe distribution of forces during the colli-sionRthe collision angleRthe deformation characteristics of the vehi-cleRthe characteristics of the object with whichthe vehicle has collided

Factors that can only be seen and measuredafter a collision has occurred do not play adecisive role in the deployment of an air bag,

nor do they provide an indication of air bagdeployment.The vehicle can be deformed considerably,without an air bag being deployed. This is thecase if only parts which are relatively easilydeformed are affected and the rate of decel-eration is not high. Conversely, air bags maybe deployed even though the vehicle suffersonly minor deformation. This is the case if, forexample, very rigid vehicle parts such as lon-gitudinal bodymembers are hit, and sufficientdeceleration occurs as a result.If the restraint system control unit detects aside impact or that the vehicle is rolling over,the relevant restraint system components areactivated independently of one anotherdepending on the apparent type of accident.If the systemdetermines a need for additionalprotection for the vehicle occupants, theEmergency Tensioning Devices are deployed.RSide impact air bags on the side of impact,independently of the Emergency Tension-ing Device and the use of the seat belt onthe driver's seat and outer seats in the sec-ond rowThe side impact air bag on the front-passenger side (front) deploys in the fol-lowing situations:- the OCS system detects that the front-passenger seat is occupied or

- the belt tongue is engaged in the beltbuckle of the front-passenger seat

RWindow curtain air bag on the side ofimpact, independently of the use of theseat belt and independently of whether thefront-passenger is occupiedRWindow curtain air bags on the driver's andfront-passenger side in certain situationswhen the vehicle rolls over, if the systemdetermines that deployment can offer addi-tional protection to that provided by theseat belt

i Not all air bags are deployed in an acci-dent. The different air bag systems workindependently of each other.

Occupant safety 57

Safety

Z

How the air bag system works is deter-mined by the severity of the accident detec-ted, especially the vehicle deceleration oracceleration and the apparent type of acci-dent:Rfrontal collisionRside impactRrollover

PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupantprotection system)

Introduction

PRE-SAFE® takes preemptive measures toprotect occupants in certain hazardous sit-uations.

Important safety notes

! Make sure that there are no objects in thefootwell under or behind the seats whenmoving the seats back. There is a risk thatthe seats and/or the objects could be dam-aged.

Despite your vehicle being equipped with thePRE-SAFE® system, the possibility of per-sonal injuries occurring as a result of an acci-dent cannot be eliminated. Always adapt yourdriving style to suit the prevailing road andweather conditions and maintain a safe dis-tance from the vehicle in front. Drive care-fully.

Function

PRE-SAFE® intervenes:Rin emergency braking situations, e.g. whenBAS is activated.Rin critical driving situations, e.g. when phys-ical limits are exceeded and the vehicleundersteers or oversteers severely.Rvehicles with the Driving Assistance pack-age: when a driver assistance system inter-venes powerfully or the radar sensor sys-

tem detects an imminent danger of colli-sion in certain situations.

PRE-SAFE® takes the following measuresdepending on the hazardous situation detec-ted:Rthe front seat belts are pre-tensioned.Rif the vehicle skids, the sliding sunroof andthe side windows are closed so that only asmall gap remains. The panorama roof withpower tilt/sliding panel is completelyclosed.Rvehicles with the memory function for thefront-passenger seat: the front-passengerseat is adjusted if it is in an unfavorableposition.

If the hazardous situation passes withoutresulting in an accident, PRE-SAFE® slackensthe belt pre-tensioning. All settings made byPRE-SAFE® can then be reversed.If the seat belt pre-tensioning is not reduced:X Move the seat backrest or seat backslightly when the vehicle is stationary.The seat belt pre-tensioning is reduced andthe locking mechanism is released.

The seat-belt adjustment is an integral part ofthe PRE-SAFE® convenience function. Youwill find information on the convenience func-tion under "Belt adjustment" (Y page 47).

PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory occu-pant protection system PLUS)

Introduction

PRE-SAFE® PLUS is only available in vehicleswith the Driving Assistance package.Using the radar sensor system, PRE-SAFE®PLUS is able to detect that a head-on or rear-end collision is imminent. In certain hazard-ous situations, PRE-SAFE® PLUS takes pre-emptive measures to protect the vehicleoccupants.

58 Occupant safetySafety

Important safety notes

The intervention of PRE-SAFE® PLUS cannotprevent an imminent collision.The driver is not warned when PRE-SAFE®PLUS intervenes.PRE-SAFE® PLUS does not intervene if thevehicle is backing up.PRE-SAFE® PLUS does not perform brakingactions while the vehicle is in motion or whenParking Guidance is active.

Function

PRE-SAFE® PLUS intervenes in certain situa-tions if the radar sensor system detects animminent head-on or rear-end collision.PRE-SAFE® PLUS takes the following meas-ures depending on the hazardous situationdetected:Rif the radar sensor system detects that ahead-on collision is imminent, the seatbelts are pre-tensioned.Rif the radar sensor system detects that arear-end collision is imminent:- the brake pressure is increased if thedriver applies the brakes when the vehi-cle is stationary.

- the seat belts are pre-tensioned.The PRE-SAFE® PLUS braking application iscanceled:Rif the accelerator pedal is depressed whena gear is engagedRif the risk of a collision passes or is no lon-ger detectedRif DISTRONIC PLUS indicates an intentionto pull away

If the hazardous situation passes withoutresulting in an accident, the original settingsare restored.

Automatic measures after an acci-dentImmediately after an accident, the followingmeasures are implemented, depending onthe type and severity of the impact:Rthe hazard warning lamps are activatedRthe emergency lighting is activatedRthe vehicle doors are unlockedRthe front side windows are loweredRvehicles with a memory function: the elec-trically adjustable steering wheel is raisedRthe engine is switched offRvehicles with mbrace: automatic emer-gency call

Children in the vehicle

Important safety notesAccident statistics show that childrensecured in the rear seats are safer than chil-dren secured in the front-passenger seat. Forthis reason, Mercedes-Benz strongly advisesthat you install a child restraint system on arear seat. Children are generally better pro-tected there.If a child younger than 12 years and under 5 ft(1.50 m) in height is traveling in the vehicle:Ralways secure the child in a child restraintsystem suitable for Mercedes-Benz vehi-cles. The child restraint system must beappropriate to the age, weight and size ofthe childRbe sure to observe the instructions andsafety notes in this section in addition tothe child restraint system manufacturer'sinstallation instructionsRbe sure to observe the instructions andsafety notes on the "Occupant classifica-tion system (OCS)" (Y page 51)

Children in the vehicle 59

Safety

Z

G WARNINGIf you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-cle, they could set it inmotion by, for example:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshift the automatic transmission out of theparking position P.Rstart the engine.In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-ment and become trapped. There is a risk ofan accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

G WARNINGIf persons, particularly children are subjectedto prolonged exposure to extreme heat orcold, there is a risk of injury, possibly evenfatal. Never leave children unattended in thevehicle.

G WARNINGIf the child restraint system is subjected todirect sunlight, parts may get very hot. Chil-dren may burn themselves on these parts,particularly on the metal parts of the childrestraint system. There is a risk of injury.If you leave the vehicle, taking the child withyou, always ensure that the child restraintsystem is not exposed to direct sunlight. Pro-tect it with a blanket, for example. If the childrestraint system has been exposed to directsunlight, let it cool down before securing thechild in it. Never leave children unattended inthe vehicle.

Always ensure that all vehicle occupants havetheir seat belts fastened correctly and are sit-ting properly. Particular attention must bepaid to children.Observe the safety notes on the seat belt(Y page 44) and the notes on correct use ofseat belts (Y page 45).A booster seat may be necessary to achieveproper seat belt positioning for children over

41 lbs (18 kg) or until they reach a heightwhere a lap/shoulder belt can be fastenedproperly without a booster seat.

Special seat belt retractor

G WARNINGIf the seat belt is released while driving, thechild restraint system will no longer besecured properly. The special seat belt retrac-tor is disabled and the inertia real draws in aportion of the seat belt. The seat belt cannotbe immediately refastened. There is anincreased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.Stop the vehicle immediately, paying atten-tion to road and traffic conditions. Reactivatethe special seat belt retractor and secure thechild restraint system properly.

All seat belts in the vehicle, except the driv-er's seat belt, are equippedwith a special seatbelt retractor. When activated, the specialseat belt retractor ensures that the seat beltcannot slacken once the child seat is secured.Installing a child restraint system:X Make sure you observe the child restraintsystemmanufacturer's installation instruc-tions.

X Pull the seat belt smoothly from the beltoutlet.

X Engage seat belt tongue in belt buckle.

Activating the special seat belt retractor:X Pull the seat belt out fully and let the inertiareel retract it again.While the seat belt is retracting, you shouldhear a ratcheting sound. The special seatbelt retractor is enabled.

X Push the child restraint system down sothat the seat belt is tight and does notloosen.

60 Children in the vehicleSafety

Removing a child restraint system/deactivat-ing the special seat belt retractor:X Make sure you observe the child restraintsystemmanufacturer's installation instruc-tions.

X Press the belt buckle release button, holdthe belt tongue and guide it back towardsthe belt outlet.The special seat belt retractor is deactiva-ted.

Child restraint systemThe use of seat belts and child restraint sys-tems is required by law in:Rall 50 statesRthe U.S. territoriesRthe District of ColumbiaRall Canadian provincesYou can obtain further information about thecorrect child restraint system from anyauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

G WARNINGIf the child restraint system is installed incor-rectly on a suitable seat, it cannot protect asintended. The child cannot then be restrainedin the event of an accident, heavy braking orsudden changes of direction. There is anincreased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.Make sure that you observe the child restraintsystem manufacturer's installation instruc-tions and the notes on use. Please ensure,that the base of the child restraint system isalways resting completely on the seat cush-ion. Never place objects, e.g. cushions, underor behind the child restraint system. Only usechild restraint systems with the original coverdesigned for them. Only replace damagedcovers with genuine covers.

G WARNINGIf the child restraint system is installed incor-rectly or is not secured, it can come loose inthe event of an accident, heavy braking or a

sudden change in direction. The childrestraint system could be thrown about, strik-ing vehicle occupants. There is an increasedrisk of injury, possibly even fatal.Always install child restraint systems prop-erly, even if they are not being used. Makesure that you observe the child restraint sys-tem manufacturer's installation instructions.

You will find further information on stowingobjects, luggage or loads under "Loadingguidelines" (Y page 298).

G WARNINGChild restraint systems or their securing sys-tems which have been damaged or subjectedto a load in an accident can no longer protectas intended. The child cannot then berestrained in the event of an accident, heavybraking or sudden changes of direction. Thereis an increased risk of injury, possibly evenfatal.Replace child restraint systems which havebeen damaged or subjected to a load in anaccident as soon as possible. Have the secur-ing systems on the child restraint systemchecked at a qualified specialist workshop,before you install a child restraint systemagain.

Securing systems for the child restraint sys-tem are:Rthe seat belt systemRthe ISOFIX (LATCH-type) securing ringsRthe Top Tether anchoragesIf it is absolutely necessary to carry a child onthe front-passenger seat, be sure to observethe information on the "Occupant Classifica-tion System (OCS)" (Y page 51). There youwill also find information on deactivating thefront-passenger front air bag.

Children in the vehicle 61

Safety

Z

All child restraint systems must meet the fol-lowing standards:RU.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stand-ards 213 and 225RCanadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards213 and 210.2

Confirmation that the child restraint systemcorresponds to the standards can be foundon an instruction label on the child restraintsystem. This confirmation can also be foundin the installation instructions that are inclu-ded with the child restraint system.Observe thewarning labels in the vehicle inte-rior and on the child restraint system.

LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat secur-ing system

G WARNINGLATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint systemsdo not offer sufficient protective effect forchildren whose weight is greater than 48 lbs(22 kg) who are secured using the safety beltintegrated in the child restraint system. In theevent of an accident, a child might not berestrained correctly. This poses an increasedrisk of injury or even fatal injury.If the child weighs more than 48 lbs (22 kg),only use LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraintsystems with which the child is also securedwith the vehicle seat belt. Also secure thechild restraint system with the Top Tetherbelt, if available.

Always comply with the manufacturer'sinstallation and operating instructions for thechild restraint system used.Before every trip, make sure that the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system isengaged correctly in both LATCH-type (ISO-FIX) securing rings

! When installing the child restraint system,make sure that the seat belt for the middleseat does not get trapped. The seat beltcould otherwise be damaged.

: LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing ringsVehicles with rear seat armrest: adjust therear seat armrest so that LATCH-type (ISO-FIX) securing rings: for the LATCH-type(ISOFIX) child restraint system are accessi-ble.X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) childrestraint system on both LATCH-type (ISO-FIX) securing rings:.

The LATCH-type (ISOFIX) system is a stand-ardized securing system for speciallydesigned child restraint systems on the rearseats. LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings:for two LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraintsystems are installed on the left and right rearseats.Non-LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seats mayalso be used and can be installed using thevehicle's seat belt system. Install child seatsaccording to themanufacturer's instructions.

Top Tether

IntroductionTop Tether provides an additional connectionbetween the child restraint system securedwith a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat mountand the vehicle. This helps reduce the risk ofinjury even further. If the child restraint sys-tem is equipped with a Top Tether belt, thisshould always be used.

62 Children in the vehicleSafety

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the rear seat backrests are not locked, theycould fold forwards in the event of an acci-dent, heavy braking or sudden changes ofdirection. As a result, child restraint systemscannot perform their intended protectivefunction. Rear seat backrests that are notlocked can also cause additional injuries, e.g.in the event of an accident. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.Always lock rear seat backrests after instal-ling a Top Tether belt. Observe the lock veri-fication indicator. Adjust the rear seat backr-ests so that they are in an upright position.

If the rear seat backrest is not engaged andlocked, this will be shown in themultifunctiondisplay in the instrument cluster. A warningtone also sounds.

Top Tether anchorages

Top Tether anchorage points= are installedin the rear compartment behind the headrestraints on the parcel shelf.

X Move head restraint: upwards.X Fold up cover; of Top Tether anchorage=.

X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) childrestraint system with Top Tether. Alwayscomply with the child restraint systemmanufacturer's installation instructionswhen doing so.

X Route Top Tether beltA under headrestraint:between the twohead restraintbars.

X Hook Top Tether hook? of Top Tether beltA into Top Tether anchorage=.Make sure that Top Tether beltA is nottwisted.

X Tension Top Tether beltA. Always complywith the child restraint systemmanufactur-er's installation instructionswhen doing so.

X Fold down cover; of Top Tether anchor-age=.

X Move head restraint: back down againslightly if necessary (Y page 111).Make sure that you do not interferewith thecorrect routing of Top Tether beltA.

Child restraint system on the front-passenger seat

General notesAccident statistics show that childrensecured in the rear seats are safer than chil-dren secured in the front-passenger seat. Forthis reason, Mercedes-Benz strongly advises

Children in the vehicle 63

Safety

Z

that you install a child restraint system on arear seat.If it is absolutely necessary to install a childrestraint system to the front-passenger seat,be sure to observe the instructions and safetynotes on the "Occupant classification system(OCS)" (Y page 51).You can thus avoid the risks that could ariseas a result of:Ran incorrectly categorized person in thefront-passenger seatRthe unintentional deactivation of the front-passenger front air bagRthe unsuitable positioning of the childrestraint system, e.g. too close to the dash-board

Rearward-facing child restraint systemIf it is absolutely necessary to install a rear-ward-facing child restraint system on thefront-passenger seat, always make sure thatthe front-passenger front air bag is deactiva-ted. Only if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFFindicator lamp is permanently lit (Y page 43)is the front-passenger front air bag deactiva-ted.Always observe the child restraint systemmanufacturer's installation and operatinginstructions.

Forward-facing child restraint systemIf it is absolutely necessary to install aforward-facing child restraint system to thefront-passenger seat, always move the front-passenger seat as far back as possible. Fullyretract the seat cushion length. The entirebase of the child restraint system mustalways rest on the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest of the childrestraint system must, as far as possible, lieflat against the backrest of the front-passenger seat. The child restraint systemmust not touch the roof or be put under strainby the head restraint. Adjust the angle of theseat backrest and the head restraint position

accordingly. Alwaysmake sure that the shoul-der belt strap is correctly routed from thevehicle belt sash guide to the shoulder beltguide on the child restraint system. The shoul-der belt strap must be routed forwards anddownwards from the vehicle belt sash guide.If necessary, adjust the vehicle belt sashguide and the front-passenger seat accord-ingly.Always observe the child restraint systemmanufacturer's installation and operatinginstructions.

Child-proof locks

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf children are traveling in the vehicle, theycould:Ropen doors, thus endangering other peopleor road usersRexit the vehicle and be caught by oncomingtrafficRoperate vehicle equipment and becometrapped

There is a risk of an accident and injury.Always activate the child-proof locks andoverride feature if children are traveling in thevehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always takethe key with you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unattended in the vehicle.

Override feature for:Rthe rear doors (Y page 65)Rthe rear side windows (Y page 65)

G WARNINGIf you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-cle, they could set it inmotion by, for example:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshift the automatic transmission out of theparking position P.Rstart the engine.

64 Children in the vehicleSafety

In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-ment and become trapped. There is a risk ofan accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

G WARNINGIf persons, particularly children are subjectedto prolonged exposure to extreme heat orcold, there is a risk of injury, possibly evenfatal. Never leave children unattended in thevehicle.

G WARNINGIf the child restraint system is subjected todirect sunlight, parts may get very hot. Chil-dren may burn themselves on these parts,particularly on the metal parts of the childrestraint system. There is a risk of injury.If you leave the vehicle, taking the child withyou, always ensure that the child restraintsystem is not exposed to direct sunlight. Pro-tect it with a blanket, for example. If the childrestraint system has been exposed to directsunlight, let it cool down before securing thechild in it. Never leave children unattended inthe vehicle.

Child-proof locks for the rear doors

You secure each door individually with thechild-proof locks on the rear doors. A doorsecured with a child-proof lock cannot beopened from inside the vehicle. When the

vehicle is unlocked, the door can be openedfrom the outside.X To activate: press the child-proof locklever up in the direction of arrow:.

X Make sure that the child-proof locks areworking properly.

X To deactivate: press the child-proof locklever down in the direction of arrow;.

Override feature for the rear side win-dows

X To activate/deactivate: press button;.If indicator lamp: is lit, operation of therear side windows is disabled. Operation isonly possible using the switches in the driv-er's door. If indicator lamp: is off, oper-ation is possible using the switches in therear compartment.

Pets in the vehicle

G WARNINGIf you leave animals unattended or unsecuredin the vehicle, they could press buttons orswitches, for example.As a result, they could:Ractivate vehicle equipment and becometrapped, for exampleRactivate or deactivate systems, therebyendangering other road users

Unsecured animals could also be flung aroundthe vehicle in the event of an accident or sud-

Pets in the vehicle 65

Safety

Z

den steering or braking, thereby injuring vehi-cle occupants. There is a risk of an accidentand injury.Never leave animals unattended in the vehi-cle. Always secure animals properly duringthe journey, e.g. use a suitable animal trans-port box.

Driving safety systems

Overview of driving safety systemsIn this section, you will find information aboutthe following driving safety systems:RABS (Anti-lock Braking System)(Y page 66)RBAS (Brake Assist System) (Y page 67)RBAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist (BrakeAssist System PLUS with Cross-TrafficAssist) (Y page 67)RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS(distance warning function and adaptiveBrake Assist) (Y page 69)RESP® (Electronic Stability Program)(Y page 71)REBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution)(Y page 73)RADAPTIVE BRAKE (Y page 74)RPRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 74)RSTEER CONTROL (Y page 76)

Important safety notesIf you fail to adapt your driving style orbecome distracted, the driving safety sys-tems can neither reduce the risk of accidentnor override the laws of physics. Drivingsafety systems are merely aids designed toassist driving. You are responsible for the dis-tance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speedand for braking in good time. Always adaptyour driving style to suit the prevailing road,weather and traffic conditions and maintain a

safe distance from the vehicle in front. Drivecarefully.The driving safety systems described onlywork as effectively as possible when there isadequate contact between the tires and theroad surface. Please pay special attention tothe notes on tires, recommended minimumtire tread depths, etc. (Y page 358).Inwintry driving conditions, always usewintertires (M+S tires) and if necessary, snowchains. Only in this way will the driving safetysystems described in this section work aseffectively as possible.

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

General informationABS regulates brake pressure in such a waythat the wheels do not lock when you brake.This allows you to continue steering the vehi-cle when braking.The!ABSwarning lamp in the instrumentcluster lights up when the ignition is switchedon. It goes out when the engine is running.

Important safety notes

i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 66).

G WARNINGIf ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock whenbraking. The steerability and braking charac-teristics may be severely impaired. Addition-ally, further driving safety systems are deac-tivated. There is an increased danger of skid-ding and accidents.Drive on carefully. Have ABS checked imme-diately at a qualified specialist workshop.

When ABS is malfunctioning, other systems,including driving safety systems, will alsobecome inoperative. Observe the informationon the ABS warning lamp (Y page 286) anddisplay messages which may be shown in theinstrument cluster (Y page 251).

66 Driving safety systemsSafety

ABS works from a speed of about 5 mph(8 km/h), regardless of road-surface condi-tions. ABS works on slippery surfaces, evenwhen you only brake gently.

BrakingX If ABS intervenes: continue to depress thebrake pedal vigorously until the braking sit-uation is over.

X To make a full brake application:depress the brake pedal with full force.

If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel apulsing in the brake pedal.The pulsating brake pedal can be an indica-tion of hazardous road conditions, and func-tions as a reminder to take extra care whiledriving.

BAS (Brake Assist System)

General informationBAS operates in emergency braking situa-tions. If you depress the brake pedal quickly,BAS automatically boosts the braking force,thus shortening the stopping distance.

Important safety notes

i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 66).

G WARNINGIf BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distancein an emergency braking situation isincreased. There is a risk of an accident.In an emergency braking situation, depressthe brake pedal with full force. ABS preventsthe wheels from locking.

BrakingX Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed untilthe emergency braking situation is over.ABS prevents the wheels from locking.

The brakes will function as usual once yourelease the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated.

BAS PLUS (Brake Assist SystemPLUS) with Cross-Traffic Assist

General information

i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 66).

BAS PLUS is only available on vehicles withthe Driving Assistance package.For BAS PLUS to assist you when driving, theradar sensor system and the camera systemmust be operational.With the help of a sensor system and a cam-era system, BAS PLUS can detect obstacles:Rthat are in the path of your vehicle for anextended period of timeRthat cross the path of your vehicleIn addition, pedestrians in the path of yourvehicle can be detected.BAS PLUS detects pedestrians by using typi-cal characteristics such as the body contoursand posture of a person standing upright.If the radar sensor system or the camera sys-tem is malfunctioning, BAS PLUS functionsare restricted or no longer available. Thebrake system is still available with completebrake boosting effect and BAS.

i Observe the restrictions described in the"Important safety notes" sec-tion“ (Y page 67).

BAS PLUS can help you tominimize the risk ofa collision with a vehicle or a pedestrian andreduce the effects of such a collision. If BASPLUS detects a danger of collision, you areassisted when braking.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGBAS PLUS cannot always clearly identifyobjects and complex traffic situations.

Driving safety systems 67

Safety

Z

In such cases, BAS PLUS may:Rintervene unnecessarilyRnot interveneThere is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake. Terminate theintervention in a non-critical driving situation.

G WARNINGBAS PLUS does not react:Rto small people, e.g. childrenRto animalsRto oncoming vehiclesRwhen corneringAs a result, BAS PLUSmay not intervene in allcritical situations. There is a risk of an acci-dent.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake.

In the event of snowfall or heavy rain, the rec-ognition can be impaired.Recognition by the radar sensor system isalso impaired in the event of:Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything elsecovering the sensorsRthere is interference by other radar sourcesRthere are strong radar reflections, forexample in parking garagesRa narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. amotorbikeRa vehicle traveling in front on a different lineRvehicles quickly moving into the radar sen-sor system detection range

Recognition by the camera system is alsoimpaired in the event of:Rdirt on the camera or if the camera is cov-eredRthere is glare on the camera system, e.g.from the sun being low in the sky

RdarknessRif:

- pedestrians move quickly, e.g. into thepath of the vehicle

- the camera system no longer recognizesa pedestrian as a person due to specialclothing or other objects

- a pedestrian is concealed by otherobjects

- the typical outline of a person is not dis-tinguishable from the background

Following damage to the front end of the vehi-cle, have the configuration and operation ofthe radar sensors checked at a qualified spe-cialist workshop. This also applies to colli-sions at low speeds where there is no visibledamage to the front of the vehicle.Following damage to the windshield, have theconfiguration and operation of the camerasystemchecked at a qualified specialist work-shop.

FunctionTo avoid a collision, BAS PLUS calculates thebrake force necessary if:Ryou approach an obstacle, andRBAS PLUS has detected a risk of collisionWhen driving at a speed under 20 mph(30 km/h): if you depress the brake pedal,BAS PLUS is activated. The increase in brakepressure will be carried out at the last possi-ble moment.When driving at a speed above 20 mph(30 km/h): if you depress the brake pedalsharply, BAS PLUS automatically raises thebrake pressure to a value adapted to the traf-fic situation.BAS PLUS provides braking assistance in haz-ardous situations with vehicles in front withina speed range between 4 mph (7 km/h) and155 mph (250 km/h).

68 Driving safety systemsSafety

At speeds of up to approximately 44 mph(70 km/h), BAS PLUS can react to:Rstationary objects in the path of your vehi-cle, e.g. stopped or parked vehiclesRpedestrians in the path of your vehicleRobjects crossing your path and that arerecognized in the detection range of thesensors

i If BAS PLUS demands particularly highbraking force, preventative passenger pro-tection measures (PRE-SAFE®) are activa-ted simultaneously.

X Keep the brake pedal depressed until theemergency braking situation is over.ABS prevents the wheels from locking.

BAS PLUS is deactivated and the brakes func-tion as usual again, if:Ryou release the brake pedal.Rthere is no longer a risk of collision.Rno obstacle is detected in front of yourvehicle.Ryou depress the accelerator pedal.Ryou activate kickdown.

COLLISION PREVENTION ASSISTPLUS

General informationCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS con-sists of a distance warning function with anautonomous emergency braking function andadaptive Brake Assist.COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS canhelp you to minimize the risk of a front-endcollision with a vehicle ahead or reduce theeffects of such a collision.If COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUSdetects that there is a risk of a collision, youwill be warned visually and acoustically. If youdo not react to the visual and audible collisionwarning, autonomous braking can be initiatedin critical situations. If you apply the brakeyourself in a critical situation, the COLLISION

PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS adaptive BrakeAssist assists you.

Important safety notesIn particular, the detection of obstacles canbe impaired if:Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything elsecovering the sensorsRthere is snow or heavy rainRthere is interference by other radar sourcesRthere are strong radar reflections, forexample in parking garagesRa narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. amotorbikeRa vehicle traveling in front on a different lineRnew vehicles or after a service on the COL-LISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS systemObserve the notes in the section on break-ing-in (Y page 156).

Following damage to the front end of the vehi-cle, have the configuration and operation ofthe radar sensor checked at a qualified spe-cialist workshop. This also applies to colli-sions at low speeds where there is no visibledamage to the front of the vehicle.

Distance warning function

Important safety notesi Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion for driving safety systems (Y page 66).

G WARNINGThe distance warning function does not react:Rto people or animalsRto oncoming vehiclesRto crossing trafficRwhen corneringThus, the distance warning function cannotprovide a warning in all critical situations.There is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake.

Driving safety systems 69

Safety

Z

G WARNINGThe distance warning function cannot alwaysclearly identify objects and complex trafficsituations.In such cases, the distance warning functionmay:Rgive an unnecessary warningRnot give a warningThere is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and do not rely solely on the distancewarning function.

FunctionX To activate/deactivate: activate or deac-tivate the distance warning function in theon-board computer (Y page 245).

If the distance warning function is not activa-ted, theæ symbol appears in the assis-tance graphics display.The distancewarning function can help you tominimize the risk of a front-end collision witha vehicle ahead or reduce the effects of sucha collision. If the distance warning functiondetects that there is a risk of a collision, youwill be warned visually and acoustically.Starting at a speed of around 4mph (7 km/h),the distance warning function warns you ifyou rapidly approach a vehicle in front. Anintermittent warning tone will then sound,and the· distance warning lamp will lightup in the instrument cluster.X Brake immediately in order to increase thedistance from the vehicle in front.

orX Take evasive action, provided it is safe to doso.

Due to the nature of the system, particularlycomplicated but non-critical driving condi-tions may also cause the system to display awarning.With the help of the radar sensor system, thedistance warning function can detect obsta-

cles that are in the path of your vehicle for anextended period of time.Up to a speed of around 44 mph (70 km/h),the distance warning function can also reactto stationary obstacles, such as stopped orparked vehicles.If you approach an obstacle and the distancewarning function detects a risk of a collision,the system will initially alert you both visuallyand acoustically.

Autonomous braking functionIf the driver does not react to the distancewarning signal in a critical situation, COLLI-SION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS can assistwith the autonomous braking function.The autonomous braking function:Rgives the driver more time to react to criti-cal driving situationsRcan help the driver to avoid an accident orRreduces the effects of an accidentVehicles without DISTRONIC PLUS: theautonomous braking function is available inthe following speed ranges:R5 - 65 mph (7 - 105 km/h) for movingobjectsR5 - 31 mph (7 - 50 km/h) for stationaryobjects

Vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS: the auton-omous braking function is available in the fol-lowing speed ranges:R5 - 124 mph (7 - 200 km/h) for movingobjectsR5 - 31 mph (7 - 50 km/h) for stationaryobjects

If the autonomous braking function requires aparticularly high braking force, preventativepassenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE®)are activated simultaneously.

Adaptive Brake Assist

i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 66).

70 Driving safety systemsSafety

Adaptive Brake Assist provides braking assis-tance in hazardous situations at speedsabove 4 mph (7 km/h). It uses radar sensortechnology to assess the traffic situation.

G WARNINGAdaptive Brake Assist cannot always clearlyidentify objects and complex traffic situa-tions.In such cases, Adaptive Brake Assist can:Rintervene unnecessarilyRnot interveneThere is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake. Terminate theintervention in a non-critical driving situation.

G WARNINGAdaptive Brake Assist does not react:Rto people or animalsRto oncoming vehiclesRto crossing trafficRwhen corneringAs a result, the Adaptive Brake Assist may notintervene in all critical conditions. There is arisk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake.

Due to the nature of the system, particularlycomplicated but non-critical driving condi-tions may also cause Brake Assist to inter-vene.If adaptive Brake Assist is not available due toa malfunction in the radar sensor system, thebrake system remains available with fullbrake boosting effect and BAS.With the help of adaptive Brake Assist, thedistance warning signal can detect obstaclesthat are in the path of your vehicle for anextended period of time.If adaptive Brake Assist detects a risk of col-lision with the vehicle in front, it calculatesthe braking force necessary to avoid a colli-sion. If you apply the brakes forcefully, adap-

tive Brake Assist will automatically increasethe braking force to a level suitable for thetraffic conditions.X Keep the brake pedal depressed until theemergency braking situation is over.ABS prevents the wheels from locking.

The brakes will work normally again if:Ryou release the brake pedal.Rthere is no longer any danger of a collision.Rno obstacle is detected in front of yourvehicle.

Adaptive Brake Assist is then deactivated.If adaptive Brake Assist demands particularlyhigh braking force, preventative passengerprotection measures (PRE-SAFE®) are activa-ted simultaneously.Up to a speed of approximately 155 mph(250 km/h), adaptive Brake Assist is capableof reacting to moving objects that havealready been detected as such at least onceover the period of observation.Up to a speed of approximately 44 mph(70 km/h), adaptive Brake Assist reacts tostationary obstacles.

ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)

General notes

i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 66).

ESP® monitors driving stability and traction,i.e. power transmission between the tires andthe road surface.If ESP® detects that the vehicle is deviatingfrom the direction desired by the driver, oneor more wheels are braked to stabilize thevehicle. The engine output is also modified tokeep the vehicle on the desired course withinphysical limits. ESP® assists the driver whenpulling away on wet or slippery roads. ESP®can also stabilize the vehicle during braking.

Driving safety systems 71

Safety

Z

ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System)

i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 66).

ETS traction control is part of ESP®. On vehi-cles with 4MATIC, 4ETS is part of ESP®.Traction control brakes the drive wheels indi-vidually if they spin. This enables you to pullaway and accelerate on slippery surfaces, forexample if the road surface is slippery on oneside. In addition, more drive torque is trans-ferred to the wheel or wheels with traction.Traction control remains active, even if youdeactivate ESP®.

Important safety notes

i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 66).

G WARNINGIf ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® is unable tostabilize the vehicle. Additionally, further driv-ing safety systems are deactivated. Thisincreases the risk of skidding and an accident.Drive on carefully. Have ESP® checked at aqualified specialist workshop.

! If you test the parking brake using a brakedynamometer, switch the ignition off.Application of the brakes by ESP®may oth-erwise destroy the brake system.

When towing the vehicle with the rear axleraised, observe the notes on ESP®(Y page 353).ESP® is deactivated if the warning lamp åin the instrument cluster lights up and:Rthe vehicle is movingRthe ECO start/stop function is activatedIf the ÷ warning lamp lights up continu-ously, ESP® is not available due to a malfunc-tion.Observe the information on warning lamps(Y page 288) and display messages whichmay be shown in the instrument cluster(Y page 251).

Only use wheels with the recommended tiresizes. Only then will ESP® function properly.

Characteristics of ESP®

General informationIf the ÷ ESP warning lamp goes out beforebeginning the journey, ESP® is automaticallyactive.If ESP® intervenes, the ÷ ESP® warninglamp flashes in the instrument cluster.If ESP® intervenes:X Do not deactivate ESP® under any circum-stances.

X Only depress the accelerator pedal as far asnecessary when pulling away.

X Adapt your driving style to suit the prevail-ing road and weather conditions.

ECO start/stop functionThe ECO start/stop function switches theengine off automatically when the vehiclestops moving. The engine starts automati-callywhen the driverwants to pull away again.ESP® remains in its previously selected sta-tus.Example: if ESP®was deactivated beforethe engine was switched off, ESP® remainsdeactivated when the engine is switched onagain.

Deactivating/activating ESP®

Important safety notesi Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 66).

You can select between the following statesof ESP®:RESP® is activated.RESP® is deactivated.

G WARNINGIf you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer sta-bilizes the vehicle. There is an increased riskof skidding and an accident.

72 Driving safety systemsSafety

Only deactivate ESP® in the situations descri-bed in the following.

It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the fol-lowing situations:Rwhen using snow chainsRin deep snowRon sand or gravelActivate ESP® as soon as the situationsdescribed above no longer apply. ESP® willotherwise not be able to stabilize the vehicleif the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts tospin.

! Avoid spinning the driven wheels for anextended period with ESP® deactivated.You could otherwise damage the drivetrain.

Deactivating/activating ESP®

You can deactivate or activate ESP® via theon-board computer.X To deactivate: (Y page 72).The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in theinstrument cluster lights up.

X To activate: (Y page 72).The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in theinstrument cluster goes out.

Characteristics when ESP® is deactivatedIf ESP® is deactivated and one ormorewheelsstart to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp inthe instrument cluster does not flash. In suchsituations, ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle.If you deactivate ESP®:RESP® no longer improves driving stability.Rthe driven wheels can spin.The spinning of the wheels results in a cut-ting action for better traction on loose sur-faces.Rtraction control is still activated.RPRE-SAFE® is no longer available, nor is itactivated if you brake firmly and ESP®intervenes.

RPRE-SAFE® Brake is no longer available, itis also not activated if you brake firmly andESP® intervenes.RESP® still provides support when you brakefirmly.

Crosswind Assist

General informationStrong crosswinds can cause your vehicle todeviate from a straight course. The crosswinddriving assistance function integrated intoESP® significantly reduces these effects.ESP® intervenes automatically according tothe direction and intensity of the crosswindsaffecting your vehicle.ESP intervenes with stabilizing braking toassist you in keeping the vehicle in the lane.Crosswind Assist is active at vehicle speedsabove 50 mph (80 km/h) when drivingstraight ahead or cornering gently.

Important safety notesCrosswind Assist does not work if ESP® isdeactivated or disabled because of a mal-function.

EBD (electronic brake force distribu-tion)

General informationEBD monitors and controls the brake pres-sure on the rear wheels to improve drivingstability while braking.

Important safety notes

i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 66).

G WARNINGIf EBD is malfunctioning, the rear wheels canlock, e.g. under full braking. This increases therisk of skidding and an accident.You should therefore adapt your driving styleto the different handling characteristics. Have

Driving safety systems 73

Safety

Z

the brake system checked at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Observe information regarding indicator andwarning lamps (Y page 286) as well as dis-play messages (Y page 254).

ADAPTIVE BRAKEADAPTIVE BRAKE enhances braking safetyand offers increased braking comfort. In addi-tion to the braking function, ADAPTIVEBRAKEalso has the HOLD function (Y page 196) andhill start assist (Y page 160).

PRE-SAFE® Brake

General information

i Pay attention to the important safetynotes in the "Driving safety systems" sec-tion (Y page 66).

PRE‑SAFE® Brake is only available for vehi-cles with the Driving Assistance package.For PRE-SAFE® Brake to assist you when driv-ing, the radar sensor system and the camerasystem must be switched on and be opera-tional.With the help of the radar sensor system andthe camera system, PRE-SAFE® Brake candetect obstacles that are in front of your vehi-cle for an extended period of time.In addition, pedestrians in the path of yourvehicle can be detected.PRE-SAFE® Brake detects pedestrians usingtypical characteristics such as the body con-tours and posture of a person standingupright.Observe the restrictions described in the"Important safety notes" sec-tion“ (Y page 74).PRE-SAFE® Brake can help you to minimizethe risk of a collision with a vehicle ahead or apedestrian, and reduce the effects of such acollision. If PRE-SAFE® Brake has detected a

risk of collision, you will be warned visuallyand acoustically as well as by automatic brak-ing.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGPRE-SAFE® Brake will initially brake your vehi-cle by a partial application of the brakes if adanger of collision is detected. There may bea collision unless you brake yourself. Evenafter subsequent full application of the brakesa collision cannot always be avoided, partic-ularly when approaching at too high a speed.There is a risk of an accident.Always apply the brakes yourself and try totake evasive action, provided it is safe to doso.

G WARNINGPRE-SAFE® Brake cannot always clearly iden-tify objects and complex traffic conditions.In these cases, PRE-SAFE® Brake may:Rgive an unnecessary warning and thenbrake the vehicleRnot give a warning or interveneThere is a risk of an accident.Always pay particular attention to the trafficsituation and be ready to brake, especially ifPRE-SAFE® Brake warns you. Terminate theintervention in a non-critical driving situation.

In order to maintain the appropriate distanceto the vehicle in front and thus prevent a col-lision, you must apply the brakes yourself.PRE-SAFE® Brake can also brake the vehicleautomatically under the following conditions:Rthe driver and front-passenger have theirseat belts fastenedandRthe vehicle speed is between approx-imately 4 mph (7 km/h) and 124 mph(200 km/h)

74 Driving safety systemsSafety

At a speed of up to approximately 44 mph(70 km/h), PRE-SAFE®Brake can also detect:Rstationary objects in the path of your vehi-cle, e.g. stopped or parked vehiclesRpedestrians in the path of your vehicle

G WARNINGPRE-SAFE® Brake does not react:Rto small people, e.g. childrenRto animalsRto oncoming vehiclesRto crossing trafficRwhen corneringAs a result, PRE-SAFE® Brake may neithergive warnings nor intervene in all critical sit-uations. There is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake.

In the event of snowfall or heavy rain, the rec-ognition can be impaired.Recognition by the radar sensor system isalso impaired in the event of:Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything elsecovering the sensorsRthere is interference by other radar sourcesRthere are strong radar reflections, forexample in parking garagesRa narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. amotorbikeRa vehicle traveling in front on a different linerelative to the center of your vehicle

Recognition by the camera system is alsoimpaired in the event of:Rdirt on the camera or if the camera is cov-eredRthere is glare on the camera system, e.g.from the sun being low in the sky

RdarknessRif:

- pedestrians move quickly, e.g. into thepath of the vehicle

- the camera system no longer recognizesa pedestrian as a person due to specialclothing or other objects

- a pedestrian is concealed by otherobjects

- the typical outline of a person is not dis-tinguishable from the background

Following damage to the front end of the vehi-cle, have the configuration and operation ofthe radar sensors checked at a qualified spe-cialist workshop. This also applies to colli-sions at low speeds where there is no visibledamage to the front of the vehicle.Following damage to the windshield, have theconfiguration and operation of the camerasystemchecked at a qualified specialist work-shop.

FunctionX To activate/deactivate: activate or deac-tivate PRE-SAFE® Brake in the on-boardcomputer (Y page 245).If the PRE-SAFE®Brake is not activated, theæ symbol appears in the multifunctiondisplay.

Starting at a speed of around 4mph (7 km/h),this function warns you if you rapidlyapproach a vehicle in front. An intermittentwarning tone will then sound and the·distance warning lamp will light up in theinstrument cluster.X Brake immediately to defuse the situation.orX Take evasive action provided it is safe to doso.

If there is an increased risk of collision, pre-ventive passenger protectionmeasures (PRE-SAFE®) are activated.If the risk of collision with the vehicle in frontremains and you do not brake, take evasive

Driving safety systems 75

Safety

Z

action or accelerate significantly, the vehiclemay perform automatic emergency braking,up to the point of full brake application. Auto-matic emergency braking is not performeduntil immediately prior to an imminent acci-dent.You can prevent the intervention of the PRE-SAFE® Brake at any time by:Rdepressing the accelerator pedal further.Ractivating kickdown.Rreleasing the brake pedal.The braking action of PRE-SAFE® Brake isended automatically if:Ryou maneuver to avoid the obstacle.Rthere is no longer a risk of collision.Rthere is no longer an obstacle detected infront of your vehicle.

STEER CONTROL

General informationSTEER CONTROL helps you by transmitting anoticeable steering force to the steeringwheel in the direction required for vehiclestabilization.This steering assistance is provided in partic-ular if:Rboth right wheels or both left wheels are ona wet or slippery road surface when youbrake.Rthe vehicle starts to skid.

Important safety notes

i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 66).

No steering support is provided from STEERCONTROL, if:RESP® is malfunctioning.Rthe lighting is faulty.If ESP® is malfunctioning, you will be assistedfurther by the electrical power steering.

Protection against theft

ImmobilizerThe immobilizer prevents your vehicle frombeing started without the correct SmartKey.X To activate with the SmartKey: removethe SmartKey from the ignition lock.

X To activate with KEYLESS-GO start-function or KEYLESS-GO: switch the igni-tion off and open the driver's door.

X To deactivate: switch on the ignition.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Any-one can start the engine if a valid SmartKeyhas been left inside the vehicle.

i The immobilizer is always deactivatedwhen you start the engine.In the event that the engine cannot be star-ted (yet the vehicle's battery is charged),the system is not operational. Contact anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).

ATA (anti-theft alarm system)

76 Protection against theftSafety

X To arm: lock the vehicle with the SmartKeyor KEYLESS-GO.Indicator lamp: flashes. The alarm sys-tem is armed after approximately15 seconds.

X To disarm: unlock the vehicle with theSmartKey or KEYLESS-GO.

orX Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.

A visual and audible alarm is triggered if thealarm system is armed and you open:Ra doorRthe vehicle with the mechanical keyRthe trunk lidRthe hoodX To turn the alarmoffwith the SmartKey:press the% or& button on theSmartKey.The alarm is switched off.

orX Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-func-tion or KEYLESS-GO: remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock(Y page 157).

X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.The alarm is switched off.

X To stop the alarm using KEYLESS-GO:grasp the outside door handle. The Smart-Key must be outside the vehicle.The alarm is switched off.

orX Press the Start/Stop button on the dash-board. The SmartKey must be inside thevehicle.The alarm is switched off.

The alarm is not switched off, even if youclose the open door that triggered it, forexample.

i If the alarm stays on for more than30 seconds, the mbrace emergency callsystem automatically sends a message tothe Customer Assistance Center. This isdone either by text message or data con-nection. The emergency call system sendsthe message or data provided that:Ryou have subscribed to the mbrace ser-vice.Rthe mbrace service has been activatedproperly.Rthe necessary mobile phone network isavailable.

Protection against theft 77

Safety

Z

78

Useful information .............................. 80SmartKey ............................................. 80Doors .................................................... 87Trunk .................................................... 90Side windows ...................................... 97Sliding sunroof .................................. 101

79

Openingandclosing

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optional equip-ment of your vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's Manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions.

i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops (Y page 26).

SmartKey

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,they could:Ropen the doors, thus endangering otherpeople or road users.Rget out and disrupt traffic.Roperate the vehicle's equipment.Additionally, children could set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshifting the automatic transmission out ofpark position PRStart the engine.There is a risk of an accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children or animals unattended in thevehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out ofreach of children.

G WARNINGIf you attach heavy or large objects to theSmartKey, the SmartKey could be uninten-tionally turned in the ignition lock. This couldcause the engine to be switched off. There is arisk of an accident.

Do not attach any heavy or large objects to theSmartKey. Remove any bulky key rings beforeinserting the SmartKey into the ignition lock.

! Keep the SmartKey away from strongmagnetic fields. Otherwise, the remotecontrol function could be affected.Strong magnetic fields can occur in thevicinity of powerful electrical installations.

Do not keep the SmartKey:Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobilephone or another SmartKeyRwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metalfoilRinside metallic objects, e.g. a metal caseThis can affect the functionality of theSmartKey.

Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start function:do not keep the SmartKey on the parcel shelfor in the trunk. Otherwise, the SmartKey maynot be detected, e.g. when starting the engineusing the Start/Stop button.A checkwhich periodically establishes a radioconnection between the vehicle and theSmartKey determines whether a valid Smart-Key is in the vehicle. This occurs, for example:Rwhen starting the engineRwhilst drivingRwhen the external door handles aretouchedRduring convenience closing

80 SmartKeyOp

eningandclosing

SmartKey functions

: & Locks the vehicle; F Opens/closes the trunk lid= % Unlocks the vehicleX To unlock centrally: press button=.If you do not open the vehicle withinapproximately 40 seconds of unlocking:Rthe vehicle is locked again.Rprotection against theft is reactivated.

X To lock centrally: press button:.The SmartKey centrally locks/unlocks:Rthe doorsRthe trunk lidRthe fuel filler flapThe turn signals flash once when unlockingand three times when locking.You can also set an audible signal to confirmthat the vehicle has been locked. The audiblesignal can be activated and deactivated viaCOMAND or Audio 20 (see the separate oper-ating instructions).When the locator lighting is activated viaCOMAND or Audio 20, it lights up when it isdark after the vehicle is unlocked with theremote control (see the separate operatinginstructions).X To open the trunk lid automaticallyfrom outside the vehicle: press and holdbutton; until the trunk lid opens.

X To open the trunk lid automaticallyfrom outside the vehicle: if the SmartKey

is in close proximity to the vehicle: presstheF button on the SmartKey.You can release the button as soon as thetrunk lid starts to close.

KEYLESS-GO

General notesBear inmind that the engine can be started byany of the vehicle occupants if there is aSmartKey in the vehicle.

Locking/unlocking centrallyYou can start, lock or unlock the vehicle usingKEYLESS-GO. To do this, you only need carrythe SmartKey with you. You can combine thefunctions of KEYLESS-GOwith those of a con-ventional SmartKey. Unlock the vehicle byusing KEYLESS-GO, for instance, and lock itusing the& button on the SmartKey.The driver's door and the door at which thehandle is used, must both be closed. TheSmartKey must be outside the vehicle. Whenlocking or unlocking with KEYLESS-GO, thedistance between the SmartKey and the cor-responding door handle must not be greaterthan 3 ft (1 m).A checkwhich periodically establishes a radioconnection between the vehicle and theSmartKey determines whether a valid Smart-Key is in the vehicle. This occurs, for example:Rwhen starting the engineRwhilst drivingRwhen the external door handles aretouchedRduring convenience closing

SmartKey 81

Openingandclosing

Z

X To unlock the vehicle: touch the innersurface of the door handle.

X To lock the vehicle: touch sensor sur-face: or;.Make sure that you do not touch the innersurface of the door handle.

X Convenience closing feature: touchrecessed sensor surface; for an exten-ded period.Further information on the convenienceclosing feature (Y page 99).

X To unlock the trunk lid: pull the handle onthe trunk lid.

DeactivatingIf you do not intend to use the vehicle for alonger period of time, you can deactivate KEY-LESS-GO. The SmartKey will then use very lit-tle power, thereby conserving battery power.For the purposes of activation/deactivation,the vehicle must not be nearby.X To deactivate: press the& button onthe SmartKey twice in rapid succession.The battery check lamp of the SmartKeylights up twice briefly and KEYLESS-GO isdeactivated.

X To activate: press any button on theSmartKey or insert the SmartKey into theignition lock.KEYLESS-GO and all of its associated fea-tures are available again.

KEYLESS-GO start functionBear inmind that the engine can be started byany of the vehicle occupants if there is aSmartKey in the vehicle.

Changing the settings of the lockingsystemYou can change the settings of the lockingsystem. Thismeans that only the driver's doorand the fuel filler flap are unlocked when thevehicle is unlocked. This is useful if you fre-quently travel on your own.X To change the setting: press and holddown the% and& buttons simulta-neously for approximately six seconds untilthe battery check lamp flashes twice(Y page 84).

If the setting of the locking system is changedwithin the signal range of the vehicle, press-ing the& or% button:Rlocks orRunlocks the vehicleThe SmartKey now functions as follows:X To unlock the driver's door: press the% button once.

X To unlock centrally: press the% but-ton twice.

X To lock centrally: press the& button.

The KEYLESS-GO function is changed as fol-lows:X To unlock the driver's door: touch theinner surface of the door handle on thedriver's door.

X To unlock centrally: touch the inner sur-face of the door handle on the front-passenger door or the rear door.

X To lock centrally: touch the outer sensorsurface on one of the door handles.

X To restore the factory settings: pressand hold down the% and& buttonssimultaneously for approximately six sec-

82 SmartKeyOp

eningandclosing

onds until the battery check lamp flashestwice (Y page 84).

Mechanical key

General notesIf the vehicle can no longer be locked orunlocked with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO,use the mechanical key.If you use the mechanical key to unlock andopen the driver's door, the anti-theft alarmsystem will be triggered. Switch off the alarm(Y page 76).If you unlock the vehicle using themechanicalkey, the fuel filler flap will not be unlockedautomatically.X To unlock the fuel filler flap: insert theSmartKey into the ignition lock.

Removing the mechanical key

X Push release catch: in the direction ofthe arrow and at the same time removemechanical key; from the SmartKey.

For further information about:Runlocking the driver's door (Y page 88)Runlocking the trunk (Y page 96)Rlocking the vehicle (Y page 89)

Inserting the mechanical keyX Push mechanical key; completely intothe SmartKey until it engages and releasecatch: is back in its basic position.

SmartKey battery

Important safety notes

G WARNINGBatteries contain toxic and corrosive substan-ces. If batteries are swallowed, it can result insevere health problems. There is a risk of fatalinjury.Keep batteries out of the reach of children. Ifa battery is swallowed, seekmedical attentionimmediately.

H Environmental noteBatteries contain dangeroussubstances. It is against thelaw to dispose of them withthe household rubbish. Theymust be collected separatelyand recycled to protect theenvironment.Dispose of batteries in anenvironmentally friendlymanner. Take dischargedbatteries to a qualified spe-cialist workshop or a specialcollection point for used bat-teries.

The SmartKey batteries contain perchloratematerial, which may require special handlingand regard for the environment. Nationalguidelines must be observed during disposal.In California, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm.Mercedes-Benz recommends that you havethe batteries replaced at a qualified specialistworkshop.

SmartKey 83

Openingandclosing

Z

Checking the battery

X Press the& or% button.The battery is working properly if batterycheck lamp: lights up briefly.The battery is discharged if battery checklamp: does not light up briefly.

X Change the battery (Y page 84).If the key battery is checked within the signalreception range of the vehicle, pressing the& or% button:Rlocks orRunlocks the vehicle

i You can obtain a battery from any quali-fied specialist workshop.

Replacing the batteryYou require a CR 2025 3 V cell battery.X Take the mechanical key out of the Smart-Key (Y page 83).

X Press mechanical key; into the openingin the SmartKey in the direction of thearrow until battery compartment cover:

opens. Do not hold battery compartmentcover: closed while doing so.

X Remove battery compartment cover:.

X Repeatedly tap the SmartKey against yourpalm until battery= falls out.

X Insert the new battery with the positive ter-minal facing upwards. Use a lint-free clothto do so.

X Make sure that the surface of the battery isfree of lint, grease and other contaminants.

X Insert the front tabs of battery compart-ment cover: into the housing first andthen press to close it.

X Insert mechanical key; into the Smart-Key.

X Check the function of all SmartKey buttonson the vehicle.

84 SmartKeyOp

eningandclosing

Problems with the SmartKey

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

You can no longer lockor unlock the vehicleusing the SmartKey.

The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 84) and replace it if nec-essary (Y page 84).

If this does not work:X Unlock (Y page 88) or lock (Y page 89) the vehicle using themechanical key.

There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.X Unlock (Y page 88) or lock (Y page 89) the vehicle using themechanical key.

The SmartKey is faulty.X Unlock (Y page 88) or lock (Y page 89) the vehicle using themechanical key.

X Have the SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

You can no longer lockor unlock the vehicleusing KEYLESS-GO.

KEYLESS-GO was deactivated.X Reactivate KEYLESS-GO (Y page 81).

The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 84) and replace it if nec-essary (Y page 84).

If this does not work:X Unlock (Y page 88) or lock (Y page 89) the vehicle using themechanical key.

There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.X Unlock (Y page 88) or lock (Y page 89) the vehicle using themechanical key.

KEYLESS-GO is malfunctioning.X Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function ofthe SmartKey.

X Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a qualified specialistworkshop.

If the vehicle can also not be locked/unlocked using the remotecontrol function:X Unlock (Y page 88) or lock (Y page 89) the vehicle using themechanical key.

X Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a qualified specialistworkshop.

SmartKey 85

Openingandclosing

Z

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The engine cannot bestarted using theSmartKey.

The on-board voltage is too low.X Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating or interiorlighting, and try to start the engine again.

If this does not work:X Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary(Y page 347).

orX Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 349).orX Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine cannot bestarted using theStart/Stop button. TheSmartKey is in the vehi-cle.

The vehicle is locked.X Unlock the vehicle and try to start the vehicle again.

The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 84) and replace it if nec-essary (Y page 84).

If this does not work:X Start your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.

There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.X Start your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.

You have lost a Smart-Key.

X Have the SmartKey deactivated at a qualified specialist work-shop.

X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.

You have lost themechanical key.

X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.

86 SmartKeyOp

eningandclosing

Doors

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,they could:Ropen the doors, thus endangering otherpeople or road users.Rget out and disrupt traffic.Roperate the vehicle's equipment.Additionally, children could set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshifting the automatic transmission out ofpark position PRStart the engine.There is a risk of an accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children or animals unattended in thevehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out ofreach of children.

You should preferably place luggage or loadsin the trunk. Observe the loading guidelines(Y page 298).

Unlocking and opening doors fromthe insideYou can open a door from inside the vehicleeven if it has been locked. You can only openthe rear doors from inside the vehicle if theyare not secured by the child-proof locks(Y page 65). If the vehicle has been lockedwith the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO,opening a door from the inside will trigger theanti-theft alarm system. Switch off the alarm(Y page 76).

X To unlock and open a front door: pulldoor handle;.If the door is locked, locking knob: popsup. The door is unlocked and opens.

X To unlock a rear door: pull door han-dle;.Locking knob: pops up and the doorunlocks.

X To open a rear door: pull door handle;again.The door opens.

Centrally locking and unlocking thevehicle from the insideYou can centrally lock and unlock the vehiclefrom the inside. The switches are on thedriver’s door.

X To unlock: press button:.X To lock: press button;.If the front-passenger door is closed, thevehicle locks.

Doors 87

Openingandclosing

Z

Meanwhile, the fuel filler flap will not belocked or unlocked.You cannot unlock the vehicle centrally fromthe inside if the vehicle has been locked withthe SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO.The doors can be opened from the inside. Youcan only open the rear doors from inside thevehicle if they are not secured by the child-proof locks (Y page 65).If the vehicle has been locked with the Smart-Key orwith KEYLESS-GO, opening a door fromthe inside will trigger the anti-theft alarm sys-tem. Switch off the alarm (Y page 76).If a locked door is opened from the inside, theprevious unlock status of the vehicle will betaken into consideration if:Rthe vehicle was locked using the lockingbutton for the central locking, orRif the vehicle was locked automaticallyThe vehicle will be fully unlocked if it had pre-viously been fully unlocked. If only the driver'sdoor had been previously unlocked, only thedoor which has been opened from the insideis unlocked.

Automatic locking feature

X To deactivate: press and hold button:for approximately five seconds until a tonesounds.

X To activate: press and hold button; forapproximately five seconds until a tonesounds.

If you press one of the two buttons and do nothear a tone, the relevant setting has alreadybeen selected.The vehicle is locked automatically when theignition is switched on and the wheels areturning.You could therefore be locked out if:Rthe vehicle is being pushed.Rthe vehicle is being towed.Rthe vehicle is on a roller dynamometer.

i You can also activate and deactivate theautomatic locking function via COMAND orAudio 20 (see the separate operatinginstructions).

Unlocking the driver's door (mechan-ical key)If the vehicle can no longer be locked orunlocked with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO,use the mechanical key.X Take the mechanical key out of the Smart-Key (Y page 83).

Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO:X Insert the tip of themechanical key into theslit on the cover of the driver's door lockand turn it until the cover is released.

X Insert the mechanical key into the lock ofthe driver's door as far as it will go.

X Turn themechanical key counter-clockwiseas far as it will go to position1.The locking knob pops up and the doorunlocks.

88 DoorsOp

eningandclosing

X Turn the mechanical key back and removeit.

X Insert the mechanical key into the Smart-Key.

X Hold the cover over the lock of the driver'sdoor with the thicker end towards the frontof the vehicle and press to secure. Thenmake sure that the slit of the cover is hor-izontal.

Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO:

X Insert the mechanical key into opening:in the protective cap.

X Pull and hold the door handle.X Pull the protective cap on the mechanicalkey as straight as possible away from thevehicle until it releases.

X Release the door handle.

X Insert the mechanical key into the lock ofthe driver's door as far as it will go.

X Turn themechanical key counter-clockwiseas far as it will go to position1.The locking knob pops up and the doorunlocks.

X Turn the mechanical key back and removeit.

X Insert the mechanical key into the Smart-Key (Y page 83).

X Carefully press the protective cap onto thelock cylinder until it engages and is seatedfirmly. Do not pull the door handle whendoing so.

All vehicles:If you use the mechanical key to unlock andopen the driver's door, the anti-theft alarmsystem will be triggered. Switch off the alarm(Y page 76).

Locking the vehicle (mechanical key)If the vehicle can no longer be locked with theSmartKey or KEYLESS-GO, use the mechani-cal key.X Open the driver's door.X Close the front-passenger door, the reardoors and the trunk lid.

X Press the locking button (Y page 87).X Check whether the locking knobs on thefront-passenger door and the rear doorsare still visible. Press down the lockingknobs by hand, if necessary.

X Close the driver's door.X Take the mechanical key out of the Smart-Key (Y page 83).

Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO:X Insert the tip of themechanical key into theslit on the cover of the driver's door lockand turn it until the cover is released.

Doors 89

Openingandclosing

Z

X Insert the mechanical key into the lock ofthe driver's door as far as it will go.

X Turn themechanical key clockwise as far asit will go to position1.The locking knob drops down and the driv-er's door is locked.

X Turn the mechanical key back and removeit.

X Insert the mechanical key into the Smart-Key.

X Make sure that the doors and the trunk lidare locked.

X Hold the cover over the lock of the driver'sdoor with the thicker end towards the frontof the vehicle and press to secure. Thenmake sure that the slit of the cover is hor-izontal.

Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO:

X Insert the mechanical key into opening:in the protective cap.

X Pull and hold the door handle.

X Pull the protective cap on the mechanicalkey as straight as possible away from thevehicle until it releases.

X Release the door handle.

X Insert the mechanical key into the lock ofthe driver's door as far as it will go.

X Turn themechanical key clockwise as far asit will go to position1.The locking knob drops down and the driv-er's door is locked.

X Turn the mechanical key back and removeit.

X Insert the mechanical key into the Smart-Key (Y page 83).

X Make sure that the doors and the trunk lidare locked.

X Carefully press the protective cap onto thelock cylinder until it engages and is seatedfirmly. Do not pull the door handle whendoing so.

All vehicles:If you lock the vehicle as described above, thefuel filler flap is not locked. The anti-theftalarm system is not armed.

Trunk

Important safety notes

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaustgases can enter the vehicle interior if thetrunk lid is open when the engine is running,

90 TrunkOp

eningandclosing

especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is arisk of poisoning.Always switch off the engine before openingthe trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lidopen.

G WARNINGIf objects, luggage or loads are not secured ornot secured sufficiently, they could slip, tipover or be flung around and thereby hit vehicleoccupants. There is a risk of injury, particu-larly in the event of sudden braking or a sud-den change in direction.Always store objects so that they cannot beflung around. Secure objects, luggage orloads against slipping or tipping before thejourney.

! The trunk lid swings upwards whenopened. Therefore, make sure that there issufficient clearance above the trunk lid.

The opening dimensions of the trunk lid canbe found in the "Vehicle data" section(Y page 403).

i You can limit the opening angle of thetrunk lid in COMAND or Audio 20 (see theseparate operating instructions).

Do not leave the SmartKey in the trunk. Youcould otherwise lock yourself out.You should preferably place luggage or loadsin the trunk. Observe the loading guidelines(Y page 298).

Obstacle recognition with trunk lidreversing featureVehicles with trunk lid remote closingfeature: the trunk lid is equipped with auto-matic obstacle detection with reversing fea-ture. If a solid object blocks or restricts thetrunk lid when automatically opening, thisprocedure is stopped. If a solid object blocksor restricts the trunk lid when automaticallyclosing, the trunk lid opens again automati-cally. The automatic obstacle recognition

with reversing feature is only an aid. It is not asubstitute for your attentiveness when open-ing and closing the trunk lid.

G WARNINGThe reversing feature does not react:Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin-gersRover the last 1/3 in(8 mm) of the closingmovement

This means that the reversing feature cannotprevent someone being trapped in these sit-uations. There is a risk of injury.Make sure that no body parts are in closeproximity during the closing procedure.If somebody becomes trapped:Rpress theF button on the SmartKey, orRpress the remote operating switch on thedriver's door, orRpress the closing or locking button on thetrunk lid, orRpull on the trunk lid handle

Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: it isalso possible to stop the closing process byperforming a kicking movement under therear bumper.

Opening and closing manually

Opening

Trunk 91

Openingandclosing

Z

X Press theF button on the SmartKey.orX Pull handle:.The trunk lid opens.

Closing

X Pull the trunk lid down using recess: andpush it closed.

X Lock the vehicle if necessary with the&button on the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO (Y page 81).

Opening/closing automatically fromoutside

Important safety notes

G WARNINGParts of the body could become trapped dur-ing automatic closing of the trunk lid. More-over, people, e.g. children, may be standing inthe closing area or may enter the closing areaduring the closing process. There is a risk ofinjury.Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of theclosing area during the closing process.Use one of the following options to stop theclosing process:RPress theF button on the key.Rpress the remote operating switch on thedriver's door.

RPress the closing or locking button on thetrunk lid.RPull the trunk lid handle.

Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: it isalso possible to stop the closing process byperforming a kicking movement under therear bumper.

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaustgases can enter the vehicle interior if thetrunk lid is open when the engine is running,especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is arisk of poisoning.Always switch off the engine before openingthe trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lidopen.

! The trunk lid swings upwards whenopened. Therefore, make sure that there issufficient clearance above the trunk lid.

The opening dimensions of the trunk lid canbe found in the "Vehicle data" section(Y page 403).

OpeningYou can open the trunk lid automaticallyusing the SmartKey or the handle in the trunklid.X Press and hold theF button on theSmartKey until the trunk lid opens.

orX If the trunk lid is unlocked, pull the trunk lidhandle and let it go again immediately.

92 TrunkOp

eningandclosing

Closing

X Press closing button: on the trunk lid.Vehicles with trunk lid remote closingfeature and KEYLESS-GO:when the driver'sdoor is closed you can simultaneously closethe trunk lid and lock the vehicle. The KEY-LESS-GO key must be in the rear detectionrange of the vehicle.X Press locking button; in the trunk lid.If KEYLESS-GO detects a SmartKey outsidethe vehicle, the trunk lid closes and thevehicle is locked.

If KEYLESS-GO detects a SmartKey in thetrunk, the trunk lid opens again after it isclosed.If KEYLESS-GO detects a second SmartKeyoutside the vehicle, the trunk lid remainsclosed.

Opening automatically from outside

Important safety notes

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaustgases can enter the vehicle interior if thetrunk lid is open when the engine is running,especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is arisk of poisoning.Always switch off the engine before openingthe trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lidopen.

! The trunk lid swings upwards whenopened. Therefore, make sure that there issufficient clearance above the trunk lid.

The opening dimensions of the trunk lid canbe found in the printed Operator's Manual.

HANDS-FREE ACCESS

Important safety notes

G WARNINGThe vehicle's exhaust systemmay be very hot.You could burn yourself by touching theexhaust system if you use HANDS-FREEACCESS. There is a risk of injury. Alwaysensure that you only make the kicking move-ment within the detection range of sensors.

! If the SmartKey is within the rear detec-tion range of KEYLESS-GO, the followingsituations, for example, could lead to theunintentional opening of the trunk:Rusing a car washRusing a power washerMake sure that the SmartKey is at least10 ft (3 m) away from the vehicle.

General notesWith KEYLESS-GO and HANDS-FREEACCESS, you can open or close the trunk lidor stop the procedure without using yourhands. This is useful if you have your handsfull. To do this, make a kicking movementunder the bumper with your foot.Observe the following points:RCarry your KEYLESS-GO key about yourperson. The KEYLESS-GO key must be inthe rear detection range of the vehicle.RWhenmaking the kicking movement, makesure that you are standing firmly on theground and that there is sufficient clear-ance to the rear of the vehicle. You couldotherwise lose your balance e.g. on ice.

Trunk 93

Openingandclosing

Z

RAlways ensure that you only make the kick-ingmovementwithin the detection range ofsensors:.RStand at least 12 in (30 cm) away from therear area while doing so.RDo not come into contact with the bumperwhile making the kicking movement. Oth-erwise, the sensors may not function cor-rectly.RHANDS-FREE ACCESS does not functionwhen the engine is started.RIf a KEYLESS-GO key is within the reardetection range of KEYLESS-GO, HANDS-FREEACCESS could be triggered. The trunklid could thus be opened or closed unin-tentionally, for example, if you:- set something down or lift something upbehind the vehicle.

- polish the rear of the vehicle.Do not carry the KEYLESS-GO key aboutyour person in these situations or in situa-tions similar to these. This will prevent theunintentional opening/closing of the trunk.RDirt caused by road salt around sensors:may restrict functionality.RUsing the HANDS-FREE ACCESS with aprosthetic leg may restrict functionality.

Operation

X To open/close: kick into sensor detectionrange: under the bumper with your foot.You will hear a warning tone while the trunklid is opening or closing.

X If the trunk lid does not open after sev-eral attempts: wait at least ten secondsthen move your leg under the bumper onceagain.

If you hold your foot under the bumper for toolong, the trunk lid does not open or close.Repeat the leg movement more quickly if thisoccurs.To stop the opening or closing procedure:Rmove your foot in sensor detectionrange: under the bumper, orRpull the handle on the outside of the trunklid orRpress the closing button in the trunk lid orRpress theF button on the SmartKeyIf the trunk lid closing procedure has beenstopped:Rmove your foot under the bumper again andthe trunk lid will open.

If the trunk lid opening procedure has beenstopped:Rmove your foot under the bumper again andthe trunk lid will close.

94 TrunkOp

eningandclosing

Opening/closing automatically frominside

Important safety notes

G WARNINGParts of the body could become trapped dur-ing automatic closing of the trunk lid. More-over, people, e.g. children, may be standing inthe closing area or may enter the closing areaduring the closing process. There is a risk ofinjury.Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of theclosing area during the closing process.Use one of the following options to stop theclosing process:RPress theF button on the key.Rpress the remote operating switch on thedriver's door.RPress the closing or locking button on thetrunk lid.RPull the trunk lid handle.

Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: it isalso possible to stop the closing process byperforming a kicking movement under therear bumper.

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaustgases can enter the vehicle interior if thetrunk lid is open when the engine is running,especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is arisk of poisoning.Always switch off the engine before openingthe trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lidopen.

! The trunk lid swings upwards whenopened. Therefore, make sure that there issufficient clearance above the trunk lid.

The opening dimensions of the trunk lid canbe found in the "Vehicle data" section(Y page 403).

Opening and closing

You can open and close the trunk lid from thedriver's seat when the vehicle is stationaryand unlocked.X To open: pull remote operating switch fortrunk lid: until the trunk lid opens.

X To close: press remote operating switchfor trunk lid: until the trunk lid is com-pletely closed.

Opening automatically from inside

Important safety notes

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaustgases can enter the vehicle interior if thetrunk lid is open when the engine is running,especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is arisk of poisoning.Always switch off the engine before openingthe trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lidopen.

! The trunk lid swings upwards whenopened. Therefore, make sure that there issufficient clearance above the trunk lid.

The opening dimensions of the trunk lid canbe found in the printed Operator's Manual.

Trunk 95

Openingandclosing

Z

Opening

You can open the trunk lid from the driver'sseat when the vehicle is stationary andunlocked.X Pull remote operating switch for trunklid: until the trunk lid opens.

Locking the trunk separatelyYou can lock the trunk separately. If you thenunlock the vehicle centrally, the trunkremains locked and cannot be opened.

Activating the function to lock the trunk sep-arately:X Close the trunk lid.X Open the glove box.X Push the switch to position:.If the vehicle is unlocked centrally, thetrunk remains locked.i You can also lock the glove box(Y page 299).

Deactivating the function to lock the trunkseparately:X Open the glove box.X Push the switch to position;.If the vehicle is unlocked centrally, thetrunk will also be unlocked.

Unlocking the trunk (mechanical key)! The trunk lid swings upwards whenopened. Therefore, make sure that there issufficient clearance above the trunk lid.

If the trunk cannot be unlocked with theSmartKey, KEYLESS-GO or HANDS-FREEACCESS, use the mechanical key.If you use the mechanical key to unlock andopen the trunk lid, the anti-theft alarm systemwill be triggered. Switch off the alarm(Y page 76).X Take the mechanical key out of the Smart-Key (Y page 83).

X Insert the mechanical key into the trunk lidlock as far as it will go.

X Turn themechanical key counter-clockwiseas far as it will go from position1 to posi-tion2.The trunk is unlocked.

X Turn the mechanical key back to position1 and remove it.

X Insert the mechanical key into the Smart-Key (Y page 83).

When you lock the vehicle (Y page 89), thetrunk is also locked.

96 TrunkOp

eningandclosing

Trunk emergency releaseYou can unlock the trunk lid from the insidewith the emergency release button.

X Press emergency release button: briefly.The trunk lid unlocks and opens.

The trunk lid can be unlocked with the trunklid emergency release when the vehicle isstationary or while driving.The trunk lid emergency release does notunlock the trunk lid if the battery is discon-nected or discharged.Trunk lid emergency release light:Remergency release button: flashes for30 minutes after the trunk lid is openedRemergency release button: flashes for60 minutes after the trunk lid is closed

Side windows

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhile opening the side windows, body partscould become trapped between the side win-dow and the door frame as the side windowmoves. There is a risk of injury.Make sure that nobody touches the side win-dow during the opening procedure. If some-body becomes trapped, release the switch orpull the switch to close the sidewindow again.

G WARNINGWhile closing the side windows, body parts inthe closing area could become trapped. Thereis a risk of injury.When closing make sure that no parts of thebody are in the closing area. If somebodybecomes trapped, release the switch or pressthe switch to open the side window again.

G WARNINGIf children operate the side windows theycould become trapped, particularly if they areleft unsupervised. There is a risk of injury.Activate the override feature for the rear sidewindows. When leaving the vehicle, alwaystake the SmartKey with you and lock the vehi-cle. Never leave children unsupervised in thevehicle.

Side window reversing featureThe side windows are equipped with an auto-matic reversing feature. If a solid objectblocks or restricts a side window from trav-eling upwards during automatic operation,the side window opens again automatically.During the manual closing process, the sidewindow only opens again automatically afterthe corresponding switch is released. Theautomatic reversing feature is only an aid andis no substitute for your attention when clos-ing a side window.

G WARNINGThe reversing feature does not react:Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin-gersRwhile resettingThis means that the reversing feature cannotprevent someone being trapped in these sit-uations. There is a risk of injury.Make sure that no body parts are in closeproximity during the closing procedure. Ifsomeone becomes trapped, press the switchto open the side window again.

Side windows 97

Openingandclosing

Z

Opening and closing the side win-dowsThe switches for all side windows are locatedon the driver's door. There is also a switch oneach door for the corresponding sidewindow.The switches on the driver's door take prec-edence.

: Front left; Front right= Rear right? Rear leftX Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock (Y page 157).

X To openmanually: press and hold the cor-responding switch.

X To open fully: press the switch beyond thepoint of resistance and release it.Automatic operation is started.

X To closemanually: pull the correspondingswitch and hold it.

X To close fully: pull the switch beyond thepoint of resistance and release it.Automatic operation is started.

X To interrupt automatic operation:press/pull the corresponding switch again.

If you press the switch beyond the point ofresistance and release, automatic operationis started in the corresponding direction. Youcan stop automatic operation by pressing/pulling the switch again.You can continue to operate the sidewindowsafter you switch off the engine or remove the

SmartKey. This function remains active forfive minutes or until you open a front door.When the override feature for the side win-dows is activated (Y page 65), the side win-dows cannot be operated from the rear.

i Information on opening and closing theroller sunblinds on the rear side windows(Y page 308).

Convenience opening

General notesVehicles with KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS-GOstart function: you can ventilate the vehi-cle before you start driving.If the SmartKey is in close proximity to thevehicle, the convenience opening function isavailable.To do this, the SmartKey is used to carry outthe following functions simultaneously:Runlock the vehicleRopen the side windowsRopen the sliding sunroof or the panoramaroof with power tilt/sliding panel and theroller sunblindRswitch on the seat ventilation for the driv-er's seat

Convenience openingX Press and hold the% button until theside windows and the sliding sunroof or thepanorama roof with power tilt/slidingpanel are in the desired position.If the roller sunblinds of the panorama roofwith power tilt/sliding panel are closed, theroller sunblinds are opened first.

X Press and hold the% button again untilthe panorama roof with power tilt/slidingpanel is in the desired position.

X To interrupt convenience opening:release the% button.

98 Side windowsOp

eningandclosing

Convenience closing feature

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen the convenience closing feature is oper-ating, parts of the body could become trappedin the closing area of the side window and thesliding sunroof. There is a risk of injury.Observe the complete closing procedurewhen the convenience closing feature is oper-ating. Make sure that no body parts are inclose proximity during the closing procedure.

Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS-GO start function: if the SmartKey is in closeproximity to the vehicle, the convenienceclosing function is available.When you lock the vehicle, you can simulta-neously:Rclose the side windowsRclose the sliding sunroof or the panoramaroof with power tilt/sliding panel

On vehicles with a panorama roof with powertilt/sliding panel, you can then close theroller sunblinds.Notes on the automatic reversing feature for:Rthe side window (Y page 97)Rthe sliding sunroof or the panorama roofwith power tilt/sliding panel(Y page 102)

Using the SmartKeyX Press and hold the& button until theside windows and the sliding sunroof or thepanorama roof with power tilt/slidingpanel are fully closed.

X Make sure that all the sidewindows and thesliding sunroof or panorama roof withpower tilt/sliding panel are closed.

X Vehicles with panorama roof withpower tilt/sliding panel: press and holdthe& button until the roller sunblinds ofthe panorama roof with power tilt/slidingpanel close.

X To interrupt convenience closing:release the& button.

Using KEYLESS-GOThe driver's door and the door at which thehandle is used, must both be closed. TheSmartKey must be outside the vehicle. Thegap between the SmartKey and the corre-sponding door handle should not be greaterthan 3 ft (1 m).

X Touch recessed sensor surface: on thedoor handle until the side windows and thesliding sunroof or the panorama roof withpower tilt/sliding panel are fully closed.Make sure you only touch recessed sensorsurface:.

X Make sure that all the sidewindows and thesliding sunroof or panorama roof withpower tilt/sliding panel are closed.

X Vehicles with panorama roof withpower tilt/sliding panel: touch recessedsensor surface: on the door handle againuntil the roller sunblinds of the panoramaroof with power tilt/sliding panel close.

X To interrupt convenience closing:release recessed sensor surface: on thedoor handle.

Resetting the side windowsIf a side window can no longer be closed fully,you must reset it.

Side windows 99

Openingandclosing

Z

X Close all the doors.X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock (Y page 157).

X Pull the corresponding switch on the doorcontrol panel until the side window is com-pletely closed (Y page 98).

X Hold the switch for an additional second.

If the side window opens again slightly:X Immediately pull the corresponding switchon the door control panel until the side win-dow is completely closed (Y page 98).

X Hold the switch for an additional second.X If the respective side window remainsclosed after the button is released, then ithas been set correctly. If this is not thecase, repeat the steps above again.

100 Side windowsOp

eningandclosing

Problems with the side windows

G WARNINGIf you close a side window again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the side windowcloses with increased or maximum force. The reversing feature is then not active. Parts of thebody could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of injury oreven fatal injury.Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. To stop the closing process, releasethe switch or push the switch again to reopen the side window.

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

A side window cannotbe closed because it isblocked by objects, e.g.leaves in the windowguide.

X Remove the objects.X Close the side window.

A side window cannotbe closed and you can-not see the cause.

If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens againslightly:X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the correspondingswitch again until the side window has closed.The side window is closed with increased force.

If a side window is obstructed again during closing and reopensagain slightly:X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the correspondingswitch again until the side window has closed.The side window is closed without the anti-entrapment feature.

Sliding sunroof

Important safety notesYour vehicle may be equipped with a slidingsunroof or a panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel. In this section, the term "slidingsunroof" refers to both types of sliding sun-roof.

G WARNINGWhile opening and closing the sliding sunroof,body parts in close proximity could becometrapped. There is a risk of injury.Make sure that no body parts are in closeproximity during the opening and closing pro-cedures.

If somebody becomes trapped:Rrelease the switch immediately, orRduring automatic operation, push theswitch briefly in any direction

The opening or closing procedure will be stop-ped.

G WARNINGIf children operate the sliding sunroof theycould become trapped, particularly if they areleft unsupervised. There is a risk of injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

Sliding sunroof 101

Openingandclosing

Z

! Only open the sliding sunroof if it is free ofsnow and ice. Otherwise,malfunctionsmayoccur.Do not allow anything to protrude from thesliding sunroof. Otherwise, the seals couldbe damaged.

! The weather can change abruptly. It couldstart to rain or snow. Make sure that thesliding sunroof is closedwhen you leave thevehicle. The vehicle electronics can bedamaged if water enters the vehicle inte-rior.

Resonance noises can occur in addition to theusual airflow noises when the sliding sunroofis open. They are caused by minor pressurefluctuations in the vehicle interior. Changethe position of the sliding sunroof or open aside window slightly to reduce or eliminatethese noises.Only for vehicleswith panorama roofwithpower tilt/sliding panel:

G WARNINGAt high speeds the raised sliding sunroof auto-matically lowers slightly at the rear. This couldtrap you or other persons. There is a risk ofinjury. Make sure that nobody reaches intothe sweep of the sliding sunroof whilst thevehicle is in motion.If somebody becomes trapped, immediatelypull back the sliding sunroof switch. The slid-ing sunroof lifts during opening.

Sliding sunroof reversing featureYour vehicle may be equipped with a slidingsunroof or a panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel. In this section, the term "slidingsunroof" refers to both types of sliding sun-roof.The sliding sunroof is equipped with an auto-matic reversing feature. If a solid objectblocks or restricts the sliding sunroof duringthe closing process, the sliding sunroof opensagain automatically. The automatic reversing

feature is only an aid and is no substitute foryour attention when closing the sliding roof.

G WARNINGThe reversing feature does not react:Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin-gersRover the last 1/6 in(4 mm) of the closingmovementRduring resettingRwhen closing the sliding sunroof againman-ually immediately after automatic reversing

This means that the reversing feature cannotprevent someone being trapped in these sit-uations. There is a risk of injury.Make sure that no body parts are in closeproximity during the closing procedure.If somebody becomes trapped:Rrelease the switch immediately, orRduring automatic operation, push theswitch briefly in any direction

The closing process is stopped.

Operating the sliding sunroof

Opening and closing

Overhead control panel: To raise; To open= To close/lower

102 Sliding sunroofOp

eningandclosing

X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock (Y page 157).

X Press or pull the3 switch in the corre-sponding direction.

If you press or pull the3 switch beyondthe point of resistance, automatic operationis started in the corresponding direction. Youcan stop automatic operation by pressing orpulling again.When opening and raising the roof, automaticoperation is only available if the sliding sun-roof is in the closed position.The sun protection cover automatically opensalong with the sliding sunroof. You can openor close the sun protection cover manuallywhen the sliding sunroof is raised or closed.You can continue to operate the sliding sun-roof after switching off the engine or remov-ing the SmartKey from the ignition lock. Thisfunction is available for up to five minutes oruntil the driver's or front-passenger door isopened.

Resetting

! If the sliding sunroof still cannot beopened or closed fully after resetting, con-tact a qualified specialist workshop.

Reset the sliding sunroof if it does not movesmoothly.X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock.

X Raise the sliding sunroof fully at the rear(Y page 102).

X Keep the3 switch pressed for anothersecond.

X Make sure that the sliding sunroof can befully opened and closed again(Y page 102).

X If this is not the case, repeat the stepsabove again.

Operating the panorama roof withpower tilt/sliding panel

Opening and closing

Overhead control panel: To raise; To open= To close/lowerThe panorama roof with power tilt/slidingpanel can only be operated when the rollersunblind is open.X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock (Y page 157).

X Press or pull the3 switch in the corre-sponding direction.

If you press or pull the3 switch beyondthe point of resistance, automatic operationis started in the corresponding direction. Youcan stop automatic operation by pressing orpulling again.If the panorama roof with power tilt/slidingpanel is raised at the rear, it automaticallylowers slightly at higher speeds. The noiselevel in the vehicle interior is reduced as aresult. At low speeds it raises again automat-ically.You can continue to operate the panoramaroof with power tilt/sliding panel after youswitch off the engine or remove the Smart-Key. This function remains active for fiveminutes or until you open a front door.When a roof carrier is mounted the panoramaroof with power tilt/sliding panel cannot beopened. The panorama roof with power tilt/

Sliding sunroof 103

Openingandclosing

Z

sliding panel can still be raised to allow ven-tilation of the vehicle interior. If the panoramaroof with power tilt/sliding panel makes con-tact with a roof carrier approved byMercedes-Benz, the sunroofwill lower slightlybut remain raised at the rear.

Rain-closing featureThe raised sliding sunroof automatically low-ers at the rear when driving if it starts to rain.The sliding sunroof is lowered depending on:Rthe road speed andRthe intensity of the rain.You can manually cancel the automatic clos-ing procedure. Press or pull the3 switchin any direction.To raise the sliding sunroof again, press the3 switch in direction:.The "Rain-closing feature when driving" func-tion is deactivated, until you:Rpress or pull the3 switch in any direc-tion orRturn the SmartKey to another position inthe ignition lock (Y page 157).

Operating the roller sunblinds for thepanorama roof with power tilt/slidingpanel

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen opening or closing the roller sunblind,parts of the body could be trapped betweenthe roller sunblind and the frame or slidingsunroof. There is a risk of injury.When opening or closing make sure that noparts of the body are in the sweep of the rollersunblind.If somebody becomes trapped:Rrelease the switch immediately, orRduring automatic operation, push theswitch briefly in any direction

The opening or closing procedure will be stop-ped.

The roller sunblinds shield the vehicle interiorfrom sunlight. The front roller sunblind canonly be opened and closed when the slidingsunroof is closed.

Roller sunblind reversing featureThe roller sunblinds are equipped with anautomatic reversing feature. If a solid objectblocks or restricts a roller sunblind during theclosing process, the roller sunblind opensagain automatically. However, the automaticreversing feature is only an aid and does notrelieve you of the responsibility of payingattention when closing the roller sunblinds.

G WARNINGThe reversing feature especially does notreact to soft, light and thin objects such assmall fingers. This means that the reversingfeature cannot prevent someone being trap-ped in these situations. There is a risk ofinjury.When closing make sure that no parts of thebody are in the sweep of the roller sunblind.If somebody becomes trapped:Rrelease the switch immediately, orRduring automatic operation, push theswitch briefly in any direction

The closing process is stopped.

104 Sliding sunroofOp

eningandclosing

Opening and closing the roller sun-blinds

Overhead control panel: To open; To open= To closeYou can only close the roller sunblinds whenthe panorama roof with power tilt/slidingpanel is closed.X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock (Y page 157).

X Press the3 switch in direction:.Both roller sunblinds open, then the pano-rama roof with power tilt/sliding panel israised.

X Pull the3 switch in direction;.The sunblinds open

X Pull the3 switch in direction=.The roller sunblinds close when the pano-rama roof with power tilt/sliding panel isclosed.

If you press or pull the3 switch beyondthe point of resistance, automatic operationis started in the corresponding direction. Youcan stop automatic operation by pressing orpulling again.

Resetting the panorama roof withpower tilt/sliding panel or the frontroller sunblind

Reset the panorama roof with power tilt/slid-ing panel or the front roller sunblind if thepanorama roof with power tilt/sliding panelor the roller sunblinds does not movesmoothly.X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock (Y page 157).

X Pull the3 switch repeatedly to the pointof resistance in the direction of arrow:until the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is fully closed.

X Keep the3 switch pulled for an addi-tional second.

X Pull the3 switch in the direction ofarrow: repeatedly until the front rollersunblind is closed.

X Keep the3 switch pulled for an addi-tional second.

X Make sure that the panorama roof withpower tilt/sliding panel (Y page 103) andthe front roller sunblind (Y page 105) canbe fully opened again.

X If this is not the case, repeat the stepsabove again.

Sliding sunroof 105

Openingandclosing

Z

Problems with the sliding sunroof

G WARNINGIf you close the sliding sunroof again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the slidingsunroof closes with increased or maximum force. The reversing feature is then not active. Partsof the body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk ofinjury or even fatal injury.Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area.If somebody becomes trapped:Rrelease the switch immediately, orRduring automatic operation, push the switch briefly in any directionThe closing process is stopped.

! If the sliding sunroof still cannot be opened or closed as a result of a malfunction, contacta qualified specialist workshop.

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The sliding sunroof orpanorama roof withpower tilt/sliding panelcannot be closed andyou cannot see thecause.

If the sliding sunroof or panorama roof with power tilt/slidingpanel is obstructed during closing and reopens again slightly:X Immediately after it blocks, pull the3 switch down again tothe point of resistance until the sliding sunroof or panorama roofwith power tilt/sliding panel is closed.The sliding sunroof or panorama roof with power tilt/slidingpanel is closed with more force.

If the sliding sunroof or panorama roof with power tilt/slidingpanel is obstructed again during closing and reopens againslightly:X Immediately after it blocks, pull the3 switch down again tothe point of resistance until the sliding sunroof or panorama roofwith power tilt/sliding panel is closed.The sliding sunroof or panorama roof with power tilt/slidingpanel is closed without the anti-entrapment feature.

106 Sliding sunroofOp

eningandclosing

Useful information ............................ 108Correct driver's seat position .......... 108Seats .................................................. 109Steering wheel .................................. 115Mirrors ............................................... 117Memory function .............................. 120

107

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optional equip-ment of your vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's Manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions.

i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops (Y page 26).

Correct driver's seat position

G WARNINGYou could lose control of your vehicle if you dothe following while driving:Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,steering wheel or mirrorsRfasten the seat beltThere is a risk of an accident.Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-ing wheel andmirror and fasten your seat beltbefore starting the engine.

X Observe the safety guidelines on seatadjustment (Y page 109).

X Make sure that seat= is adjusted prop-erly.Electrical seat adjustment (Y page 110)

When adjusting the seat, make sure that:Ryou are as far away from the driver's air bagas possibleRyou are sitting in a normal upright positionRyou can fasten the seat belt properlyRyou have moved the backrest to an almostvertical positionRyou have set the seat cushion angle so thatyour thighs are gently supportedRyou can depress the pedals properly.Ryour legs are not fully extendedX Check whether the head restraint is adjus-ted properly.When doing so, make sure that you haveadjusted the head restraint so that the backof your head is supported at eye level by thecenter of the head restraint.

X Observe the safety guidelines on steeringwheel adjustment (Y page 115).

X Make sure that steering wheel: is adjus-ted properly.Adjust the steering wheel manually(Y page 115)Adjust the steering wheel electrically(Y page 116)

When adjusting the steering wheel, makesure that:Ryou can hold the steering wheel with yourarms slightly bentRyou can move your legs freelyRyou can see all the displays in the instru-ment cluster clearly

X Observe the safety guidelines for seat belts(Y page 44).

X Check whether you have fastened seatbelt; properly (Y page 46).

108 Correct driver's seat positionSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

The seat belt should:Rfit snugly across your bodyRbe routed across the middle of your shoul-derRbe routed in your pelvic area across the hipjoints

X Before starting off, adjust the rear-viewmir-ror and the exterior mirrors in such a waythat you have a good view of road and traf-fic conditions (Y page 118).

X Vehicles with memory function: you canstore the seat, steering wheel, exterior mir-ror and head-up display settings with thememory function (Y page 121).

Seats

Important safety notes

G WARNINGChildren could become trapped if they adjustthe seats, particularly when unattended.There is a risk of injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

The seats can still be adjusted when there isno SmartKey in the ignition lock.

G WARNINGWhen you adjust a seat, you or other vehicleoccupants could become trapped, e.g. on theseat guide rail. There is a risk of injury.Make sure when adjusting a seat that no onehas any body parts in the sweep of the seat.

Observe the safety notes on "Air bags"(Y page 48) and "Children in the Vehicle"(Y page 59).

G WARNINGIf the driver's seat is not engaged, it couldmove unexpectedly while the vehicle is inmotion. This could cause you to lose control ofthe vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.

Always make sure that the driver's seat isengaged before starting the engine.

G WARNINGYou could lose control of your vehicle if you dothe following while driving:Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,steering wheel or mirrorsRfasten the seat beltThere is a risk of an accident.Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-ing wheel andmirror and fasten your seat beltbefore starting the engine.

G WARNINGIf you adjust the seat height carelessly, you orother vehicle occupants could be trapped andthereby injured. Children in particular couldaccidentally press the electrical seat adjust-ment buttons and become trapped. There is arisk of injury.While moving the seats, make sure that yourhands or other body parts do not get under thelever assembly of the seat adjustment sys-tem.

G WARNINGIf head restraints are not installed and adjus-ted correctly, they cannot provide protectionas intended. There is an increased risk ofinjury in the head and neck area, e.g. in theevent of an accident or when braking.Always drive with the head restraints instal-led. Before driving off, make sure for everyvehicle occupant that the center of the headrestraint supports the back of the head atabout eye level.

G WARNINGThe seat belt does not offer the intended levelof protection if you have not moved the back-rest to an almost vertical position.When brak-ing or in the event of an accident, you couldslide underneath the seat belt and sustainabdomen or neck injuries, for example. This

Seats 109

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

poses an increased risk of injury or even fatalinjury.Adjust the seat properly before beginningyour journey. Always ensure that the backrestis in an almost vertical position and that theshoulder section of your seat belt is routedacross the center of your shoulder.

! To avoid damage to the seats and the seatheating, observe the following information:Rkeep liquids from spilling on the seats. Ifliquid is spilled on the seats, dry them assoon as possible.Rif the seat covers are damp or wet, do notswitch on the seat heating. The seatheating should also not be used to drythe seats.Rclean the seat covers as recommended;see "Interior care".Rdo not transport heavy loads on theseats. Do not place sharp objects on theseat cushions, e.g. knives, nails or tools.The seats should only be occupied bypassengers, if possible.Rwhen the seat heating is in operation, donot cover the seats with insulating mate-rials, e.g. blankets, coats, bags, seat cov-ers, child seats or booster seats.

! Make sure that there are no objects in thefootwell under or behind the seats whenmoving the seats back. There is a risk thatthe seats and/or the objects could be dam-aged.

i The rear-compartment head restraintscan be removed (Y page 112).Vehicles without the through-loading fea-ture: the head restraints cannot beremoved from the rear compartment seats.For more information, contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

i Further related subjects:RRear bench seat through-loading feature(Y page 301)

Adjusting the seats manually andelectrically

Adjusting the seats electrically

Electrically adjustable seats withmemory function

: Head restraint height; Backrest angle= Seat height? Seat cushion lengthA Seat cushion angleB Seat fore-and-aft adjustment

i Further related subjects:RYou can store the seat settings using thememory function (Y page 121).RIf PRE-SAFE® is triggered, the front-passenger seat will be moved to a betterposition if it was previously in an unfav-orable position (Y page 58).

Electrically adjustable seats withoutmemory function

: Backrest angle

110 SeatsSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

; Seat height= Seat cushion length? Seat cushion angleA Seat fore-and-aft adjustment

Adjusting the head restraints

Important safety notes

G WARNINGYou could lose control of your vehicle if you dothe following while driving:Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,steering wheel or mirrorsRfasten the seat beltThere is a risk of an accident.Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat beltbefore starting the engine.

G WARNINGIf head restraints are not installed and adjus-ted correctly, they cannot provide protectionas intended. There is an increased risk ofinjury in the head and neck area, e.g. in theevent of an accident or when braking.Always drive with the head restraints instal-led. Before driving off, make sure for everyvehicle occupant that the center of the headrestraint supports the back of the head atabout eye level.

General notesPay attention to the important safety notes(Y page 109).Do not rotate the head restraints of the frontand rear seats. Otherwise, you cannot adjustthe height and angle of the head restraints tothe correct position.

Adjusting the head restraint heightmanually

X To raise: pull the head restraint up to thedesired position.

X To lower: press release catch: in thedirection of the arrow and push the headrestraint down to the desired position.

Adjusting the head restraint fore-and-aft position manually

With this function you can adjust the distancebetween the head restraint and the back ofthe seat occupant's head.X To move forwards: pull the head restraintforwards in the direction of the arrow untilit engages in the desired position.

X To move backwards: press and holdrelease button:.

X Push the head restraint back.X Release the release button once the headrestraint is in the desired position.

X Ensure that the head restraint has engagedproperly.

Seats 111

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

Adjusting the height of the headrestraints electricallyX To adjust the head restraint height: slidethe switch for head restraint adjustment(Y page 110) up or down in the direction ofthe arrow.

Adjusting the rear seat head restraintheight

X Once the head restraint is fully lowered,press release catch:.

X To raise: pull the head restraint up to thedesired position.

X To lower: press release catch: and pushthe head restraint down until it is in thedesired position.

Installing and removing rear headrestraints

X Release the rear seat backrest and fold itslightly forwards (Y page 302).

X To remove: pull the head restraint up tothe stop.

X Press release catch: and pull the headrestraint out of the guides.

X To re-install: insert the head restraint sothat the notches on the bar are on the leftwhen viewed in the direction of travel.

X Push the head restraint down until you hearit engage in position.

X Fold back the rear seat backrest until itengages.

Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support

: To raise the backrest contour; To soften the backrest contour= To lower the backrest contour? To harden the backrest contourYou can adjust the contour of the front seatbackrests individually to provide optimumsupport for your back.

Switching the seat heating on/off

Switching on/off

G WARNINGRepeatedly switching on the seat heating cancause the seat cushion and backrest pads tobecome very hot. The health of persons withlimited temperature sensitivity or a limitedability to react to excessively high tempera-

112 SeatsSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

tures may be affected or they may even sufferburn-like injuries. There is a risk of injury.Therefore, do not switch the seat heating onrepeatedly.

The three red indicator lamps in the buttonindicate the heating level you have selected.The system automatically switches downfrom level 3 to level 2 after approximatelyeight minutes.The system automatically switches downfrom level 2 to level 1 after approximately tenminutes.The system automatically switches offapproximately 20 minutes after it is set tolevel 1.X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock (Y page 157).

X To switch on: press button: repeatedlyuntil the desired heating level is set.

X To switch off: press button: repeatedlyuntil all the indicator lamps go out.i If the battery voltage is too low, the seatheating may switch off.

i If drive program E (Y page 168) is selec-ted, the power of the seat heating isreduced.

Seats 113

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

Problems with the seat heating

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The seat heating hasswitched off prema-turely or cannot beswitched on.

The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical con-sumers are switched on.X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such asthe rear window defroster or interior lighting.Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the seat heating can beswitched back on manually.

Switching the seat ventilation on/off

Activating/deactivating

The three blue indicator lamps in the buttonsindicate the ventilation level you have selec-ted.X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock (Y page 157).

X To switch on: press button: repeatedlyuntil the desired ventilation level is set.

X To switch off: press button: repeatedlyuntil all the indicator lamps go out.

i If the battery voltage is too low, the seatventilation may switch off.

i You can open the side windows and thesliding sunroof using the "Convenienceopening" feature (Y page 98). The seat ven-tilation of the driver's seat automaticallyswitches to the highest level.

i When the vehicle is stationary, the fanspeed can be reduced automatically. Thisreduces the noises of the seat ventilation.

114 SeatsSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Problems with the seat ventilation

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The seat ventilation hasswitched off prema-turely or cannot beswitched on.

The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical con-sumers are switched on.X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such asthe rear window defroster or interior lighting.Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the seat ventilation canbe switched back on.

Steering wheel

Important safety notes

G WARNINGYou could lose control of your vehicle if you dothe following while driving:Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,steering wheel or mirrorsRfasten the seat beltThere is a risk of an accident.Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-ing wheel andmirror and fasten your seat beltbefore starting the engine.

G WARNINGChildren could injure themselves if theyadjust the steering wheel. There is a risk ofinjury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

The electrically adjustable steering wheel canstill be adjusted when there is no key in theignition lock.

Adjusting the steering wheel man-ually

: Release lever; To adjust the steering wheel height= To adjust the steering wheel position

(fore-and-aft adjustment)X Push release lever: down completely.The steering column is unlocked.

X Adjust the steering wheel to the desiredposition.

X Push release lever: up completely.The steering column is locked.

X Check if the steering column is locked.When doing so, try to push the steeringwheel up or down or try to move it in thefore-and-aft direction.

Steering wheel 115

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

Adjusting the steering wheel electri-cally

: To adjust the steering wheel position(fore-and-aft adjustment)

; To adjust the steering wheel height

i Further related subjects:REASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature(Y page 116)RStoring settings (Y page 121)ROperating the on-board computer(Y page 231).

EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjuststhe steering wheel, you and other vehicleoccupants – particularly children – couldbecome trapped. There is a risk of injury.While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is mak-ing adjustments, make sure that no one hasany body parts in the sweep of the steeringwheel.Move the steering wheel adjustment lever ifthere is a risk of entrapment by the steeringwheel. The adjustment process is stopped.

Press one of the memory function positionbuttons. The adjustment process is stopped.This function is only available on vehicles withmemory function.

G WARNINGIf children activate the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT fea-ture, they can become trapped, particularlywhen unattended. There is a risk of injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

G WARNINGIf you drive off while the EASY-ENTRY/EXITfeature is making adjustments, you could losecontrol of the vehicle. There is a risk of anaccident.Always wait until the adjustment process iscomplete before driving off.

The EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature makes gettingin and out of your vehicle easier.You can activate and deactivate the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature using Audio 20/COMAND; see the separate Audio 20/COMAND operating instructions.

Position of the steering wheel and thedriver's seat when the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is activeThe steering wheel tilts upwards and the driv-er's seat moves backwards if you:Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lockRwith KEYLESS-GO: open the driver's door;KEYLESS-GO must be in position 1Rwith the SmartKey: open the driver'sdoor; the SmartKeymust be in position0 or1 in the ignition lock (Y page 157)Ropen the driver's door when the ignition isswitched off

i The steering wheel only tilts upwards ifthe driving position is stored after the seator steering wheel has been adjusted(Y page 121).

116 Steering wheelSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

The most recent driving position of the steer-ing wheel is stored if:Rthe ignition is switched off.Rthe setting is stored with the memory func-tion (Y page 121).

i The steering wheel only moves upwards ifit has not already reached the upper steer-ing limiter.

Position of the steering wheel for driv-ingThe steering wheel is moved to the last selec-ted position when:Rthe driver's door is closed and you insertthe SmartKey into the ignition lockRyou close the driver's door when the igni-tion is switched onRyou press the Start/Stop button once onvehicles with KEYLESS-GO

i The steering wheel only returns to the lastset position if the driving position is storedafter the seat or steering wheel has beenadjusted (Y page 121).

The most recent driving position of the steer-ing wheel is stored if:Rthe ignition is switched off.Rthe setting is stored with the memory func-tion (Y page 121).

Crash-responsive EASY-EXIT featureIf the crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature istriggered in an accident, the steering columnwill move upwards when the driver's door isopened or the SmartKey is removed from theignition lock. This makes it easier to exit thevehicle and rescue the occupants.The crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature isonly operational if the EASY-EXIT/ENTRY fea-ture is activated in Audio 20/COMAND; seethe separate Audio 20/COMAND operatinginstructions.

Mirrors

Rear-view mirror

X Anti-glare mode: flick anti-glare lever:forwards or back.

Exterior mirrors

Important safety notes

G WARNINGYou could lose control of your vehicle if you dothe following while driving:Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,steering wheel or mirrorsRfasten the seat beltThere is a risk of an accident.Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-ing wheel andmirror and fasten your seat beltbefore starting the engine.

G WARNINGThe exterior mirror on the front-passengerside reduces the size of the image. Visibleobjects are actually closer than they appear.This means that you could misjudge the dis-tance from road users traveling behind, e.g.when changing lane. There is a risk of an acci-dent.For this reason, always make sure of theactual distance from the road users travelingbehind by glancing over your shoulder.

Mirrors 117

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

Adjusting the exterior mirrors

X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock (Y page 157).

X Press button; for the right-hand exteriormirror or button= for the left-hand exte-rior mirror.The indicator lamp lights up in the buttonthat has been pressed.The indicator lamp goes out again aftersome time. You can adjust the selectedmirror using adjustment button: as longas the indicator lamp is lit.

X Press adjustment button: up, down, or tothe left or right until you have adjusted theexterior mirror to the correct position. Youshould have a good overview of traffic con-ditions.

The convex exterior mirrors provide a largerfield of vision.After the engine has been started, the exte-rior mirrors are automatically heated if therear window defroster is switched on and theoutside temperature is low.

Folding the exterior mirrors in or outelectrically

X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock (Y page 157).

X Briefly press button:.Both exterior mirrors fold in or out.i Make sure that the exterior mirrors arealways folded out fully while driving. Theycould otherwise vibrate.

i If you are driving faster than 30 mph(47 km/h), you can no longer fold in theexterior mirrors.

Setting the exterior mirrorsIf the battery has been disconnected or com-pletely discharged, the exterior mirrors mustbe reset. The exterior mirrors will otherwisenot fold in when you select the AutomaticAutomaticMirror FoldingMirror Folding function in the on-boardcomputer.X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock (Y page 157).

X Briefly press button:.

Folding the exterior mirrors in or outautomaticallyIf the Automatic Mirror FoldingAutomatic Mirror Folding functionis activated in COMAND or Audio 20 (see theseparate COMAND or Audio 20 operatinginstructions):

118 MirrorsSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Rthe exterior mirrors fold in automatically assoon as you lock the vehicle from the out-side.Rthe exterior mirrors fold out automaticallyagain as soon as you unlock the vehicle.

i If the exterior mirrors have been folded inmanually, they do not fold out.

Exterior mirror pushed out of positionIf an exterior mirror has been pushed out ofposition, proceed as follows:X Vehicles without electrically foldingexterior mirrors:move the exterior mirrorinto the correct position manually.

X Vehicles with electrically folding exte-rior mirrors: press and hold button:until you hear a click and then the mirrorengage in position (Y page 118).The mirror housing is engaged again andyou can adjust the exterior mirrors as usual(Y page 118).

Automatic anti-glare mirrors

G WARNINGElectrolyte may escape if the glass in an auto-matic anti-glaremirror breaks. The electrolyteis harmful and causes irritation. It must notcome into contact with your skin, eyes, res-piratory organs or clothing or be swallowed.There is a risk of injury.If you come into contact with the electrolyte,observe the following:RRinse off the electrolyte from your skinimmediately with water.RImmediately rinse the electrolyte out ofyour eyes thoroughly with clean water.RIf the electrolyte is swallowed, immediatelyrinse your mouth out thoroughly. Do notinduce vomiting.RIf electrolyte comes into contact with yourskin or hair or is swallowed, seek medicalattention immediately.

RImmediately change out of clothing whichhas come into contact with electrolyte.RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek medicalattention immediately.

The rear-view mirror and the exterior mirroron the driver's side automatically go into anti-glaremode if the following conditions aremetsimultaneously:Rthe ignition is switched onRincident light from headlamps strikes thesensor in the rear-view mirror

The mirrors do not go into anti-glare mode ifreverse gear is engaged or if the interior light-ing is switched on.

Parking position for the exterior mir-ror on the front-passenger side

Using reverse gear

: Memory button M; Adjustment button= Button for the front-passenger side exte-

rior mirror? Button for the driver's side exterior mirrorYou can position the front-passenger sideexterior mirror in such a way that you can seethe rear wheel on that side as soon as youengage reverse gear. You can store this posi-tion.

Mirrors 119

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 157).

X Press button= for the exterior mirror onthe front-passenger side.

X Engage reverse gear.The exterior mirror on the front-passengerside moves to the preset parking position.

X Use adjustment button; to adjust theexterior mirror to a position that allows youto see the rear wheel and the curb.The parking position is stored.i If you shift the transmission to anotherposition, the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side returns to the driving posi-tion.

Using the memory buttonYou can position the front-passenger sideexterior mirror in such a way that you can seethe rear wheel on that side as soon as youengage reverse gear. This setting can bestored using memory button M:.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 157).

X Press button= for the exterior mirror onthe front-passenger side.

X Use adjustment button; to adjust theexterior mirror to a position that allows youto see the rear wheel and the curb.

X Press memory buttonM: and one of thearrows on adjustment button; withinthree seconds.The parking position is stored if the exteriormirror does not move.

X If the mirror moves out of position, repeatthe steps.

Calling up a stored parking position set-tingX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 157).

X Adjust the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side using button=.

X Engage reverse gear.The exterior mirror on the front-passengerside moves to the stored parking position.

The exterior mirror on the front-passengerside moves back to its original position:Ras soon as you exceed a speed of 9 mph(15 km/h)Rabout ten seconds after you have disen-gaged reverse gearRif you press button? for the exterior mir-ror on the driver's side

Memory function

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you use thememory function on the driver'sside while driving, you could lose control ofthe vehicle as a result of the adjustmentsbeing made. There is a risk of an accident.Only use the memory function on the driver'sside when the vehicle is stationary.

G WARNINGWhen thememory function adjusts the seat orsteering wheel, you and other vehicle occu-pants – particularly children – could becometrapped. There is a risk of injury.While the memory function is making adjust-ments, make sure that no one has any bodyparts in the sweep of the seat or steeringwheel. If somebody becomes trapped, imme-diately release the memory function positionbutton. The adjustment process is stopped.

120 Memory functionSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

G WARNINGChildren could become trapped if they acti-vate the memory function, particularly whenunattended. There is a risk of injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

Storing settingsWith the memory function, you can store upto three different settings, e.g. for three dif-ferent people.The following settings are stored as a singlememory preset:Rposition of the seat, backrest and headrestraintRseat heating: cushion surfacesRdriver's side: position of the exterior mir-rors on the driver's and front-passengersidesRposition of the head-up display

X Adjust the seat accordingly (Y page 110).X On the driver's side, adjust the steeringwheel (Y page 116) and the exteriormirrors(Y page 118).

X Press memory button M and one of thestorage position buttons 1, 2 or 3 withinthree seconds.The settings are stored in the selected pre-set position. A tone sounds when the set-tings have been completed.

Calling up a stored settingX Press and hold the corresponding storageposition button 1, 2 or 3 until:RSeatRSteering wheelRExterior mirrorsRHead-up displayare in the stored position.i The steering wheel and seat adjustmentprocedure is interrupted as soon as yourelease the storage position button. Theadjustment of the mirror is still carried out.

Memory function 121

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

122

Useful information ............................ 124Exterior lighting ................................ 124Interior lighting ................................. 129Replacing bulbs (vehicles with LEDheadlamps) ........................................ 130Changing bulbs (vehicles with hal-ogen headlamps) .............................. 130Windshield wipers ............................ 133

123

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optional equip-ment of your vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's Manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions.

i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops (Y page 26).

Exterior lighting

General notesFor reasons of safety, Mercedes-Benz recom-mends that you drive with the lights switchedon even during the daytime. In some coun-tries, operation of the headlamps varies dueto legal requirements and self-imposed obli-gations.

Driving abroad

Symmetrical low-beam headlampsSwitch the headlamps to symmetrical lowbeam in countries in which traffic drives onthe opposite side of the road from the countrywhere the vehicle is registered. This preventsglare to oncoming traffic. When using sym-metrical lights, the edge of the road is not litas widely and as far ahead as normal.Have the headlamps converted at a qualifiedspecialist workshop as close to the border aspossible before driving in these countries.

Asymmetrical low beamHave the headlamps converted back to asym-metrical low-beam headlamps at a qualifiedspecialist workshop as soon as possible aftercrossing the border again.

Setting the exterior lighting

Setting optionsExterior lighting can be set using:Rthe light switchRthe combination switch (Y page 126)Rthe on-board computer (Y page 247)

Light switch

Operation

1 W Left-hand standing lamps2 X Right-hand standing lamps3 T Parking lamps, license plate and

instrument cluster lighting4Ã Automatic headlamp mode, control-

led by the light sensor5 L Low-beam/high-beam headlampsB R Rear fog lampIf you hear a warning tone when you leave thevehicle, the lights may still be switched on.X Turn the light switch toÃ.The exterior lighting (except the parking/standing lamps) switches off automatically ifyou:Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lockRopen the driver's door with the SmartKey inposition 0

Automatic headlamp modeG WARNINGWhen the light switch is set toÃ, the low-beam headlamps may not be switched on

124 Exterior lightingLightsandwindshieldwipers

automatically if there is fog, snow or othercauses of poor visibility due to the weatherconditions such as spray. There is a risk of anaccident.In such situations, turn the light switch toL.

The automatic headlamp feature is only anaid. The driver is responsible for the vehicle'slighting at all times.Only for Canada:The daytime running lamps improve the visi-bility of your vehicle during the day. The day-time running lamps function is required by lawinCanada. It cannot therefore be deactivated.When the engine is running and the vehicle isstationary: if youmove the selector lever froma drive position to P, the daytime runninglamps/low-beam headlamps go out afterthree minutes.When the engine is running, the vehicle isstationary and in bright ambient light: if youturn the light switch to T, the daytimerunning lamps and parking lamps switch on.If the engine is running and you turn the lightswitch to L, the manual settings takeprecedence over the daytime running lamps.USA only:The daytime running lamps improve the visi-bility of your vehicle during the day. To do this,the daytime running lamps function must beswitched on using the on-board computer(Y page 247).If the engine is running and you turn the lightswitch to T or L, the manual settingstake precedence over the daytime runninglamps.Ã is the favored light switch setting. Thelight setting is automatically selected accord-ing to the brightness of the ambient light(exception: poor visibility due to weather con-ditions such as fog, snow or spray):RSmartKey in position 1 in the ignition lock:the parking lamps are switched on or off

automatically depending on the brightnessof the ambient light.RWith the engine running: if you have acti-vated the "daytime running lamps" functionvia the on-board computer, the daytimerunning lamps or the parking lamps and thelow-beamheadlamps are switched on or offautomatically depending on the brightnessof the ambient light.

X To switch on automatic headlampmode: turn the light switch toÃ.

Low-beam headlampsEven if the light sensor does not detect that itis dark, the parking lamps and low-beamheadlamps switch on when the ignition isswitched on and the light switch is set to theL position. This is a particularly usefulfunction in the event of rain and fog.X To switch on the low-beam headlamps:turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock toposition 2 or start the engine.

X Turn the light switch to L.The greenL indicator lamp in the instru-ment cluster lights up.

Rear fog lampThe rear fog lamp improves visibility of yourvehicle for the traffic behind in the event ofthick fog. Please take note of the country-specific regulations for the use of rear foglamps.X To switch on the rear fog lamps: turn theSmartKey in the ignition lock to position 2or start the engine.

X Turn the light switch to L orÃ.X Press the R button.The yellow R indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster lights up.

X To switch off the rear fog lamp: press theR button.The yellow R indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster goes out.

Exterior lighting 125

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

Parking lamps! If the battery has been excessively dis-charged, the parking lamps or standinglamps are automatically switched off toenable the next engine start. Always parkyour vehicle safely and sufficiently litaccording to legal standards. Avoid thecontinuous use of the T parking lampsfor several hours. If possible, switch on theX right or the W left standing lamp.

X To switch on: turn the light switch toT.The greenT indicator lamp in the instru-ment cluster lights up.

Standing lampsSwitching on the standing lamps ensures thecorresponding side of the vehicle is illumina-ted.X To switch on the standing lamps: theSmartKey is not in the ignition lock or it is inposition 0.

X Turn the light switch toW (left-hand sideof the vehicle) or X (right-hand side ofthe vehicle).

Combination switch

Turn signal

: High-beam headlamps; Turn signal, right= High-beam flasher? Turn signal, left

X To indicate briefly: press the combinationswitch briefly to the pressure point in thedirection of arrow; or?.The corresponding turn signal flashes threetimes.

X To indicate: press the combination switchbeyond the pressure point in the directionof arrow; or?.

High-beam headlampsX To switch on the high-beamheadlamps:turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock toposition 2 or start the engine.

X Turn the light switch to L orÃ.X Press the combination switch beyond thepressure point in the direction of arrow:.In theà position, the high-beam head-lamps are only switched on when it is darkand the engine is running.The blue K indicator lamp in the instru-ment cluster lights up when the high-beamheadlamps are switched on.

X To switch off the high-beam head-lamps:move the combination switch backto its normal position.The blue K indicator lamp in the instru-ment cluster goes out.

If Adaptive Highbeam Assist is active, it con-trols activation and deactivation of the high-beam headlamps (Y page 127).

High-beam flasherX To switch on: turn the SmartKey in theignition lock to position 1 or 2, or start theengine.

X Pull the combination switch in the directionof arrow=.

126 Exterior lightingLightsandwindshieldwipers

Hazard warning lamps

X To switch on the hazardwarning lamps:press button:.All turn signals flash. If you now switch on aturn signal using the combination switch,only the turn signal lamp on the corre-sponding side of the vehicle will flash.

X To switch off the hazardwarning lamps:press button:.

The hazard warning lamps automaticallyswitch on if:Ran air bag is deployed orRthe vehicle decelerates rapidly from aspeed of above 45 mph (70 km/h) andcomes to a standstill

The hazard warning lamps switch off auto-matically if the vehicle reaches a speed ofabove 6 mph (10 km/h) again after a fullbrake application.The hazard warning lamps still operate if theignition is switched off.

Cornering light function

The cornering light function improves the illu-mination of the road over a wide angle in thedirection you are turning, enabling better vis-ibility in tight bends, for example. It can onlybe activated when the low-beam headlampsare switched on.Active:Rif you are driving at speeds below 25 mph(40 km/h) and switch on the turn signal orturn the steering wheelRif you are driving at speeds between25 mph (40 km/h) and 45 mph (70 km/h)and turn the steering wheel

The cornering lamp may remain lit for a shorttime, but is automatically switched off afterno more than three minutes.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist

General notes

You can use this function to set the head-lamps to change between low beam and highbeam automatically. The system recognizesvehicles with their lights on, either approach-ing from the opposite direction or traveling infront of your vehicle, and consequentlyswitches the headlamps from high beam tolow beam.

Exterior lighting 127

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

The system automatically adapts the low-beam headlamp range depending on the dis-tance to the other vehicle. Once the systemno longer detects any other vehicles, it reac-tivates the high-beam headlamps.The system's optical sensor is located behindthe windshield near the overhead controlpanel.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGAdaptive HighbeamAssist does not recognizeroad users:Rwho have no lights, e.g. pedestriansRwho have poor lighting, e.g. cyclistsRwhose lighting is blocked, e.g. by a barrierIn very rare cases, Adaptive Highbeam Assistmay fail to recognize other road users thathave lights, or may recognize them too late. Inthis or similar situations, the automatic high-beam headlamps will not be deactivated oractivated regardless. There is a risk of an acci-dent.Always carefully observe the traffic conditionsand switch off the high-beam headlamps ingood time.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist cannot take intoaccount road, weather or traffic conditions.Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aid. Youare responsible for adjusting the vehicle'slighting to the prevailing light, visibility andtraffic conditions.In particular, the detection of obstacles canbe restricted if there is:Rpoor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain orsnowRdirt on the sensors or the sensors areobscured

Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assiston/offX To switch on: turn the light switch toÃ.X Press the combination switch beyond thepressure point in the direction of arrow:.The _ indicator lamp in the multifunc-tion display lights up if it is dark and thelight sensor activates the low-beam head-lamps.If you are driving at speeds above 25 km/h:If you are driving at speeds above approx-imately 16 mph (25 km/h):The headlamp range is set automaticallydepending on the distance between thevehicle and other road users.If you are driving at speeds above approx-imately 19 mph (30 km/h) and no otherroad users have been detected:The high-beam headlamps are switched onautomatically. The K indicator lamp inthe instrument cluster also lights up.If you are driving at speeds below approx-imately 16 mph (25 km/h) or other roadusers have been detected or the roads areadequately lit:The high-beam headlamps are switched offautomatically. The K indicator lamp inthe instrument cluster goes out. The _indicator lamp in the multifunction displayremains lit.

X To switch off: move the combinationswitch back to its normal position or movethe light switch to another position.The _ indicator lamp in the instrumentcluster goes out.

Headlamps fogged up on the insideCertain climatic and physical conditions maycause moisture to form in the headlamp. Thismoisture does not affect the functionality ofthe headlamp.

128 Exterior lightingLightsandwindshieldwipers

Interior lighting

Overview of interior lighting

Front overhead control panel

: p To switch the left-hand front readinglamp on/off

; | To switch the automatic interiorlighting control on/off

= c To switch the front interior lightingon/off

? u To switch the rear interior lightingon/off

A p To switch the right-hand front read-ing lamp on/off

Control panel in the grab handle (rearcompartment)

: Reading lamp; p Switches the reading lamp on/off

Interior lighting control

General notesIn order to prevent the vehicle's battery fromdischarging, the interior lighting functions areautomatically deactivated after some timeunless the SmartKey is in position 2 in theignition lock.The color, brightness and display lamp for theambient lighting may be set using COMANDor Audio 20 (see the separate operatinginstructions).

Automatic interior lighting controlX To activate/deactivate: press the |button.When the automatic interior lighting con-trol is activated, the button is flush with theoverhead control panel.

The interior lighting automatically switcheson if you:Runlock the vehicleRopen a doorRremove the SmartKey from the ignition lockThe interior light is activated for a short whilewhen the SmartKey is removed from the igni-tion lock. This delayed switch-off can beadjusted using COMAND or Audio 20 (see theseparate Operator's Manual).

Manual interior lighting controlX To switch the front interior lighting on/off: press the c button.

X To switch the interior lighting on/off:press the u button.

X To switch the reading lamps on/off:press the p button.

Interior lighting 129

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

Crash-responsive emergency lightingThe interior lighting is activated automaticallyif the vehicle is involved in an accident.X To switch off the crash-responsiveemergency lighting: press the hazardwarning lamp button.

orX Lock and then unlock the vehicle using theSmartKey.

Replacing bulbs (vehicles with LEDheadlamps)

The front and rear light clusters of your vehi-cle are equipped with LED light bulbs. Do notreplace the bulbs yourself. Contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop which has the necessaryspecialist knowledge and tools to carry outthe work required.Lamps are an important aspect of vehiclesafety. You must therefore make sure thatthese function correctly at all times. Have theheadlamp setting checked regularly.

Changing bulbs (vehicles with halo-gen headlamps)

Important safety notes

G WARNINGBulbs, lamps and connectors can get very hotwhen operating. If you change a bulb, youcould burn yourself on these components.There is a risk of injury.Allow these components to cool down beforechanging a bulb.

Do not use a bulb that has been dropped or ifits glass tube has been scratched.The bulb may explode if:Ryou touch itRit is hot

Ryou drop itRyou scratch itOnly operate bulbs in enclosed lampsdesigned for that purpose. Only install sparebulbs of the same type and the specified volt-age.Marks on the glass tube reduce the servicelife of the bulbs. Do not touch the glass tubewith your bare hands. If necessary, clean theglass tubewhen coldwith alcohol or spirit andrub it off with a lint-free cloth.Protect bulbs from moisture during opera-tion. Do not allow bulbs to come into contactwith liquids.Replace only the bulbs listed (Y page 130).Have the bulbs that you cannot replace your-self changed at a qualified specialist work-shop.If you require assistance changing bulbs, con-sult a qualified specialist workshop.If the new bulb still does not light up, consulta qualified specialist workshop.Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect ofvehicle safety. You must therefore make surethat these function correctly at all times.Have the headlamp setting checked regularly.

Overview: changing bulbs/bulb typesYou can change the following bulbs. The bulbtype can be found in the legend.

130 Changing bulbs (vehicles with halogen headlamps)Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Vehicles with halogen headlamps: Low-beam headlamp: H7 55 W; High-beam headlamp: H7 55 W= Turn signal lamp: PWY 24 W

Tail lamp (halogen headlamps): Turn signal: P 21 W; Backup lamp: W 16 W

Changing the front bulbs

Removing and installing the cover in thefront wheel housing

Youmust remove the cover of the front wheelhousing before you can change the front turnsignal lamp.X To remove: switch off the lights.X Turn the front wheels inwards.X Turn rotary knob: 180° outwards until itstops using a suitable object.Cover; is released.

X Fold cover; upwards.X To install: insert cover; into the left,right and two lower catches.

X Turn rotary knob: 180° inwards until itstops using a suitable object.Cover; is locked.

Low-beam headlamps

X Switch off the lights.X Open the hood.X Turn housing cover: counter-clockwiseand pull it out.

X Turn bulb holder; counter-clockwise andpull it out.

X Take the bulb out of bulb holder;.X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder;.X Insert bulb holder; into the lamp and turnit clockwise.

X Align housing cover: and turn it clock-wise until it engages.

Changing bulbs (vehicles with halogen headlamps) 131

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

High-beam headlamps

X Switch off the lights.X Open the hood.X Turn housing cover: counter-clockwiseand pull it out.

X Turn bulb holder; counter-clockwise andpull it out.

X Take the bulb out of bulb holder;.X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder;.X Insert bulb holder; into the lamp and turnit clockwise.

X Align housing cover: and turn it clock-wise until it engages.

Turn signal

X Remove the cover in the front wheel hous-ing (Y page 131).

X Turn housing cover: counter-clockwiseand pull it out.

X Turn bulb holder; counter-clockwise,unlock it and pull it out.

X Take the bulb out of bulb holder;.

X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder;.X Insert bulb holder; into the lamp and turnit clockwise.

X Align housing cover: and turn it clock-wise until it engages.

X Replace the cover in the front wheel hous-ing (Y page 131).

Changing the rear bulbs

Opening and closing the side trim pan-els

Example: right-hand side trim panel

Youmust open the side trim panel in the trunkbefore you can change the bulbs in the taillamps.X To open: release right or left side trimpanel: at the top and fold it down in thedirection of the arrow.

X To close: insert side panel :.

Tail lampsX Switch off the lights.X Open the trunk.X Open the side trim panel (Y page 132).

132 Changing bulbs (vehicles with halogen headlamps)Lightsandwindshieldwipers

X Pull out the plug.X Turn fender nut: 90° counter-clockwiseand remove the bulb holder.

X Turn signal lamp;;: lightly press the bulbinto the bulb holder, turn it counter-clock-wise and remove it from the bulb holder.

X Insert the new bulb into the bulb holder andturn it clockwise.

X Backup lamp==: remove the bulb fromthe bulb holder.

X Insert the new bulb into the bulb holder.X Re-install bulb holder.X Turn fender nut: 90° clockwise.X Insert the connector.X Close the side trim panel (Y page 132).

Windshield wipers

Switching the windshield wiperson/off! Do not operate the windshield wiperswhen the windshield is dry, as this could

damage the wiper blades. Moreover, dustthat has collected on the windshield canscratch the glass if wiping takes placewhenthe windshield is dry.If it is necessary to switch on thewindshieldwipers in dry weather conditions, alwaysuse washer fluid when operating the wind-shield wipers.

! If the windshield wipers leave smears onthe windshield after the vehicle has beenwashed in an automatic car wash, wax orother residues may be the reason for this.Clean the windshield using washer fluidafter washing the vehicle in an automaticcar wash.

! Intermittent wiping with rain sensor: dueto optical influences and the windshieldbecoming dirty in dry weather conditions,the windshield wipers may be activatedinadvertently. This could then damage thewindshield wiper blades or scratch thewindshield.For this reason, you should always switchoff the windshield wipers in dry weather.

1 $ Windshield wiper off2 Ä Intermittent wipe, low (rain sensor

set to low sensitivity)3 Å Intermittent wipe, high (rain sensor

set to high sensitivity)4 ° Continuous wipe, slow5 ¯ Continuous wipe, fastB í Single wipe/î Towipe thewind-

shield using washer fluid

Windshield wipers 133

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

X Switch on the ignition.X Turn the combination switch to the corre-sponding position.

Vehicles with a rain sensor: in the Ä orÅ position, the appropriate wiping fre-quency is automatically set according to theintensity of the rain. In the Å position, therain sensor is more sensitive than in the Äposition, causing the windshield wipers towipe more frequently.If the wiper blades are worn, the windshieldwill no longer be wiped properly. This couldprevent you from observing the traffic condi-tions.

Replacing the wiper blades

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the windshield wipers begin to move whileyou are changing the wiper blades, you couldbe trapped by the wiper arm. There is a risk ofinjury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andignition before changing the wiper blades.

! Never open the hood if a windshield wiperarm has been folded away from the wind-shield.Never fold awindshieldwiper armwithout awiper blade back onto the windshield.Hold the windshield wiper arm firmly whenyou change the wiper blade. If you releasethe windshield wiper arm without a wiperblade and it falls onto the windshield, thewindshield may be damaged by the force ofthe impact.Mercedes-Benz recommends that you havethe wiper blades changed at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

! To avoid damaging the wiper blades,make sure that you touch only the wiperarm of the wiper.

Changing the windshield wiper blades

Adjusting the wiper blades so that theyare verticalOn vehicles without KEYLESS-GO:X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock (Y page 157).

X Set the windshield wipers to position °.X When the wiper arms have reached a ver-tical position, turn the SmartKey to position0 and remove it from the ignition lock.

X Fold the wiper arm away from the wind-shield.

On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO:X Switch off the engine.X Remove your foot from the brake pedal.X Set the windshield wipers to position °.X Press the Start/Stop button repeatedlyuntil the windshield wiper starts.

X When the wiper arms have reached a ver-tical position, press the Start/Stop button.

X Fold the wiper arm away from the wind-shield.

Removing the wiper blades

X Hold on to the wiper arm with one hand.With the other hand, turn wiper blade indirection of arrow: away from the wiperarm as far as it will go.

X Slide catch; in the direction of arrow=until it engages in the removal position witha noticeable click.

134 Windshield wipersLightsandwindshieldwipers

X Remove the wiper blade in the direction ofarrow? away from the wiper arm.

Installing the wiper blades

X Insert the new wiper blade into the wiperarm in the direction of arrow:.

X Slide catch; in the direction of arrow=until it engages in the locking position witha noticeable click.

X Make sure that the wiper blade is seatedcorrectly.

X Fold the wiper arm back onto the wind-shield.

X Remove the protective film of the serviceindicator on the tip of the wiper blade.

i If the color of the service indicatorchanges from black to yellow, the wiperblades should be replaced. The duration ofthe color change varies depending on theterms of use.

Windshield wipers 135

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

Problems with the windshield wipers

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The windshield wipersare jammed.

Leaves or snow, for example, may be obstructing the windshieldwiper movement. The wiper motor has been deactivated.X For safety reasons, you should remove the SmartKey from theignition lock.

orX Switch off the engine using the Start/Stop button and open thedriver's door.

X Remove the cause of the obstruction.X Switch the windshield wipers back on.

The windshield wipersfail completely.

The windshield wiper drive is malfunctioning.X Select another wiper speed on the combination switch.X Have the windshield wipers checked at a qualified specialistworkshop.

The windshield washerfluid from the spraynozzles no longer hitsthe center of the wind-shield.

The spray nozzles are misaligned.X Have the spray nozzles adjusted at a qualified specialist work-shop.

136 Windshield wipersLightsandwindshieldwipers

Useful information ............................ 138Overview of climate control sys-tems ................................................... 138Operating the climate control sys-tems ................................................... 142Setting the air vents ......................... 152

137

Climatecontrol

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optional equip-ment of your vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's Manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions.

i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops (Y page 26).

Overview of climate control systems

Important safety notesObserve the settings recommended on thefollowing pages. The windows could other-wise fog up.To prevent the windows from fogging up:Rswitch off climate control only brieflyRswitch on air-recirculation mode onlybrieflyRswitch on the cooling with air dehumidifi-cation functionRswitch on the defrost windshield functionbriefly, if required

Climate control regulates the temperatureand air humidity in the vehicle interior. Theinterior filter cleans the air, thus improvingthe interior climate.The "Cooling with air dehumidification" func-tion is only available when the engine is run-ning. Optimum climate control is only ach-ieved with the side windows and roof closed.The residual heat function can only be acti-vated or deactivated with the ignitionswitched off (Y page 149).

i Ventilate the vehicle for a brief periodduring warm weather, e.g. using the con-venience opening feature (Y page 98). Thiswill speed up the cooling process and the

desired interior temperature will bereached more quickly.

i The integrated filter filters out most par-ticles of dust and soot and completely fil-ters out pollen. It also reduces gaseous pol-lutants and odors. A clogged filter reducesthe amount of air supplied to the vehicleinterior. For this reason, you should alwaysobserve the interval for replacing the filter,which is specified in the MaintenanceBooklet. As it depends on environmentalconditions, e.g. heavy air pollution, theinterval may be shorter than stated in theMaintenance Booklet.

i It is possible that the blower may be acti-vated automatically 60 minutes after theSmartKey has been removed depending onvarious factors, e.g. the outside tempera-ture. The vehicle is then ventilated for30 minutes to dry the climate control sys-tem.

138 Overview of climate control systemsClimatecontrol

Control panel for dual-zone automatic climate control

: To set the temperature, left (Y page 145); To set the air distribution (Y page 146)= To set the airflow (Y page 146)

To switch off climate control (Y page 142)? To set climate control to automatic (Y page 144)A To defrost the windshield (Y page 147)B To call up the Audio 20/COMAND climate control menu; see the separate operating

instructionsC To switch the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 148)D To activate/deactivate synchronization (Y page 147)E To activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode manually (Y page 149)F To activate/deactivate cooling with air dehumidification (Y page 143)G To set the temperature, right (Y page 145)

Optimum use of dual-zone climatecontrol

Dual-zone automatic climate controlThe following contains notes and recommen-dations on optimum use of dual-zone climatecontrol.RActivate climate control using theÃrocker switch. The indicator lamp abovetheà rocker switch lights up. The "Cool-ing with air dehumidification" function isnot activated automatically in automatic

mode. If necessary, activate this function(Y page 143).RSet the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †).ROnly use the "Windshield defrosting" func-tion briefly until the windshield is clearagain.ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g.if there are unpleasant outside odors orwhen in a tunnel. The windows could oth-erwise fog up, since no fresh air is drawninto the vehicle in air-recirculation mode.

Overview of climate control systems 139

Climatecontrol

AGILITY SELECT switchYou can choose between various drive pro-grams with the AGILITY SELECT switch(Y page 167).If you have selected the drive program E, theclimate control switches to Eco mode.In Eco mode:Rthe cooling output is reduced when coolingRwhen heating, the electrical heater boosteris deactivated and heat output is reducedas a resultRthe rear window defroster running time isreduced

If you have selected the drive program C, S orS+ the climate control switches to Comfortmode. The current climate control settingsare maintained in Comfort mode.

ECO start/stop functionDuring automatic engine switch-off, the cli-mate control system only operates at areduced capacity. If you require the full cli-mate control output, you can switch off theECO start/stop function by pressing the ECObutton (Y page 162).

140 Overview of climate control systemsClimatecontrol

Control panel for 3-zone automatic climate control

Canada onlyFront control panel

: To set the temperature, left (Y page 145); To set the air distribution, left (Y page 146)= To set the airflow (Y page 146)

To switch off climate control (Y page 142)? To set climate control to automatic (Y page 144)A To defrost the windshield (Y page 147)B To call up the Audio 20/COMAND climate control menu; see the separate operating

instructionsTo activate/deactivate the residual heat function (Y page 149)

C To switch the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 148)D To activate/deactivate cooling with air dehumidification (Y page 143)E To activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode manually (Y page 149)F To set the air distribution, right (Y page 146)G To set the temperature, right (Y page 145)

Rear control panelH To set the temperature (Y page 145)I DisplayJ To set the airflow (Y page 146)

Overview of climate control systems 141

Climatecontrol

Optimum use of 3-zone automatic cli-mate control

3-zone automatic climate controlThe following contains instructions and rec-ommendations to enable you to get the mostout of your 3-zone automatic climate control.RActivate climate control using theÃrocker switch. The indicator lamp abovetheà rocker switch lights up. The "Cool-ing with air dehumidification" function isnot activated automatically in automaticmode. If necessary, activate this function(Y page 143).RSet the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †).ROnly use the "Windshield defrosting" func-tion briefly until the windshield is clearagain.ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g.if there are unpleasant outside odors orwhen in a tunnel. The windows could oth-erwise fog up, since no fresh air is drawninto the vehicle in air-recirculation mode.RUse the residual heat function if youwant toheat or ventilate the vehicle interior whenthe ignition is switched off. The residualheat function can only be activated or deac-tivated with the ignition switched off. Theresidual heat function is switched off whenthe ignition is switched on.

AGILITY SELECT switchYou can choose between various drive pro-grams with the AGILITY SELECT switch(Y page 167).If you have selected the drive program E, theclimate control switches to Eco mode.In Eco mode:Rthe cooling output is reduced when coolingRwhen heating, the electrical heater boosteris deactivated and heat output is reducedas a resultRthe rear window defroster running time isreduced

If you have selected the drive program C, S orS+ the climate control switches to Comfortmode. The current climate control settingsare maintained in Comfort mode.

ECO start/stop functionDuring automatic engine switch-off, the cli-mate control system only operates at areduced capacity. If you require the full cli-mate control output, you can switch off theECO start/stop function by pressing the ECObutton (Y page 162).

Operating the climate control sys-tems

Switching climate control on/off

General notesWhen the climate control is switched off, theair supply and air circulation are alsoswitched off. The windows could fog up.Therefore, switch off climate control onlybrieflySwitch on climate control primarily using theà rocker switch (Y page 144).

Switching on/offX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 157).

X To switch on: press thet/!rocker switch up or down.The Audio 20/COMAND climate controlmenu opens.

X Activate the climate control using the air-conditioning function bar; see the separateAudio 20/COMAND operating instruc-tions.

orX Set the airflow to level 1 or higher using theH button.

142 Operating the climate control systemsClimatecontrol

X To switch off: press thet/!rocker switch up or down.The Audio 20/COMAND climate controlmenu opens.

X Deactivate the climate control using theair-conditioning function bar; see the sep-arate Audio 20/COMAND operatinginstructions.

orX Set the airflow to level 0 using theHrocker switch.

Activating/deactivating cooling withair dehumidification

General notesIf you deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehu-midification" function, the air inside the vehi-cle will not be cooled. The air inside the vehi-cle will also not be dehumidified. The win-dows can fog up more quickly. Therefore,deactivate the cooling with air-dehumidifica-tion function only briefly.The "Cooling with air dehumidification" func-tion is only available when the engine is run-ning. The air inside the vehicle is cooled anddehumidified according to the temperatureselected.Condensation may drip from the underside ofthe vehicle when it is in cooling mode. This isnormal and not a sign that there is a malfunc-tion.

Activating/deactivatingX To activate: press the¿ rocker switchup or down.The indicator lamp above the rocker switchlights up.

orX Activate the cooling with air dehumidifica-tion function via Audio 20/COMAND (seethe separate operating instructions).

X To deactivate: press the¿ rockerswitch up or down.The indicator lamp above the rocker switchgoes out.

orX Deactivate the cooling with air dehumidifi-cation function via Audio 20/COMAND(see the separate operating instructions).

Operating the climate control systems 143

Climatecontrol

Problems with the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The indicator lamp inthe¿ buttonflashes three times orremains off. The cool-ing with air dehumidifi-cation function canalso no longer be acti-vated using Audio 20/COMAND (see the sep-arate operating instruc-tions).

Cooling with air dehumidification has been deactivated due to amalfunction.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Setting climate control to automatic

General notesIn automatic mode, the set temperature ismaintained automatically at a constant level.The system automatically regulates the tem-perature of the dispensed air, the airflow andthe air distribution.The automatic mode functions optimallywhen the "Cooling with air dehumidification"function is activated. The "Cooling with airdehumidification" function must be activatedmanually in automatic mode. If necessary,"Cooling with air dehumidification" can alsobe deactivated.If you deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehu-midification" function, the air inside the vehi-cle will not be cooled. The air inside the vehi-cle will also not be dehumidified. The win-dows can fog up more quickly. Therefore,deactivate the cooling with air-dehumidifica-tion function only briefly.

Automatic controlX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 157).

X Set the desired temperature using thew rocker switch on the front controlunit.

orX Set the desired temperature usingAudio 20/COMAND; see the separateoperating instructions.

X To activate: press rocker switchà upor down.The indicator lamp above theà rockerswitch lights up.

X To switch tomanual operation: press theH rocker switch up or down.

orX Set the airflow using Audio 20/COMAND;see the separate operating instructions.

orX Press the top or bottom section of the_rocker switch.

orX Set the air distribution using Audio 20/COMAND; see the separate operatinginstructions.The indicator lamp above theà rockerswitch goes out.

144 Operating the climate control systemsClimatecontrol

In automaticmode, if you adjust the airflow orair distribution manually, the indicator lampabove theà rocker switch goes out. Thefunction which has not been changed man-ually, however, continues to be controlledautomatically. When the manually set func-tion switches back to automatic mode, theindicator lamp above theà rocker switchlights up again.

Adjusting the climate mode settingsThis function is only available with 3-zoneautomatic climate control on vehicles forCanada.In automatic mode you can select the follow-ing airflow settings for the driver's and front-passenger areas:FOCUS high airflow that is set slightly

coolerMEDIUM medium airflow, standard settingDIFFUSE low airflow that is set slightly

warmer and with less of a draftX To set: set the climate mode using Audio20/COMAND (see separate operatinginstructions).

Setting the temperature

Dual-zone automatic climate controlDifferent temperatures can be set for thedriver's and front-passenger sides.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 157).

X To increase/reduce: press the upper orlower section of thew rocker switch.

orX Set the temperature using Audio 20/COMAND; see the separate operatinginstructions.Only change the temperature setting insmall increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).

3-zone automatic climate control

General notes

3-zone automatic climate control zones

You can select different temperature settingsfor the driver's and front-passenger sides aswell as for the rear compartment.

Setting the temperature in the front com-partment using the front control panelX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 157).

X To increase/reduce: press the upper orlower section of thew rocker switch.

orX Set the temperature using Audio 20/COMAND; see the separate operatinginstructions.Only change the temperature setting insmall increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).

Setting the temperature in the rear com-partment using the front control panelX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 157).

X Set the temperature with thew rockerswitch on the front control panel.

orX Set the temperature using Audio 20/COMAND; see the separate operatinginstructions.Only change the temperature setting insmall increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).

Operating the climate control systems 145

Climatecontrol

X Press the top or bottom section of the!rocker switch.The climate control menu in Audio 20/COMAND opens.

X Select the "Synchronization" function; seeseparate Audio 20/COMAND operatinginstructions.The temperature setting for the driver'sside is adopted for the front-passenger sideand the rear compartment.

Setting the temperature in the rear com-partment using the rear control panelX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 157).

X To increase/reduce: press the upper orlower section of thew rocker switch onthe rear control panel (Y page 141).Only change the temperature setting insmall increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).The set temperature appears on the rear-compartment display.

Setting the air distribution

Air distribution settings¯ Directs air through the defroster ventsP Directs air through the center and side

air ventsO Directs air through the footwell air

ventsS Directs air through the center, side and

footwell ventsa Directs air through the defroster and

footwell vents_ Directs air through the defroster, cen-

ter, side and footwell ventsb Directs air through the defroster, cen-

ter and side air ventsW Sets the air distribution to automatic

Adjusting3-zone automatic climate control: you can setthe air distribution separately for the driver'sand front-passenger side.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2(Y page 157).

X Press the_ button up or down.The various air distribution settings appearin Audio 20/COMAND.

X Press and hold the_ button upwardsuntil the desired position is reached.

orX Set the air distribution using Audio 20/COMAND; see the separate operatinginstructions.

Setting the airflow

Dual-zone automatic climate controlX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 157).

X To increase/reduce: press the upper orlower section of theH rocker switch.

orX Set the airflow using Audio 20/COMAND;see the separate operating instructions.

3-zone automatic climate control

Adjusting the front-compartment airflowYou can set the airflow separately for thefront and rear compartment.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 157).

X To increase/reduce: press the upper orlower section of theH rocker switch.

orX Set the airflow using Audio 20/COMAND;see the separate operating instructions.

146 Operating the climate control systemsClimatecontrol

Setting the rear compartment airflowX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 157).

X Press the top or bottom section of the!rocker switch.The Audio 20/COMAND climate controlmenu opens.

X Select the "Synchronization" function inthe climate control menu; see separateAudio 20/COMAND operating instruc-tions.The airflow setting for the front area isadopted for the rear compartment.

Setting the rear compartment airflowusing the rear control panelX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 157).

X To increase/reduce: press the upper orlower section of theK/I rockerswitch on the rear control panel.The selected airflow level set is shown inthe rear-compartment display.

Switching the synchronization func-tion on/off

General notesClimate control can be set centrally using thesynchronization function. The temperaturesetting is adopted for the front-passengerside. For 3-zone automatic climate control,the temperature setting is adopted for thefront-passenger side and rear compartment.

Activating/deactivating

Dual-zone automatic climate controlX Press the upper or lower section of the0 rocker switch.The indicator lamp in the0 rockerswitch lights up or goes out.

orX Activate/deactivate the synchronizationfunction using Audio 20/COMAND; see theseparate operating instructions).

The synchronization function deactivates ifthe settings for the front-passenger side arechanged.

3-zone automatic climate controlX Activate/deactivate the synchronizationfunction using Audio 20/COMAND; see theseparate operating instructions).

The synchronization function is deactivated:Rif the settings for the front-passenger sideare changedRif the settings for the rear compartment arechanged

Defrosting the windshield

General notesYou can use this function to defrost the wind-shield or to defrost the inside of the wind-shield and the front side windows.Switch off the "Windshield defrosting" func-tion as soon as the windshield is clear again.

Activating/deactivating the defrostingfunction for the windshieldX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 157).

X To activate: press the¬ rocker switchon the front control unit up or down.The indicator lamp above the¬ rockerswitch lights up. The current climate con-trol settings are deactivated.

Operating the climate control systems 147

Climatecontrol

The climate control system switches to thefollowing functions:Rhigh airflowRhigh temperatureRair distribution to the windshield andfront side windowsRair-recirculation mode offi If necessary, the "Cooling with air dehu-midification" function is activated. In thiscase, the indicator lamp above the¿ button remains switched off.

X To deactivate: press the¬ rockerswitch up or down.The indicator lamp above the¬ rockerswitch goes out. The previously selectedsettings are restored. Air-recirculationmode remains deactivated.

orX Press the top or bottom section of theÃrocker switch.

Defrosting the windows

Windows fogged up on the insideX Activate the cooling with air dehumidifica-tion function with the¿ rocker switch.

orX Activate the "Cooling with air dehumidifi-cation" function via Audio 20/COMAND;see the separate operating instructions.

X Switch on automatic mode using theÃrocker switch.

X If the windows continue to fog up, activatethe "Windshield defrosting" function usingthe¬ rocker switch.i You should only select this setting untilthe windshield is clear again.

Windows fogged up on the outsideX Activate the windshield wipers.X Switch on automatic mode using theÃrocker switch.

i If you clean the windows regularly, theydo not fog up so quickly.

Rear window defroster

General notesThe rear window defroster has a high currentdraw. You should therefore switch it off assoon as the rear window is clear. Otherwise,the rear window defroster switches off auto-matically after several minutes.If the battery voltage is too low, the rear win-dow defroster may switch off.

Activating/deactivatingX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 157).

X Press the¤ rocker switch up or down.The indicator lamp above the¤ rockerswitch lights up or goes out.

148 Operating the climate control systemsClimatecontrol

Problems with the rear window defroster

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The rear windowdefroster has deactiva-ted prematurely or can-not be activated.

The battery has not been sufficiently charged.X Switch off any consumers that are not required, e.g. readinglamps, interior lighting or the seat heating.When the battery is sufficiently charged, the rear windowdefroster can be activated again.

Activating/deactivating air-recircula-tion mode

General notesYou can also temporarily deactivate the flowof fresh air manually if unpleasant odors areentering the vehicle from outside. The airalready inside the vehicle will then be recir-culated.If you switch on air-recirculation mode, thewindows can fog up more quickly, in particu-lar at low temperatures. Only use air-recircu-lation mode briefly to prevent the windowsfrom fogging up.

Activating/deactivatingX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 157).

X To activate: press theg rocker switchup or down.The indicator lamp above theg rockerswitch lights up.

Air-recirculation mode switches on automat-ically:Rat high outside temperaturesRat high levels of pollution (3-zone automaticclimate control only)Rin a tunnel (vehicles with a navigation sys-tem only)

The indicator lamp above theg rockerswitch is not lit when automatic air-recircula-tion mode is activated. Outside air is addedafter about 30 minutes.

X To deactivate: press theg rockerswitch up or down.The indicator lamp above theg rockerswitch goes out.

Air-recirculation mode deactivates automati-cally:Rafter approximately five minutes at outsidetemperatures below approximately 41 ‡(5 †)Rafter approximately five minutes if coolingwith air dehumidification is deactivatedRafter approximately 30 minutes at outsidetemperatures above approximately 41 ‡(5 †) if the "Cooling with air dehumidifica-tion" function is activated

Activating/deactivating the residualheat function

General notesThe residual heat function is only availablewith 3-zone automatic climate control onvehicles for Canada.Once the engine is switched off, it is possibleto make use of the residual heat of the engineto continue heating or ventilating the frontcompartment of the vehicle for approximately30 minutes. The heating or ventilation timedepends on the interior temperature that hasbeen set.

Operating the climate control systems 149

Climatecontrol

Switching on/offX Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the igni-tion lock or remove it (Y page 157).

X To activate: press the! rocker switchup or down.The indicator lamp above the! rockerswitch lights up.

The blower will run at a low speed regardlessof the airflow setting.If you activate the residual heat function athigh temperatures, only the ventilation will beactivated. The blower runs at medium speed.X To deactivate: press the! rockerswitch up or down.The indicator lamp above the! rockerswitch goes out.

Residual heat is deactivated automatically:Rafter approximately 30 minutesRwhen the ignition is switched onRif the battery voltage drops

Perfume atomizer

Operating the perfume atomizer

G WARNINGIf children open the perfume vial, they coulddrink the perfume or it could come into con-tactwith their eyes. There is a risk of injury. Donot leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.If the perfume liquid has been drunk, consulta doctor. If perfume comes into contact withyour eyes or skin, rinse the eyes with cleanwater. If you continue to experience difficul-ties, consult a doctor.

H Environmental noteFull perfume vials must notbe disposed of with house-hold rubbish. They must becollected separately andrecycled to protect the envi-ronment.

Dispose of full perfume vialsin an environmentallyresponsible manner andtake them to a special wastecollection point.

: Perfume lid; Perfume vialThe perfume atomizer helps to improve driv-ing comfort.Using Audio 20/COMAND, you can:Rswitch the perfume atomizer on and off(see separate Audio 20/COMAND operat-ing instructions)Rregulate the perfume atomizer (see theseparate Audio 20/COMAND operatinginstructions)

The following conditions can affect your per-ception of the perfume intensity:Roperating mode of the climate control sys-temRinterior temperatureRtime of year/dayRair humidityRphysiological condition of occupants, e.g.fatigue or hunger

The perfume atomizer can only be operatedwhen the climate control system is switchedon and is only active when the glove box isclosed.The perfume atomizer is provided with a pre-filled perfume vial. You can also choose froma variety of filled perfume vials and an emptyvial which you can fill yourself.

150 Operating the climate control systemsClimatecontrol

If you refill an empty perfume vial, observe theseparate information sheet attached to thevial.

! If you do not use genuine Mercedes-Benzinterior perfumes, observe themanufactur-ers' safety notices on the perfume packag-ing.

Do not refill the pre-filled perfume vial when itis empty. Dispose of the used vial after use.X To insert the perfumevial: open the glovebox (Y page 299).

X Slide the perfume vial into the holder as faras it will go.

X To remove the perfume vial: pull out theperfume vial.

X To refill the perfume vial: unscrew the lidof the empty perfume vial to refill it your-self.

X Refill the vial with a maximum of 15 ml ofthe desired liquid perfume.

X Screw the lid back on to the vial.

! Only refill the vial when you are outsidethe vehicle. Otherwise, liquid perfumecould drip into the interior and contaminateit.

Always refill the empty refillable vial with thesame perfume. Otherwise, youmight not ach-ieve optimum results from the perfume atom-izer.

Operating the climate control systems 151

Climatecontrol

Z

Problems with the perfume atomizer

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The vehicle interior isnot perfumed althoughthe perfume atomizer isactivated.

The perfume vial has not been pushed into the holder as far as itwill go.X Slide the perfume vial into the holder as far as it will go.

The perfume vial has not been adequately filled.X Pre-filled vials: dispose of the empty vial.X Use a new pre-filled vial.X Refillable vials: refill the vial with a maximum of 15 ml of thesame perfume.

The perfume atomizer is faulty.X Have the perfume atomizer checked at a qualified specialistworkshop.

IonizationIonization is used to purify the air in the vehi-cle interior and attain an improved interiorclimate.The ionization of the interior air is odorlessand cannot be perceived directly in the vehi-cle interior.You can switch ionization on/off using Audio20/COMAND (see the separate operatinginstructions).Ionization can only be operated when theautomatic climate control is switched on. Theside air vent on the driver's side must beopen.

Setting the air vents

Important safety notes

G WARNINGVery hot or very cold air can flow from the airvents. This could result in burns or frostbite inthe immediate vicinity of the air vents. Thereis a risk of injury.Make sure that all vehicle occupants alwaysmaintain a sufficient distance to the air out-

lets. If necessary, redirect the airflow toanother area of the vehicle interior.

In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh airthrough the air vents into the vehicle interior,please observe the following notes:Rkeep the air inlet between the windshieldand the hood free of blockages, such as ice,snow or leaves.Rnever cover the air vents or air intake grillesin the vehicle interior.

Setting the center air vents

152 Setting the air ventsClimatecontrol

X To open/close: turn thumbwheel?,AorB to the left or right as far as it will go.

X To adjust the air direction: hold center airvent:,; or= by thumbwheel?,A orB and move it up or down or to the left orright.

Setting the side air vents

: Side window defroster vent; Side air vent, left= Thumbwheel for left side air ventX Toopen/close: turn thumbwheel= to theleft or right as far as it will go.

X To adjust the air direction: hold side airvent; by thumbwheel= and move it upor down or to the left or right.

Setting the rear-compartment airventsRear air vents are not available in all vehicles.

Vehicles with dual-zone automatic climate control

Vehicles with 3-zone automatic climate control: Rear-compartment air vent, left; Rear-compartment air vent, right= Rear-compartment air vent thumbwheel? Rear control panelX Toopen/close: turn thumbwheel= to theleft or right as far as it will go.

X To adjust the air direction: hold rear airvent: or; by themiddle fin andmove upor down or to the left or right.

Setting the air vents 153

Climatecontrol

Z

154

Useful information ............................ 156Notes onbreaking-in a newvehicle............................................................. 156Driving ............................................... 156Automatic transmission ................... 164Refueling ............................................ 171Parking ............................................... 174Driving tips ........................................ 178Driving systems ................................ 183

155

Drivingandparking

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optional equip-ment of your vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's Manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions.

i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops (Y page 26).

Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle

Important safety notesThe sensor system of some driving and driv-ing safety systems adjusts automaticallywhile a certain distance is being driven afterthe vehicle has been delivered or afterrepairs. Full system effectiveness is notreached until the end of this teach-in proce-dure.New and replaced brake pads and discs onlyreach their optimum braking effect after sev-eral hundred kilometers of driving. Compen-sate for this by applying greater force to thebrake pedal.

The first 1000 miles (1500 km)The more you look after the engine when it isnew, the more satisfied you will be with itsperformance in the future.RYou should therefore drive at varying vehi-cle and engine speeds for the first1000 miles (1500 km).RAvoid heavy loads, e.g. driving at full throt-tle, during this period.RWhen changing gears manually, change upin good time, before the tachometer needlereachesÔ of the way to the red area of thetachometer.

RDo not manually shift to a lower gear tobrake the vehicle.RTry to avoid depressing the acceleratorpedal beyond the point of resistance (kick-down).

After 1000miles (1500 km), you can increasethe engine speed gradually and acceleratethe vehicle to full speed.You should also observe these notes onbreaking in if the engine or parts of the drivetrain on your vehicle have been replaced.Always observe the respective speed limits.

Driving

Important safety notes

G WARNINGObjects in the driver's footwell can restrict thepedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.The operating and road safety of the vehicle isjeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.Make sure that all objects in the vehicle arestowed correctly, and that they cannot enterthe driver's footwell. Install the floormatssecurely and as specified in order to ensuresufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not useloose floormats and do not place floormats ontop of one another.

G WARNINGUnsuitable footwear can hinder correct usageof the pedals, e.g.:Rshoes with thick solesRshoes with high heelsRslippersThere is a risk of an accident.Wear suitable footwear to ensure correctusage of the pedals.

G WARNINGIf you switch off the ignition while driving,safety-relevant functions are only availablewith limitations, or not at all. This could affect,for example, the power steering and the brake

156 DrivingDrivingandparking

boosting effect. You will require considerablymore effort to steer and brake. There is a riskof an accident.Do not switch off the ignition while driving.

G WARNINGIf the parking brake has not been fullyreleased when driving, the parking brake can:Roverheat and cause a fireRlose its hold function.There is a risk of fire and an accident. Releasethe parking brake fully before driving off.

! Warm up the engine quickly. Do not usethe engine's full performance until it hasreached operating temperature.Only shift the automatic transmission tothe desired drive position when the vehicleis stationary.Where possible, avoid spinning the drivewheels when pulling away on slipperyroads. You could otherwise damage thedrive train.

SmartKey positions

SmartKey

g To remove the SmartKey1 Power supply for some consumers, such

as the windshield wipers2 Ignition (power supply for all consumers)

and drive position3 To start the engine

i The SmartKey can be turned in the igni-tion lock even if it is not the correct Smart-Key for the vehicle. The ignition is notswitched on. The engine cannot be started.

Vehicles with AIRPANEL: you can open theshutters in the radiator trim, by turning thekey to position 2 in the ignition lock. Afterapproximately 120 seconds the shuttersopen automatically. Further information onopening and cleaning the shutters(Y page 334).

Start/Stop button

General notesA checkwhich periodically establishes a radioconnection between the vehicle and theSmartKey determines whether a valid Smart-Key is in the vehicle. This occurs, for example,when starting the engine.To start the vehicle without actively using theSmartKey:Rthe Start/Stop button must be inserted inthe ignition lock.Rthe SmartKey must be in the vehicle.Rthe vehicle must not be locked with theSmartKey or KEYLESS-GO (Y page 81).

Pressing the Start/Stop button several timesin succession corresponds to the differentSmartKey positions in the ignition lock. This isonly the case if you are not depressing thebrake pedal.If you depress the brake pedal and press theStart/Stop button, the engine starts immedi-ately.Do not keep the SmartKey:Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobilephone or another SmartKeyRwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metalfoilRinside metallic objects, e.g. a metal caseThis can affect the functionality of the Smart-Key.

Driving 157

Drivingandparking

Z

The Start/Stop button can be removed fromthe ignition lock. Then, you can insert theSmartKey into the ignition lock.If you lock the vehicle with the SmartKey'sremote control or with KEYLESS-GO, after ashort time:Ryou will not be able to switch on the ignitionwith the Start/Stop button.Ryou will not be able to start the engine withthe Start/Stop button until the vehicle isunlocked again.

If you lock the vehicle centrally using the but-ton on the front door (Y page 87), you cancontinue to start the engine with the Start/Stop button.You do not have to remove the Start/Stopbutton from the ignition lock when you leavethe vehicle. You should, however, always takethe SmartKey with you when leaving the vehi-cle. As long as the SmartKey is in the vehicle:Rthe vehicle can be started using the Start/Stop buttonRthe electrically powered equipment can beoperated

The engine can be turned off while the vehicleis in motion by pressing and holding theStart/Stop button for approximately threeseconds. This function operates independ-ently of the ECO start/stop automatic engineswitch-off function.

SmartKey positions with the Start/Stopbutton

When you insert Start/Stop button: intoignition lock;, the system needs approx-

imately two seconds recognition time. Youcan then use Start/Stop button:.As soon as the ignition is switched on, all theindicator lamps in the instrument cluster lightup. If an indicator lamp does not go out afterstarting the engine or lights up while driving,see (Y page 285).If Start/Stop button: has not yet beenpressed, this corresponds to the SmartKeybeing removed from the ignition.X Insert Start/Stop button: into ignitionlock;.

X To switch on the power supply: pressStart/Stop button: once.The power supply is switched on. You cannow activate the windshield wipers, forexample.

The power supply is switched off again if:Rthe driver's door is opened andRyou press Start/Stop button: twicewhenin this position

X To switch on the ignition: press Start/Stop button: twice.The ignition is switched on.

The power supply is switched off again if:Rthe driver's door is opened andRyou press Start/Stop button: once whenin this position

= Start/Stop button USA? Start/Stop button Canada

158 DrivingDrivingandparking

Starting the engine

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,they could:Ropen the doors, thus endangering otherpeople or road users.Rget out and disrupt traffic.Roperate the vehicle's equipment.Additionally, children could set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshifting the automatic transmission out ofpark position PRStart the engine.There is a risk of an accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children or animals unattended in thevehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out ofreach of children.

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Inhalingthese exhaust gases leads to poisoning. Thereis a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leavethe engine running in enclosed spaces with-out sufficient ventilation.

G WARNINGFlammable materials introduced throughenvironmental influence or by animals canignite if in contact with the exhaust system orparts of the engine that heat up. There is a riskof fire.Carry out regular checks to make sure thatthere are no flammable foreign materials inthe engine compartment or in the exhaustsystem.

! Do not depress the accelerator whenstarting the engine.

General notesThe catalytic converter is preheated for up to30 seconds after a cold start. The sound ofthe engine may change during this time.

Automatic transmissionX Shift the transmission to position P(Y page 164).The transmission position display in themultifunction display showsP (Y page 166).

You can also start the engine when the trans-mission is in position N.

Starting procedure with the SmartKeyTo start the engine using the SmartKeyinstead of the Start/Stop button, pull theStart/Stop button out of the ignition lock.X Turn the SmartKey to position 3 in the igni-tion (Y page 157) lock and release it assoon as the engine is running.

If the engine will not start:X Remove the SmartKey from the ignitionlock.

X Reinsert the SmartKey into the ignition lockafter a short waiting period.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 157).The indicator lamps in the instrument clus-ter light up (Y page 284).

X Turn the SmartKey to position 3 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 157) and release it assoon as the engine is running.

Starting procedure with the Start/StopbuttonThe Start/Stop button is only available onvehicles with KEYLESS-GO or the KEYLESS-GO start function.The Start/Stop button can be used to startthe vehicle manually without inserting theSmartKey into the ignition lock. The Start/Stop button must be inserted in the ignition

Driving 159

Drivingandparking

Z

lock and the SmartKeymust be in the vehicle.This mode for starting the engine operatesindependently of the ECO start/stop auto-matic engine start function.You can start the engine if a valid SmartKey isin the vehicle. Switch off the engine andalways take the SmartKey with you whenleaving the vehicle, even if you only leave it fora short time. Pay attention to the importantsafety notes.X Depress the brake pedal and keep itdepressed.

X Press the Start/Stop button once(Y page 157).The engine starts.

Pulling away

Automatic transmission

G WARNINGIf the engine speed is above the idling speedand you engage transmission position D or R,the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There isa risk of an accident.When engaging transmission position D or R,always firmly depress the brake pedal and donot simultaneously accelerate.

! If a warning tone sounds and theRelease Park. BrakeRelease Park. Brake message appearsin the multifunction display, the parkingbrake is still applied. Release the parkingbrake.

X Depress the brake pedal and keep itdepressed.

X Shift the transmission to position D or R.X Release the brake pedal.X Carefully depress the accelerator pedal.The electric parking brake (Y page 176) isautomatically released.The redF (USA only) or! (Canadaonly) indicator lamp in the instrument clus-ter goes out.

It is only possible to shift the transmissionfrom position P to the desired position if youdepress the brake pedal. Only then is theparking lock released. If the brake pedal is notdepressed, the DIRECT SELECT lever can stillbe moved but the parking lock remainsengaged.The vehicle locks centrally once you havepulled away. The locking knobs in the doorsdrop down.You can open the doors from the inside at anytime.You can also deactivate the automatic lockingfeature, see the Digital Operator's Manual.

i Upshifts take place at higher enginespeeds after a cold start. This helps thecatalytic converter to reach its operatingtemperature more quickly.

Hill start assistHill start assist helps you when pulling awayforwards or in reverse on an uphill gradient. Itholds the vehicle for a short time after youhave removed your foot from the brake pedal.This gives you enough time to move your footfrom the brake pedal to the accelerator pedaland to depress it before the vehicle begins toroll.

G WARNINGAfter a short time, hill start assist will no lon-ger brake your vehicle and it could roll away.There is a risk of an accident and injury.Therefore, quickly move your foot from thebrake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Neverleave the vehicle when it is held by hill startassist.

X Remove your foot from the brake pedal.The vehicle is then held for about a second.

X Pull away.Hill start assist is not active if:Ryou are pulling away on a level road or on adownhill gradient.Rthe transmission is in position N.

160 DrivingDrivingandparking

Rthe electric parking brake is applied.RESP® is malfunctioning.

ECO start/stop function

IntroductionThe ECO start/stop function switches theengine off automatically if the vehicle is stop-ped under certain conditions.The engine starts automatically when thedriver wants to pull away again. The ECOstart/stop function thereby helps you toreduce the fuel consumption and emissionsof your vehicle.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the engine is switched off automatically andyou exit the vehicle, the engine is restartedautomatically. The vehicle may begin moving.There is a risk of accident and injury.If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn offthe ignition and secure the vehicle againstrolling away.

General notes

: ECO start/stop displayIf the engine has been switched off automat-ically by the ECO start/stop function, theè symbol is shown in the multifunctiondisplay.Every time you switch on the engine using theSmartKey or the Start/Stop button, the ECOstart/stop function is activated.

Automatic engine switch-offIf the vehicle is braked to a standstill inD orN,the ECO start/stop function switches off theengine automatically.The ECO start/stop function is operationalwhen:Rthe indicator lamp in the ECO button is litgreen.Rthe outside temperature is within the rangethat is suitable for the system.Rthe engine is at normal operating temper-ature.Rthe set temperature for the vehicle interiorhas been reached.Rthe battery is sufficiently charged.Rthe system detects that the windshield isnot fogged up when the air-conditioningsystem is switched on.Rthe hood is closed.Rthe driver's door is closed and the driver'sseat belt is fastened.

All of the vehicle's systems remain activewhen the engine is stopped automatically.TheHOLD function can also be activated if theengine has been switched off automatically. Itis then not necessary to continue applying thebrakes during the automatic stop phase.When you depress the accelerator pedal, theengine starts automatically and the brakingeffect of the HOLD function is deactivated.The engine can be switched off automaticallya maximum of four times (first stop and threesubsequent stops) in succession.

Automatic engine startThe engine starts automatically if:Ryou switch off the ECO start/stop functionby pressing the ECO button.Ryou switch to drive program S+.Rin transmission position D or N the brakepedal is released and the HOLD function isnot active.Ryou depress the accelerator pedal.

Driving 161

Drivingandparking

Z

Ryou engage reverse gear R.Ryou move the transmission out of positionP.Ryou unfasten your seat belt or open thedriver's door.Rthe vehicle starts to roll.Rthe brake system requires this.Rthe temperature in the vehicle interior devi-ates from the set range.Rthe system detects moisture on the wind-shield when the air-conditioning system isswitched on.Rthe battery's condition of charge is too low.Shifting the transmission to position P doesnot start the engine.

Deactivating/activating the ECO start/stop function

X To switch off: press ECO button:.Indicator lamp; goes out.

X To switch on: press ECO button:.Indicator lamp; lights up.

If indicator lamp; is off, the ECO start/stopfunction has been deactivated manually or asthe result of a malfunction. The engine willthen not be switched off automatically whenthe vehicle stops.Selecting drive program S+ deactivates theECO start/stop function. If you press ECObutton:, the ECO start/stop function isactivated.

162 DrivingDrivingandparking

Problems with the engine

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The engine does notstart. The starter motorcan be heard.

RThere is a malfunction in the engine electronics.RThere is a malfunction in the fuel supply.X Before attempting to start the engine again, turn the SmartKeyin the ignition back to position 0 or press the Start/Stop buttonrepeatedly until all indicator lamps in the instrument cluster goout.

X Try to start the engine again (Y page 159). Avoid excessivelylong and frequent attempts to start the engine as thesewill drainthe battery.

If the engine does not start after several attempts:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine does notstart. You cannot hearthe starter motor.

The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak ordischarged.X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 349).If the engine does not start despite attempts to jump-start it:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The startermotor was exposed to a thermal load that was too high.X Try to start the engine again (Y page 159).If the engine still does not start:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine is not run-ning smoothly and ismisfiring.

There is a malfunction in the engine electronics or in a mechanicalcomponent of the engine management system.X Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly.Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic con-verter and damage it.

X Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialistworkshop.

The coolant tempera-ture gauge shows avalue above 248 ‡(120 †).

The coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the engineis no longer being cooled sufficiently.X Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolant tocool down.

X Check the coolant level (Y page 327). Observe the warningnotes as you do so and add coolant if necessary.

Driving 163

Drivingandparking

Z

Automatic transmission

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the engine speed is above the idling speedand you engage transmission position D or R,the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There isa risk of an accident.When engaging transmission position D or R,always firmly depress the brake pedal and donot simultaneously accelerate.

G WARNINGThe automatic transmission switches to neu-tral positionNwhen you switch off the engine.The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of anaccident.After switching off the engine, always switchto parking positionP. Prevent the parked vehi-cle from rolling away by applying the parkingbrake.

Bear in mind that the power transmissionbetween the engine and the transmission isinterrupted when the engine is switched off.For this reason, shift the automatic transmis-sion to P when the engine is switched off andthe vehicle is at a standstill. Apply the electricparking brake to prevent the vehicle from roll-ing away.

DIRECT SELECT lever

Overview of transmission positions

j Park position with parking lockk Reverse geari Neutralh DriveThe DIRECT SELECT lever is on the right of thesteering column.The DIRECT SELECT lever always returns toits original position. The current transmissionposition P, R, N or D appears in the transmis-sion position display in the multifunction dis-play (Y page 166).

Engaging park position P

! If the engine speed is too high or the vehi-cle is moving, do not shift the automatictransmission directly fromD toR, fromR toD or directly to P. The automatic transmis-sion could otherwise be damaged.

j Park position with parking lockk Reverse gear

164 Automatic transmissionDrivingandparking

i Neutralh DriveX Push the DIRECT SELECT lever in the direc-tion of arrow P.

Engaging park position P automaticallyPark position P is automatically engaged if:Ryou switch off the engine using the Smart-Key and remove the SmartKey.Ryou switch off the engine using the Start/Stop button and open the driver's door.Ryou open the driver's door when the vehicleis stationary or driving at very low speedand the transmission is in position D or R.

Engaging reverse gear R

! Only shift the automatic transmission toRwhen the vehicle is stationary.

X If the transmission is in position D or N:push the DIRECT SELECT lever up past thefirst point of resistance.

X If the transmission is in position P: depressthe brake pedal and push the DIRECTSELECT lever up past the first point ofresistance.

The ECO start/stop function is not availablewhen reverse gear is engaged. Further infor-mation on the ECO start/stop function(Y page 161).

Shifting to neutral N

G WARNINGIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,they could:Ropen the doors, thus endangering otherpeople or road users.Rget out and disrupt traffic.Roperate the vehicle's equipment.

Additionally, children could set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshifting the automatic transmission out ofpark position PRStart the engine.There is a risk of an accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children or animals unattended in thevehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out ofreach of children.

X If the transmission is in position D or R:push the DIRECT SELECT lever up or downto the first point of resistance.

X If the transmission is in position P: depressthe brake pedal and push the DIRECTSELECT lever up or down to the first point ofresistance.

If you switch the engine off with the trans-mission in position R or D, the automatictransmission shifts to N automatically.With the SmartKey: if you then open one ofthe front doors or remove the SmartKey fromthe ignition, the automatic transmissionshifts to P.With the Start/Stop button: if you thenopen one of the front doors, the automatictransmission shifts to P.If you want the automatic transmission toremain in neutral N, e.g. when having thevehicle cleaned in an automatic car washwitha towing system:Using the SmartKey:X Switch on the ignition.X Depress the brake pedal and keep itdepressed.

X Shift to neutral N.X Release the brake pedal.X Release the electric parking brake.X Switch off the ignition and leave the Smart-Key in the ignition lock.

Automatic transmission 165

Drivingandparking

Z

With the Start/Stop button:X Switch on the ignition.X Depress the brake pedal and keep itdepressed.

X Pull the Start/Stop button out of the igni-tion.

X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.X Shift to neutral N.X Release the brake pedal.X Release the electric parking brake.X Switch off the ignition and leave the Smart-Key in the ignition lock.

Engaging drive position DX If the transmission is in position R or N:push the DIRECT SELECT lever down pastthe first point of resistance.

X If the transmission is in position P: depressthe brake pedal and push the DIRECTSELECT lever down past the first point ofresistance.

Transmission position and drive pro-gram display! If the transmission position display in themultifunction display is not working, youshould pull away carefully to checkwhetherthe desired transmission position isengaged. Ideally, you should select trans-mission position D and drive program E orS.

: Status symbol drive program; Transmission position= Gear

The current transmission position and driveprogram appear in the multifunction display.The arrows in the transmission position dis-play show how and into which transmissionpositions you can change using the DIRECTSELECT lever.

Transmission positions

B Park positionThis prevents the vehicle from roll-ing away when stopped.Do not shift the transmission intoposition P (Y page 164) unless thevehicle is stationary. The parkinglock should not be used as a brakewhen parking. Always apply theelectronic parking brake in addi-tion to the parking lock in order tosecure the vehicle.The automatic transmission shiftsto P automatically if you:Rremove the SmartKeyRswitch off the engine when in Ror D and open one of the frontdoors

If the vehicle electronics are mal-functioning, the transmission maybe locked in position P. Have thevehicle electronics checked imme-diately at a qualified specialistworkshop.

C Reverse gearOnly shift the transmission to Rwhen the vehicle is stationary.

166 Automatic transmissionDrivingandparking

A NeutralDo not shift the transmission to Nwhile driving. Otherwise, the auto-matic transmission could be dam-aged.No power is transmitted from theengine to the drive wheels.Releasing the brakes will allow youto move the vehicle freely, e.g. topush it or tow it.If ESP® is deactivated or faulty:shift the transmission to positionNif the vehicle is in danger of skid-ding, e.g. on icy roads.If you switch off the engine usingthe SmartKey or the Start/Stopbutton, the automatic transmissionshifts to neutral N automatically.

! Rolling in neutralN can damagethe drive train.

7 DriveThe automatic transmissionchanges gear automatically. Allforward gears are available.

Driving tips

Changing gearThe automatic transmission shifts to the indi-vidual gears automatically when it is in trans-mission position D. This automatic gear shift-ing behavior is determined by:Rthe selected drive program (Y page 167)Rthe position of the accelerator pedalRthe road speed

Accelerator pedal positionYour style of driving influences how the auto-matic transmission shifts gear:Rlittle throttle: early upshiftsRmore throttle: late upshifts

Double-clutch functionWhen shifting down, the double-clutch func-tion is active regardless of the currently selec-ted drive program. The double-clutch functionreduces load change reactions and is condu-cive to a sporty driving style. The sound gen-erated by the double-clutch function dependson the drive program selected.

KickdownUse kickdown for maximum acceleration.X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond thepressure point.The automatic transmission shifts to alower gear depending on the engine speed.

X Ease off the accelerator pedal once thedesired speed is reached.The automatic transmission shifts back up.

Rocking the vehicle freeRocking the vehicle free by shifting back andforth between transmission positionsD andRcan help to free a vehicle that has becomestuck in mud or snow.The vehicle's engine management restrictsswitching between transmission positions Dand R to speeds up to a maximum of 5 mph(9 km/h).To shift back and forth between transmissionpositions D and R, move the DIRECT SELECTlever up and down past the point of resist-ance.

AGILITY SELECT switchUse the AGILITY SELECT switch to change thedrive program. Depending on the drive pro-gram selected the following vehicle charac-teristics will change:Rthe drive (engine and transmission man-agement)Rthe suspensionRthe steering

Automatic transmission 167

Drivingandparking

Z

Rthe availability of the ECO start/stop func-tion (Y page 161)Rthe climate control settings

- Dual-zone automatic climate control(Y page 140)

- vehicles for Canada: three-zone auto-matic climate control (Y page 142)

Rthe rear window defroster operation period(Y page 148)Rthe performance of the seat heating(Y page 112)

Each time you start the engine using theSmartKey or the Start/Stop button, drive pro-gram C is activated. For further informationabout starting the engine, see (Y page 159).

X Push AGILITY SELECT switch: up ordown, until the desired drive program isselected.The selected drive program appears in themultifunction display. After five secondsthe display goes out and the status icon ofthe selected drive program appears.In addition, the current drive program set-tings are displayed in the Audio 20/COMAND display.

Available drive programs:

I Individual Individual settings

S+ Sport Plus Extremely sporty drivingcharacteristics

S Sport Sporty driving character-istics

C Comfort Comfortable and econom-ical driving characteristics

E Eco Particularly economicaldriving characteristics

Additional information for drive programs(Y page 168).Using the steering wheel paddle shifters, youcan temporarily change gears yourself. Forfurther information on the manual drive pro-gram (Y page 169).

Drive programs

Drive program I (Individual)In drive program I the following properties ofthe drive program can be selected:Rthe drive (engine and transmission man-agement)Rthe suspensionRthe steeringTo permanently select the gears in the driveprogram I using the steering wheel paddleshifters, select the permanent manual gear-shift program.Information about the selection of drive pro-gram I with COMAND or Audio 20 can befound in the Digital Operator's Manual.

Drive program S+ (Sport Plus)Drive program S+ is characterized by the fol-lowing:Rthe vehicle delivers extremely sporty han-dling characteristicsRthe vehicle pulling away in first gearRthe automatic transmission shifting uplaterRthe fuel consumption possibly being higheras a result of the later automatic transmis-sion shift points

168 Automatic transmissionDrivingandparking

Rthe suspension exhibits particularly stiffspringing and damping settings (vehicleswith AIRMATIC)Rthe ECO start/stop function is not available

Drive program S (Sport)Drive program S is characterized by the fol-lowing:Rthe vehicle exhibits sporty driving charac-teristicsRthe vehicle pulling away in first gearRthe automatic transmission shifting uplaterRthe fuel consumption possibly being higheras a result of the later automatic transmis-sion shift pointsRthe suspension exhibits hard springing anddamping settings (vehicles with AIRMATIC)

Drive program C (Comfort)Drive program C is characterized by the fol-lowing:Rthe vehicle delivers comfortable, economi-cal handling characteristics.Rthe vehicle pulling away more gently inforward and reverse gears, unless theaccelerator pedal is depressed fully.Rincreased sensitivity. This improves drivingstability on slippery road surfaces, forexample.Roptimal fuel consumption resulting fromthe automatic transmission shifting upsooner. The vehicle is driven in the lowengine speed range and thewheels are lesslikely to spin.

Drive program E (Eco)Drive program E is characterized by the fol-lowing:Rthe vehicle exhibits comfortable, economi-cal handling characteristicsRthe vehicle pulling away more gently inforward and reverse gears, unless theaccelerator pedal is depressed fully.Rincreased sensitivity. This improves drivingstability on slippery road surfaces, forexample.Roptimal fuel consumption resulting fromthe automatic transmission shifting upsooner. The vehicle is driven in the lowengine speed range and thewheels are lesslikely to spin.Rduring deceleration, the engine is discon-nected from the drive train. The vehicleuses kinetic energy and consumes less fuel(overrun mode).Rthe performance of air-conditioning systemand heating are reduced

Manual gear shifting

General notes

: Left steering wheel paddle shifter: shiftsdown

; Right steering wheel paddle shifter: shiftsup

Using the steering wheel paddle shifters, youcan temporarily change gears yourself. Thetransmission must be in position D.

Automatic transmission 169

Drivingandparking

Z

ActivatingX Shift the transmission to position D.X Pull the left or right steering wheel paddleshifter (Y page 169).Manual gear shifting is activated tempora-rily. The selected gear appears in the mul-tifunction display.

Shifting gearsPulling on the left or right steering wheel pad-dle shifter, allows you to shift gears yourselffor a limited time. Depending onwhich paddleshifter is pulled, the automatic transmissionimmediately shifts into the next gear down orup, if permitted.X To shift up: pull the right-hand steeringwheel paddle shifter (Y page 169).The automatic transmission shifts up to thenext gear.If the maximum engine speed on the cur-rently engaged gear is reached and youcontinue to accelerate, the automatictransmission automatically shifts up inorder to prevent engine damage.

X To shift down: pull on the left-hand steer-ing wheel paddle shifter (Y page 169).The automatic transmission shifts down tothe next gear.If the engine exceeds the maximum enginespeed when shifting down, the automatictransmission protects against engine dam-age by not shifting down.Automatic down shifting occurs whencoasting.

Shift recommendation

The gearshift recommendations assist you inadopting an economical driving style. The rec-ommended gear is shown in themultifunctiondisplay.X Shift to recommended gear; accordingto gearshift recommendation: whenshown in the multifunction display of theinstrument cluster.

DeactivatingIf you have activated manual gear shifting, itwill remain active for a certain amount oftime. Under certain conditions the minimumamount of time is extended, e.g. in the case oflateral acceleration, during an overrun phaseor when driving on steep terrain.If manual gear shifting is deactivated, thegears will be selected automatically.You can also deactivate manual gear selec-tion:X Pull on the right-hand steering wheel pad-dle shifter and hold it in place (Y page 169).

orX Use the DIRECT SELECT lever to switch thetransmission position.

orX Use the AGILITY SELECT switch to changethe drive program (Y page 167).Manual gear selection is deactivated.

170 Automatic transmissionDrivingandparking

Problems with the transmission

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The transmission hasproblems shifting gear.

The transmission is losing oil.X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist work-shop immediately.

The acceleration abilityis deteriorating.The transmission nolonger changes gear.

The transmission is in emergency mode.It is only possible to shift into second gear and reverse gear.X Stop the vehicle.X Shift the transmission to position P.X Switch off the engine.X Wait at least ten seconds before restarting the engine.X Shift the transmission to position D or R.If D is selected, the transmission shifts into second gear; if R isselected, the transmission shifts into reverse gear.

X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist work-shop immediately.

Transfer caseThis section is only valid for vehicles with 4-wheel drive (4MATIC). Power is always trans-mitted to both axles.

! Performance tests may only be carriedout on a 2-axle dynamometer. The brakesystem or transfer case could otherwise bedamaged. Contact a qualified specialistworkshop for a performance test.

! To prevent ESP® from intervening, theignition must be switched off (SmartKey orthe Start/Stop button in position 0 or 1) if:Rthe electric parking brake is being testedon a brake dynamometer.Rthe vehicle is being towed with only oneaxle raised (not permitted for vehicleswith 4MATIC).

The brake system could otherwise be dam-aged.

! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towedwith either the front or the rear axle raised,as doing so will damage the transmission.

Refueling

Important safety notes

G WARNINGFuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuelincorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explo-sion.You must avoid fire, open flames, creatingsparks and smoking. Switch off the engineand, if applicable, the auxiliary heating beforerefueling.

G WARNINGFuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.There is a risk of injury.You must make sure that fuel does not comeinto contact with your skin, eyes or clothingand that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuelvapors. Keep fuel away from children.

Refueling 171

Drivingandparking

Z

If you or others come into contact with fuel,observe the following:RWash away fuel from skin immediatelyusing soap and water.RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes,immediately rinse them thoroughly withclean water. Seek medical assistance with-out delay.RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assis-tance without delay. Do not induce vomit-ing.RImmediately change out of clothing whichhas come into contact with fuel.

G WARNINGElectrostatic buildup can create sparks andignite fuel vapors. There is a risk of fire andexplosion.Always touch the vehicle body before openingthe fuel filler flap or touching the fuel pumpnozzle. Any existing electrostatic buildup isthereby discharged.

Do not get into the vehicle again during therefueling process. Otherwise, electrostaticcharge could build up again.

! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with agasoline engine. Do not switch on the igni-tion if you accidentally refuel with thewrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enterthe fuel system. Even small amounts of thewrong fuel could result in damage to thefuel system and the engine. Notify a quali-fied specialist workshop and have the fueltank and fuel lines drained completely.

! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage thefuel system.

! Take care not to spill any fuel on paintedsurfaces. You could otherwise damage thepaintwork.

! Use a filter when refueling from a fuel can.Otherwise, the fuel lines and/or injectionsystem could be blocked by particles fromthe fuel can.

If you overfill the fuel tank, fuel could sprayout when the fuel pump nozzle is removed.For further information on fuel and fuel quality(Y page 397).

Refueling

General informationPay attention to the important safety notes(Y page 171).If you unlock/lock the vehicle from the out-side, the fuel filler flap also unlocks/locks.The position of the fuel filler cap is displayed8 in the instrument cluster. The arrownext to the filling pump indicates the side ofthe vehicle.

Opening the fuel filler flap

: To open the fuel filler flap; To insert the fuel filler cap= Tire pressure table? Fuel type to be usedX Switch off the engine.X Remove the SmartKey from the ignitionlock.

or, in vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-func-tion or KEYLESS‑GOX Open the driver's door.The on-board electronics now have status0. This is the same as the SmartKey havingbeen removed.

172 RefuelingDrivingandparking

X Press the fuel filler flap in the direction ofarrow:.The fuel filler flap swings up.

X Turn the fuel filler flap counter-clockwiseand remove it.

X Insert the fuel filler cap into the holder onthe inside of fuel filler flap;.

X Completely insert the filler neck of the fuelpump nozzle into the tank, hook in placeand refuel.

X Only fill the tank until the pump nozzleswitches off.

Do not add any more fuel after the pumpstops filling for the first time. Otherwise, fuelmay leak out.

Closing the fuel filler flapX Replace the cap on the filler neck and turnclockwise until it engages audibly.

X Close the fuel filler flap.Close the fuel filler flap before locking thevehicle.If you are driving with the fuel filler cap open,the8 reserve fuel warning lamp flashes. Amessage appears in the multifunction display(Y page 270).

Refueling 173

Drivingandparking

Z

Problems with fuel and the fuel tank

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Fuel is leaking from thevehicle.

G WARNINGThe fuel line or the fuel tank is faulty.Risk of explosion or fire.X Apply the electric parking brake.X Switch off the engine.X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.or, in vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function or KEYLESS‑GOX Open the driver's door.The on-board electronics now have status 0. This is the same asthe SmartKey having been removed.

X Do not restart the engine under any circumstances.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The fuel filler flap can-not be opened.

The fuel filler flap is not unlocked.orThe SmartKey battery is discharged.X Unlock the vehicle (Y page 81).orX Unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Y page 83).

The fuel filler flap is unlocked, but the opening mechanism is jam-med.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Parking

Important safety notes

G WARNINGFlammable material such as leaves, grass ortwigsmay ignite if they come into contactwithhot parts of the exhaust system or exhaustgas flow. There is a risk of fire.Park the vehicle so that no flammable mate-rials come into contact with parts of the vehi-cle which are hot. Take particular care not topark on dry grassland or harvested grainfields.

G WARNINGIf you switch off the ignition while driving,safety-relevant functions are only availablewith limitations, or not at all. This could affect,for example, the power steering and the brakeboosting effect. You will require considerablymore effort to steer and brake. There is a riskof an accident.Do not switch off the ignition while driving.

174 ParkingDrivingandparking

G WARNINGIf you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-cle, they could set it inmotion by, for example:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshift the automatic transmission out of theparking position P.Rstart the engine.In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-ment and become trapped. There is a risk ofan accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

! Always secure the vehicle correctlyagainst rolling away. Otherwise, the vehicleor its drivetrain could be damaged.

To ensure that the vehicle is secured againstrolling away unintentionally:Rthe electric parking brake must be applied.Rthe transmission must be in position P andthe SmartKey must be removed from theignition lock.Rthe front wheels must be turned towardsthe curb on steep uphill or downhill gradi-ents.Rthe empty vehicle must be secured at thefront axle with a wheel chock or similar, forexample, on uphill or downhill gradients.Ra laden vehicle must also be secured at therear axle with a wheel chock or similar, forexample, on uphill or downhill gradients.

Switching off the engine

Important safety notes

G WARNINGThe automatic transmission switches to neu-tral positionNwhen you switch off the engine.The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of anaccident.After switching off the engine, always switchto parking positionP. Prevent the parked vehi-

cle from rolling away by applying the parkingbrake.

Vehicles with automatic transmissionX Apply the electric parking brake.X Shift the transmission to position P.X With the SmartKey: turn the SmartKey toposition0 in the ignition lock and remove it.The immobilizer is activated.

X With the Start/Stop button: press theStart/Stop button (Y page 157).The engine stops and all the indicatorlamps in the instrument cluster go out.When the driver's door is closed, this cor-responds to SmartKey position1. When thedriver's door is open, this corresponds toSmartKey position 0: "SmartKey removed".

If you switch the engine off with the trans-mission in position R or D, the automatictransmission shifts to N automatically.With the SmartKey: if you then open one ofthe front doors or remove the SmartKey fromthe ignition, the automatic transmissionshifts to P.With the Start/Stop button: if you thenopen one of the front doors, the automatictransmission shifts to P.If you want the automatic transmission toremain in neutral N, e.g. when having thevehicle cleaned in an automatic car washwitha towing system:Using the SmartKey:X Switch on the ignition.X Depress the brake pedal and keep itdepressed.

X Shift to neutral N.X Release the brake pedal.X Release the electric parking brake.X Switch off the ignition and leave the Smart-Key in the ignition lock.

Parking 175

Drivingandparking

Z

With the Start/Stop button:X Switch on the ignition.X Depress the brake pedal and keep itdepressed.

X Pull the Start/Stop button out of the igni-tion.

X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.X Shift to neutral N.X Release the brake pedal.X Release the electric parking brake.X Switch off the ignition and leave the Smart-Key in the ignition lock.

In the event of an emergency, the engine canbe turned off while the vehicle is in motion bypressing and holding the Start/Stop buttonfor three seconds. This function operatesindependently of the ECO start/stop auto-matic engine switch-off function.

Electric parking brake

General notes

G WARNINGIf you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-cle, they could set it inmotion by, for example:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshift the automatic transmission out of theparking position P.Rstart the engine.In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-ment and become trapped. There is a risk ofan accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

The function of the electric parking brake isdependent on the on-board voltage. If the on-board voltage is low or there is a malfunctionin the system, it may not be possible to applythe released parking brake.X If this is the case, only park the vehicle onlevel ground and secure it to prevent it roll-ing away.

X Shift the automatic transmission to posi-tion P.

It may not be possible to release an appliedparking brake if the on-board voltage is low orthere is a malfunction in the system. Contacta qualified specialist workshop.The electric parking brake performs a func-tion test at regular intervals while the engineis switched off. The sounds that can be heardwhile this is occurring are normal.

Applying/releasing manually

X To apply: push handle:.When the electric parking brake is applied,the redF (USA only) or! (Canadaonly) indicator lamp lights up in the instru-ment cluster.The electric parking brake can also beapplied when the SmartKey is removed.

176 ParkingDrivingandparking

X To release: pull handle:.The redF (USA only) or! (Canadaonly) indicator lamp in the instrument clus-ter goes out.

The electric parking brake can only bereleased:Rwhen the SmartKey is in position 1 or 2 inthe ignition lock (Y page 157) orRif the ignition was switched on using theStart/Stop button.

Applying automaticallyThe electric parking brake is applied auto-matically:Rif DISTRONIC PLUS brings the vehicle to astandstill orRif the HOLD function is keeping the vehiclestationary orRif Active Parking Assist is holding the vehi-cle at a standstill

In addition, at least one of the following con-ditions must be fulfilled:Rthe engine is switched off.Rthe driver's door is open and the seat belt isnot fastened.Rthere is a system malfunction.Rthe power supply is insufficient.Rthe vehicle is stationary for a lengthyperiod.

The redF (USA only) or! (Canadaonly) indicator lamp in the instrument clusterlights up.The electric parking brake is not automati-cally engaged if the engine is switched off bythe ECO start/stop function.

Releasing automaticallyYour vehicle's electric parking brake is auto-matically released if all of the following con-ditions are met:Rthe engine is running.Rthe transmission is in position D or R.

Rthe seat belt has been fastened.Ryou depress the accelerator pedal.If the transmission is in position R, the trunklid must be closed.If your seat belt is not fastened, the followingconditions must be fulfilled to automaticallyrelease the electric parking brake:Rthe driver's door is closed.Ryou have shifted out of transmission posi-tion P or you have previously driven fasterthan 2 mph (3 km/h).

Ensure that you do not depress the acceler-ator pedal unintentionally. Otherwise theparking brake will be released and the vehiclewill start to move.

Emergency brakingThe vehicle can also be braked during anemergency by using the electric parkingbrake.X While driving, push handle:of the electricparking brake (Y page 176).

The vehicle is braked as long as you keephandle: of the electric parking brakedepressed. The longer the electric parkingbrake handle: is depressed, the greater thebraking force.During braking:Ra warning tone soundsRthe Please Release Parking BrakePlease Release Parking Brakemessage appearsRthe redF (USA only) or! (Canadaonly) indicator lamp in the instrument clus-ter flashes

When the vehicle has been braked to a stand-still, the electric parking brake is engaged.

Parking the vehicle for a long periodIf you leave the vehicle parked for longer thanfour weeks, the battery may be damaged byexhaustive discharging and further damagedin the event of this occurring again.

Parking 177

Drivingandparking

Z

X Connect a trickle charger.i You can obtain information about tricklechargers from a qualified specialist work-shop.

If you leave the vehicle parked for longer thansix weeks, the vehiclemay suffer damage as aresult of lack of use.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop andseek advice.

Driving tips

General driving tips

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you switch off the ignition while driving,safety-relevant functions are only availablewith limitations, or not at all. This could affect,for example, the power steering and the brakeboosting effect. You will require considerablymore effort to steer and brake. There is a riskof an accident.Do not switch off the ignition while driving.

G WARNINGIf you operate mobile communication equip-ment while driving, you will be distracted fromtraffic conditions. You could also lose controlof the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.Only operate this equipment when the vehicleis stationary.

Observe the legal requirements for the coun-try in which you are driving. Some jurisdic-tions prohibit the driver from using a mobilephone while driving a vehicle.If you make a call while driving, always usehands-freemode. Only operate the telephonewhen the traffic situation permits. If you areunsure, pull over to a safe location and stopbefore operating the telephone.Bear in mind that at a speed of only 30 mph(approximately 50 km/h), the vehicle covers

a distance of 44 ft (approximately 14 m) persecond.

Drive sensibly – save fuelObserve the following tips to save fuel:X The tires should always be inflated to therecommended tire pressure.

X Remove unnecessary loads.X Remove roof racks when they are not nee-ded.

X Warm up the engine at low engine speeds.X Avoid frequent acceleration or braking.X Have all maintenance work carried out asindicated by the service intervals in theMaintenance Booklet or by the serviceinterval display.

Fuel consumption also increases when driv-ing in cold weather, in stop-start traffic and inhilly terrain.

Drinking and driving

G WARNINGDrinking and driving and/or taking drugs anddriving are very dangerous combinations.Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs canaffect your reflexes, perceptions and judg-ment.The possibility of a serious or even fatal acci-dent is greatly increased when you drink ortake drugs and drive.Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allowanyone to drive who has been drinking or tak-ing drugs.

Emission control

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Inhalingthese exhaust gases leads to poisoning. Thereis a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leavethe engine running in enclosed spaces with-out sufficient ventilation.

178 Driving tipsDrivingandparking

Certain engine systems are designed to keepthe level of poisonous components in exhaustfumes within legal limits.These systems only work at peak efficiency ifthey are serviced exactly in accordance withthe manufacturer's specifications. For thisreason, all work on the enginemust be carriedout by qualified and authorized Mercedes-Benz technicians.The engine settings must not be changedunder any circumstances. Furthermore, allspecific service work must be carried out atregular intervals and in accordance with theMercedes-Benz service requirements. Detailscan be found in the Maintenance Booklet.

ECO displayThe ECO display shows you how economicalyour driving style is. The ECO display assistsyou in achieving the most economical drivingstyle for the selected settings and prevailingconditions. Your driving style can significantlyinfluence the vehicle's consumption.

: Acceleration; Coasting= Constant? Additional range achievedRange? is shown under Bonus fr. StartBonus fr. Startand represents the additional range achievedsince the beginning of the journey as a resultof an adapted driving style.If the fuel level has dropped into the reserverange, the Reserve FuelReserve Fuel message is shownin the multifunction display instead of

range?. The8 warning lamp in theinstrument cluster also lights up(Y page 291).The ECO display consists of three sections,with an inner and outer area. The sectionscorrespond to the following three categories:

: Acceleration (evaluation of allacceleration processes):Rthe outer area fills up and theinner area lights up green: mod-erate acceleration, especially athigher speedsRthe outer area empties and theinner area is gray: sporty accel-eration

; Coasting (evaluation of all decel-eration processes):Rthe outer area fills up and theinner area lights up green: antic-ipatory driving, keeping your dis-tance and early release of theaccelerator. The vehicle cancoast without use of the brakes.Rthe outer area empties and theinner area is gray: frequent heavybraking

= Constant (continuous evaluationover the entire journey):Rthe outer area fills up and theinner area lights up green: con-stant speed and avoidance ofunnecessary acceleration anddecelerationRthe outer area empties and theinner area is gray: fluctuations inspeed

The three inner areas display the current driv-ing style and light up green as a result of aparticularly economical driving style.Depending on the driving situation, up to twoareas may light up simultaneously.

Driving tips 179

Drivingandparking

Z

At the beginning of the journey, the threeouter areas are empty and fill up as a result ofeconomical driving. A higher level indicates amore economical driving style. If the threeouter areas are completely filled at the sametime, the driver has adopted the most eco-nomical driving style for the selected settingsand prevailing conditions. The ECO displayborder lights up.The ECO display does not indicate the actualfuel consumption. The additionally achievedrange displayed under Bonus fr. StartBonus fr. Startdoes not indicate a fixed consumption reduc-tion.In addition to driving style, the actual con-sumption is affected by other factors, suchas:RloadRtire pressureRcold startRchoice of routeRelectrical consumers switched onThese factors are not included in the ECO dis-play.An economical driving style specially requiresdriving at moderate engine speeds.Achieving a higher value in the categories"Acceleration" and "Constant":Robserve the gearshift recommendations.Rdrive the vehicle in drive program E (vehi-cles with the AGILITY SELECT switch)

On long journeys at a constant speed, e.g. onthe highway, only the outer area for "con-stant" will change.The ECO display summarizes the driving stylefrom the start of the journey to its completion.Therefore, there are more marked changes inthe outer areas at the start of a journey. Onlonger journeys, there are fewer changes. Formoremarked changes, perform amanual rest(Y page 237).For further information on the ECO display,see (Y page 236).

Braking

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you shift down on a slippery road surface inan attempt to increase the engine's brakingeffect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.There is an increased danger of skidding andaccidents.Do not shift down for additional engine brak-ing on a slippery road surface.

Downhill gradients

! On long and steep gradients, you mustreduce the load on the brakes by shiftingearly to a lower gear. This allows you to takeadvantage of the engine braking effect andhelps avoid overheating and excessivewear of the brakes.When you take advantage of the enginebraking effect, a drive wheel may not turnfor some time, e.g. on a slippery road sur-face. This could cause damage to the drivetrain. This type of damage is not covered bythe Mercedes-Benz warranty.

Heavy and light loads

G WARNINGIf you rest your foot on the brake pedal whiledriving, the braking system can overheat. Thisincreases the stopping distance and can evencause the braking system to fail. There is arisk of an accident.Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Neverdepress the brake pedal and the acceleratorpedal at the same time.

! Depressing the brake pedal constantlyresults in excessive and premature wear tothe brake pads.

If the brakes have been subjected to a heavyload, do not stop the vehicle immediately.Drive on for a short while. This allows the air-flow to cool the brakes more quickly.

180 Driving tipsDrivingandparking

Wet roadsIf you have driven for a long time in heavy rainwithout braking, theremay be a delayed reac-tion from the brakeswhen braking for the firsttime. Thismay also occur after the vehicle hasbeen washed or driven through deep water.You have to depress the brake pedal morefirmly. Maintain a greater distance from thevehicle in front.After driving on a wet road or having the vehi-cle washed, brake firmly while paying atten-tion to the traffic conditions. This will warmupthe brake discs, thereby drying them morequickly and protecting them against corro-sion.

Limited braking performance on salt-treated roadsIf you drive on salted roads, a layer of saltresidue may form on the brake discs andbrake pads. This can result in a significantlylonger braking distance.RIn order to prevent any salt build-up, applythe brakes occasionally while paying atten-tion to the traffic conditions.RCarefully depress the brake pedal and thebeginning and end of a journey.RMaintain a greater distance to the vehicleahead.

Servicing the brakes

! If the red brake warning lamp lights up inthe instrument cluster and you hear awarn-ing tone while the engine is running, thebrake fluid level may be too low. Observeadditional warning messages in the multi-function display.The brake fluid level may be too low due tobrake pad wear or leaking brake lines.Have the brake system checked immedi-ately. This work should be carried out at aqualified specialist workshop.

! A function or performance test shouldonly be carried out on a 2-axle dynamom-

eter. If you wish to operate the vehicle onsuch a dynamometer, please consult anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center inadvance. You could otherwise damage thedrive train or the brake system.

! The ESP® system operates automatically.The engine and the ignition must thereforebe switched off (the SmartKey must be inposition 0 or 1 in the ignition lock or theStart/Stop button must be in position 0 or1) if the electric parking brake is tested ona brake dynamometer.Braking triggered automatically by ESP®may cause severe damage to the brakesystem.

All checks and maintenance work on thebrake system must be carried out at a quali-fied specialist workshop. Consult a qualifiedspecialist workshop to arrange this.Have brake pads installed and brake fluidreplaced at a qualified specialist workshop.If the brake system has only been subject tomoderate loads, you should test the function-ality of your brakes at regular intervals.Information on BAS (Brake Assist) (Y page 67)and BAS PLUS (Brake Assist PLUS)(Y page 67).For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-mends only installing the following brakedisks and brake pads/linings:Rbrake disks that have been approved byMercedes-BenzRbrake pads/linings that have beenapproved by Mercedes-Benz or that are ofan equivalent standard of quality

Other brake disks or brake pads/linings cancompromise the safety of your vehicle.Always replace all brake disks and brakepads/linings on an axle at the same time.Always install new brake pads/linings whenreplacing brake disks.The vehicle is equipped with lightweightbrake disks to which the wheel assembly withrim and threaded connection is matched.

Driving tips 181

Drivingandparking

Z

The use of brake disks other than thoseapproved by Mercedes-Benz can change thetrackwidth and is subject to approval, if appli-cable.Shock-type loads when handling the brakedisks, such as when changing wheels, canlead to a reduction in comfort when drivingwith lightweight brake disks. Avoid shock-type loads on the lightweight brake disks,particularly on the brake plate.Mercedes-Benz recommends that you onlyuse brake fluid that has been speciallyapproved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz,or which corresponds to an equivalent qualitystandard. Brake fluid which has not beenapproved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles orwhich is not of an equivalent quality couldaffect your vehicle's operating safety.

Driving on wet roads

HydroplaningIf water has accumulated to a certain depthon the road surface, there is a danger ofhydroplaning occurring, even if:Ryou drive at low speeds.Rthe tires have adequate tread depth.For this reason, in the event of heavy rain or inconditions in which hydroplaning may occur,you must drive in the following manner:Rlower your speed.Ravoid ruts.Ravoid sudden steering movements.Rbrake carefully.

Driving on flooded roads

! Bear in mind that vehicles traveling infront or in the opposite direction createwaves. This may cause the maximum per-missible water depth to be exceeded.Failure to observe these notesmay result indamage to the engine, electrical systemsand transmission.

If you have to drive on stretches of road onwhich water has collected, please bear inmind that:Rthe water level, in the case of still water,may not exceed a maximum point of thelower edge of the vehicle bodyRyou should drive no faster than at a walkingpace

Winter driving

G WARNINGIf you shift down on a slippery road surface inan attempt to increase the engine's brakingeffect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.There is an increased danger of skidding andaccidents.Do not shift down for additional engine brak-ing on a slippery road surface.

G DANGERIf the exhaust pipe is blocked or adequateventilation is not possible, poisonous gasessuch as carbon monoxide (CO) may enter thevehicle. This is the case, e.g. if the vehiclebecomes trapped in snow. There is a risk offatal injury.If you leave the engine or the auxiliary heatingrunning, make sure the exhaust pipe and areaaround the vehicle are clear of snow. Toensure an adequate supply of fresh air, open awindow on the side of the vehicle that is notfacing into the wind.

Have your vehicle winter-proofed at a quali-fied specialist workshop at the onset of win-ter.Drive particularly carefully on slippery roadsurfaces. Avoid sudden acceleration, steeringand brakingmaneuvers. Do not use the cruisecontrol or DISTRONIC PLUS.If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot bestopped when moving at low speed:X Shift the transmission to position N.

182 Driving tipsDrivingandparking

The outside temperature indicator is notdesigned to serve as an ice-warning deviceand is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.Changes in the outside temperature are dis-played after a short delay.Indicated temperatures just above the freez-ing point do not guarantee that the road sur-face is free of ice. The road may still be icy,especially in wooded areas or on bridges. Thevehicle could skid if you fail to adapt yourdriving style. Always adapt your driving styleand drive at a speed to suit the prevailingweather conditions.You should pay special attention to road con-ditions when temperatures are around freez-ing point.For more information on driving with snowchains, see (Y page 361).For more information on driving with summertires, see (Y page 360).Observe the notes in the "Winter operation"section (Y page 360).

Driving systems

Mercedes-Benz Intelligent DriveMercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive stands forinnovative driver assistance and safety sys-tems which enhance comfort and support thedriver in critical situations. With these intelli-gent co-ordinated systems Mercedes-Benzhas set a milestone on the path towardsautonomous driving.Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive embraces allelements of active and passive safety in onewell thought out system – for the safety of thevehicle occupants and that of other roadusers.Further information on driving safety systems(Y page 66).

Cruise control

General notesCruise control maintains a constant roadspeed for you. It brakes automatically in orderto avoid exceeding the set speed. Change intoa lower gear in good time on long and steepdownhill gradients. This is especially impor-tant if the vehicle is laden. By doing so, youwill make use of the braking effect of theengine. This relieves the load on the brakesystem and prevents the brakes from over-heating and wearing too quickly.Use cruise control only if road and traffic con-ditions make it appropriate to maintain asteady speed for a prolonged period. You canstore any road speed above 20 mph(30 km/h).

Important safety notesIf you fail to adapt your driving style, cruisecontrol can neither reduce the risk of an acci-dent nor override the laws of physics. Cruisecontrol cannot take into account the road,traffic and weather conditions. Cruise controlis only an aid. You are responsible for the dis-tance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed,for braking in good time and for staying inyour lane.Do not use cruise control:Rin road and traffic conditions which do notallow you to maintain a constant speed e.g.in heavy traffic or on winding roadsRon slippery road surfaces. Braking or accel-erating could cause the drivewheels to losetraction and the vehicle could then skidRwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog,heavy rain or snow

If there is a change of drivers, advise the newdriver of the speed stored.

Driving systems 183

Drivingandparking

Z

Cruise control lever

: To activate or increase speed; To activate or reduce speed= To deactivate cruise control? To activate at the current speed/last

stored speedWhen you activate cruise control, the storedspeed is shown in the multifunction displayfor five seconds. In addition, theé symbolappears in the multifunction display. In thespeedometer, the segments between thestored speed and the maximum speed lightup.

Storing and maintaining the currentspeed

You can store the current speed if you aredriving faster than 20 mph (30 km/h).

X Accelerate the vehicle to the desiredspeed.

X Briefly press the cruise control lever up:or down;.

X Remove your foot from the acceleratorpedal.Cruise control is activated. The vehicleautomatically maintains the stored speed.

i Cruise control may be unable to maintainthe stored speed on uphill gradients. Thestored speed is resumed when the gradientevens out. Cruise control maintains thestored speed on downhill gradients byautomatically applying the brakes.

Storing the current speed or call up thelast stored speed

G WARNINGIf you call up the stored speed and it is lowerthan the current speed, the vehicle deceler-ates. If you do not know the stored speed, thevehicle could decelerate unexpectedly. Thereis a risk of an accident.Pay attention to the road and traffic condi-tions before calling up the stored speed. If youdo not know the stored speed, store thedesired speed again.

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsyou:.

X Remove your foot from the acceleratorpedal.The first time cruise control is activated, itstores the current speed or regulates the

184 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

speed of the vehicle to the previouslystored speed.

Setting a speed

Keep in mind that it may take a brief momentuntil the vehicle has accelerated or braked tothe speed set.X Press the cruise control lever up: for ahigher speed or down; for a lower speed.

X To adjust the set speed in 1 mph incre-ments (1 km/h increments): brieflypress the cruise control lever up: ordown; to the pressure point.Every time the cruise control lever ispressed up: or down; the last speedstored is increased or reduced.

X To adjust the set speed in 5 mph incre-ments (10 km/h increments): brieflypress the cruise control lever up: ordown; to the pressure point.Every time the cruise control lever ispressed up: or down; the last speedstored is increased or reduced.i Cruise control is not deactivated if youdepress the accelerator pedal. If you accel-erate to overtake, cruise control adjuststhe vehicle's speed to the last speed storedafter you have finished overtaking.

Deactivating cruise control

There are several ways to deactivate cruisecontrol:X Briefly press the cruise control lever for-wards:.

orX Brake.Cruise control is automatically deactivated if:Ryou engage the electric parking brakeRyou are driving at less than 20 mph(30 km/h)RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP®Ryou shift the transmission to position Nwhile driving

If cruise control is deactivated, you will hear awarning tone. You will see the Cruise Con‐Cruise Con‐trol Offtrol Off message in the multifunction dis-play for approximately five seconds.

i When you switch off the engine, the lastspeed stored is cleared.

DISTRONIC PLUS

General notesDISTRONIC PLUS regulates the speed andautomatically helps you maintain the dis-tance to the vehicle detected in front. Vehi-cles are detected with the aid of the radarsensor system. DISTRONIC PLUS brakesautomatically so that the set speed is notexceeded.

Driving systems 185

Drivingandparking

Z

Change into a lower gear in good time on longand steep downhill gradients. This is espe-cially important if the vehicle is laden. Bydoing so, you will make use of the brakingeffect of the engine. This relieves the load onthe brake system and prevents the brakesfrom overheating and wearing too quickly.If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that there is a riskof a collision, you will be warned visually andacoustically. DISTRONIC PLUS cannot pre-vent a collision without your intervention. Anintermittent warning tone will then sound andthe distance warning lamp will light up in theinstrument cluster. Brake immediately inorder to increase the distance to the vehiclein front or take evasive action provided it issafe to do so.DISTRONIC PLUS operates in range between0 mph (0 km/h) and 120 mph (200 km/h).Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS while driving onroads with steep gradients.As DISTRONIC PLUS transmits radar waves, itcan resemble the radar detectors of theresponsible authorities. You can refer to therelevant chapter in the Operator's Manual ifquestions are asked about this.

i USA only: This device has been approvedby the FCC as a "Vehicular Radar System".The radar sensor is intended for use in anautomotive radar system only. Removal,tampering, or altering of the devicewill voidany warranties, and is not permitted by theFCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use inany non-approved way.Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user's authority tooperate the equipment.

i Canada only: This device complies withRSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation issubject to the following two conditions:1. This device may not cause harmful inter-ference, and2. this device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.

Removal, tampering, or altering of thedevice will void any warranties, and is notpermitted. Do not tamper with, alter, or usein any non-approved way.Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user's authority tooperate the equipment.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGDISTRONIC PLUS does not react to:Rpeople or animalsRstationary obstacles on the road, e.g. stop-ped or parked vehiclesRoncoming and crossing trafficAs a result, DISTRONIC PLUSmay neither givewarnings nor intervene in such situations.There is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake.

G WARNINGDISTRONIC PLUS cannot always clearly iden-tify other road users and complex traffic sit-uations.In such cases, DISTRONIC PLUS may:Rgive an unnecessary warning and thenbrake the vehicleRneither give a warning nor interveneRaccelerate or brake unexpectedlyThere is a risk of an accident.Continue to drive carefully and be ready tobrake, in particular when warned to do so byDISTRONIC PLUS.

G WARNINGDISTRONIC PLUS brakes your vehicle with upto 50% of themaximumpossible deceleration.If this braking force is insufficient, DISTRONICPLUS warns you visually and audibly. There isa risk of an accident.In such cases, apply the brakes yourself andtry to take evasive action.

186 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD functionis activated, the vehicle brakes automati-cally in certain situations. To prevent dam-age to the vehicle, deactivate DISTRONICPLUS and the HOLD function in the follow-ing or other similar situations:Rwhen towing the vehicleRin the car wash

If you fail to adapt your driving style,DISTRONIC PLUS can neither reduce the riskof accident nor override the laws of physics.DISTRONIC PLUS cannot take into accountthe road, traffic and weather conditions.DISTRONIC PLUS is only an aid. You areresponsible for the distance to the vehicle infront, for vehicle speed, for braking in goodtime and for staying in your lane.Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS:Rin road and traffic conditions which do notallow you to maintain a constant speed e.g.in heavy traffic or on winding roadsRon slippery road surfaces. Braking or accel-erating could cause the drivewheels to losetraction and the vehicle could then skidRwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog,heavy rain or snow

DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect narrowvehicles driving in front, e.g. motorcycles, orvehicles driving on a different line.In particular, the detection of obstacles canbe impaired if:Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything elsecovering the sensorsRthere is snow or heavy rainRthere is interference by other radar sourcesRthere are strong radar reflections, forexample, in parking garages

If DISTRONIC PLUS no longer detects a vehi-cle in front, DISTRONIC PLUS may unexpect-edly accelerate the vehicle to the storedspeed.

This speed may:Rbe too high if you are driving in a filter laneor an exit laneRbe so high in the right lane that you passvehicles driving on the left (left-hand drivecountries)Rbe so high in the left lane that you passvehicles driving on the right (right-handdrive countries)

If there is a change of drivers, advise the newdriver of the speed stored.

Cruise control lever

: To activate or increase speed; To activate or reduce speed= To deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS? To activate at the current speed/last

stored speedA To set the specified minimum distance

Selecting DISTRONIC PLUS

X Checkwhether LIM indicator lamp: is off.

Driving systems 187

Drivingandparking

Z

If it is off, DISTRONIC PLUS is already selec-ted.If it is not, press the cruise control lever inthe direction of arrow;.LIM indicator lamp: in the cruise controllever goes out. DISTRONIC PLUS is selec-ted.

Activating DISTRONIC PLUS

Activation conditionsIn order to activate DISTRONIC PLUS, the fol-lowing conditions must be fulfilled:Rthe engine must be started. It may take upto two minutes after pulling away beforeDISTRONIC PLUS is operational.Rthe electric parking brake must bereleased.RESP® must be active, but not intervening.RActive Parking Assist must not be activa-ted.Rthe transmission must be in position D.Rthe driver's door must be closed when youshift from P to D or your seat belt must befastened.Rthe front-passenger door and rear doorsmust be closed.

Activating

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsyou; or press it up: or down=.DISTRONIC PLUS is selected.

X To adjust the set speed in 1 mph incre-ments (1 km/h increments): briefly

press the cruise control lever up: to thepressure point for a higher speed, or down= for a lower speed.Every time the cruise control lever ispressed up or down, the last speed storedis increased or reduced.

orX To adjust the set speed in 5 mph incre-ments (10 km/h increments): brieflypress the cruise control lever up: pastthe pressure point for a higher speed, ordown= for a lower speed.Every time the cruise control lever ispressed up or down, the last speed storedis increased or reduced.

X Remove your foot from the acceleratorpedal.Your vehicle adapts its speed to that of thevehicle in front, but only up to the desiredstored speed.

i If you do not fully release the acceleratorpedal, the DISTRONICDISTRONIC PLUSPLUS PassivePassivemes-sage appears in the multifunction display.The set distance to a slower-moving vehiclein front will then not bemaintained. Youwillbe driving at the speed you determine bythe position of the accelerator pedal.

You can also activate DISTRONIC PLUS whenstationary. The lowest speed that can be set is20 mph (30 km/h).X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsyou; or press it up: or down=.DISTRONIC PLUS is selected.

Activating at the current speed/laststored speedG WARNINGIf you call up the stored speed and it differsfrom the current speed, the vehicle acceler-ates or decelerates. If you do not know thestored speed, the vehicle could accelerate orbrake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an acci-dent.Pay attention to the road and traffic condi-tions before calling up the stored speed. If you

188 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

do not know the stored speed, store thedesired speed again.

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsyou:.

X Remove your foot from the acceleratorpedal.DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. The firsttime it is activated, the current speed isstored. Otherwise, it sets the vehicle cruisespeed to the previously stored value.

Driving with DISTRONIC PLUS

Pulling away and driving

X If you want to pull away withDISTRONIC PLUS: remove your foot fromthe brake pedal.

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsyou:.

orX Accelerate briefly.Your vehicle pulls away and adapts itsspeed to that of the vehicle in front. If no

vehicle is detected in front, your vehicleaccelerates to the set speed.

i The vehicle can also pull away when it isfacing an unidentified obstacle or is drivingon a different line from another vehicle. Thevehicle then brakes automatically. There isa risk of an accident. Be ready to brake at alltimes.

If there is no vehicle in front, DISTRONICPLUS operates in the same way as cruisecontrol.If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle infront has slowed down, it brakes your vehicle.In this way, the distance you have selected ismaintained.If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a faster-movingvehicle in front, it increases the driving speed.However, the vehicle is only accelerated up tothe speed you have stored.

Selecting the drive programDISTRONIC Plus supports a sporty drivingstyle when you have selected the S or S+driving program (Y page 168). Accelerationbehind the vehicle in front or to the set speedis then noticeably more dynamic. If you haveselected the C or E driving program, the vehi-cle accelerates more gently. This setting isrecommended in stop-and-start traffic.

Changing lanesIf you change to the passing lane, DISTRONICPLUS supports you when:Ryou are driving faster than 45 mph(70 km/h)Ryou switch on the appropriate turn signalRDISTRONIC PLUS does not detect a dangerof collision

If these conditions are fulfilled, your vehicle isaccelerated. Acceleration will be interruptedif changing lanes takes too long or if the dis-tance between your vehicle and the vehicle infront becomes too small.

i When changing lanes, DISTRONIC PLUSmonitors the left lane on left-hand drive

Driving systems 189

Drivingandparking

Z

vehicles and the right lane on right-handdrive vehicles.

StoppingG WARNINGWhen leaving the vehicle, even if it is brakedonly by DISTRONIC PLUS, it could roll away if:Rthere is a malfunction in the system or inthe voltage supply.RDISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivatedwith the cruise control lever, e.g. by a vehi-cle occupant or from outside the vehicle.Rthe electrical system in the engine com-partment, the battery or the fuses havebeen tampered with.Rthe battery is disconnected.Rthe accelerator pedal has been depressed,e.g. by a vehicle occupant.

There is a risk of an accident.If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn offDISTRONIC PLUS and secure the vehicleagainst rolling away.

For further information on deactivatingDISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 192).If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle infront is stopping, it brakes your vehicle until itis stationary.Once your vehicle is stationary, it remainsstationary and you do not need to depress thebrake.After a time, the electric parking brakesecures the vehicle and relieves the servicebrake.Depending on the specified minimum dis-tance, your vehicle will come to a standstill ata sufficient distance behind the vehicle infront. The specified minimum distance is setusing the control on the cruise control lever.

The electric parking brake automaticallysecures the vehicle if DISTRONIC PLUS isactivated and:Rthe seat belt is unfastened and the driver'sdoor is open.Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is auto-matically switched off by the ECO start/stop function.Ra system malfunction occurs.Rthe power supply is not sufficient.If amalfunction occurs, then the transmissionmay be shifted into position P automatically.

Setting a speed

X Press the cruise control lever up: for ahigher speed or down; for a lower speed.

X To adjust the set speed in 1 mph incre-ments (1 km/h increments): brieflypress the cruise control lever up: ordown; to the pressure point.Every time the cruise control lever ispressed up: or down; the last speedstored is increased or reduced.

X To adjust the set speed in 5 mph incre-ments (10 km/h increments): brieflypress the cruise control lever up: ordown; to the pressure point.Every time the cruise control lever ispressed up: or down;, the last speedstored is increased or reduced.

i If you accelerate to overtake, DISTRONICPLUS adjusts the vehicle's speed to the lastspeed stored after you have finished over-taking.

190 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Setting the specifiedminimumdistanceYou can set the specified minimum distancefor DISTRONIC PLUS by varying the time spanbetween one and two seconds.With this func-tion, you can set the minimum distance thatDISTRONIC PLUS keeps to the vehicle infront, dependent on vehicle speed. You cansee this distance in the multifunction display(Y page 191).

i Make sure that you maintain the mini-mum distance to the vehicle in front asrequired by law. Adjust the distance to thevehicle in front if necessary.

X To increase: turn control; in direction=.DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a greaterdistance between your vehicle and thevehicle in front.

X To decrease: turn control; in direc-tion:.DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a shorterdistance between your vehicle and thevehicle in front.

DISTRONIC PLUS displays in the instru-ment cluster

Displays in the speedometer

If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front,segments between the speed of the vehicle infront: and stored speed; light up. Thesegments likewise light up if a vehicle in frontis detected in the fast lane.

i For design reasons, the speed displayedin the speedometer may differ slightly fromthe speed set for DISTRONIC PLUS.

Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is deacti-vated

: Vehicle in front, if detected; Distance indicator, current distance to

the vehicle in front= Specified minimum distance to the vehi-

cle in front; adjustable? Own vehicleIn the Assistance menu (Y page 244) of theon-board computer, you can select the assis-tance graphics display.

Driving systems 191

Drivingandparking

Z

X Select the Assistance Info DisplayAssistance Info Displayfunction using the on-board computer(Y page 243).

Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is activa-ted

: DISTRONIC PLUS active (text onlyappears when the cruise control lever isactuated)

; Vehicle in front, if detected= Specified minimum distance to the vehi-

cle in front; adjustable? Own vehicleIn the Assistance menu (Y page 244) of theon-board computer, you can select the assis-tance graphics display.X Select the Assistance Info DisplayAssistance Info Displayfunction using the on-board computer(Y page 243).

You will see the stored speed for about fivesecondswhen you activateDISTRONIC PLUS.

Deactivating DISTRONIC PLUS

There are several ways to deactivateDISTRONIC PLUS:X Briefly press the cruise control lever for-wards:

orX Brake, unless the vehicle is stationary.When you deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS, youwill see the DISTRONICDISTRONIC PLUSPLUS OffOffmessage inthe multifunction display for approximatelyfive seconds.

i The last speed stored remains stored untilyou switch off the engine.

i DISTRONIC PLUS is not deactivated if youdepress the accelerator pedal.

DISTRONIC PLUS is automatically deactiva-ted if:Ryou engage the electric parking brake or ifthe vehicle is automatically secured withthe electric parking brakeRESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP®Rthe transmission is in the P, R orN positionRyou pull the cruise control lever towardsyou in order to pull away and the front-passenger door or one of the rear doors isopenRthe vehicle has skiddedRyou activate Active Parking AssistIf DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated, you willhear a warning tone. You will see theDISTRONIC PLUS OffDISTRONIC PLUS Off message in the multi-function display for approximately five sec-onds.

Tips for driving with DISTRONIC PLUS

General notesPay particular attention in the following trafficsituations:RCornering, going into and coming out of abendRVehicles traveling on a different lineROther vehicles changing lanesRNarrow vehicles

192 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

RObstructions and stationary vehiclesRCrossing vehiclesIn such situations, brake if necessary.DISTRONIC PLUS is then deactivated.

Cornering, going into and coming out of abend

The ability of DISTRONIC PLUS to detect vehi-cles when cornering is limited. Your vehiclemay brake unexpectedly or late.

Vehicles traveling on a different line

DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect vehiclestraveling on a different line. The distance tothe vehicle in front will be too short.

Other vehicles changing lanes

DISTRONIC PLUS has not detected the vehi-cle cutting in yet. The distance to this vehiclewill be too short.

Narrow vehicles

DISTRONIC PLUS has not yet detected thevehicle in front on the edge of the road,because of its narrow width. The distance tothe vehicle in front will be too short.

Obstructions and stationary vehicles

DISTRONIC PLUS does not brake for obsta-cles or stationary vehicles. If, for example, the

Driving systems 193

Drivingandparking

Z

detected vehicle turns a corner and revealsan obstacle or stationary vehicle, DISTRONICPLUS will not brake for these.

Crossing vehicles

DISTRONIC PLUS may mistakenly detectvehicles that are crossing your lane. Activat-ing DISTRONIC PLUS at traffic lights withcrossing traffic, for example, could causeyour vehicle to pull away unintentionally.

DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assistand Stop&Go Pilot

General notes

DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist andStop&Go Pilot aids you in keeping the vehiclein the center of the driving lane by means ofmoderate steering interventions in a speedrange from 0 - 125 mph (0 - 200 km/h).It monitors the area in front of your vehicle bymeans of camera system: at the top of thewindshield.

At speeds of more than 37 mph (60 km/h)Steering Assist focuses on clear lane mark-ings (left and right).In a speed range from 0 - 37 mph(0 - 60 km/h) Stop&Go Pilot focuses on thevehicle in front, taking into account lanemarkings, e.g. when following vehicles in atraffic jam.If these conditions are not present, SteeringAssist and Stop&Go Pilot cannot provideassistance.DISTRONIC PLUS must be active in order forthe function to be available.

Important safety notesIf you fail to adapt your driving style,DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist andStop&Go Pilot can neither reduce the risk ofan accident nor override the laws of physics.It cannot take into account road, weather ortraffic conditions. DISTRONIC PLUS withSteering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot is only anaid. You are responsible for the distance tothe vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, forbraking in good time and for staying in yourlane.DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist andStop&Go Pilot does not detect road and traf-fic conditions and does not detect all roadusers. If you are following a vehicle which isdriving towards the edge of the road, yourvehicle could come into contact with the curbor other road boundaries. In the case of devi-ations in roadmarkings, beware of other roadusers, e.g. cyclists that are in the direct vicin-ity of your vehicle.Obstacles such as building site huts on thelane or projecting out into the lane are notdetected.An inappropriate steering intervention, e.g.after intentionally driving over a lanemarking,can be corrected at any time if you steerslightly in the opposite direction.DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist andStop&Go Pilot cannot continuously keep yourvehicle in lane. In some cases, the steeringintervention is not sufficient to bring the vehi-

194 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

cle back to the lane. In such cases, you muststeer the vehicle yourself to ensure that itdoes not leave the lane.The systemmay be impaired or may not func-tion if:Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insuffi-cient illumination of the road, or due tosnow, rain, fog or sprayRthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic,the sun or reflections (e.g. when the roadsurface is wet)Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up, damagedor covered, for instance by a sticker, in thevicinity of the cameraRthere are no, several or unclear lane mark-ings for a lane, e.g. in areas with road con-struction workRthe lane markings are worn away, dark orcovered up, e.g. by dirt or snowRthe distance to the vehicle in front is toosmall and the lanemarkings thus cannot bedetectedRthe lane markings change quickly, e.g.lanes branch off, cross one another ormergeRthe road is narrow and windingRthere are strong shadows cast on the roadThe system is switched to passive and no lon-ger assists you by performing steering inter-ventions if:Ryou actively change laneRyou switch on the turn signalRtake your hands off the steeringwheel or donot steer for a prolonged period of time

i After you have finished changing lanes,Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are auto-matically active again.

Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot cannotprovide assistance:Ron very sharp cornersRa loss of tire pressure or a defective tire hasbeen detected and displayed.

Pay attention also to the important safetynotes for DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 186).The steering interventions are carried outwith a limited steering moment. The systemrequires the driver to keep his hands on thesteering wheel and to steer himself.If you do not steer yourself or if take yourhands off the steering wheel for a prolongedperiod of time, the system will first alert youwith a visual warning. A steering wheel sym-bol appears in themultifunction display. If youhave still not started to steer and have nottaken hold of the steering wheel after fiveseconds at the latest, a warning tone alsosounds to remind you to take control of thevehicle. Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilotswitch to passive mode. DISTRONIC PLUSremains active.

Activating Steering Assist and Stop&GoPilot

X Press button;.Indicator lamp: lights up. The DTR+:DTR+:Steering Assist. OnSteering Assist. On message appearsin themultifunction display. Steering Assistand Stop&Go Pilot are activated.

Driving systems 195

Drivingandparking

Z

Information in the multifunction display

If Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are acti-vated but is not ready for a steering interven-tion, steering wheel symbol: appears ingray. If the system provides you with supportby means of steering interventions, sym-bol: is shown in green.

Deactivating Steering Assist and Stop&GoPilotX Press button;.Indicator lamp: goes out. The DTR+:DTR+:Steering Assist. OffSteering Assist. Off messageappears in the multifunction display. Steer-ing Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are deactiva-ted.

When DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated, Steer-ing Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are deactivatedautomatically.

HOLD function

General notesThe HOLD function can assist the driver in thefollowing situations:Rwhen pulling away, especially on steepslopesRwhen maneuvering on steep slopesRwhen waiting in trafficThe vehicle is kept stationary without thedriver having to depress the brake pedal.The braking effect is canceled and the HOLDfunction deactivated when you depress theaccelerator pedal to pull away.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen leaving the vehicle, it can still roll awaydespite being braked by the HOLD function if:Rthere is a malfunction in the system or inthe voltage supply.Rthe HOLD function has been deactivated bypressing the accelerator pedal or the brakepedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant.Rthe electrical system in the engine com-partment, the battery or the fuses havebeen tampered with.Rthe battery is disconnectedThere is a risk of an accident.If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn offthe HOLD function and secure the vehicleagainst rolling away.

! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD functionis activated, the vehicle brakes automati-cally in certain situations. To prevent dam-age to the vehicle, deactivate DISTRONICPLUS and the HOLD function in the follow-ing or other similar situations:Rwhen towing the vehicleRin the car wash

Activation conditionsYou can activate the HOLD function if all ofthe following conditions are fulfilled:Rthe vehicle is stationary.Rthe engine is running or if it has been auto-matically switched off by the ECO start/stop function.Rthe driver's door is closed or your seat beltis fastened.Rthe electric parking brake is released.Rthe transmission is in position D, R or N.RDISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated.

196 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Activating the HOLD function

X Make sure that the activation conditionsare met.

X Depress the brake pedal.X Quickly depress the brake pedal furtheruntil: appears in the multifunction dis-play.The HOLD function is activated. You canrelease the brake pedal.

i If depressing the brake pedal the firsttime does not activate the HOLD function,wait briefly and then try again.

Deactivating the HOLD functionThe HOLD function is deactivated automati-cally if:Ryou accelerate and the transmission is inposition D or R.Rthe transmission is in position P.Ryou depress the brake pedal again with acertain amount of pressure until: disap-pears from the multifunction display.Ryou secure the vehicle using the electricparking brake.Ryou activate DISTRONIC PLUS.

i After a time, the electric parking brakesecures the vehicle and relieves the servicebrake. The HOLD function is then deacti-vated.

The electric parking brake automaticallysecures the vehicle if the HOLD function isactivated and:Rthe driver's door is open and the driver'sseat belt is unfastened.Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is auto-matically switched off by the ECO start/stop function.Ra system malfunction occurs.Rthe power supply is not sufficient.If amalfunction occurs, then the transmissionmay be shifted into position P automatically.

AIRMATIC

General notesAIRMATIC is an air suspension with variabledamping for improved driving comfort. All-round level control ensures the best possiblesuspension and constant ground clearance,even with a laden vehicle. When you drivefast, the vehicle is lowered automatically toimprove driving safety and to reduce fuel con-sumption. There is also the option tomanuallyadjust the vehicle level. AIRMATIC consists oflevel setting, level control and the AdaptiveDamping System ADS.The vehicle level can be set using the AGILITYSELECT switch (Y page 167) or the level but-ton (Y page 198). The setting always corre-sponds to the last selected function.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen the vehicle is being lowered, peoplecould become trapped if their limbs arebetween the vehicle body and the wheels orunderneath the vehicle. There is a risk ofinjury.Make sure no one is underneath the vehicle orin the immediate vicinity of the wheel archeswhen the vehicle is being lowered.

Driving systems 197

Drivingandparking

Z

i If one of the doors is open, the vehicle isnot lowered.

Vehicle level

Setting the raised vehicle level

It is possible to choose between the "Normal"and "Raised" vehicle levels below a speed50 mph (80 km/h). Select the "Normal" set-ting for normal road surfaces and "Raised" fordriving with snow chains or on particularlypoor road surfaces. Your selection remainsstored even if you remove the SmartKey fromthe ignition lock.X Start the engine.

If indicator lamp; is not lit:X Press button:.Indicator lamp; lights up. The vehicle israised by 0.6 in (15 mm) compared to thenormal level.The Vehicle RisingVehicle Rising message appears inthe multifunction display.i The message disappears after ten sec-onds, irrespective of the level reached. Ifnecessary, the vehicle is raised further.

The "Raised level" setting is canceled if you:Rdrive faster than 75 mph (120 km/h).Rdrive for approximately three minutes at aspeed over 50 mph (80 km/h).

The "Raised level" remains active when youare not driving within these speed ranges.

Setting the normal vehicle level

X Start the engine.

If indicator lamp; is lit:X Press button:.Indicator lamp; goes out. The vehicle isadjusted to the height of the currentlyselected drive program (Y page 167).

Suspension tuning

General notesThe Adaptive Damping System automaticallycontrols the calibration of the dampers.The damping is tuned individually to eachwheel and depends on:Ryour driving style, e.g. sportyRthe road surface condition, e.g. bumpsRyour individual selection, i.e. sports or com-fort

Your selection remains stored even if youremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.

Sports tuningIn the "Sport" and "Sport Plus" drive pro-grams, the firmer suspension setting ensureseven better contact with the road. Select thismode when employing a sporty driving style,e.g. on winding country roads.X Select the S or S+ drive program with theAGILITY SELECT switch (Y page 167).The vehicle is lowered by 0.6 in (15 mm)compared to the normal level.

Comfort tuningIn the "Eco" and "Comfort" drive programs,the driving characteristics of your vehicle aremore comfortable. Therefore, select thismode if you favor a more comfortable drivingstyle. Select comfort mode also when drivingfast on straight roads, e.g. on straightstretches of highway.X Select the E or C drive program with theAGILITY SELECT switch (Y page 167).The vehicle is raised to the normal level.

198 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

When driving at speeds above 80 mph(125 km/h), the vehicle is automatically low-ered by 0.6 in (15 mm) in the E and C driveprograms. When driving at speeds below50mph (80 km/h) the vehicle is raised again.

4MATIC (permanent four-wheel drive)4MATIC ensures that all four wheels are per-manently driven. Together with ESP®, itimproves the traction of your vehicle when-ever a drive wheel spins due to insufficientgrip.If you fail to adapt your driving style, 4MATICcan neither reduce the risk of accident noroverride the laws of physics. 4MATIC cannottake account of road, weather and traffic con-ditions. 4MATIC is only an aid. You areresponsible for the distance to the vehicle infront, for vehicle speed, for braking in goodtime and for staying in your lane.If a drive wheel spins due to insufficient grip:ROnly depress the accelerator pedal as far asnecessary when pulling away.RAccelerate less when driving.

! Never tow the vehicle with one axleraised. This may damage the transfer case.Damage of this sort is not covered by theMercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. Allwheelsmust remain either on the ground orbe fully raised. Observe the instructions fortowing the vehicle with all wheels in fullcontact with the ground.

i In wintry driving conditions, themaximumeffect of 4MATIC can only be achieved ifyou use winter tires (M+S tires), with snowchains if necessary.

PARKTRONIC

Important safety notesPARKTRONIC is an electronic parking aid withultrasonic sensors. It monitors the areaaround your vehicle using six sensors in the

front bumper and six sensors in the rearbumper. PARKTRONIC indicates visually andaudibly the distance between your vehicleand an object.PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is not a replace-ment for your attention to your immediatesurroundings. You are always responsible forsafe maneuvering, parking and exiting a park-ing space. When maneuvering, parking orpulling out of a parking space, make sure thatthere are no persons, animals or objects inthe area in which you are maneuvering.

! When parking, pay particular attention toobjects above or below the sensors, suchas flower pots or trailer drawbars.PARKTRONIC does not detect such objectswhen they are in the immediate vicinity ofthe vehicle. You could damage the vehicleor the objects.The sensorsmay not detect snow and otherobjects that absorb ultrasonic waves.Ultrasonic sources such as an automaticcar wash, the compressed-air brakes on atruck or a pneumatic drill could causePARKTRONIC to malfunction.PARKTRONICmay not function correctly onuneven terrain.

PARKTRONIC is activated automatically whenyou:Rswitch on the ignitionRshift the transmission to position D, R or NPARKTRONIC is deactivated at speeds above11 mph (18 km/h). It is reactivated at lowerspeeds.

Range of the sensors

General notesPARKTRONIC does not take objects into con-sideration that are:Rbelow the detection range, e.g. people, ani-mals or objects.Rabove the detection range, e.g. overhang-ing loads, truck overhangs or loadingramps.

Driving systems 199

Drivingandparking

Z

: Sensors in the front bumper, left-handside (example)

The sensors must be free from dirt, ice orslush. They can otherwise not function cor-rectly. Clean the sensors regularly, takingcare not to scratch or damage them(Y page 334).

Front sensors

Center Approx. 40 in (approx.100 cm)

Corners Approx. 24 in (approx.60 cm)

Rear sensors

Center Approx. 48 in (approx.120 cm)

Corners Approx. 32 in (approx.80 cm)

Minimum distance

Center Approx. 8 in (approx.20 cm)

Corners Approx. 6 in (approx.15 cm)

If there is an obstacle within this range, therelevant warning displays light up and a warn-ing tone sounds. If the distance falls belowthe minimum, the distance may no longer beshown.

Warning displays

: Segments on the left-hand side of thevehicle

; Segments on the right-hand side of thevehicle

= Segments showing operational readinessThe warning displays show the distancebetween the sensors and the obstacle. Thewarning display for the front area is in theinstrument cluster. The warning display forthe rear area is located on the headliner in therear compartment.The warning display for each side of the vehi-cle is divided into five yellow and two red seg-

200 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

ments. PARKTRONIC is operational if opera-tional readiness indicator= lights up.The selected transmission position and thedirection in which the vehicle is rolling deter-minewhichwarning display is activewhen theengine is running.

Transmissionposition

Warning display

D Front area activated

R, N or the vehicleis rolling back-wards

Rear and front areasactivated

P No areas activated

One or more segments light up as the vehicleapproaches an obstacle, depending on thevehicle's distance from the obstacle.From the:Rsixth segment onwards, you will hear anintermittent warning tone for approx-imately two seconds.Rseventh segment onwards, you will hear awarning tone for approximately two sec-onds. This indicates that you have nowreached the minimum distance.

Deactivating/activating PARKTRONIC

Vehicles with AIRMATIC

: Indicator lamp; To deactivate/activate PARKTRONIC

If indicator lamp: is on then PARKTRONIC isdeactivated. Active Parking Assist is then alsodeactivated.

i PARKTRONIC is automatically activatedwhen you turn the SmartKey to position2 inthe ignition lock.

Vehicles without AIRMATIC

: To deactivate/activate PARKTRONIC; Indicator lampIf indicator lamp; lights up, PARKTRONIC isdeactivated. Active Parking Assist is then alsodeactivated.

i PARKTRONIC is automatically activatedwhen you turn the SmartKey to position2 inthe ignition lock.

Driving systems 201

Drivingandparking

Z

Problems with PARKTRONIC

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Only the red segmentsin the PARKTRONICwarning displays are lit.You also hear a warningtone for approximatelytwo seconds.PARKTRONIC is thendeactivated and theindicator lamp on thePARKTRONIC buttonlights up.

PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has switched off.X If problems persist, have PARKTRONIC checked at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Only the red segmentsin the PARKTRONICwarning displays are lit.PARKTRONIC is thendeactivated.

The PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or there is interference.X Clean the PARKTRONIC sensors (Y page 334).X Switch the ignition back on.

The problem may be caused by an external source of radio orultrasound waves.X See if PARKTRONIC functions in a different location.

Active Parking Assist

General notesActive Parking Assist is an electronic parkingaid with ultrasound. It measures the road onboth sides of the vehicle. A parking symbolindicates a suitable parking space. Activesteering intervention and brake applicationcan assist you during parking and when exit-ing a parking space. You may also usePARKTRONIC (Y page 199).

Important safety notesActive Parking Assist is merely an aid. It is nota replacement for your attention to yourimmediate surroundings. You are alwaysresponsible for safe maneuvering, parkingand exiting a parking space. Make sure thatno persons, animals or objects are in themaneuvering range.When PARKTRONIC is switched off, ActiveParking Assist is also unavailable.

G WARNINGWhile parking or pulling out of a parkingspace, the vehicle swings out and can driveonto areas of the oncoming lane. This couldresult in a collision with another road user.There is a risk of an accident.Pay attention to other road users. Stop thevehicle if necessary or cancel the Active Park-ing Assist parking procedure.

! If unavoidable, you should drive overobstacles such as curbs slowly and not at asharp angle. Otherwise, you may damagethe wheels or tires.

Active Parking Assist may possibly indicateparking spaces which are not suitable forparking, for example:Rwhere parking or stopping is prohibitedRin front of driveways or entrances and exitsRon unsuitable surfaces

202 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Parking tips:ROn narrow roads, drive as close to the park-ing space as possible.RParking spaces that are littered or over-grown might be identified or measuredincorrectly.RParking spaces that are partially occupiedby trailer drawbars might not be identifiedas such or be measured incorrectly.RSnowfall or heavy rainmay lead to a parkingspace being measured inaccurately.RPay attention to the PARKTRONIC(Y page 200) warning messages during theparking procedure.RYou can intervene in the steering procedureto correct it at any time. Active ParkingAssist will then be canceled.RWhen transporting a load which protrudesfrom your vehicle, you should not useActive Parking Assist.RNever use Active Parking Assist when snowchains are installed.RMake sure that the tire pressures arealways correct. This has a direct influenceon the parking characteristics of the vehi-cle.

Use Active Parking Assist for parking spaces:Rparallel or at right angles to the direction oftravelRthat are on straight roads, not bendsRthat are on the same level as the road, e.g.not on the pavement

Detecting parking spacesObjects located above the height range ofActive Parking Assist will not be detectedwhen the parking space is measured. Theseare not taken into account when the parkingprocedure is calculated, e.g. overhangingloads, tail sections or loading ramps of goodsvehicles.

G WARNINGIf there are objects above the detection range:RActive Park Assist may steer too earlyRthe vehicle may not stop in front of theseobjects.

You may cause a collision as a result. There isa risk of an accident.If there are objects above the detection range,stop and deactivate Active Parking Assist.

For further information on the detectionrange (Y page 199).Active Parking Assist does not assist youparking in spaces at right angles to the direc-tion of travel if:Rtwo parking spaces are located directlynext to one anotherRthe parking space is directly next to a lowobstacle such as a low curbRyou park forwardsActive Parking Assist does not assist youparking in spaces that are parallel or at rightangles to the direction of travel if:Rthe parking space is on a curbRthe system reads the parking space asbeing blocked, for example by foliage orgrass paving blocksRthe area is too small for the vehicle tomaneuver intoRthe parking space is bordered by an obsta-cle, e.g. a tree, a post or a trailer

Driving systems 203

Drivingandparking

Z

: Detected parking space on the left; Parking symbol= Detected parking space on the rightActive Parking Assist is switched on automat-ically when driving forwards. The system isoperational at speeds of up to approximately22 mph (35 km/h). While in operation, thesystem independently locates and measuresparking spaces on both sides of the vehicle.Active Parking Assist will only detect parkingspaces:Rparallel or at right angles to the direction oftravelRthat are parallel to the direction of traveland at least 59 in (1.5 m) wideRthat are parallel to the direction of traveland at least 39.5 in (1.0m) longer than yourvehicleRthat are at right angles to the direction oftravel and at least 39.5 in (1.0 m) widerthan your vehicle

i Note that Active Parking Assist cannotmeasure the length of a parking space if itis at right angles to the direction of travel.You will need to judge whether your vehiclewill fit in the parking space.

When driving at speeds below 19 mph(30 km/h), you will see the parking symbol asa status indicator in the instrument cluster.When a parking space has been detected, anarrow towards the right or the left alsoappears. By default, Active Parking Assistonly displays parking spaces on the front-passenger side. Parking spaces on the driv-

er's side are displayed as soon as the turnsignal on the driver's side is activated. Whenparking on the driver's side, this must remainswitched on until you acknowledge the use ofActive Parking Assist by pressing theabutton on the multifunction steering wheel.The system automatically determineswhether the parking space is parallel or atright angles to the direction of travel.A parking space is displayed while you aredriving past it, and until you are approx-imately 50 ft (15 m) away from it.

Parking

G WARNINGIf you leave the vehicle when it is only beingbraked by Active Parking Assist it could rollaway if:Rthere is a malfunction in the system or inthe voltage supply.Rthe electrical system in the engine com-partment, the battery or the fuses havebeen tampered with.Rthe battery is disconnected.Rthe accelerator pedal has been depressed,e.g. by a vehicle occupant.

There is a risk of an accident.Before leaving the vehicle, always secure itagainst rolling away.

i When PARKTRONIC detects obstacles,Active Parking Assist brakes automaticallyduring the parking process. You are respon-sible for braking in good time.

X Stop the vehicle when the parking spacesymbol shows the desired parking space inthe instrument cluster.

X Shift the transmission to position R.The Start Park Assist?Start Park Assist? Yes: OKYes: OK No:No:%message appears in themultifunctiondisplay.

204 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

X To cancel the procedure: press the%button on the multifunction steering wheelor pull away.

orX To park using Active Parking Assist:press thea button on the multifunctionsteering wheel.The Park Assist Active AcceleratePark Assist Active Accelerateand Brakeand Brake Observe SurroundingsObserve Surroundings mes-sage appears in the multifunction display.

X Let go of the multifunction steering wheel.X Back up the vehicle, being ready to brake atall times.When backing up, drive at a speedbelow approximately 6 mph (10 km/h).Otherwise Active Parking Assist will be can-celed.Active Parking Assist brakes the vehicle toa standstill when the vehicle approachesthe rear border of the parking space.Maneuvering may be required in tight park-ing spaces.

The Park Assist Active Select DPark Assist Active Select DObserveObserve SurroundingsSurroundingsmessage appears inthe multifunction display.X Shift the transmission to position D whilethe vehicle is stationary.Active Parking Assist immediately steers inthe other direction.The Park Assist Active AcceleratePark Assist Active Accelerateand Brakeand Brake Observe SurroundingsObserve Surroundings mes-sage appears in the multifunction display.i You will achieve the best results by wait-ing for the steering procedure to completebefore pulling away.

X Drive forwards and be ready to brake at alltimes.Active Parking Assist brakes the vehicle toa standstill when the vehicle approachesthe front border of the parking space.Maneuvering may be required in tight park-ing spaces.

The Park Assist Active Select RPark Assist Active Select RObserveObserve SurroundingsSurroundingsmessage appears inthe multifunction display.

As soon as the parking procedure is com-plete, the ParkPark AssistAssist SwitchedSwitched OffOffmes-sage appears and a warning tone sounds. Thevehicle is now parked.The vehicle is kept stationary without thedriver having to depress the brake pedal. Thebraking effect is canceled when you depressthe accelerator pedal.Active Parking Assist no longer supports youwith steering interventions and brake appli-cations. When Active Parking Assist is fin-ished, you must steer and brake again your-self. PARKTRONIC is still available.Parking tips:RThe way your vehicle is positioned in theparking space after parking is dependenton various factors. These include the posi-tion and shape of the vehicles parked infront and behind it and the conditions of thelocation. It may be the case that ActiveParking Assist guides you too far into aparking space, or not far enough into it. Insome cases, it may also lead you across oronto the curb. If necessary, you should can-cel the parking procedure with Active Park-ing Assist.RYou can also select preselect transmissionposition D. The vehicle redirects and doesnot drive as far into the parking space.Should the transmission change take placetoo early, the parking procedure will becanceled. A sensible parking position canno longer be achieved from this position.

Exiting a parking spaceIn order that Active Parking Assist can sup-port you when you exit the parking space:Rthe border of the parking space must behigh enough at the front and the rear. Acurb is too small, for example.Rthe border of the parking spacemust not betoowide, as the position of the vehiclemustnot exceed an angle of 45° to the starting

Driving systems 205

Drivingandparking

Z

position as it is maneuvering into the park-ing space.Ra maneuvering distance of at least 3.3 ft(1.0 m) must be available.

Active Parking Assist can only assist you withexiting a parking space if you have parked thevehicle parallel to the direction of travel usingActive Parking Assist.

i If PARKTRONIC detects obstacles, ActiveParking Assist brakes automatically whilstthe vehicle exits the parking space. You areresponsible for braking in good time.

X Start the engine.X Release the electric parking brake.X Switch on the turn signal in the directionyou are pulling away.

X Shift the transmission to position D or R.The Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No:Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No:%message appears in themultifunctiondisplay.

X To cancel the procedure: press the%button on the multifunction steering wheelor pull away.

orX To exit a parking space using ActiveParking Assist: press thea button onthe multifunction steering wheel.The Park Assist active AcceleratePark Assist active Accelerateandand brakebrake ObserveObserve surroundingssurroundingsmes-sage appears in the multifunction display.

X Let go of the multifunction steering wheel.X Pull away, being ready to brake at all times.Do not exceed a maximum speed ofapproximately 6 mph (10 km/h) when exit-ing a parking space. Otherwise Active Park-ing Assist will be canceled.

X Depending on the message or as required,shift the transmission to position D or R.Active Parking Assist immediately steers inthe other direction. The Park AssistPark Assistactive Accelerate and brakeactive Accelerate and brakeObserveObserve surroundingssurroundingsmessage appearsin the multifunction display.

i You will achieve the best results by wait-ing for the steering procedure to completebefore pulling away.If you back up after activation, the steeringwheel is moved to the straight-ahead posi-tion.

X Drive forwards and back up as prompted bythe PARKTRONIC warning displays, severaltimes if necessary.

Once you have exited the parking space com-pletely, the steering wheel is moved to thestraight-ahead position. You hear a tone andthe Park Assist switched offPark Assist switched off messageappears in the multifunction display. You willthen have to steer and merge into traffic onyour own. PARKTRONIC is still available. Youcan take over the steering, before the vehiclehas exited the parking space completely. Thisis useful, for example when you recognizethat it is already possible to pull out of theparking space.

Canceling Active Parking AssistX Stop the movement of the multifunctionsteering wheel or steer yourself.Active Parking Assist will be canceled atonce. The Park Assist CanceledPark Assist Canceled mes-sage appears in the multifunction display.

orX Press the PARKTRONIC button(Y page 201).PARKTRONIC is switched off and ActiveParking Assist is immediately canceled.The Park Assist CanceledPark Assist Canceled messageappears in the multifunction display.

Active Parking Assist is canceled automati-cally if:Rthe electric parking brake is engagedRtransmission position P is selectedRparking using Active Parking Assist is nolonger possible

206 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Ryou are driving faster than6mph (10 km/h)Ra wheel spins, ESP® intervenes or fails. The

÷ warning lamp lights up in the instru-ment cluster.

A warning tone sounds. The parking symboldisappears and the multifunction displayshows the Park Assist CanceledPark Assist Canceled mes-sage.When Active Parking Assist is canceled, youmust steer and brake again yourself.If a system malfunction occurs, the vehicle isbraked to a standstill. To drive on, depress theaccelerator again.

Rear view camera

General notes

Rear view camera: is in the trunk lid handle.Rear view camera: is an optical parking andmaneuvering aid. It shows the area behindyour vehicle with guide lines in the Audio 20/COMAND display.The area behind the vehicle is displayed as amirror image, as in the rear view mirror.

i The text shown in the Audio 20/COMANDdisplay depends on the language setting.The following are examples of rear viewcamera messages in the Audio 20/COMAND display.

Important safety notesThe rear view camera is only an aid. It is not areplacement for your attention to your imme-

diate surroundings. You are always responsi-ble for safe maneuvering and parking. Whenmaneuvering or parking,make sure that thereare no persons, animals or objects in the areain which you are maneuvering.Under the following circumstances, the rearview camera will not function, or will functionin a limited manner:Rif the trunk lid is openRin heavy rain, snow or fogRat night or in very dark placesRif the camera is exposed to very bright lightRif the area is lit by fluorescent bulbs or LEDlighting (the display may flicker)Rif there is a sudden change in temperature,e.g. when driving into a heated garage inwinterRif the camera lens is dirty or obstructed.Observe the notes on cleaning(Y page 334)Rif the rear of your vehicle is damaged. In thisevent, have the camera position and settingchecked at a qualified specialist workshop

The field of vision and other functions of therear view camera may be restricted due toadditional accessories on the rear of the vehi-cle (e.g. license plate holder, bicycle rack).

i The rear view camera is protected fromraindrops and dust by means of a flap.When the rear view camera is activated,this flap opens.The flap closes again when:Ryou have finished the maneuvering proc-essRyou switch off the engineRyou open the trunkObserve the notes on cleaning(Y page 334).For technical reasons, the flap may remainopen briefly after the rear view camera hasbeen deactivated.

Driving systems 207

Drivingandparking

Z

Activating/deactivating the rear viewcameraX To activate:make sure that the SmartKeyis in position 2 in the ignition lock.

X Make sure that the Activation by RActivation by Rgeargear function is selected in Audio 20/COMAND; see the Digital Operator's Man-ual.

X Engage reverse gear.The rear view camera flap opens. The areabehind the vehicle is shownwith guide linesin the Audio 20/COMAND display.The image from the rear view camera isavailable throughout the maneuveringprocess.

To deactivate: the rear view camera deacti-vates if you shift the transmission toP or afterdriving forwards a short distance.

Messages in the Audio 20/COMANDdisplayThe rear view camera may show a distortedview of obstacles, show them incorrectly ornot at all. The rear view camera does not showobjects in the following positions:Rvery close to the rear bumperRunder the rear bumperRin the area immediately above the tailgatehandle

! Objects not at ground level may appear tobe further away than they actually are, e.g.:Rthe bumper of a parked vehicleRthe drawbar of a trailerRthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitchRthe rear section of an HGVRa slanted postUse the guidelines only for orientation.Approach objects no further than the bot-tom-most guideline.

: Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-imately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the rear of thevehicle

; White guide line without turning the steer-ing wheel, vehicle width including theexterior mirrors (static)

= Yellow guide line for the vehicle widthincluding the exterior mirrors, for currentsteering wheel angle (dynamic)

? Yellow lanemarking tires at current steer-ing wheel angle (dynamic)

A Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of thevehicle

B Vehicle center axle (marker assistance)C BumperD Red guide line at a distance of approx-

imately 12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of thevehicle

The guide lines are shown when the trans-mission is in position R.The distance specifications only apply toobjects that are at ground level.

208 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

: Front warning display; Additional PARKTRONIC measurement

operational readiness indicator= Rear warning displayVehicles with PARKTRONIC: whenPARKTRONIC is operational (Y page 200),additional measurement operational readi-ness indicator; appears in the Audio 20/COMAND display. If the PARKTRONIC warn-ing displays are active or light up, warningdisplays: and= are also active or light upcorrespondingly in the Audio 20/COMANDdisplay.

"Reverse parking" function

Backing up straight into a parking spacewithout turning the steering wheel

: White guide line without turning the steer-ing wheel, vehicle width including theexterior mirrors (static)

; Yellow guide line for the vehicle widthincluding the exterior mirrors, for currentsteering wheel angle (dynamic)

= Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of thevehicle

? Red guide line at a distance of approx-imately 12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of thevehicle

X Make sure that the rear view camera isswitched on (Y page 208).The lane and the guide lines are shown.

X With the help of white guide line:, checkwhether the vehicle will fit into the parkingspace.

X Using white guide line: as a guide, care-fully back up until you reach the end posi-tion.Red guide line? is then at the end of theparking space. The vehicle is almost paral-lel in the parking space.

Reverse perpendicular parking with thesteering wheel at an angle

: Parking space marking; Yellow guide line for the vehicle width

including the exterior mirrors, for currentsteering wheel angle (dynamic)

X Drive past the parking space and bring thevehicle to a standstill.

X Make sure that the rear view camera isswitched on (Y page 208).The lane and the guide lines are shown.

X While the vehicle is at a standstill, turn thesteering wheel in the direction of the park-

Driving systems 209

Drivingandparking

Z

ing space until yellow guide line; reachesparking space marking:.

X Keep the steering wheel in that positionand back up carefully.

: Yellow guide line for the vehicle widthincluding the exterior mirrors, for currentsteering wheel angle (dynamic)

X Stop the vehicle when it is almost exactly infront of the parking space.Thewhite lane should be as close to parallelwith the parking space marking as possi-ble.

: White guide line at current steering wheelangle

; Parking space markingX Turn the steering wheel to the center posi-tion while the vehicle is stationary.

: Red guide line at a distance of approx-imately 12 in (0.30m) from the rear of thevehicle

; White guide line without turning the steer-ing wheel

= End of parking spaceX Back up carefully until you have reachedthe final position.Red guide line: is then at end of parkingspace=. The vehicle is almost parallel inthe parking space.

Wide-angle function

: Symbol for the wide-angle view function; Own vehicle= PARKTRONIC warning displaysYou can also use the rear view camera toselect a wide-angle view.When PARKTRONIC is operational(Y page 200), a symbol for your own vehicleappears in the Audio 20/COMAND display. Ifthe PARKTRONICwarning displays are active,warning displays= light up in the Audio 20/

210 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

COMAND display in yellow or red respec-tively.

Object detectionThe rear view camera helps detect movingand stationary objects. If an object (person,vehicle or other obstacle) is detected, thisobject is marked with a bar. Objects locatedsome distance from the vehicle away aremarked with a yellow bar. If the distance tothe object is very small, the bar is displayed inred.Object detection only works in full screenmode.To ensure that you can use the function, itmust be switched on in Audio 20/COMAND;see the separate operating instructions.

360° camera (surround view)

General notesThe 360° camera is a system consisting offour cameras.The system analyzes images from the follow-ing cameras:RRear view cameraRFront cameraRTwo cameras in the exterior rear view mir-rors

The cameras capture the immediate sur-roundings of the vehicle. The system sup-ports you, for example when parking or ifvision is restricted at an exit.You can show pictures from the 360° camerain full-screen mode or in six different split-screen views on the COMAND/Audio 20 dis-play. A split-screen view also includes a topview of the vehicle. This view is calculatedfrom the data supplied by the installed cam-eras (virtual camera).The six split-screen views are:

Rtop view and picture from the rear viewcamera (130° viewing angle)Rtop view and image from the front camera(130° viewing angle without displaying themaximum steering wheel angle)Rtop view and enlarged rear viewRtop view and enlarged front viewRtop view and pictures from the rearwardfacing mirror cameras (rear wheel view)Rtop view and pictures from the forwardfacing mirror cameras (front wheel view)

When the function is active and you shift thetransmission fromD or R toN, the guide linesin the COMAND display are hidden.When you change between transmissionpositions D and R, you see the previouslyselected front or rear view.

Important safety notesThe 360°camera is only an aid and may showa distorted view of obstacles, show themincorrectly or not at all. The 360°camera isnot a substitute for attentive driving.You are always responsible for safe maneu-vering and parking. When maneuvering orparking, make sure that there are no persons,animals or objects in the area inwhich you aremaneuvering.You are always responsible for safety, andmust always pay attention to your surround-ings when parking and maneuvering. Thisapplies to the areas behind, in front of andbeside the vehicle. You could otherwiseendanger yourself and others.The 360° camera will not function or willfunction in a limited manner:Rif the doors are openRif the exterior mirrors are folded inRif the trunk lid is openRin heavy rain, snow or fogRat night or in very dark placesRif the cameras are exposed to very brightlight

Driving systems 211

Drivingandparking

Z

Rif the area is lit by fluorescent bulbs or LEDlighting (the display may flicker)Rif the camera lenses fog up, e.g. when driv-ing into a heated garage in winter, causinga rapid change in temperatureRif the camera lenses are dirty or coveredRif the vehicle components in which thecameras are installed are damaged. In thisevent, have the camera position and settingchecked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Do not use the 360° camera in this case. Youcan otherwise injure others or cause damageto objects or the vehicle.Guide lines are always shown at road level.The camera in the rear area is protected bymeans of a flap. This flap opens when the360° camera is activated. Observe the noteson cleaning (Y page 335). For technical rea-sons, the flap may remain open briefly afterthe 360° camera has been deactivated.

Activation conditionsThe 360° camera image can be displayed if:RCOMAND/Audio 20 is switched on, see theDigital Operator's ManualRthe 360° Camera360° Camera function is switched oni If the 360° camera is activated at speedsabove 19 mph (30 km/h) a warning mes-sage appears.The warning message disappears if:Rthe vehicle's speed falls below 19 mph(30 km/h). The 360° camera is then acti-vated.Rthe message is confirmed with the%button.

Activating the 360° camera using thefunction button

X Press button:.Depending on whether position D or R isengaged, the following is shown:Rfull screen display with the image fromthe front cameraRfull screen display with the image fromthe rear view camera

i You can also switch to the split-screenview from the full-screen view.

Activating the 360° camera withCOMANDX To select 360° Camera360° Camera in the carouselmenu: turn and press the controller.Depending on whether position D or R isengaged, the following is shown:Ra split screen with top view and theimage from the front camera orRa split screen with top view and theimage from the rear view camera

Activating the 360° camera usingreverse gearThe 360° camera images can be automati-cally displayed by engaging reverse gear.

212 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position2 in the ignition lock.

X Make sure that the Activation by RActivation by Rgeargear function is selected in COMAND, seethe Digital Operator's Manual.

X To show the360° camera image: engagereverse gear.The area behind the vehicle is shown in theCOMAND display in split-screenmode. Yousee the top view of the vehicle and theimage from the rear view camera.

Selecting the split-screen and fullscreen displaysSwitching between split screen views:X To switch to the line with the vehicle icons:slide Z V the controller.

X To select a vehicle icon: turn the controller.

Switching to full screen mode:X 180° View180° View Turn and press the controller.i The full screen option is only available inthe following views:RTop view with picture from the rear viewcameraRTop viewwith picture from the front cam-era

Displays in the COMAND display

Important safety notesThe camera system may show a distortedview of obstacles, show them incorrectly ornot at all. Obstacles are not shown by thesystem in the following locations:Runder the front and rear bumpersRvery close to the front and rear bumpersRin close range above the handle on thetrunk lidRvery close to the exterior mirrorsRin the transitional areas between the vari-ous cameras in the virtual top view

! Objects not at ground level may appear tobe further away than they actually are, e.g.:Rthe bumper of a parked vehicleRthe drawbar of a trailerRthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitchRthe rear section of an HGVRa slanted postUse the guidelines only for orientation.Approach objects no further than the bot-tom-most guideline.

Top view with picture from the rear viewcamera

: Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-imately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the rear of thevehicle

; Symbol for the split screen setting withtop view and rear view camera image

= Guide line for themaximumsteering angle? Yellow lanemarking tires at current steer-

ing wheel angle (dynamic)A Yellow guide line for the vehicle width

including the exterior mirrors, for currentsteering wheel angle (dynamic)

Driving systems 213

Drivingandparking

Z

B Vehicle center axle (marker assistance)C Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-

imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of thevehicle

D BumperE Red guide line at a distance of approx-

imately 12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of thevehicle

The guide lines are shown when the trans-mission is in position R.The distance specifications only apply toobjects that are at ground level.

Top view with picture from the front cam-era

: Symbol for the split screen setting withtop view and front camera image

; Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-imately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the front of thevehicle

= Yellow guide line for the vehicle widthincluding the exterior mirrors, for currentsteering wheel angle (dynamic)

? Yellow lanemarking tires at current steer-ing wheel angle (dynamic)

A Red guide line at a distance of approx-imately 12 in (0.30m) from the front of thevehicle

B Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the front of thevehicle

Top view and enlarged rear view

: Symbol for the split screen setting withtop view and rear view camera imageenlarged

; Red guide line at a distance of approx-imately 12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of thevehicle

This view assists you in estimating the dis-tance to the vehicle behind you.

i This setting can also be selected as anenlarged front view.

214 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Top view with picture from the mirrorcamera

: Symbol for the top view and forward-facing mirror camera setting

; Yellow guide line for the vehicle widthincluding the exteriormirrors (right side ofvehicle)

= Yellow guide line for the vehicle widthincluding the exterior mirrors (left side ofvehicle)

i You can also select the mirror camerasetting for the rear-facing view.

Wide-angle function

: Symbol for the full screen settingwith rearview camera image

; Own vehicle= PARKTRONIC warning displaysIf the vehicle is equipped with PARKTRONICand the function is active (Y page 201), warn-ing displays= in the COMAND display arealso active or light up accordingly.

PARKTRONIC appears:Rin split screen view as red or yellow brack-ets around the vehicle icon in the top view,orRin the full screen view, on the right-handside at the bottomas red or yellow bracketsaround the vehicle icon

i The full screen display can also be selec-ted as front view.

Select this viewwhen you are driving out of anexit and the view of crossing traffic is restric-ted, for example.

i To select split-screen view, select the% symbol in the display then confirmwith the COMAND controller.

Object detectionThe 360° camera helps detect moving andstationary objects. If an object (person, vehi-cle, other obstacle) is detected, this object ismarked with a bar. Objects located some dis-tance from the vehicle away are marked witha yellow bar. If the distance to the object isvery small, the bar is displayed in red.Object detection only functions in both fullscreen modes.To ensure that you can use the function, itmust be switched on in COMAND (see theseparate operating instructions).

Exiting 360° camera display modeAs soon as the vehicle exceeds a speed of19 mph (30 km/h), the function switches off.The view which was active before the 360°camera was displayed appears in theCOMAND display. You can also stop the 360°camera display from split-screen view byselecting the% symbol in the display andthen confirming with the COMAND controller.Vehicles with automatic transmission: the360° camera display is also ended if youselect transmission position P.

Driving systems 215

Drivingandparking

Z

ATTENTION ASSIST

General notesATTENTION ASSIST helps you during long,monotonous journeys, such as on highways.It is active in the 37 mph (60 km/h) to125 mph (200 km/h) range. If ATTEN-TIONASSIST detects typical indicators of fati-gue or increasing lapses in concentration onthe part of the driver, it suggests taking abreak.

Important safety notesATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid to thedriver. It might not always recognize fatigueor increasing inattentiveness in time or fail torecognize them at all. The system is not asubstitute for a well-rested and attentivedriver.The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST isrestricted and warnings may be delayed ornot occur at all:Rif the length of the journey is less thanapproximately 30 minutesRif the road condition is poor, e.g. if the sur-face is uneven or if there are potholesRif there is a strong side windRif you have adopted a sporty driving stylewith high cornering speeds or high rates ofaccelerationRif you are predominantly driving slowerthan 37 mph (60 km/h) or faster than125 mph (200 km/h)Rif you are driving with the active SteerAssist of DISTRONIC PLUSRif the time has been set incorrectlyRin active driving situations, such as whenyou change lanes or change your speed

ATTENTION ASSIST is reset when you con-tinue your journey and starts assessing yourtiredness again if:Ryou switch off the engine.Ryou take off your seat belt and open thedriver's door, e.g. for a change of drivers orto take a break.

Displaying the attention level

You can have current status information dis-played in the assistance menu (Y page 244)of the on-board computer.X Select the Assistance display for AttentionAssist using the on-board computer(Y page 243).

The following information is displayed:Rlength of the journey since the last break.Rthe attention level determined by ATTEN-TION ASSIST (Attention LevelAttention Level), dis-played in a bar display in five levels fromhigh to low.RIf ATTENTION ASSIST is unable to calculatethe attention level and cannot output awarning, the SystemSystem SuspendedSuspended messageappears. The bar display then changes thedisplay, e.g. if you are driving at a speedbelow37mph (60 km/h) or above 124mph(200 km/h).

216 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Activating ATTENTION ASSISTX Activate ATTENTION ASSIST using the on-board computer (Y page 246).The system determines the attention levelof the driver depending on the settingselected:

Selection StandardStandard: the sensitivity withwhich the system determines the attentionlevel is set to normal.Selection SensitiveSensitive: the sensitivity is sethigher. The attention level detected by Atten-tion Assist is adapted accordingly and thedriver is warned earlier.When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, theé symbol appears in the multifunctiondisplay in the assistance graphic display.When ATTENTION ASSIST has been deactiva-ted, it is automatically reactivated after theengine has been stopped. The sensitivityselected corresponds to the last selectionactivated (standard/sensitive).

Warning in the multifunction displayIf fatigue or increasing lapses in concentra-tion are detected, a warning appears in themultifunction display: ATTENTION ASSISTATTENTION ASSISTTake a Break!Take a Break!.In addition to the message shown in the mul-tifunction display, you will then hear a warn-ing tone.X If necessary, take a break.X Confirm the message by pressing theabutton on the steering wheel.

On long journeys, take regular breaks in goodtime to allow yourself to rest properly. If youdo not take a break and ATTENTION ASSISTstill detects increasing lapses in concentra-tion, you will be warned again after15 minutes at the earliest. This will only hap-pen if ATTENTION ASSIST still detects typicalindicators of fatigue or increasing lapses inconcentration.If a warning is output in the multifunction dis-play, a service station search is performed in

COMAND. You can select a service stationand navigation to this service station will thenbegin. This function can be activated anddeactivated in COMAND.

Lane Tracking package

General notesThe Lane Tracking package consists of BlindSpot Assist (Y page 217) and Lane KeepingAssist (Y page 219).

Blind Spot Assist

General notesBlind Spot Assist monitors the areas on eitherside of the vehicle that are not visible to thedriver with two lateral, rear-facing radar sen-sors. A warning display in the exterior mirrorsdraws your attention to vehicles detected inthe monitored area. If you then switch on thecorresponding turn signal to change lane, youwill also receive an optical and audible warn-ing.Blind Spot Assist supports you from a speedof approximately 20 mph (30 km/h).

Important safety notesG WARNINGBlind Spot Assist does not react to:Rvehicles overtaken too closely on the side,placing them in the blind spot areaRvehicles which approach with a large speeddifferential and overtake your vehicle

As a result, Blind Spot Assist may not givewarnings in such situations. There is a risk ofan accident.Always observe the traffic conditions care-fully, and maintain a safe lateral distance.

Blind Spot Assist is only an aid. It may fail todetect some vehicles and is no substitute forattentive driving. Always ensure that there issufficient distance to the side for other roadusers and obstacles.

Driving systems 217

Drivingandparking

Z

i USA only:This device has been approved by the FCCas a "Vehicular Radar System". The radarsensor is intended for use in an automotiveradar system only. Removing, tamperingwith, or altering the device will void anywarranties, and is not permitted by theFCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use inany non-approved way.Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user’s authority tooperate the equipment.

Radar sensorsThe radar sensors for Blind Spot Assist areintegrated into the rear bumper. Make surethat the bumpers are free from dirt, ice orslush. The sensors must not be covered, forexample by cycle racks or overhanging loads.Following a severe impact or in the event ofdamage to the bumpers, have the function ofthe radar sensors checked at a qualified spe-cialist workshop. Blind Spot Assist may nolonger work properly.

Monitoring areaIn particular, the detection of obstacles canbe impaired if:Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything elsecovering the sensorsRthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavyrain, snow or sprayRthere are narrow vehicles, e.g. motorcyclesor bicyclesRthe road has very wide lanesRthe road has narrow lanesRyou are not driving in the middle of the laneRthere are barriers or similar lane bordersVehicles in the monitoring range are then notindicated.

Blind Spot Assistmonitors the area up to 10 ft(3 m) behind your vehicle and directly next toyour vehicle, as shown in the diagram.If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in thelane beyond the lane next to your vehicle maybe indicated, especially if the vehicles are notdriving in themiddle of their lane. This may bethe case if there are vehicles driving at theinner edge of their lanes.Due to the nature of the system:Rwarnings may be issued in error when driv-ing close to crash barriers or similar solidlane borders.Rthe warning is canceled when driving for anextended period next to long vehicles, suchas trucks.

The two radar sensors for Blind Spot Assistare integrated into the sides of the rearbumper. Make sure that the bumper is free ofdirt, ice or slush in the vicinity of the sensors.The sensors must not be covered, for exam-ple by cycle racks or overhanging loads. Fol-lowing a severe impact or in the event of dam-age to the bumpers, have the function of thesensors checked at a qualified specialistworkshop. Blind Spot Assist may otherwisenot work properly.

218 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Warning display

: Warning displayBlind Spot Assist is not active at speeds belowapproximately 20mph (30 km/h). Vehicles inthe monitoring range are then not indicated.If a vehicle is detected within the blind spotmonitoring range at speeds above 20 mph(30 km/h), warning lamp: on the corre-sponding side lights up red. This warning isalways emitted when a vehicle enters theblind spot monitoring range from behind orfrom the side. When you overtake a vehicle,the warning only occurs if the difference inspeed is less than 7 mph (12 km/h).If you select the reverse gear, Blind SpotAssist is not operational.The brightness of the warning lamps is auto-matically adapted to the brightness of thesurroundings.

Collision warningIf a vehicle is detected in themonitoring rangeof Blind Spot Assist and you switch on thecorresponding turn signal, a double warningtone sounds. Red warning lamp: flashes. Ifthe turn signal remains on, vehicles detectedare indicated by the flashing of red warninglamp:. There are no further warning tones.

Switching on Blind Spot AssistX Make sure that Blind Spot Assist(Y page 246) is activated in the on-boardcomputer.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock.Warning lamps: in the exterior mirrorslight up red until the engine is started.

Display in the assistance graphic

When Blind Spot Assist is activated, grayradar waves propagating backwards appearnext to the vehicle in the assistance display inthe multifunction display. Above a speed of20 mph (30 km/h), the color of the radarwaves in the assistance display changes togreen;. Blind Spot Assist is then ready foruse.

Lane Keeping Assist

General notes

Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area infront of your vehicle with camera:, which ismounted at the top of the windshield. Active

Driving systems 219

Drivingandparking

Z

LaneKeepingAssist detects lanemarkings onthe road and can warn you before you leaveyour lane unintentionally.This function is available in the range between40 mph and 120 mph (60 km/h and200 km/h).A warning may be given if a front wheelpasses over a lanemarking. It will warn you bymeans of intermittent vibration in the steer-ing wheel for up to 1.5 seconds.

Important safety notesG WARNINGLane Keeping Assist may not always clearlyrecognize lane markings.In this case, Lane Keeping Assist may:Rgive an unnecessary warningRnot give a warningThere is a risk of an accident.Always pay particular attention to the trafficsituation and stay in lane, in particular ifwarned by Lane Keeping Assist.

G WARNINGThe Lane Keeping Assist warning does notreturn the vehicle to the original lane. There isa risk of an accident.You should always steer, brake or accelerateyourself, in particular if warned by Lane Keep-ing Assist.

If you fail to adapt your driving style, LaneKeeping Assist can neither reduce the risk ofan accident nor override the laws of physics.Lane Keeping Assist cannot take into accountthe road, traffic and weather conditions. LaneKeeping Assist is merely an aid. You areresponsible for the distance to the vehicle infront, for vehicle speed, for braking in goodtime and for staying in your lane.The Lane Keeping Assist does not keep thevehicle in the lane.

The systemmay be impaired or may not func-tion if:Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insuffi-cient illumination of the road, or due tosnow, rain, fog or sprayRthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic,the sun or reflections (e.g. when the roadsurface is wet)Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up, damagedor covered, for instance by a sticker, in thevicinity of the cameraRthere are no, several or unclear lane mark-ings for a lane, e.g. in areas with road con-struction workRthe lane markings are worn away, dark orcovered up, e.g. by dirt or snowRthe distance to the vehicle in front is toosmall and the lanemarkings thus cannot bedetectedRthe lane markings change quickly, e.g.lanes branch off, cross one another ormergeRthe road is narrow and windingRthere are strong shadows cast on the road

Switching on Lane Keeping Assist

X Press button;.Indicator lamp: lights up. The LaneLaneKeeping Assist OnKeeping Assist On message appears inthe multifunction display. If all conditionshave been satisfied, there may be a warn-ing.If you drive at speeds above 40 mph(60 km/h) and lanemarkings are detected,the lines in the assistance graphics display

220 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

(Y page 243) are shown in green. LaneKeeping Assist is ready for use.

X To switch off: press button;.Indicator lamp: goes out. Lane KeepingAssist is deactivated. The Lane KeepingLane KeepingAssist OffAssist Off message appears in the mul-tifunction display.

Selecting Standard or Adaptive settingX In the DriveAssistDriveAssistmenu on the on-boardcomputer, select the Lane KeepingLane KeepingAssistAssist function (Y page 246).

X Select StandardStandard or AdaptiveAdaptive.StandardWhen StandardStandard is selected, nowarning vibra-tion occurs if:Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event,the warnings are suppressed for a certainperiod of time.Ra driving safety system intervenes, such asABS, BAS or ESP®.

AdaptiveWhen AdaptiveAdaptive is selected, nowarning vibra-tion occurs if:Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event,the warnings are suppressed for a certainperiod of time.Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g.ABS, BAS or ESP®.Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown.Ryou brake hard.Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid anobstacle or change lanes quickly.Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend.In order that you are warned only when nec-essary and in good time if you cross the lanemarking, the system recognizes certain con-ditions and warns you accordingly.

The warning vibration occurs earlier if:Ryou approach the outer lane marking on abend.Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a high-way.Rthe system recognizes solid lane markings.The warning vibration occurs later if:Rthe road has narrow lanes.Ryou cut the corner on a bend.

Driving Assistance PLUS package

General notesThe Active Driving Assistance PLUS packageconsists of DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 185),Active Blind Spot Assist (Y page 221) andActive Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 224).

Active Blind Spot Assist

General notesActive Blind Spot Assist uses a radar sensorsystem, pointed toward the rear of the vehi-cle, to monitor the area to the sides of thevehicle which the driver is unable to see. Awarning display in the exterior mirrors drawsyour attention to vehicles detected in themonitored area. If you then switch on the cor-responding turn signal to change lane, youwill also receive an optical and audible warn-ing. If a risk of lateral collision is detected,corrective braking may help you avoid a col-lision. Active Blind Spot Assist evaluates thefree space in the direction of travel and to theside beforemaking a course-correcting brakeapplication. For this, Active Blind Spot Assistuses radar sensors which are pointed in thedirection of travel.Active Blind Spot Assist supports you from aspeed of approximately 20 mph (30 km/h).

Important safety notesActive Blind Spot Assist is only an aid and isnot a substitute for attentive driving.

Driving systems 221

Drivingandparking

Z

G WARNINGActive Blind Spot Assist does not react to:Rvehicles overtaken too closely on the side,placing them in the blind spot areaRvehicles which approach with a large speeddifferential and overtake your vehicle

As a result, Active Blind Spot Assist may nei-ther give warnings nor intervene in such sit-uations. There is a risk of an accident.Always observe the traffic conditions care-fully, and maintain a safe lateral distance.

i USA only: This device has been approvedby the FCC as a "Vehicular Radar System".The radar sensor is intended for use in anautomotive radar system only. Removal,tampering, or altering of the devicewill voidany warranties, and is not permitted by theFCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use inany non-approved way.Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user's authority tooperate the equipment.

i Canada only: This device complies withRSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation issubject to the following two conditions:1. This device may not cause harmful inter-ference, and2. This devicemust accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.Removal, tampering, or altering of thedevice will void any warranties, and is notpermitted. Do not tamper with, alter, or usein any non-approved way.Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user's authority tooperate the equipment.

Radar sensorsThe Active Blind Spot Assist radar sensors areintegrated into the front and rear bumpersand behind a cover in the radiator grill. Makesure that the bumpers and the cover in theradiator grill are free of dirt, ice or slush. The

rear sensors must not be covered, e.g. bybicycle racks or overhanging loads. Followinga severe impact or in the event of damage tothe bumpers, have the function of the radarsensors checked at a qualified specialistworkshop. Active Blind Spot Assist may oth-erwise no longer work properly.

Monitoring areaG WARNINGActive Blind Spot Assist does not detect alltraffic situations and road users. There is arisk of an accident.Always make sure that there is sufficient dis-tance on the side for other traffic or obstacles.

Active Blind Spot Assist monitors the area upto 10 ft (3.0 m) behind your vehicle anddirectly next to your vehicle, as shown in thediagram.The detection of obstacles can be impaired inthe case of:Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything elsecovering the sensorsRpoor visibility, e.g. due to rain, snow orspray

Vehicles in the monitoring range are then notindicated.

222 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Active Blind Spot Assist may not detect nar-row vehicles, such as motorcycles or bicy-cles, or may only detect them too late.If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in thelane beyond the lane next to your vehicle maybe indicated, especially if the vehicles are notdriving in themiddle of their lane. This may bethe case if there are vehicles at the inner edgeof your lane.Due to the nature of the system:Rwarnings may be issued in error when driv-ing close to crash barriers or similar solidlane borders.Rwarnings may be interrupted when drivingalongside particularly long vehicles, e.g.trucks, for a prolonged time.

Warning display

: Warning displayActive Blind Spot Assist is not operational atspeeds below approximately 20 mph(30 km/h). Vehicles in the monitoring rangeare then not indicated.If a vehicle is detected within the blind spotmonitoring range at speeds above 20 mph(30 km/h), warning lamp: on the corre-sponding side lights up red. This warning isalways emitted when a vehicle enters theblind spot monitoring range from behind orfrom the side. When you overtake a vehicle,the warning only occurs if the difference inspeed is less than 7 mph (12 km/h).If you select the reverse gear, Active BlindSpot Assist is not operational.

The brightness of the warning lamps is auto-matically adapted to the brightness of thesurroundings.

When Active Blind Spot Assist is activated,gray radar waves propagating backwardsappear next to the vehicle in the assistancedisplay in the multifunction display. Above aspeed of 20 mph (30 km/h), the color of theradar waves in the assistance displaychanges to green;. Active Blind Spot Assistis then ready for use.

Visual and acoustic collision warningIf you switch on the turn signals to changelanes and a vehicle is detected in the sidemonitoring range, you receive a visual andacoustic collision warning. You will then heara double warning tone and red warninglamp: flashes. If the turn signal remains on,detected vehicles are indicated by the flash-ing of red warning lamp:. There are no fur-ther warning tones.

Course-correcting brake applicationIf Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of alateral collision in the monitoring range, acourse-correcting brake application is carriedout. This is meant to assist you in avoiding acollision.

G WARNINGA course-correcting brake application cannotalways prevent a collision. There is a risk of anaccident.Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself,especially if Active Blind Spot Assist warnsyou ormakes a course-correcting brake appli-

Driving systems 223

Drivingandparking

Z

cation. Always maintain a safe distance at thesides.

If a course-correcting brake applicationoccurs, red warning lamp: flashes in theexterior mirror and a dual warning tonesounds. In addition, display; underliningthe danger of a side collision appears in themultifunction display.In very rare cases, the system may make aninappropriate brake application. A course-correcting brake application may be interrup-ted at any time if you steer slightly in theopposite direction or accelerate.The course-correcting brake application isavailable in the speed range between 20 mph(30 km/h) and 120 mph (200 km/h).Either no braking application, or a course-correcting brake application adapted to thedriving situation occurs if:Rthere are vehicles or obstacles, e.g. crashbarriers, located on both sides of your vehi-cle.Ra vehicle approaches you too closely at theside.Ryou have adopted a sporty driving stylewithhigh cornering speeds.Ryou clearly brake or accelerate.Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g.ESP® or PRE-SAFE® Brake.RESP® is switched off.Ra loss of tire pressure or a defective tire isdetected.

Switching on Active Blind Spot AssistX Make sure that Active Blind Spot Assist isactivated in the on-board computer(Y page 246).

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock.Warning lamps: in the exterior mirrorslight up red for approximately 1.5 seconds.Gray radar waves propagating backwardsappear next to the vehicle in the assistancedisplay in the multifunction display.

Active Lane Keeping Assist

General notes

Active Lane Keeping Assist monitors the areain front of your vehicle by means of camerasystem: at the top of the windshield. Vari-ous different areas to the front, rear and sideof your vehicle are alsomonitoredwith the aidof the radar sensor system. Active Lane Keep-ing Assist detects lane markings on the roadand can warn you before you leave your laneunintentionally. If you do not react to thewarning, a lane-correcting application of thebrakes can bring the vehicle back into theoriginal lane.If you select kmkm in the Display UnitDisplay UnitSpeed-/Odometer:Speed-/Odometer: function on the on-boardcomputer (Y page 248), Active Lane KeepingAssist is activated starting at a speed of60 km/h. If the milesmiles display unit is selected,the assistance range begins at 40 mph.

224 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Important safety notesIf you fail to adapt your driving style, ActiveLane Keeping Assist can neither reduce therisk of accident nor override the laws of phys-ics. Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot takeaccount of road and weather conditions. Itmay not recognize traffic situations. ActiveLane Keeping Assist is only an aid. You areresponsible for the distance to the vehicle infront, for vehicle speed, for braking in goodtime and for staying in your lane.Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot continu-ously keep your vehicle in its lane.

G WARNINGActive Lane Keeping Assist cannot alwaysclearly detect lane markings.In such cases, Active Lane Keeping Assistcan:Rgive an unnecessary warning and thenmake a course-correcting brake applicationto the vehicleRnot give a warning or interveneThere is a risk of an accident.Always pay particular attention to the trafficsituation and keep within the lane, especiallyif Active Lane Keeping Assist alerts you. Ter-minate the intervention in a non-critical driv-ing situation.

The systemmay be impaired or may not func-tion if:Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insuffi-cient illumination of the road, or due tosnow, rain, fog or sprayRthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic,the sun or reflections (e.g. when the roadsurface is wet)Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up, damagedor covered, for instance by a sticker, in thevicinity of the cameraRthe radar sensors in the front or rear bump-ers or the radiator grill are dirty, e.g.obscured by snow

Rthere are no, several or unclear lane mark-ings for a lane, e.g. in areas with road con-struction workRthe lane markings are worn away, dark orcovered up, e.g. by dirt or snowRthe distance to the vehicle in front is toosmall and the lanemarkings thus cannot bedetectedRthe lane markings change quickly, e.g.lanes branch off, cross one another ormergeRthe road is narrow and windingRthere are strong shadows cast on the roadIf no vehicle is detected in the adjacent laneand there are broken lanemarkings detected,no lane-correcting brake application is made.

Warning vibration in the steering wheelA warning may be given if a front wheelpasses over a lanemarking. It will warn you bymeans of intermittent vibration in the steer-ing wheel for up to 1.5 seconds.

Lane-correcting brake applicationIf you leave your lane, under certain circum-stances the vehicle will brake briefly on oneside. This is meant to assist you in bringingthe vehicle back to the original lane.

G WARNINGA lane-correcting brake application cannotalways bring the vehicle back into the originallane. There is a risk of an accident.Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself,especially if Active Lane Keeping Assist warnsyou or makes a lane-correcting brake appli-cation.

Driving systems 225

Drivingandparking

Z

If a lane-correcting brake application occurs,display: appears in the multifunction dis-play. The brake application also slightlyreduces vehicle speed.This function is available in the range between40 mph and 120 mph (60 km/h and200 km/h).A lane-correcting brake application can bemade after driving over a lane marking rec-ognize as being solid or broken. Before this, awarning must be given by means of intermit-tent vibration in the steering wheel. In addi-tion, a lane with lane markings on both sidesmust be recognized.In the case of a broken lane marking beingdetected, a lane-correcting brake applicationcan only be made if a vehicle has been detec-ted in the adjacent lane. Oncoming vehicles,overtaking vehicles and vehicles in adjacentlanes can be detected.

i A further lane-correcting brake applica-tion can only occur after your vehicle hasreturned to the original lane.

No lane-correcting brake application occursif:Ryou clearly and actively steer, brake oraccelerate.Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend.Ryou have switched on the turn signal.Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g.ESP®, PRE-SAFE® Brake or Active BlindSpot Assist.

Ryou have adopted a sporty driving stylewithhigh cornering speeds or high rates ofacceleration.RESP® is switched off.Rthe transmission is not in position D.Ra loss of tire pressure or a defective tire hasbeen detected and displayed.Ran obstacle in the lane in which you aredriving has been detected.

Active Lane Keeping Assist may not detectother road users or traffic situations. An inap-propriate brake application may be interrup-ted at any time if you:Rsteer slightly in the opposite directionRswitch on the turn signalRclearly brake or accelerateA lane-correcting brake application is inter-rupted automatically if:Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g.ESP®, PRE-SAFE® Brake or Active BlindSpot Assist.Rlanemarkings can no longer be recognized.

Switching on Active Lane Keeping Assist

X Press button;.Indicator lamp: lights up. The LaneLaneKeeping Assist OnKeeping Assist On message appears inthe multifunction display. If all conditionshave been satisfied, a warning or steeringintervention may be made.If you drive at speeds above 40 mph(60 km/h) and lanemarkings are detected,the lines in the assistance graphics display

226 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

(Y page 243) are shown in green. ActiveLane Keeping Assist is ready for use.

X To switch off: press button;.Indicator lamp: goes out. The ActiveLane Keeping Assist is deactivated. TheLane Keeping Assist OffLane Keeping Assist Off messageappears in the multifunction display.

Selecting Standard or Adaptive settingX In the DriveAssistDriveAssistmenu on the on-boardcomputer, select the Active Lane Keep‐Active Lane Keep‐ing Assisting Assist function (Y page 246).

X Select StandardStandard or AdaptiveAdaptive.When StandardStandard is selected, no warningvibration occurs if:Ryou switch on the turn signals. In thisevent, the warnings are suppressed for acertain period of time.Ra driving safety system intervenes, suchas ABS, BAS or ESP®.

When AdaptiveAdaptive is selected, no warningvibration occurs if:Ryou switch on the turn signals. In thisevent, the warnings are suppressed for acertain period of time.Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g.ABS, BAS or ESP®.Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown.Ryou brake hard.Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid anobstacle or change lanes quickly.Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend.

In order that you are warned only when nec-essary and in good time if you cross the lanemarking, the system recognizes certain con-ditions and warns you accordingly.The warning vibration occurs earlier if:Ryou approach the outer lane marking on abend.Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a high-way.Rthe system recognizes solid lane markings.

The warning vibration occurs later if:Rthe road has narrow lanes.Ryou cut the corner on a bend.

Driving systems 227

Drivingandparking

Z

228

Useful information ............................ 230Important safety notes .................... 230Displays and operation .................... 230Menus and submenus ...................... 235Display messages ............................. 250Warning and indicator lamps in theinstrument cluster ............................ 284

229

On-board

computerand

displays

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optional equip-ment of your vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's Manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions.

i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops (Y page 26).

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you operate information systems and com-munication equipment integrated in the vehi-cle while driving, you will be distracted fromtraffic conditions. You could also lose controlof the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.Only operate the equipment when the trafficsituation permits. If you are not sure that thisis possible, park the vehicle paying attentionto traffic conditions and operate the equip-ment when the vehicle is stationary.

You must observe the legal requirements forthe country in which you are currently drivingwhen operating the on-board computer.

G WARNINGIf the instrument cluster has failed or mal-functioned, you may not recognize functionrestrictions in systems relevant to safety. Theoperating safety of your vehicle may beimpaired. There is a risk of an accident.Drive on carefully. Have the vehicle checkedat a qualified specialist workshop immedi-ately.

The on-board computer only showsmessagesor warnings from certain systems in the mul-tifunction display. You should therefore makesure your vehicle is operating safely at all

times. Otherwise, a vehicle that is not oper-ating safely may cause an accident.If the operating safety of your vehicle isimpaired, park the vehicle safely as soon aspossible. Contact a qualified specialist work-shop.For an overview, see the instrument panelillustration (Y page 33).

Displays and operation

Instrument cluster lighting

The lighting in the instrument cluster, in thedisplays and the controls in the vehicle inte-rior can be adjusted using brightness controlknob:.X Turn brightness control knob: up ordown.If the light switch (Y page 126) is set toÃ, T or L, the brightness isdependent upon the brightness of theambient light.

i The light sensor in the instrument clusterautomatically controls the brightness ofthe multifunction display.In daylight, the displays in the instrumentcluster are illuminated. A dimming functionis not possible in daylight.

230 Displays and operationOn

-board

computerand

displays

Speedometer with segmentsThe segments in the speedometer indicatewhich speed range is available.RCruise control activated (Y page 183):The segments light up from the storedspeed to the maximum speed.RDISTRONIC PLUS activated (Y page 185):One or two segments in the set speedrange light up.RDISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front:The segments between the speed of thevehicle in front and the stored speed lightup.

Tachometer! Do not drive in the overrevving range, asthis could damage the engine.

The red band in the tachometer indicates theengine's overrevving range.The fuel supply is interrupted to protect theengine when the red band is reached.

Outside temperature displayYou should pay special attention to road con-ditions when temperatures are around freez-ing point.Bear in mind that the outside temperaturedisplay indicates the temperature measuredand does not record the road temperature.The outside temperature display is in themul-tifunction display (Y page 233).Changes in the outside temperature are dis-played after a short delay.

Coolant temperature display

G WARNINGOpening the hood when the engine is over-heated or when there is a fire in the enginecompartment could expose you to hot gases

or other service products. There is a risk ofinjury.Let an overheated engine cool down beforeopening the hood. If there is a fire in theengine compartment, keep the hood closedand contact the fire department.

! A display message is shown if the coolanttemperature is too high.If the coolant temperature is over 248 ‡(120 †), do not continue driving. Theengine will otherwise be damaged.

The analog coolant temperature gauge is inthe instrument cluster on the right-hand side(Y page 33).In the on-board computer in the ServiceServicemenu there is a digital coolant temperaturegauge (Y page 244).Under normal operating conditions and withthe specified coolant level, the coolant tem-perature may rise to 248 ‡ (120 †).

Operating the on-board computer

: Multifunction display; Right control panel= Left control panel

Displays and operation 231

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

X To activate the on-board computer: turnthe SmartKey to position 1 in the ignitionlock.

You can control the multifunction display andthe settings in the on-board computer usingthe buttons on the multifunction steeringwheel.Left control panel

ò RCalls up the main menu

9

:

Press briefly:RScrolls in listsRSelects a menu or functionRIn the RadioRadio/MediaMedia menu:opens the track or station listand selects an audio track orvideo sceneRIn the TelephoneTelephone menu:switches to the phone book andselects a name or a telephonenumber

9

:

Press and hold:RRapid scrolling in all listsRIn the RadioRadio/MediaMedia menu:selects a station, audio track orvideo scene using rapid scrollingRIn the TelephoneTelephone menu: startsrapid scrolling if the phone bookis open

a RIn all menus: confirms the selec-ted entry in the listRIn the RadioRadio/MediaMedia menu:opens the list of available radiosources/mediaRIn the TelephoneTelephone menu:switches to the phone book andstarts dialing the selected num-ber

ñ Switches off the Voice Control Sys-tem; see the separate operatinginstructions

% Press briefly:RBackRIn the RadioRadio/MediaMediamenu: dese-lects the track or station list orlist of available radio sources/mediaRHides display messagesRExits the telephone book/redialmemory

% Press and hold:RCalls up the standard display inthe TripTrip menu

Right control panel

~ RRejects or ends a callRExits phone book/redial mem-ory

6 RMakes or accepts a callRSwitches to the redial memory

WX

RAdjusts the volume

8 RMute

ó Switches on the Voice Control Sys-tem; see the separate operatinginstructions

232 Displays and operationOn

-board

computera

nddisplays

Multifunction display

Multifunction display: Drive program (Y page 166); Transmission position (Y page 166)= Display panel for display messages,

menus and menu lists? TimeA Outside temperature (Y page 231)B Additional speedometer (Y page 248)The unit displayed in additional speedometerB in the multifunction display is inverse tothe speedometer unit in the instrument clus-ter.X To call up the menu list in display panel=: press theò button on the steeringwheel.Display panel= shows the selected menuor submenu and display messages.

The following messages may appear in themultifunction display:Z Gearshift recommendation, when

shifting manually (automatic trans-mission) (Y page 169)

XjY Active Parking Assist (Y page 202)CRUISECRUISE Cruise control (Y page 183)_ Adaptive Highbeam Assist

(Y page 127)

è ECO start/stop function(Y page 161)

ë HOLD function (Y page 196)a DISTRONIC PLUS Steering Assist

and Stop&Go Pilot (Y page 194)

Head-up display

General notesThe head-up display projects informationfrom the navigation system and the driverassistance system above the dashboard intothe driver's field of vision.A requirement for the display of the contentsis that the following functions are available inthe vehicle and are switched on:RNavigationRDISTRONIC PLUSRCruise controlThe head-up display allows the driver to seeall of the information without having to takehis eyes off the road.

Important safety notesThe head-up display is only an aid and is not asubstitute for attentive driving.The visibility of the head-up display is influ-enced by the following conditions:Rthe driver's seat positionRthe positioning of the display imageRthe general ambient lightRsunglasses with polarization filtersRwet roadsRblocking of sunlight by objects on the dis-play cover

In the event of extreme sunlight, sections ofthe display may fade. This can be reversed byswitching the head-up display off and onagain.

i Vehicles with the head-up display areequipped with a special windshield. Should

Displays and operation 233

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

repairs be necessary, have the windshieldreplaced at a qualified specialist workshop.

Displays and operation

Switching the head-up display on or off

X Press button:.When the head-up display is switched on,the display appears in the driver's field ofvision.

234 Displays and operationOn

-board

computerand

displays

Head-up display

Content and information for the following systems are shown in the head-up display:: Navigation messages; Current speed= Set DISTRONIC PLUS speed (Y page 185)

The selected cruise control speed (Y page 183)In the Settingsmenu, in the submenu head-up display, you have the following settings options:RSwitching other displays on/off (Y page 246)RSetting the position (Y page 247)RSetting the brightness (Y page 247)

Menus and submenus

Menu overviewPress theò button on the steering wheelto call up the list of menus and select a menu.Operating the on-board computer(Y page 231).Depending on the equipment installed in thevehicle, you can call up the following menus:RTripTrip menu (Y page 236)RNaviNavi menu (navigation instructions)(Y page 238)RRadioRadio menu (Y page 240)RMediaMedia menu (Y page 240)RTelephoneTelephone menu (Y page 242)

RAssistance GraphicAssistance Graphic menu(Y page 243)RServiceService menu (Y page 244)RSettingsSettings menu (Y page 244)

Menus and submenus 235

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Trip menu

Standard display

X Press and hold the% button on thesteering wheel until the TripTrip menu withtrip odometer: and odometer; isshown.

Displaying the range and current fuelconsumption

X Useò on the steering wheel to call upthe list of menus.

X Press the:or9button on the steer-ing wheel to select the TripTrip menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

X Press the: or9 button to selectapproximate range: and current fuel con-sumption;.

Approximate range: that can be covered iscalculated according to your current drivingstyle and the amount of fuel in the tank. Ifthere is only a small amount of fuel left in thefuel tank, the display shows a vehicle being

refueledC instead of approximaterange:.Recuperation display= shows you if energyis being recuperated from the kinetic energyin overrun mode and saved in the battery.Recuperation display= depends on theengine installed and is therefore not availablein all vehicles.

ECO display

X Useò on the steering wheel to call upthe list of menus.

X Press the:or9button on the steer-ing wheel to select the TripTrip menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

X Use the: or9 button to select ECODISPLAY.

If the ignition remains switched off for longerthan four hours, the ECO display will be auto-matically reset.For further information on the ECO display,see (Y page 179).

236 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computera

nddisplays

Trip computer "From Start" or "FromReset"

: Distance; Duration= Average speed? Average fuel consumptionX Useò on the steering wheel to call upthe list of menus.

X Press the:or9button on the steer-ing wheel to select the TripTrip menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

X Press the: or9 button to selectFrom StartFrom Start or From ResetFrom Reset.

The values in the From StartFrom Start submenu arecalculated from the start of a journey whilstthe values in the From ResetFrom Reset submenu arecalculated from the last time the submenuwas reset (Y page 237).The From StartFrom Start trip computer is automati-cally reset if:Rthe ignition has been switched off for morethan four hours.R999 hours have been exceeded.R9,999 miles have been exceeded.The From ResetFrom Reset trip computer is automati-cally reset if the value exceeds 9,999 hours or99,999 miles.

Digital speedometer

X Useò on the steering wheel to call upthe list of menus.

X Press the:or9button on the steer-ing wheel to select the TripTrip menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

X Press the: or9 button to select thedigital speedometer.

Resetting values

X Useò on the steering wheel to call upthe list of menus.

X Press the:or9button on the steer-ing wheel to select the TripTrip menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

X Press the: or9 button to select thefunction that you wish to reset.

X Press thea button.X Press the: button to select YesYes andpress thea button to confirm.

Menus and submenus 237

On-board

computera

nddisplays

Z

You can reset the values of the following func-tions:RTrip odometerR"From Start" trip computerR"From Reset" trip computerRECO displayWhen you reset the values in the "ECO dis-play", the values in the trip computer "FromStart" are likewise reset. When you reset thevalues in the trip computer "From Start", thevalues in the "ECO display" are likewise reset.

Navigation system menu

Displaying navigation instructionsIn the NaviNavi menu, the multifunction displayshows navigation instructions.Further information on navigation can befound in the separate Audio 20 or COMANDoperating instructions.X Switch on Audio 20 or COMAND; see theseparate operating instructions.

X Useò on the steering wheel to call upthe list of menus.

X Press the:or9button on the steer-ing wheel to select the NaviNavi menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

Route guidance not active

: Direction of travel; Current road

Route guidance active

No change of direction announced

: Distance to the next destination; Estimated arrival time= Distance to the next change of direction? Current road

Change of direction announced with alane recommendation

: Road into which the change of directionleads

; Distance to the change of direction= Change-of-direction symbol? Recommended lane and new lane during a

change of direction (white)A Possible lane (light gray)B Lane not recommended (dark gray)On multilane roads, new lane recommenda-tions can be displayed for the next change ofdirection if the digital map supports this data.During the change of direction, new lanesmay be added.

238 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computerand

displays

Lane not recommendedB: you will not beable to complete the next change of directionif you stay in this lane.Possible laneA: you will be able to completethe next change of direction in this lane only.Recommended lane?: in this lane you willbe able to complete the next change of direc-tion and the one after that.

Change of direction without lane recom-mendation

: Road into which the change of directionleads

; Distance to change of direction and visualdistance display

= Change-of-direction symbolWhen a change of direction is to bemade, youwill see symbol= for the change of directionand distance graphic;. The distance indi-cator shortens towards the top of the displayas you approach the point of the announcedchange of direction. The change of directionstarts once the distance display reaches zero.

Change of direction with lane recommen-dation

: Road into which the change of directionleads

; Distance to change of direction and visualdistance display

= Change-of-direction symbol? Lane recommendation

Other status indicators of the naviga-tion system

: Additional informationOther possible additional information:RNewNew Route...Route... or CalculatingCalculating Route...Route...A new route is calculated.ROff Mapped RoadOff Mapped RoadThe vehicle position is inside the area of thedigital map but the road is not recognized,e.g. non-paved roads (off-road).RNo RouteNo RouteNo route could be calculated to the selec-ted destination.RO

Menus and submenus 239

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

You have reached the destination or anintermediate destination.

Radio menu

: Waveband; Station frequency with memory position= Name of artist? Name of trackStation; is displayed with the station fre-quency or station name. Thememory positionis only displayed along with station; if thishas been stored.X Switch on Audio 20 or COMAND; see theseparate operating instructions.

X Useò on the steering wheel to call upthe list of menus.

X Press the:or9button on the steer-ing wheel to select the RadioRadio menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.Currently selected station; appears inthe multifunction display.

X To open the station list: press: or9 briefly.

X To select a station from the station list:press: or9 briefly.

X To select a station from the station listusing rapid scrolling: press and brieflyhold the: or9 button.

X To select a waveband or station mem-ory: pressa briefly.

X Use: or9 to select the wavebandor station memory.

X Pressa to confirm the selection.

i You can store your stations in Audio 20 orCOMAND, see the separate operatinginstructions.

i SIRIUS XM satellite radio functions like anormal radio.Further information on navigation can befound in the "Satellite radio" section in theseparate Audio 20 or COMAND operatinginstructions.

Media menu

Changing the media source

You can change the media source and play-back mode (audio, video or TV) at any time inthe MediaMedia menu.X Switch on Audio 20 or COMAND; see theseparate operating instructions.

X Useò on the steering wheel to call upthe list of menus.

X Press the:or9button on the steer-ing wheel to select the MediaMedia menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

X To open/close the media sources list:pressa briefly.The list shows the followingmedia sources,for example:RDisc (CD/DVD)RMemory card (SD/SDHC)

240 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computerand

displays

RMEDIA REGISTERRUSB storage deviceRBluetooth® audio device

Observe the additional information on mediasupport and on media mode in the separateAudio 20 or COMAND operating instructions.

Operating an audio player or audiomedia

: Media source, e.g. name of USB memorystick

; Current title= Name of artist? Name of albumA Folder nameAudio data from various audio devices ormedia can be played, depending on the equip-ment installed in the vehicle.X Switch on Audio 20 or COMAND; see theseparate operating instructions.

X Useò on the steering wheel to call upthe list of menus.

X Press the:or9button on the steer-ing wheel to select the MediaMedia menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

X To select audio player or data carrier:pressa briefly, to open the list of mediasources.

X Use: or9 to select the correspond-ing audio player or audio media.

X Pressa to confirm.

X To open the track list: press: or9briefly.

X To select next/previous track from thetrack list: briefly press: or9.

X To select a track from the track listusing rapid scrolling: press andhold: or9 until the desired track isreached.If you press and hold the: or9button, the rapid scrolling speed isincreased. Not all audio drives or data car-riers support this function.

If the corresponding track information isstored on the audio drive or audio media, themultifunction display may display the follow-ing:Rtrack numberRtrack nameRartistRalbumThe track information does not appear inaudio AUX mode (Auxiliary audio mode:external audio source connected).

Video DVD operation

X Switch on Audio 20 or COMAND; see theseparate operating instructions.

X Useò on the steering wheel to call upthe list of menus.

X Press the:or9button on the steer-ing wheel to select the MediaMedia menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

Menus and submenus 241

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

X To select DVD single drive or data car-rier: pressa briefly, to open the list ofmedia sources.

X Use: or9 to select the correspond-ing DVD player or DVD media.

X Pressa to confirm.X To open the scene list: press: or9 briefly.

X To select the next or previous scenefrom the scene list: briefly press: or9.

X To select a scene from the scene listusing rapid scrolling: press andhold: or9 until desired scene: isreached.

X Pressa to confirm your selection.

Telephone menu

Introduction

G WARNINGIf you operate information systems and com-munication equipment integrated in the vehi-cle while driving, you will be distracted fromtraffic conditions. You could also lose controlof the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.Only operate the equipment when the trafficsituation permits. If you are not sure that thisis possible, park the vehicle paying attentionto traffic conditions and operate the equip-ment when the vehicle is stationary.

When telephoning, you must observe thelegal requirements for the country in whichyou are currently driving.X Switch on the mobile phone; see the sepa-rate operating instructions.

X Switch on Audio 20 or COMAND; see theseparate operating instructions.

X Establish a Bluetooth® connection to Audio20 or COMAND, see the separate operatinginstructions.

X Useò on the steering wheel to call upthe list of menus.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheelto select the TelephoneTelephone menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

You will see one of the following display mes-sages in the multifunction display:RPhone READYPhone READY or the name of the networkprovider: the mobile phone has found anetwork and is ready to receive.RPhone No ServicePhone No Service: there is no networkavailable or the mobile phone is searchingfor a network.

Accepting a call

X Press the6 button on the steeringwheel to accept an incoming call.

If someone calls you when you are in theTelephoneTelephonemenu, a displaymessage appearsin the multifunction display.If you are not in the TelephoneTelephonemenu, you canstill accept a call.

Rejecting or ending a callX Press the~ button on the steeringwheel.

If you are not in the TelephoneTelephonemenu, you canstill reject or end a call.

242 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computera

nddisplays

Dialing a number from the phone bookX Useò on the steering wheel to call upthe list of menus.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheelto select the TelephoneTelephone menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

X Press the:,9 ora button toswitch to the phone book.

X Press the: or9 button to select thedesired name.

orX To begin rapid scrolling: press and holdthe: or9 button for longer thanone second.Rapid scrolling stops when you release thebutton or reach the end of the list.

X If only one telephone number is storedfor a name: press the6 ora buttonto start dialing.

orX If there is more than one number for aparticular name: press the6 orabutton to display the numbers.

X Press the: or9 button to select thenumber you want to dial.

X Press the6 ora button to start dial-ing.

orX To exit the phone book: press the~ or% button.

RedialingThe on-board computer saves the last namesor numbers dialed in the redial memory.X Useò on the steering wheel to call upthe list of menus.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheelto select the TelephoneTelephone menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

X Press the6 button to switch to theredial memory.

X Press the: or9 button to select thedesired name or number.

X Press the6 ora button to start dial-ing.

orX To exit the redial memory: press the~ or% button.

Assistance graphic menu

X Useò on the steering wheel to call upthe list of menus.

X Press the:or9button on the steer-ing wheel to select the AssistanceAssistanceGraphicGraphic menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.The multifunction display shows theDISTRONIC PLUS distance display in theassistance graphic.

X Press: to display the ATTEN-TION ASSIST assessment.

The assistance graphic displays the status ofand information from the following drivingsystems or driving safety systems:RDISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 191)RDistance warning and the autonomousbraking function COLLISION PREVENTIONASSIST PLUS (Y page 245)RPRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 74)RBlind Spot Assist (Y page 217) or ActiveBlind Spot Assist (Y page 221)

Menus and submenus 243

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

RATTENTION ASSIST (Y page 216)RLane Keeping Assist (Y page 219) or ActiveLane Keeping Assist (Y page 224)

Maintenance menu

Introduction

In the ServiceService menu, you have the followingoptions:RCalling up display messages in messagememory (Y page 250)RChecking the tire pressure electronically(Y page 367)RCalling up the service due date(Y page 329)RDisplaying the coolant temperature(Y page 244)

Displaying the coolant temperatureThe coolant temperature is also shown in theinstrument cluster in the tachometer.Observe the notes on coolant temperature(Y page 231).X Useò on the steering wheel to call upthe list of menus.

X Press the:or9button on the steer-ing wheel to select the ServiceService menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

X Use: or9 to select the CoolantCoolantsubmenu.

X Pressa to confirm your selection.The coolant temperature is shown in a bardisplay.

Settings menu

Introduction

In the SettingsSettingsmenu, you have the followingoptions:RChanging assistance settings(Y page 244)RChanging head-up display settings(Y page 246)RChanging the light settings (Y page 247)RChanging the instrument cluster settings(Y page 248)RRestoring the factory settings(Y page 249)

Assistance submenu

Deactivating/activating ESP®Observe the "Important safety notes" sectionin the description of ESP (Y page 72).

G WARNINGIf you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer sta-bilizes the vehicle. There is an increased riskof skidding and an accident.Only deactivate ESP® in the situations descri-bed in the following.

244 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computerand

displays

It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the fol-lowing situations:Rwhen using snow chainsRin deep snowRon sand or gravelFor further information about ESP®, see(Y page 71).X Start the engine.X Useò on the steering wheel to call upthe list of menus.

X Press the:or9button on the steer-ing wheel to select the SettingsSettings menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

X Use: or9 to select the DriveAs‐DriveAs‐sistsist submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to selectESPESP.

X Pressa to confirm.The current selection is displayed.

X To activate/deactivate: press theabutton again.If the å warning lamp in the instrumentcluster lights up when the vehicle is readyto drive, ESP® is deactivated.

If the ÷ and å warning lamps light upcontinuously, ESP® is not available due to amalfunction.Observe the information on warning lamps(Y page 288).Observe the information on displaymessages(Y page 251).

Activating/deactivating COLLISION PRE-VENTION ASSIST PLUSX Useò on the steering wheel to call upthe list of menus.

X Press the:or9button on the steer-ing wheel to select the SettingsSettings menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

X Use: or9 to select the DriveAs‐DriveAs‐sistsist submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Use9 or: to select CollisionCollisionPreventionPrevention.

X Pressa to confirm.The current selection is displayed.

X To activate/deactivate: press theabutton again.When COLLISION PREVENTION ASSISTPLUS is deactivated, theæ symbolappears in the multifunction display in theAssistance GraphicAssistance Graphic menu.

For further information about COLLISIONPREVENTION ASSIST PLUS, see (Y page 69).

Activating/deactivating PRE-SAFE®BrakePRE‑SAFE® Brake is only available in vehicleswith DISTRONIC PLUS.X Useò on the steering wheel to call upthe list of menus.

X Press the:or9button on the steer-ing wheel to select the SettingsSettings menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

X Use: or9 to select the DriveDriveAssistAssist submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to selectPRE-SAFE BrakePRE-SAFE Brake.

X Pressa to confirm.The current selection is displayed.

X To activate/deactivate: press theabutton again.When PRE-SAFE® Brake is deactivated, theæ symbol appears in the AssistanceAssistanceGraphicGraphic menu in the multifunction dis-play.

For more information on PRE‑SAFE® Brake,see (Y page 74).

Menus and submenus 245

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Activating/deactivating Blind Spot AssistX Useò on the steering wheel to call upthe list of menus.

X Press the:or9button on the steer-ing wheel to select the SettingsSettings menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

X Use: or9 to select the DriveDriveAssistAssist submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to selectBlind Spot AssistBlind Spot Assist.

X Pressa to confirm.The current selection is displayed.

X To activate/deactivate: press theabutton again.When Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind SpotAssist is activated, gray radar waves prop-agating backwards appear next to the vehi-cle in the Assistance GraphicAssistance Graphic menu inthe multifunction display.

For further information about Blind SpotAssist, see (Y page 217).For further information about Active BlindSpot Assist, see (Y page 221).

Setting ATTENTION ASSISTX Useò on the steering wheel to call upthe list of menus.

X Press the:or9button on the steer-ing wheel to select the SettingsSettings menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

X Use: or9 to select the DriveDriveAssistAssist submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to selectAttention AssistAttention Assist.

X Pressa to confirm.

X Press the: or9 button to set OffOff,StandardStandard or SensitiveSensitive.

X Press thea button to confirm the selec-tion.When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated,theé symbol appears in the Assis‐Assis‐tance Info Displaytance Info Display menu in the multi-function display when the ignition is on.

For further information about ATTENTIONASSIST, see (Y page 216).

Setting Lane Keeping AssistX Useò on the steering wheel to call upthe list of menus.

X Press the:or9button on the steer-ing wheel to select the SettingsSettings menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

X Use: or9 to select the DriveDriveAssistAssist submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press: or9 to select Lane Keep‐Lane Keep‐ing Assisting Assist.

X Pressa to confirm.The current selection StandardStandard or Adap‐Adap‐tivetive is displayed.

X To change the setting: pressa again.For further information about Lane KeepingAssist, see (Y page 219).For further information about Active LaneKeeping Assist, see (Y page 224).

Head-up display submenu

Switching other displays on/offThis function is only available if the vehicle isequipped with Navigation and/or Traffic SignAssist.In the on-board computer, you can selectwhich contents are shown on the windshieldwhen the head-up display is activated(Y page 233).

246 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computerand

displays

X Useò on the steering wheel to call upthe list of menus.

X Press the:or9button on the steer-ing wheel to select the SettingsSettings menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

X Press the: or9 button to select theHead-up DisplayHead-up Display submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 buttons to selectDisplay ContentDisplay Content.

X Pressa to confirm.Switching the navigation messages dis-play on/offX Press thea button to save the setting.When you switch on the NavigationNavigation Mes‐Mes‐sagessages display, navigation messages areshown on the windshield when the head-updisplay is activated.

For more information on navigation, see theseparate operating instructions.

Setting the positionYou can adjust the position of the displayedcontents on the windshield.X Switch on the Head-up display(Y page 234).

X Useò on the steering wheel to call upthe list of menus.

X Press the:or9button on the steer-ing wheel to select the SettingsSettings menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

X Use the: or9 button to select theHead-up DisplayHead-up Display submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Use the: or9 button to select thePositionPosition function.

X Press thea button to save the setting.X Use the: or9 button to set theposition from Level +5Level +5 to Level -5Level -5.

X Press thea or% button to save thesetting.

Using the Memory function, you can save andcall up the position of the Head-up display asa single memory preset (Y page 120).

Setting the brightnessYou can adjust the brightness of the displayedcontents on the windshield.X Switch on the Head-up display(Y page 234).

X Useò on the steering wheel to call upthe list of menus.

X Press the:or9button on the steer-ing wheel to select the SettingsSettings menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

X Use the: or9 button to select theHead-up DisplayHead-up Display submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theBrightnessBrightness function.

X Press thea button to save the setting.X Press the: or9 button to set thebrightness from Level +5Level +5 (bright) toLevel -5Level -5 (dark).

X Press thea or% button to save thesetting.

Light submenu

Switching the daytime running lamps on/offThis function is not available in Canada.X Useò on the steering wheel to call upthe list of menus.

X Press the:or9button on the steer-ing wheel to select the SettingsSettings menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

X Press the: or9 button to select theLightLight submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.

Menus and submenus 247

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

X Press the: or9 button to select theDaytime Running LightsDaytime Running Lights function.If the Daytime Running LightsDaytime Running Lights functionhas been switched on, the cone of light andtheW symbol in the multifunction dis-play are shown in white.

X Press thea button to save the setting.Further information on daytime runninglamps (Y page 124).

Instrument cluster submenu

Selecting the unit ofmeasurement for dis-tanceThe Display Unit Speed-/Odometer:Display Unit Speed-/Odometer:function allows you to choose whether cer-tain displays appear in kilometers or miles inthe multifunction display.X Useò on the steering wheel to call upthe list of menus.

X Press the:or9button on the steer-ing wheel to select the SettingsSettings menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

X Press the: or9 button to select theInstrument ClusterInstrument Cluster submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theDisplay Unit Speed-/OdometerDisplay Unit Speed-/Odometer func-tion.You will see the selected setting: kmkm ormilesmiles.

X Press thea button to save the setting.The selected unit of measurement for dis-tance applies to:RDigital speedometer in the TripTrip menuROdometer and the trip odometerRTrip computerRCurrent consumption and the rangeRNavigation instructions in the NaviNavi menuRCruise controlRDISTRONIC PLUSRASSYST PLUS service interval display

Selecting the permanent display functionUsing the PermanentPermanent Display:Display: function youcan enable outside temperature and addi-tional speedometer displays in the statusarea of the multifunction display.X Useò on the steering wheel to call upthe list of menus.

X Press the:or9button on the steer-ing wheel to select the SettingsSettings menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

X Press the: or9 button to select theInstrument ClusterInstrument Cluster submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press: or9 to select the Perma‐Perma‐nent Displaynent Display function.

X Pressa to confirm.The current selection Outside Tempera‐Outside Tempera‐tureture or SpeedometerSpeedometer is displayed.

X To change the setting: pressa again.

Switching the additional speedometeron/offUse the Additional SpeedometerAdditional Speedometer functionto choose whether the status area in the mul-tifunction display shows the speed digitally.The unit in the additional speedometer isalways inverse to the speedometer unit.X Useò on the steering wheel to call upthe list of menus.

X Press the:or9button on the steer-ing wheel to select the SettingsSettings menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

X Press the: or9 button to select theInstrument ClusterInstrument Cluster submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Use: or9 to select the Addi‐Addi‐tional Speedometertional Speedometer function.The current selection is displayed.

X To activate/deactivate: press theabutton again.

248 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computerand

displays

Restoring the factory settingsX Useò on the steering wheel to call upthe list of menus.

X Press the:or9button on the steer-ing wheel to select the SettingsSettings menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

X Press the: or9 button to select theFactory SettingsFactory Settings submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.The Reset All Settings?Reset All Settings? messageappears.

X Press the: or9 button to select NoNoor YesYes.

X Pressa to confirm the selection.If you have selected YesYes, the multifunctiondisplay shows a confirmation message.

For safety reasons, the Daytime RunningDaytime RunningLightsLights function in the LightsLights submenu isonly reset if the vehicle is stationary.

Menus and submenus 249

On-board

computera

nddisplays

Z

Display messages

Introduction

General notesDisplay messages appear in the multifunction display.Display messages with graphic displays may be shown in simplified form in the Operator'sManual and may therefore differ from the multifunction display.Please respond in accordancewith the displaymessages and follow the additional notes in thisOperator's Manual.With certain display messages, you will also hear a warning tone.You can hide the display messages. The display messages are then stored in the messagememory. Rectify the cause of a display message as soon as possible.When you stop and park the vehicle, please observe the notes on:RHOLD function (Y page 196)RParking (Y page 174)

Hiding display messagesX Press thea or% button on the steering wheel to hide the display message.The display message is cleared.

The multifunction display shows high-priority display messages in red. Some high-priority dis-play messages cannot be hidden.The multifunction display shows these messages continuously until the causes for the mes-sages have been remedied.

Message memoryThe on-board computer saves certain displaymessages in themessagememory. You can callup the display messages:X Useò on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus.X Press the: or9 button on the steering wheel to select the ServiceService menu.X Confirm by pressinga on the steering wheel.X Press: or9 to select the message memory.If there are no display messages, you will see No MessagesNo Messages in the multifunction display.If there are display messages, the number of messages stored is shown.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to scroll through the display messages.

250 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Safety systems

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

!÷Currently Unavail‐Currently Unavail‐able See Opera‐able See Opera‐tor's Manualtor's Manual

ABS (Anti-lock Brake System), ESP® (Electronic Stability Program),BAS (Brake Assist), PRE‑SAFE®, HOLD function, Crosswind Assist,hill start assist, STEER CONTROL, Active Lane Keeping Assist andActive Blind Spot Assist are temporarily unavailable.BAS PLUS, PRE‑SAFE® Brake, PRE‑SAFE® PLUS and COLLISIONPREVENTION ASSIST PLUS may also have failed.In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in theinstrument cluster.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.For example, the on-board voltage may be insufficient.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if youbrake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affec-ted. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation canincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Drive on carefully.Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering move-ments at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).If the display message disappears, the functions mentionedabove are available again.

If the display message continues to be displayed:X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

!÷Inoperative SeeInoperative SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

ABS, ESP®, BAS, PRE‑SAFE®, HOLD function, Crosswind Assist,hill start assist, STEER CONTROL, Active Lane Keeping Assist andActive Blind Spot Assist are unavailable due to a malfunction.BAS PLUS, PRE‑SAFE® Brake, PRE‑SAFE® PLUS and COLLISIONPREVENTION ASSIST PLUS may also have failed.The$ (USA only)/J (Canada only), ÷ å and !warning lamps in the instrument cluster may also light up.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNING

Display messages 251

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM SolutionsThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if youbrake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affec-ted. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation canincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

÷Inoperative SeeInoperative SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

ESP®, BAS, PRE‑SAFE®, HOLD function, Crosswind Assist, hillstart assist, STEER CONTROL, Active Lane Keeping Assist andActive Blind Spot Assist are unavailable due to a malfunction.BAS PLUS, PRE‑SAFE® Brake, PRE‑SAFE® PLUS and COLLISIONPREVENTION ASSIST PLUS may also have failed.In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps light up in theinstrument cluster.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thusincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

252 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

÷Currently Unavail‐Currently Unavail‐able See Opera‐able See Opera‐tor's Manualtor's Manual

ESP®, BAS, PRE‑SAFE®, HOLD function, Crosswind Assist, hillstart assist, STEER CONTROL, Active Lane Keeping Assist andActive Blind Spot Assist are unavailable due to a malfunction.BAS PLUS, PRE‑SAFE® Brake, PRE‑SAFE® PLUS and COLLISIONPREVENTION ASSIST PLUS may also have failed.In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps light up in theinstrument cluster.The self-diagnosis function might not be complete, for example.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if youbrake hard, for example.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thusincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering move-ments at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).If the display message disappears, the functions mentionedabove are available again.

If the display message continues to be displayed:X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 253

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

T!÷Inoperative SeeInoperative SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

EBD (electronic brake force distribution), ABS, ESP®, BAS,PRE‑SAFE®, HOLD function, Crosswind Assist, hill start assist,STEER CONTROL, Active Lane Keeping Assist and Active BlindSpot Assist are unavailable due to a malfunction.BAS PLUS, PRE‑SAFE® Brake, PRE‑SAFE® PLUS and COLLISIONPREVENTION ASSIST PLUS may also have failed.In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in theinstrument cluster and a warning tone sounds.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The front and rear wheels could thereforelock if you brake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affec-ted. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation canincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

F(USA

only)!(Canadaonly)Please ReleasePlease ReleaseParking BrakeParking Brake

The redF (USA only)/! (Canada only) indicator lampflashes and a warning tone sounds. A condition for automaticrelease of the electric parking brake is not fulfilled (Y page 176).You are driving with the electric parking brake applied.X Release the electric parking brake manually.

The redF (USA only)/! (Canada only) indicator lampflashes and a warning tone sounds.You are making an emergency stop using the electric parkingbrake (Y page 176).

F(USA

only)!(Canadaonly)Parking Brake SeeParking Brake SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

The yellow! warning lamp lights up.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.To apply:X Switch the ignition off.X Press the electric parking brake handle for at least ten seconds.X Shift the transmission to P.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

254 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The yellow!warning lamp and the redF (USA only)/!(Canada only) indicator lamp light up.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.To release:X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.X Release the electric parking brake manually.orX Release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 176).

If the electric parking brake still cannot be released:X Do not drive on.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The redF (USA only)/! (Canada only) indicator lampflashes and the yellow! warning lamp lights up.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.To release:X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.X Release the electric parking brake manually.To apply:X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.X Apply the electric parking brake manually.

If the redF (USA only)/! (Canada only) indicator lampcontinues to flash:X Do not drive on.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 382).X Shift the transmission to P.X Turn the front wheels towards the curb.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 255

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The yellow! warning lamp lights up. The redF (USAonly)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for about tenseconds after the electric parking brake has been applied orreleased. It then goes out or remains lit.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.X Apply the electric parking brake.

If it is not possible to engage the electric parking brake:X Shift the transmission to P.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

If it is not possible to release the electric parking brake manually:X Release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 176).

If the electric parking brake still cannot be released:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The yellow! warning lamp lights up. If you manually apply orrelease the electric parking brake, the redF (USA only)/!(Canada only) indicator lamp flashes.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. It is not possible toapply the electric parking brake manually.X Shift the transmission to P as the electric parking brake is notbeing applied automatically.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

If it is not possible to release the electric parking brake manually:X Release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 176).

256 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

F(USA

only)!(Canadaonly)ParkingParking BrakeBrake Inop‐Inop‐erativeerative

The yellow! warning lamp lights up. The redF (USAonly)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for about tenseconds after the electric parking brake has been applied orreleased. It then goes out or remains lit.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning, e.g. because of over-voltage or undervoltage.X Remove the cause for the overvoltage or undervoltage, e.g. bycharging the battery or restarting the engine.

X Engage or release the electric parking brake.

If it remains impossible to apply or release the electric parkingbrake:X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.X Engage or release the electric parking brake.

If the electric parking brake still cannot be released:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

If the electric parking brake still cannot be applied:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

The yellow! warning lamp lights up and the redF (USAonly)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes.It is not possible to apply the electric parking brake manually.X Shift the transmission to P.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

F(USA

only)!(Canadaonly)Turn On the Igni‐Turn On the Igni‐tion to Releasetion to Releasethe Parking Brakethe Parking Brake

The redF (USA only)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp lightsup.You attempted to release the electric parking brake while the igni-tion was switched off.X Switch on the ignition.

Display messages 257

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

$(USA

only)J(Canadaonly)Check Brake FluidCheck Brake FluidLevelLevel

There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.In addition, the$ (USA only)/J (Canada only) warninglamp lights up in the instrument cluster and a warning tonesounds.

G WARNINGThe braking effect may be impaired.There is a risk of an accident.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue drivingunder any circumstances.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 174).X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.X Do not add brake fluid. This does not correct the malfunction.

#Check Brake PadCheck Brake PadWearWear

The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit.USA only: the red$ brake system warning lamp also lights upwhile the engine is running.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

GInoperativeInoperative

One or more main features of the mbrace system are malfunc-tioning.X Have the mbrace system checked immediately at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Collision Preven‐Collision Preven‐tion Assist Plustion Assist PlusCurrently Unavail‐Currently Unavail‐able See Opera‐able See Opera‐tor's Manualtor's Manual

COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is temporarily not opera-tional. Possible causes are:Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due toelectromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio sta-tions or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range.Rthe on-board voltage is too low.When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display mes-sage disappears.COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is operational again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 174).X Restart the engine.

258 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Collision Preven‐Collision Preven‐tion Assist Plustion Assist PlusInoperativeInoperative

COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is temporarily inoperativedue to a malfunction. Adaptive Brake Assist may also have failed.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

PRE-SAFE Inopera‐PRE-SAFE Inopera‐tive See Opera‐tive See Opera‐tor's Manualtor's Manual

Important functions of PRE-SAFE® have failed. All other occupantsafety systems, e.g. air bags, remain available.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

PRE-SAFEPRE-SAFE FunctionsFunctionsCurrently LimitedCurrently LimitedSeeSee Operator'sOperator's Man‐Man‐ualual

PRE‑SAFE® PLUS or PRE‑SAFE® Brake is temporarily inoperative.Possible causes are:Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due toelectromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio sta-tions or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range.Rthe on-board voltage is too low.When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display mes-sage disappears.PRE‑SAFE® PLUS and PRE‑SAFE® Brake are operational again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 174).X Restart the engine.

PRE-SAFEPRE-SAFE FunctionsFunctionsLimited See Opera‐Limited See Opera‐tor's Manualtor's Manual

PRE‑SAFE® PLUS or PRE‑SAFE® Brake is unavailable due to a mal-function. BAS PLUS may also have failed.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 259

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Radar SensorsRadar SensorsDirty See Opera‐Dirty See Opera‐tor's Manualtor's Manual

At least one of the following driving systems or driving safety sys-tems is temporarily restricted or inoperative:RPRE-SAFE® PLUSRPRE-SAFE® BrakeRCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUSRActive Lane Keeping AssistRActive Blind Spot AssistRDISTRONIC PLUSPossible causes are:Rthe sensors in the radiator trim and/or in the bumpers are dirty.Rthe function of the driving system and/or driving safety systemis impaired due to heavy rain or snow.

A warning tone also sounds.When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display mes-sage disappears. All driving systems/driving safety systems areoperative again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 174).X Switch off the engine.X Clean the sensors in the following locations (Y page 334):Rin the radiator trimRin the front bumperRin the rear bumper, particularly in the middle of the rearbumper

X Restart the engine.The display message disappears.

6SRS MalfunctionSRS MalfunctionService RequiredService Required

The restraint system is faulty. The 6 warning lamp also lightsup in the instrument cluster.

G WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be trig-gered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not betriggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.For further information about the restraint system, see(Y page 42).

260 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

6FrontFront LeftLeft Malfunc‐Malfunc‐tion Servicetion ServiceRequiredRequired or FrontFrontRight MalfunctionRight MalfunctionService RequiredService Required

The front left-hand or right-hand restraint system has malfunc-tioned. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrumentcluster.

G WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be trig-gered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not betriggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

6Rear Left Malfunc‐Rear Left Malfunc‐tion Servicetion ServiceRequiredRequired or RearRearRight MalfunctionRight MalfunctionService RequiredService Required

The rear left-hand or right-hand restraint system has malfunc-tioned. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrumentcluster.

G WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be trig-gered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not betriggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

6Rear Center Mal‐Rear Center Mal‐function Servicefunction ServiceRequiredRequired

The rear center restraint system has malfunctioned. The 6warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.

G WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be trig-gered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not betriggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

6Left Side CurtainLeft Side CurtainAirbagAirbag MalfunctionMalfunctionService RequiredService Requiredor Right Side Cur‐Right Side Cur‐tain Airbag Mal‐tain Airbag Mal‐function Servicefunction ServiceRequiredRequired

There is a malfunction in the left-hand or right-hand window cur-tain air bag. The6warning lamp also lights up in the instrumentcluster.

G WARNINGThe left or right window curtain air bag may either be triggeredunintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be trig-gered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 261

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Front PassengerFront PassengerAirbag DisabledAirbag DisabledSeeSee Operator'sOperator's Man‐Man‐ualual

The front-passenger air bag is deactivated during the journey, eventhough:Ran adultorRa person larger than a certain size is occupying the front-passenger seat

If additional forces are applied to the seat, the system may inter-pret the occupant's weight as lower than it actually is.

G WARNINGThe front-passenger air bag does not deploy during an accident.There is an increased risk of injury.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 174).X Switch the ignition off.X Have the occupant get out of the vehicle.X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door andswitch on the ignition.

X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps in the centerconsole and the multifunction display and check the following:Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGER AIR BAG ONindicator lamps must light up simultaneously for approx-imately six seconds.Rafter this, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp mustbe lit and remain lit. If the indicator lamp is on, OCS has dis-abled the front-passenger air bag (Y page 52).Rthe display messages FrontFront PassengerPassenger AirbagAirbag EnabledEnabledSee Operator's ManualSee Operator's Manual or Front Passenger AirbagFront Passenger AirbagDisabledDisabled SeeSee Operator'sOperator's ManualManualmust not appear in themultifunction display.

X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary sys-tem checks have been completed.

X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the mul-tifunction display.

If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can beoccupied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF or ONindicator lamps remain lit or go out depends on howOCS classifiesthe occupant.If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating cor-rectly.

262 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM SolutionsX Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.For further information about the Occupant Classification System,see (Y page 52).

Front PassengerFront PassengerAirbagAirbag EnabledEnabled SeeSeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

The front-passenger air bag is enabled during the journey, eventhough:Ra child, a small adult or an object weighing less than the sys-tem's weight threshold is located on the front-passenger seatorRthe front-passenger seat is unoccupiedThe system may detect objects or forces applying additionalweight on the seat.

G WARNINGThe air bag may deploy unintentionally.There is an increased risk of injury.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 174).X Switch the ignition off.X Open the front-passenger door.X Remove the child and the child restraint system from the front-passenger seat.

X Make sure that there are no objects on the seat adding to theweight.The system may otherwise detect the additional weight andinterpret the seat occupant's weight as greater than it actuallyis.

X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door andswitch on the ignition.

X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps in the centerconsole and the multifunction display and check the following:Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGER AIR BAG ONindicator lamps must light up simultaneously for approx-imately six seconds.Rafter this, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp mustbe lit and remain lit. If the indicator lamp is on, OCS (OccupantClassification System) has disabled the front-passenger airbag (Y page 52).Rthe display messages FrontFront PassengerPassenger AirbagAirbag EnabledEnabledSee Operator's ManualSee Operator's Manual or Front Passenger AirbagFront Passenger Airbag

Display messages 263

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM SolutionsDisabledDisabled SeeSee Operator'sOperator's ManualManualmust not appear in themultifunction display.

X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary sys-tem checks have been completed.

X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the mul-tifunction display.

If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can beoccupied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF or ONindicator lamps remain lit or go out depends on howOCS classifiesthe occupant.If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating cor-rectly.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.For further information about the Occupant Classification System,see (Y page 52).

Lightsi Display messages about LEDs:This display message will only appear if all LEDs have failed.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

bCheck Left Corner‐Check Left Corner‐ing Lighting Light or CheckCheckRight CorneringRight CorneringLightLight

The left or right-hand cornering light is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Left LowCheck Left LowBeamBeam or CheckCheckRight Low BeamRight Low Beam

The left or right-hand low-beam headlamp is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself(Y page 130).

orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Rear LeftCheck Rear LeftTurn SignalTurn Signal orCheck Rear RightCheck Rear RightTurn SignalTurn Signal

The rear left-hand or rear right-hand turn signal is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself(Y page 130).

orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

264 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

bCheck Front LeftCheck Front LeftTurn SignalTurn Signal orCheck Front RightCheck Front RightTurn SignalTurn Signal

The front left-hand or front right-hand turn signal is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself(Y page 130).

orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Left MirrorCheck Left MirrorTurn SignalTurn Signal orCheckCheck RightRight MirrorMirrorTurn SignalTurn Signal

The turn signal in the left-hand or right-hand exterior mirror isdefective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Left BrakeCheck Left BrakeLampLamp or CheckCheckRight Brake LampRight Brake Lamp

The left or right-hand brake lamp is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheckCheck CenterCenter BrakeBrakeLampLamp

The high-mounted brake lamp is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Left TailCheck Left Tailand Brake Lampsand Brake Lamps orCheck Right TailCheck Right Tailand Brake Lampsand Brake Lamps

The left or right-hand tail lamp/brake lamp is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Left TailCheck Left TailLampLamp or CheckCheckRight Tail LampRight Tail Lamp

The left or right-hand tail lamp is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Left HighCheck Left HighBeamBeam or CheckCheckRight High BeamRight High Beam

The left or right-hand high beam is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself(Y page 130).

orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bLicense Plate LampLicense Plate Lamp

The left or right-hand license plate lamp is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 265

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

bCheck Front LeftCheck Front LeftParking LampParking Lamp orCheck Front RightCheck Front RightParking LampParking Lamp

The front left or front right parking or standing lamp is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bBackup LightBackup Light

The left or right-hand backup lamp is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself(Y page 130).

orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Front LeftCheck Front LeftSidemarker LampSidemarker Lamp orCheck Front RightCheck Front RightSidemarker LampSidemarker Lamp

The left or right front side marker lamp is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Rear LeftCheck Rear LeftSidemarker LampSidemarker Lamp orCheck Rear RightCheck Rear RightSidemarker LampSidemarker Lamp

The rear left or right side marker lamp is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheckCheck LeftLeft DaytimeDaytimeRunning LightRunning Light orCheck Right Day‐Check Right Day‐time Running Lighttime Running Light

The left-hand or right-hand daytime running lamp is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bActive HeadlampsActive HeadlampsInoperativeInoperative

The active light function is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bMalfunction SeeMalfunction SeeOperator’s ManualOperator’s Manual

The exterior lighting is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bAutoAuto LampLamp FunctionFunctionInoperativeInoperative

The light sensor is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

266 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

bSwitch Off LightsSwitch Off Lights

The lights are still switched on when you leave the vehicle. Awarning tone also sounds.X Turn the light switch toÃ.

Adaptive HighbeamAdaptive HighbeamAssist InoperativeAssist Inoperative

Adaptive Highbeam Assist is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Adaptive HighbeamAdaptive HighbeamAssist CurrentlyAssist CurrentlyUnavailable SeeUnavailable SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

Adaptive Highbeam Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoper-ative. Possible causes are:Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty.Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.X Clean the windshield.If the system detects that the camera is fully operational, displaymessage Adaptive Highbeam Assist Now AvailableAdaptive Highbeam Assist Now Available is dis-played.Adaptive Highbeam Assist is operational again.

Engine

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

+Check CoolantCheck CoolantLevel See Opera‐Level See Opera‐tor's Manualtor's Manual

The coolant level is too low.

! Avoidmaking long journeys with too little coolant in the enginecooling system. The engine will otherwise be damaged.

X Add coolant, observing the warning notes before doing so(Y page 327).

X If coolant needs to be added more often than usual, have theengine coolant system checked at a qualified specialist work-shop.

?? The fan motor is faulty.X At coolant temperatures below 248 ‡ (120 †), drive to thenearest qualified specialist workshop.

X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving inmoun-tainous terrain, and stop-and-go traffic.

Display messages 267

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

?Coolant Too HotCoolant Too HotStop Vehicle TurnStop Vehicle TurnEngine OffEngine Off

The coolant is too hot.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGDo not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause somefluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment tocatch fire.Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burnswhich can occur just by opening the hood.There is a risk of injury.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 174).X Wait until the engine has cooled down.X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is notblocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice.

X Do not start the engine again until the display message goes outand the coolant temperature is below 248 ‡ (120 †). Other-wise, the engine could be damaged.

X Pay attention to the coolant temperature display.X If the temperature increases again, visit a qualified specialistworkshop immediately.

Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolantlevel, the coolant temperature may rise to 248 ‡ (120 †).

#SeeSee Operator'sOperator's Man‐Man‐ualual

The battery is not being charged.A warning tone also sounds.Possible causes are:Ra defective alternatorRa torn poly-V-beltRa malfunction in the electronicsX Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

! Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 174).X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

268 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

#Stop Vehicle SeeStop Vehicle SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

The battery is no longer being charged and the battery charge levelis too low.A warning tone also sounds.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 174).X Observe the instructions in the# SeeSee Operator'sOperator's ManualManualdisplay message.

X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

#Start Engine SeeStart Engine SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

The engine is off and the battery charge level is too low.X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such asthe rear window defroster and interior lighting.

X Leave the engine running for a few minutes or drive a long dis-tance.The battery is being charged.

4Check Engine OilCheck Engine OilAt Next RefuelingAt Next Refueling

The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.A warning tone also sounds.X Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest(Y page 325).

X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 326).X Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop ifengine oil needs to be added more often than usual.

! Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine willotherwise be damaged.

Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from anyqualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.

Display messages 269

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

4Check Engine OilCheck Engine OilLevelLevel (Add(Add 11 quart)quart)

Display message only for AMG vehicles:The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.X Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest(Y page 325).

X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 326).X Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop ifengine oil needs to be added more often than usual.

! Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine willotherwise be damaged.

Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from anyqualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.

4Engine Oil LevelEngine Oil LevelLow Stop VehicleLow Stop VehicleTurn Engine OffTurn Engine Off

The engine oil level is too low. There is a risk of engine damage.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 174).X Check the engine oil level (Y page 325).X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 326).

8Fuel Level LowFuel Level Low

The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.X Refuel at the nearest gas station.

CC There is only a very small amount of fuel in the fuel tank.X Refuel at the nearest gas station without fail.

8Gas Cap LooseGas Cap Loose

The fuel system pressure is too low. The fuel filler cap is not closedcorrectly or the fuel system is leaking.X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed:X Close the fuel filler cap.If the fuel filler cap is correctly closed:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

270 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Driving systems

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

ÀATTENTION ASSIST:ATTENTION ASSIST:Take a Break!Take a Break!

Based on certain criteria, ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigueor a lack of concentration on the part of the driver. A warning tonealso sounds.X If necessary, take a break.During long journeys, take regular breaks in good time so you getenough rest.

ÀAttention AssistAttention AssistInoperativeInoperative

ATTENTION ASSIST is inoperative.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

¨Vehicle RisingVehicle Rising

Your vehicle is adjusting to the level you have selected.

¨Vehicle RisingVehicle RisingPlease WaitPlease Wait

The vehicle level is too low when the vehicle is stationary. A warn-ing tone also sounds.X Do not pull away.The vehicle level is set when the display message disappears.

¨Stop Vehicle Vehi‐Stop Vehicle Vehi‐cle Too Lowcle Too Low

You have pulled away while the vehicle level is still too low.AIRMATIC sets the vehicle to the selected level after a shortperiod.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 174).X Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away.

AIRMATIC is defective. A warning tone also sounds.X Do not drive at speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h).X Make only slight steering movements. Otherwise, the frontfender or the tires could be damaged if the steering movementis too large.

X Listen for scraping sounds.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely, paying attention to roadand traffic conditions, and select a higher vehicle level.Depending on the malfunction, it may be possible to raise thevehicle.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 271

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

¨MalfunctionMalfunction

The AIRMATIC function is restricted. The vehicle's handling char-acteristics may be affected.X Do not drive at speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h).X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Lane KeepingLane KeepingAssist CurrentlyAssist CurrentlyUnavailable SeeUnavailable SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manualor Active LaneActive LaneKeepingKeeping AssistAssist Cur‐Cur‐rentlyrently UnavailableUnavailableSeeSee Operator'sOperator's Man‐Man‐ualual

Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is deactivatedand temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are:Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty.Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.Rthere are no lane markings for a longer period.Rthe lanemarkings areworn, dark or covered, e.g. by dirt or snow.When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display mes-sage disappears.Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is operationalagain.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 174).X Clean the windshield.

Lane KeepingLane KeepingAssist Inopera‐Assist Inopera‐tivetive or ActiveActiveLane KeepingLane KeepingAssist InoperativeAssist Inoperative

Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

272 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Blind Spot AssistBlind Spot AssistCurrently Unavail‐Currently Unavail‐able See Opera‐able See Opera‐tor's Manualtor's Manual orActive Blind SpotActive Blind SpotAssist CurrentlyAssist CurrentlyUnavailable SeeUnavailable SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarily inop-erative. Possible causes are:Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.Rthe radar sensor system is outside the operating temperaturerange.Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due toelectromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio sta-tions or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.

When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display mes-sage disappears.Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is operational again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 174).X Restart the engine.

Blind Spot AssistBlind Spot AssistInoperativeInoperative orActive Blind SpotActive Blind SpotAssist InoperativeAssist Inoperative

Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Park Assist Can‐Park Assist Can‐celedceled

The driver's door is open.X Repeat the parking gap measurement and parking process withthe driver's door closed.

You touched the multifunction steering wheel while steering inter-vention was active.X While steering intervention is active, make sure that the multi-function steering wheel is not touched unintentionally.

The vehicle has started to skid and ESP® has intervened.X Use Active Parking Assist again later (Y page 202).

ParkPark AssistAssist Inoper‐Inoper‐ativeative

PARKTRONIC is malfunctioning or faulty.X Follow the instructions and helpful hints in the "Problems withPARKTRONIC" section (Y page 202).

If the display message continues to be displayed:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 273

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Active Parking Assist is unavailable or faulty.X Switch off the ignition and restart the engine.

If Active Parking Assist continues to be unavailable (thej symbolis not shown in the multifunction display):X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

ëOffOff

The HOLD function is deactivated. The vehicle is skidding.A warning tone also sounds.X Reactivate the HOLD function later (Y page 196).

The HOLD function is deactivated. When the brake pedal is firmlydepressed, an activation condition is not fulfilled.A warning tone also sounds.X Check the activation conditions for the HOLD function(Y page 196).

DISTRONIC PLUS OffDISTRONIC PLUS Off DISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated (Y page 185).If it was not deactivated by the driver, a warning tone also sounds.

DISTRONICDISTRONIC PLUSPLUS NowNowAvailableAvailable

DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again after having been tempo-rarily unavailable. You can now reactivate DISTRONIC PLUS(Y page 185).

274 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

DISTRONICDISTRONIC PLUSPLUS Cur‐Cur‐rentlyrently UnavailableUnavailableSeeSee Operator'sOperator's Man‐Man‐ualual

DISTRONIC PLUS is temporarily inoperative.DISTRONIC PLUS Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are also tem-porarily inoperative.Possible causes are:Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due toelectromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio sta-tions or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range.Rthe on-board voltage is too low.A warning tone also sounds.When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display mes-sage disappears.DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 174).X Restart the engine.

DISTRONIC PLUSDISTRONIC PLUSInoperativeInoperative

DISTRONIC PLUS is defective.The following may have also failed:RBAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic AssistRPRE-SAFE® BrakeRDISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go PilotA warning tone also sounds.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

DISTRONICDISTRONIC PLUSPLUS Sus‐Sus‐pendedpended

You have depressed the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS is nolonger controlling the speed of the vehicle.X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.

DISTRONIC PLUSDISTRONIC PLUS- - - mph- - - mph

An activation condition for DISTRONIC PLUS is not fulfilled.X Check the activation conditions for DISTRONIC PLUS(Y page 185).

Display messages 275

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

DTR+: SteeringDTR+: SteeringAssist. CurrentlyAssist. CurrentlyUnavailable SeeUnavailable SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

DISTRONIC PLUS Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are tempo-rarily inoperative. Possible causes are:Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty.Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.Rthere are no lane markings for a longer period.Rthe lanemarkings areworn, dark or covered, e.g. by dirt or snow.When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display mes-sage disappears.DISTRONIC PLUS Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are operativeagain.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 174).X Clean the windshield.

DTR+: SteeringDTR+: SteeringAssist. Inopera‐Assist. Inopera‐tivetive

DISTRONIC PLUS Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are malfunc-tioning.However, the DISTRONIC PLUS functions are still available.A warning tone also sounds.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Cruise ControlCruise ControlInoperativeInoperative

Cruise control is defective.A warning tone also sounds.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Cruise ControlCruise Control- - - mph- - - mph

A condition for activating cruise control has not been met.You have tried to store a speed below 20 mph (30 km/h), forexample.X If conditions permit, drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) andstore the speed.

X Check the activation conditions for cruise control (Y page 183).

276 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Tires

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

Check Tire Pres‐Check Tire Pres‐sure Soonsure Soon

Canada only:The tire pressure loss warning system has detected a significantloss in pressure.A warning tone also sounds.Possible causes:Ryou have changed the positions of the wheels and tires or instal-led new wheels and tires.Rthe tire pressure in one or more tires is not correct.

G WARNINGWith tire pressures which are too low, there is a risk of the fol-lowing hazards:Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speedincrease.Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatlyimpair tire traction.Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, maybe greatly impaired.

There is a risk of an accident.X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or brakingmaneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 174).X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for aflat tire (Y page 341).

X Check the tire pressures and, if necessary, correct the tire pres-sure.

X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system when the tirepressure is correct (Y page 369).

Check Tire Pres‐Check Tire Pres‐sure Then Restartsure Then RestartRun Flat IndicatorRun Flat Indicator

Canada only:The tire pressure loss warning system generated a display mes-sage and has not been restarted since.X Set the correct tire pressure in all four tires.X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system (Y page 369).

RunRun FlatFlat IndicatorIndicatorInoperativeInoperative

Canada only:The tire pressure loss warning system is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 277

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Please CorrectPlease CorrectTire PressureTire Pressure

The tire pressure is too low in at least one of the tires, or the tirepressure difference between the wheels is too great.X Check the tire pressures at the next opportunity (Y page 365).X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.X Restart the tire pressure monitor (Y page 367).

Check TiresCheck Tires The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly.The wheel position is displayed in the multifunction display.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGWith tire pressures which are too low, there is a risk of the fol-lowing hazards:Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speedincrease.Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatlyimpair tire traction.Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, maybe greatly impaired.

There is a risk of an accident.X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or brakingmaneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 174).X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for aflat tire (Y page 341).

X Check the tire pressure (Y page 365).X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.

278 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Warning Tire Mal‐Warning Tire Mal‐functionfunction

The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly. Thewheel position is shown in the multifunction display.

G WARNINGIf you drive with a flat tire, there is a risk of the following hazards:Ra flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.Ryou could lose control of the vehicle.Rcontinued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire.

There is a risk of an accident.X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or brakingmaneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 174).X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for aflat tire (Y page 341).

Tire Press. Moni‐Tire Press. Moni‐tor Currentlytor CurrentlyUnavailableUnavailable

Due to a source of radio interference, no signals can be receivedfrom the wheel sensors. The tire pressure monitor is temporarilymalfunctioning.X Drive on.The tire pressure monitor restarts automatically as soon as theproblem has been solved.

Tire Press. Sen‐Tire Press. Sen‐sor(s) Missingsor(s) Missing

There is no signal from the tire pressure sensor of one or severalwheels. The pressure of the affected tire is not displayed in themultifunction display.X Have the faulty tire pressure sensor replaced at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Tire Pressure Mon‐Tire Pressure Mon‐itor Inoperativeitor InoperativeNo Wheel SensorsNo Wheel Sensors

The wheels mounted do not have a suitable tire pressure sensor.The tire pressure monitor is deactivated.X Mount wheels with suitable tire pressure sensors.The tire pressuremonitor is activated automatically after drivingfor a few minutes.

Tire Press. Moni‐Tire Press. Moni‐tor Inoperativetor Inoperative

The tire pressure monitor is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 279

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Vehicle

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Shift to 'P' orShift to 'P' or'N''N' toto StartStart EngineEngine

You have attempted to start the engine with the transmission inposition R or D.X Shift the transmission to position P or N.

Auxiliary BatteryAuxiliary BatteryMalfunctionMalfunction

The auxiliary battery for the transmission is no longer beingcharged.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Apply Brake toApply Brake toShift from 'P'Shift from 'P'

You have attempted to move the transmission selector lever toposition D, R or N without depressing the brake pedal.X Depress the brake pedal.

Transmission NotTransmission Notin P Risk of Vehi‐in P Risk of Vehi‐cle Rolling Awaycle Rolling Away

The driver's door is open and the transmission is in positionR,N orD.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGThe vehicle may roll away.There is a risk of an accident.X Shift the transmission to position P.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 174).

Service RequiredService RequiredDoDo NotNot ShiftShift GearsGearsVisit DealerVisit Dealer

You cannot change the transmission position due to amalfunction.A warning tone also sounds.If transmission position D is selected:X Drive to a qualified specialist workshop without shifting thetransmission from position D.

If transmission position R, N or P is selected:X Notify a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service.

Only Shift to 'P'Only Shift to 'P'when Vehicle iswhen Vehicle isStationaryStationary

The vehicle is moving.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Shift the transmission to position P.

N The trunk lid is open.X Close the trunk lid.

280 Display messagesOn

-board

computera

nddisplays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

MM The hood is open. A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGThe open hood may block your view when the vehicle is in motion.There is a risk of an accident.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 174).X Close the hood.

CC At least one door is open. A warning tone also sounds.X Close all the doors.

_RearRear LeftLeft BackrestBackrestNot LatchedNot Latched orRear Right Back‐Rear Right Back‐rest Not Latchedrest Not Latched

The backrest in the rear is not engaged on the left-hand and/orright-hand side.X Push the backrest back until it engages.

_Rear Center Back‐Rear Center Back‐rest Not Engagedrest Not Engaged

The center rear seat backrest is not engaged.X Push the backrest back until it engages.

ÐPowerPower SteeringSteering Mal‐Mal‐function See Oper‐function See Oper‐ator's Manualator's Manual

The power steering is malfunctioning.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGYou will need to use more force to steer.There is a risk of an accident.X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required.X If you are able to steer safely: carefully drive on to a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

X If you are unable to steer safely: do not drive on. Contact thenearest qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 281

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

ÐSteering Malfunc‐Steering Malfunc‐tion See Opera‐tion See Opera‐tor's Manualtor's Manual

The electric steering lock is malfunctioning.

G WARNINGThe steering may be locked by the electric steering lock.There is a risk of an accident.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 174).X Do not drive on and consult the nearest qualified specialistworkshop.

_Before StartingBefore Startingthe Engine, Turnthe Engine, TurnSteering WheelSteering Wheel

The electric steering lock was unable to unlock the steering.X Remove the key from the ignition lock.X To unlock the steering, move the steering wheel slightly.X Insert the key into the ignition lock again.

Phone No ServicePhone No Service Your vehicle is outside the network provider's transmitter/receiver range.X Wait until the mobile phone operational readiness symbolappears in the multifunction display.

¥Check Washer FluidCheck Washer Fluid

The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has droppedbelow the minimum.X Add washer fluid (Y page 327).

SmartKey

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

ÂKey Does NotKey Does NotBelong to VehicleBelong to Vehicle

You have put the wrong SmartKey in the ignition lock.X Use the correct SmartKey.

ÂTakeTake YourYour KeyKey fromfromIgnitionIgnition

The SmartKey is in the ignition lock.X Remove the SmartKey.

ÂObtain a New KeyObtain a New Key

The SmartKey needs to be replaced.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

282 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

ÂReplaceReplace KeyKey BatteryBattery

The SmartKey batteries are discharged.X Change the batteries (Y page 84).

ÂDon't Forget YourDon't Forget YourKeyKey

The SmartKey is not in the ignition lock. You have opened thedriver's door with the engine switched off.This display message is displayed for a maximum of 60 secondsand is simply a reminder.X Take the SmartKey with you when you leave the vehicle.

ÂKey Not DetectedKey Not Detected(white display mes-sage)

The SmartKey is currently undetected.X Change the location of the SmartKey in the vehicle.

If the SmartKey still cannot be detected:X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and turn it to thedesired position.

ÂKey Not DetectedKey Not Detected(red display message)

The SmartKey is not in the vehicle.A warning tone also sounds.If the engine is switched off, you can no longer lock the vehiclecentrally or start the engine.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 174).X Locate the SmartKey.X Pressa on the steering wheel to confirm the display mes-sage.

Because there is interference from a strong source of radio waves,the SmartKey is not detected whilst the engine is running.A warning tone also sounds.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 174).X Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.

ÂRemoveRemove 'Start''Start' But‐But‐ton and Insert Keyton and Insert Key

The SmartKey is continually undetected.The SmartKey detection function has a temporary malfunction oris faulty. A warning tone also sounds.X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and turn it to thedesired position.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 283

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

Safety

Seat belts

Warning/indicatorlamp

NN Signal typePossible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

ü N After starting the engine, the red seat belt warning lamp lights up for6 seconds.The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger to fastentheir seat belts.X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 46).

ü N After starting the engine, the red seat belt warning lamp lights up. In addi-tion, a warning tone sounds for up to 6 seconds.The driver's seat belt is not fastened.X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 46).The warning tone ceases.

ü N The red seat belt warning lamp lights up after the engine starts, as soon asthe driver's or the front-passenger door is closed.The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt.X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 46).The warning lamp goes out.

There are objects on the front-passenger seat.X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in asecure place.The warning lamp goes out.

ü N The red seat belt warning lamp flashes and an intermittent audible warningsounds.The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. The vehicle isbeing driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or has briefly been driven fasterthan 15 mph (25 km/h).X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 46).The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases.

There are objects on the front-passenger seat. The vehicle is being drivenfaster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or has briefly been driven faster than 15 mph(25 km/h).X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in asecure place.The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases.

284 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-board

computerand

displays

Safety systems

Warning/indicatorlamp

NN Signal typePossible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

$J N$ (USA only),J (Canada only): the red brake system warning lampis lit while the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGThe brake boosting effect is malfunctioning and the braking characteristicsmay be affected.There is a risk of an accident.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention toroad and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstan-ces.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 174).X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.

$J N$ (USA only),J (Canada only): the red brake system warning lampis lit while the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds.There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.

G WARNINGThe braking effect may be impaired.There is a risk of an accident.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention toroad and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstan-ces.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 174).X Do not add brake fluid. Adding more will not remedy the malfunction.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.

$ N USA only: the red brake system warning lamp is lit while the engine isrunning. The multifunction display also shows a display message with the# symbol.The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 285

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Warning/indicatorlamp

NN Signal typePossible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

! N The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) is deactivated due to amalfunction. ThereforeBAS (Brake Assist), BAS PLUS, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS, ESP®(Electronic Stability Program), Crosswind Assist, PRE‑SAFE®, PRE‑SAFE®PLUS, PRE‑SAFE® Brake, HOLD function, hill start assist, STEER CONTROL,Active Lane Keeping Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist are also deactivated.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without the functionslisted above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. Thebraking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.If the ABS control unit is faulty, there is also a possibility that other systems,such as the navigation system or the automatic transmission, will not beavailable.

286 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-board

computerand

displays

Warning/indicatorlamp

NN Signal typePossible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

! N The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. A warningtone also sounds.EBD is not available due to a malfunction. Therefore ABS, BAS, BAS PLUS,COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS, ESP®, Crosswind Assist, PRE‑SAFE®,PRE‑SAFE® PLUS, PRE‑SAFE® Brake, HOLD function, hill start assist, STEERCONTROL, Active Lane Keeping Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist are alsounavailable.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without the functionslisted above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard,for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. Thebraking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 287

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Warning/indicatorlamp

NN Signal typePossible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

$J֌!

N$ (USA only),J (Canada only): the red brake warning lamp, theyellow ESP® and ESP®OFFwarning lamp and the yellow ABSwarning lamp arelit while the engine is running.ABS and ESP® are not available due to a malfunction. Therefore BAS, BASPLUS, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS, EBD®, PRE‑SAFE®, PRE‑SAFE®PLUS, PRE‑SAFE® Brake, HOLD function, hill start assist, Crosswind Assist,STEER CONTROL, Active Lane Keeping Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist arealso unavailable.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without the functionslisted above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard,for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. Thebraking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

÷ N The yellow ESP® warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion.ESP® or traction control has intervened because there is a risk of skidding orat least one wheel has started to spin.Cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated.X When pulling away, only depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary.X Ease off the accelerator pedal while the vehicle is in motion.X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.X Do not deactivate ESP®.In rare cases (Y page 72), it may be best to deactivate ESP®.Observe the important safety notes on ESP® (Y page 72).

288 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-board

computerand

displays

Warning/indicatorlamp

NN Signal typePossible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

÷ N The yellow ESP® warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.ESP®, BAS, BAS PLUS, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS, PRE‑SAFE®,PRE‑SAFE® PLUS, PRE‑SAFE® Brake, HOLD function, hill start assist, Cross-wind Assist, STEER CONTROL, Active Lane Keeping Assist and Active BlindSpot Assist are unavailable due to a malfunction.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without the functionslisted above.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

å N The yellow ESP® OFF warning lamp is lit while the engine is running or theECO start/stop function is activated.ESP® is deactivated.

G WARNING

If ESP® is switched off, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Reactivate ESP®.In rare cases (Y page 72), it may be best to deactivate ESP®.Observe the important safety notes on ESP® (Y page 72).

X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.

If ESP® cannot be activated:X Drive on carefully.X Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 289

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Warning/indicatorlamp

NN Signal typePossible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

F! NF (USA only),! (Canada only): the red indicator lamp for the electricparking brake flashes or is lit and/or the yellow warning lamp for the electricparking brake is lit.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.

6 N The red restraint system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.The restraint system is faulty.

G WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered unin-tentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.X Drive on carefully.X Have the restraint system checked at a qualified specialist workshop imme-diately.

For further information about the restraint system, see (Y page 42).

290 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-board

computerand

displays

Engine

Warning/indicatorlamp

NN Signal typePossible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

; N The yellowCheck Engine warning lamp lights upwhile the engine is running.There may be a malfunction, for example:Rin the engine managementRin the fuel injection systemRin the exhaust systemRin the ignition system (for vehicles with gasoline engines)Rin the fuel systemThe emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine may be in emer-gency mode.X Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualified specialist work-shop.

In some states, you must immediately visit a qualified specialist workshop assoon as the yellowCheck Enginewarning lamp lights up. This is due to the legalrequirements in effect in these states. If in doubt, check whether such legalregulations apply in the state in which you are currently driving.

8 N The yellow reserve fuel warning lamp lights up while the engine is running.The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.X Refuel at the nearest gas station.

8 N The yellow reserve fuel warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion.In addition, the; Check Engine warning lamp may light up.The fuel system pressure is too low. The fuel filler cap is not closed correctlyor the fuel system is leaking.X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.X If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed: close the fuel filler cap.X If the fuel filler cap is closed: visit a qualified specialist workshop.

? N The red coolant warning lamp lights up while the engine is running and thecoolant temperature gage is at the start of the bar display.The temperature sensor for the coolant temperature gage is defective.The coolant temperature is no longer beingmonitored. There is a risk of enginedamage if the coolant temperature is too high.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, payingattention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under anycircumstances.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 174).X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 291

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Warning/indicatorlamp

NN Signal typePossible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

? N The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running.The coolant level is too low.If the coolant level is correct, the airflow to the engine radiatormay be blockedor the electric engine radiator fan may be malfunctioning.The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled sufficiently.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 174).X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the enginehas cooled down.

X Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warning notes(Y page 327).

X If you need to add coolant more often than usual, have the engine coolantsystem checked.

X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. bysnow, slush or ice.

X Do not start the engine again until the coolant temperature is below 248 ‡(120 †). Otherwise, the engine could be damaged.

X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving in mountainousterrain, and stop-and-go traffic.

? N The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running. Awarning tone also sounds.The coolant temperature has exceeded 248 ‡ (120 †). The airflow to theengine radiator may be blocked or the coolant level may be too low.

G WARNINGThe engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be damaged.Do not drivewhen your engine is overheated. This can cause some fluidswhichmay have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire.Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burns which canoccur just by opening the hood.There is a risk of injury.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 174).

292 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-board

computerand

displays

Warning/indicatorlamp

NN Signal typePossible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the enginehas cooled down.

X Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warning notes(Y page 327).

X If you need to add coolant more often than usual, have the engine coolantsystem checked.

X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. bysnow, slush or ice.

X At coolant temperatures below248‡ (120†), drive to the nearest qualifiedspecialist workshop.

X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving in mountainousterrain, and stop-and-go traffic.

Driving systems

Warning/indicatorlamp

NN Signal typePossible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

· N The red distance warning lamp lights up while the vehicle is in motion. Awarning tone also sounds.You are approaching a vehicle or a stationary obstacle in your line of travel attoo high a speed.X Be prepared to brake immediately.X Pay careful attention to the traffic situation. You may have to brake or takeevasive action.

Further information on PRE‑SAFE® Brake (Y page 74).For further information about the distance warning function of COLLISIONPREVENTION ASSIST PLUS, see (Y page 69).

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 293

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Tires

Warning/indicatorlamp

NN Signal typePossible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

h N The yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction)is lit.The tire pressure monitor has detected a loss of pressure in at least one of thetires.

G WARNINGWith tire pressures which are too low, there is a risk of the following hazards:Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase.Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tiretraction.Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatlyimpaired.There is a risk of an accident.

X Stop the vehicle withoutmaking any sudden steering or brakingmaneuvers.Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 174).X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tire(Y page 341).

X Check the tire pressure (Y page 365).X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.

h N The yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction)flashes for approximately one minute and then remains lit.The tire pressure monitor is faulty.

G WARNINGThe system is possibly unable to recognize or register low tire pressure.There is a risk of an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

294 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-board

computera

nddisplays

Vehicle

Warning/indicatorlamp

NN Signal typePossible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Ð N The red power steering warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.The power steering is malfunctioning.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGYou will need to use more force to steer.There is a risk of an accident.X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required.X If you are able to steer safely: carefully drive on to a qualified specialistworkshop.

X If you are unable to steer safely: do not drive on. Contact the nearestqualified specialist workshop.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 295

On-board

computera

nddisplays

Z

296

Useful information ............................ 298Stowage areas .................................. 298Features ............................................. 306

297

Stow

ageandfeatures

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optional equip-ment of your vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's Manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions.

i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops (Y page 26).

Stowage areas

Loading guidelines

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaustgases can enter the vehicle interior if thetrunk lid is open when the engine is running,especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is arisk of poisoning.Always switch off the engine before openingthe trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lidopen.

G WARNINGIf objects, luggage or loads are not secured ornot secured sufficiently, they could slip, tipover or be flung around and thereby hit vehicleoccupants. There is a risk of injury, particu-larly in the event of sudden braking or a sud-den change in direction.Always store objects so that they cannot beflung around. Secure objects, luggage orloads against slipping or tipping before thejourney.

G WARNINGThe exhaust tail pipe and tail pipe trim canbecome very hot. If you come into contactwith these parts of the vehicle, you could burnyourself. There is a risk of injury.

Always be particularly careful around theexhaust tail pipe and the tail pipe trim. Allowthese components to cool down before touch-ing them.

The handling characteristics of a laden vehi-cle are dependent on the distribution of theload within the vehicle. For this reason, youshould observe the following notes whentransporting a load:RNever exceed the maximum permissiblegross vehicle weight or the gross axleweight rating of the vehicle (including occu-pants). The values are specified on the vehi-cle identification plate on the B-pillar of thedriver's door.RThe trunk is the preferred place to carryobjects.RPosition heavy loads as far forwards as pos-sible and as low down in the trunk as pos-sible.RThe load must not protrude above theupper edge of the seat backrests.RAlways place the load behind unoccupiedseats if possible.RSecure the load with sufficiently strong andwear-resistant tie-downs. Pad sharp edgesfor protection.

Stowage spaces

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you do not correctly store objects in thevehicle interior, they can slip or be flungaround, thus striking vehicle occupants.There is a risk of injury, especially when brak-ing or abruptly changing directions.RAlways store objects so that they cannot beflung around in these or in similar situa-tions.RAlways make sure that objects do not pro-trude from stowage compartments, parcelnets or stowage nets.

298 Stowage areasStow

ageandfeatures

RClose lockable stowage compartmentswhile driving.RStow and secure objects that are heavy,hard, pointy, sharp-edged, fragile or toolarge in the trunk.

Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 298).

Stowage compartments in the front

Glove box

X Toopen: pull handle: and open glove boxflap;.

X To close: fold glove box flap; upwardsuntil it engages.

Objects in A4 format or an iPad®, for example,can be stored in the glove box. For vehicleswith a perfume atomizer (Y page 150) thestorage space of the glove box is restricted.

The glove box can only be locked andunlocked using the mechanical key.

X To lock: insert the mechanical key into thelock and turn it 90° clockwise to position2.

X To unlock: insert the mechanical key intothe lock and turn it 90° counter-clockwiseto position1.

Eyeglasses compartment

X To open: press marking:.The eyeglasses compartment opens down-wards.

X To close: press marking: again and theeyeglasses compartment returns upwardsand engages.

Make sure that the eyeglasses compartmentis always closedwhile the vehicle is inmotion.

Stowage compartment in the front centerconsole

X Briefly press trim; in the direction of thearrow.Cover: swings upwards.

Stowage areas 299

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Stowage compartment under the armrest

X To open: press button: at the front.The stowage space opens.

Depending on the vehicle's equipment, thefollowing may be in the stowage space:Ra multimedia connector unit with 2 USBports and a SD card slot, e.g. for usewith aniPod®, iPhone® or MP3 player, see the sep-arate Operator's ManualRa small stowage space in the upper frontsection

Stowage compartment in the doors

You can store items such as a rolled-up fluo-rescent jacket (driver's door) and the vehicledocument wallet (front-passenger door) instowage compartment: in the doors.In doors; you can store bottles with a capa-city of up to 34 fl. oz. (1.0 liter).

Stowage space in the rear

Stowage compartment in the rear seatarmrest! Do not sit on or support your body weighton the rear seat armrest when it is foldeddown, as you could otherwise damage it.

! Close the cover of the stowage compart-ment before folding the rear seat armrestback into the seat backrest.

X To open: fold down the seat armrest.X Press on the front of release catch: andfold the cover of the armrest upwards.

Additional stowage spaceDepending on the equipment, the followingadditional stowage areas are available in thevehicle:Rcard and coin holder in the dashboardabove the light switch (not suitable for hold-ing thin objects such as shopping tokens)Rthe open stowage compartment in the cen-ter consoleRstowage net in front-passenger footwellRthemap pockets on the back of the driver'sand front-passenger seatRthe parcel nets on the left and right-handside in the trunk

Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 298)and the safety notes regarding stowagespaces (Y page 298).

300 Stowage areasStow

ageandfeatures

Ski and snowboard bag

Important safety notes

G WARNINGThe skibag in conjunction with the lashingstraps cannot restrain any objects other thanskis.Vehicle occupants could be struck in theevent of sudden braking or an accident, forinstance, if you:Rtransport other heavy or sharp-edgedobjects in the skibagRdo not secure the skibag with the lashingstraps

There is a risk of accident and injury.Store only skis in the skibag. Always securethe skibag with the lashing straps so that itcannot move around.

A maximum of four pairs of skis or two snow-boards can be transported in the ski andsnowboard bag.

Securing the ski and snowboard bag inthe trunk

X Fold themiddle rear seat backrest forwards(Y page 302).

X Slide the ski and snowboard bag betweenthe two outside rear seat backrests. Ensurethat the wheels of the ski and snowboardbag are in the trunk.

X Open the ski and snowboard bag with zip-per: and place the skis or snowboardsinside it.

X Close the ski and snowboard bag.X Pull tensioning strap; tight by the looseend until the skis or snowboards are heldfirmly inside the ski and snowboard bag.

X Engage tensioning strap= in a diagonalpattern on hooks? in cargo tie-down ringsA as shown.

Rear bench seat through-loading fea-ture

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the rear bench seat/rear seat and seatbackrest are not engaged they could fold for-wards, e.g. when braking suddenly or in theevent of an accident.RThe vehicle occupant would thereby bepushed into the seat belt by the rear benchseat/rear seat or by the seat backrest. Theseat belt can no longer offer the intendedlevel of protection and could even causeinjuries.RObjects or loads in the trunk cannot berestrained by the seat backrest.

There is an increased risk of injury.Before every trip, make sure that the seatbackrests and the rear bench seat/rear seatare engaged.

Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 298).The outside and the middle rear seat backr-ests can be folded down separately to

Stowage areas 301

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

increase the trunk capacity. The division ratiois 40% to 20% to 40%.

Folding the rear seat backrests forwardX Vehicles without memory function: if nec-essary, move the driver's or front-passenger seat forward.

X Vehicles with memory function: when oneor both parts of the rear seat backrest arefolded forward, the respective front seatmoves forward slightly, when necessary, inorder to avoid contact.

X Open the trunk.X Fully insert the rear seat backrest headrestraints.

Left and right seat backrestX Pull right-hand or left-hand rear seat back-rest release handle:.The corresponding rear seat backrest isreleased.

Middle rear seat backrestX Pull release lever; forwards.Rear seat backrest: is released.

X Fold corresponding rear seat backrest;forward.

X Move the driver's or front-passenger seatback if necessary.

Folding the rear seat backrest back

! Make sure that the seat belt does notbecome trapped when folding the rear seatbackrest back. Otherwise, it could be dam-aged.

Left and right seat backrestX Move the driver's or front-passenger seatforward if necessary.

X Fold rear seat backrest: back until itengages.If the rear seat backrest is not engaged andlocked, this will be shown in the multifunc-tion display in the instrument cluster. Awarning tone also sounds.

302 Stowage areasStow

ageandfeatures

Middle rear seat backrestX Move the driver's or front-passenger seatforward if necessary.

X Fold seat backrest: back until it engages.Red lock status indicator; is no longervisible.

X Adjust the head restraints if necessary(Y page 111).

X Move the driver's or front-passenger seatback if necessary.

You should always engage the rear seatbackrests if you do not need the through-loading feature. This will prevent unauthor-ized access to the trunk from the vehicle inte-rior.

Locking the center rear seat backrest

In order to prevent the trunk from beingaccessed by unauthorized persons, the cen-ter seat backrest can be locked using a catch.The center seat backrest can only be foldedforward together with the left seat backrest.

X To lock: fold the left and center seat backr-ests forward.Make sure that the center andleft seat backrests are engaged and joinedtogether.

X Slide catch: upwards.The release mechanism of the center seatbackrest is locked.

X To unlock: fold back the left and centerrear seat backrests.

X Slide catch: downward from inside thetrunk.

Securing cargo

Cargo tie-down rings

General notesObserve the following notes on securingloads:RObserve the loading guidelines(Y page 298).RSecure the load using the cargo tie-downrings.RDistribute the load on the cargo tie-downrings evenly.RDo not use elastic straps or nets to securea load, as these are only intended as ananti-slip protection for light loads.RDo not route tie-downs across sharp edgesor corners.RPad sharp edges for protection.

Stowage areas 303

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Trunk

Sedan with through-loading feature in the rearbench seatX Fold up the cargo tie-down rings next to therear seat backrest and put them throughthe slots in the carpet.

Bag hook

G WARNINGThe bag hooks cannot restrain heavy objectsor items of luggage. Objects or items of lug-gage could be flung around and thereby hitvehicle occupants when braking or abruptlychanging directions. There is a risk of injury.Only hang light objects on the bag hooks.Never hang hard, sharp-edged or fragileobjects on the bag hooks.

! The bag hook can bear amaximum load of6.6lbs (3kg) and should not be used tosecure a load.

: Bag hook

EASY-PACK trunk box

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen the load surface moves up, your handsmay become trapped on the frame of theEASY-PACK trunk box. There is a risk of injury.When the load surface moves up, make surethat your hands are not within the sweep ofthe load surface. If someone becomes trap-ped, carefully push the center of the load sur-face downward.

! When the EASY-PACK trunk box is pulledout, no objects may be placed on the frameof the box, nor should the frame be pushedfrom above. Otherwise, the box could bedamaged.

! Sharp-edged, pointed or fragile objectscan damage the EASY-PACK trunk box andthen be thrown out. There is a risk of injury.Do not transport sharp-edged, pointed orfragile objects in the EASY-PACK trunk box.Always store and secure these or similarobjects in the trunk outside of the EASY-PACK trunk box.

! If you exceed the maximum permittedload of the EASY-PACK trunk box, objectscan be thrown out of the EASY-PACK trunkbox and strike vehicle occupants. There is arisk of injury, particularly in the event ofsudden braking or a sudden change indirection.Always observe the maximum permittedload of the EASY-PACK trunk box. Alwaysstore and secure heavy objects in the trunkoutside of the EASY-PACK trunk box.

The maximum permitted load of the EASY-PACK trunk box is 22 lbs (10 kg). With a loadof above approximately 11 lbs (5 kg), the bot-tom of the box moves downward until it restson the mat of the trunk floor. Thus, overload-ing of the box is avoided.

304 Stowage areasStow

ageandfeatures

Adjusting the height to any position

ExampleX Pull the box out by handle: in the direc-tion of the arrow all the way to the stop.

X Lowering the load surface: push the cen-ter of load surface; down by hand in thedirection of the arrow until load surface;has reached the desired position and thebox is the desired size.

X To raise the load surface: press switch=.Load surface; of the box moves up auto-matically.

X To stow the box: push the box in by han-dle: all the way to the stop.

Removing and installing

ExampleX To install: insert retainer; of box: intoslots=

X Raise box: and press hooksA intoanchorage? as far as they will go.

X Turn left-hand rotating catchB counter-clockwise and right-hand rotating catchBclockwise by 90°.

X To remove: turn left-hand rotating catchB clockwise and right-hand rotating catchB counter-clockwise by 90°.

X Move box: downwards and pull it outfrom anchorages?.

Store the EASY-PACK trunk box on a flat sur-face after removal, e.g. on a suitable shelf.

Stowage well under the trunk floor! Unhook the handle before again beforeclosing the trunk lid and clip it in securely toprevent the handle flap from protruding.Otherwise, you could damage the handle.

The TIREFIT kit, the vehicle tool kit, etc. arelocated in the stowage compartment.X To open: pull handle: up.

Stowage areas 305

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

X Hook handle: into rain trough;.

Roof carrier

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen you load the roof, the center of gravityof the vehicle rises and the driving character-istics change. If you exceed themaximum roofload, the driving characteristics, as well assteering and braking, will be greatly impaired.There is a risk of an accident.Never exceed the maximum roof load andadjust your driving style.

The maximum roof load can be found in the"Technical data" (Y page 403).

! Mercedes-Benz recommends that youonly use roof carriers that have been testedand approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.This helps to avoid damage to the vehicle.Position the load on the roof carrier in sucha way that the vehicle will not sustain dam-age even when it is in motion.Depending on the vehicle equipment,ensure that when the roof carrier is instal-led you can:Rraise the sliding sunroof/panorama roofwith power tilt/sliding panel fullyRopen the trunk lid fully

! To avoid damaging or scratching the cov-ers, do not use metallic or hard objects toopen them.

An incorrectly secured roof carrier or roofload may become detached from the vehicle.You must therefore ensure that you observethe roof carrier manufacturer's installationinstructions.Vehicles with a panorama roof withpower tilt/sliding panel: the panorama roofwith power tilt/sliding panel cannot beopened if a roof carrier is installed. The pan-orama roof with power tilt/sliding panel canstill be raised to allow ventilation of the vehi-cle interior.If the panorama roof with power tilt/slidingpanel makes contact with a roof carrierapproved by Mercedes-Benz, the sunroof willlower slightly but remain raised at the rear.

Attaching the roof carrier

X Open covers: carefully in the direction ofthe arrow.

X Fold covers: upwards.X Only secure the roof carrier to the anchor-age points under covers:.

X Observe the manufacturer's installationinstructions.

Features

Cup holder

Important safety notes

! Only use the cup holders for containers ofthe right size and which have lids. Thedrinks could otherwise spill.

306 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

G WARNINGIf you do not correctly store objects in thevehicle interior, they can slip or be flungaround, thus striking vehicle occupants.There is a risk of injury, especially when brak-ing or abruptly changing directions.RAlways store objects so that they cannot beflung around in these or in similar situa-tions.RAlways make sure that objects do not pro-trude from stowage compartments, parcelnets or stowage nets.RClose lockable stowage compartmentswhile driving.RStow and secure objects that are heavy,hard, pointy, sharp-edged, fragile or toolarge in the trunk.

Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 298).

Cup holder in the front-compartmentcenter console

If you remove the cup holder insert, you canuse the resulting compartment for stowage.X To open: open the stowage compartment(Y page 299).

X To remove: slide catch= forwards andpull out cup holder;.

X To insert: insert cup holder; and slideback catch=.

X To close: push cover: of the stowagecompartment closed.

You can remove the cup holder's rubber matfor cleaning. Clean with clear, lukewarmwater only.

Cup holder in the rear seat armrest

! Do not sit on or support your body weighton the rear seat armrest when it is foldeddown, as you could otherwise damage it.

! Close the cup holder before folding therear seat armrest up. Otherwise, the cupholder could be damaged.

X Fold down the rear seat armrest.X To open: press the front of cup holder:or;.Cup holder: or; extends automatically.

X To fold out: place a container in the cupholder.The cup holder folds down automatically.

X To fold in: remove the container.The cup holder folds in automatically.

X To close: slide cup holder: or; backuntil it engages.

Sun visors

Overview

G WARNINGIf themirror cover of the vanitymirror is foldedup when the vehicle is in motion, you could beblinded by incident light. There is a risk of anaccident.

Features 307

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Always keep the mirror cover folded downwhile driving.

: Mirror light; Bracket= Retaining clip, e.g. for a car park ticket? Vanity mirrorA Mirror cover

Vanity mirror in the sun visorMirror light: only functions if the sun visoris clipped into bracket; andmirror coverAhas been folded up.

Glare from the sideX Fold down the sun visor.X Pull the sun visor out of retainer;.X Swing the sun visor to the side.

Rear side window roller sunblinds! Always guide the roller sunblind by hand.Do not let it snap back suddenly as thiswould damage the automatic roller mech-anism.

! Do not drive the vehicle with the rollersunblind hooked in and the side windowsopened simultaneously. The roller sunblindcan jump out of the retainers and springback suddenly when driving at high speeds,e.g. when driving on the freeway. This coulddamage the inertia reel. Therefore, eitherclose the side window or retract the rollersunblind before driving at high speeds.

X To extend: pull the roller sunblind out bytab: and hook it onto retainers; at thetop of the window.

Rear window roller sunblind

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen extending or retracting, parts of thebody could become trapped within the sweepof the roller sunblind. There is a risk of injury.When extending or retracting, make sure thatno one has any parts of the body within thesweep of the roller sunblind. If someonebecomes trapped, briefly press the buttonagain. The opening or closing procedure willbe stopped.

! Make sure that the roller sunblind canmove freely. Otherwise, the roller sunblindor other objects could be damaged.

Extending/retracting the roller sun-blind

308 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock (Y page 157).

X To extend or retract: briefly press but-ton:.The roller sunblind fully extends or fullyretracts.

X To stop: briefly press button: again.The roller sunblind stops briefly and movesback into the out-of-use position.

Ashtray

Front ashtray

! The stowage space under the ashtray isnot heat resistant. Before placing lit ciga-rettes in the ashtray, make sure that theashtray is properly engaged.Otherwise, thestowage space could be damaged.

X To open: open the stowage compartment(Y page 299).

X Push the cover of the ashtray upwards at itsright side=.

X To remove the insert: hold the sides ofinsert?, push it upwards gently; andpull it out.

X To re-install the insert: press insert?into the holder until it engages.

X To close: close the cover of the ashtray.X Push cover: of the stowage compart-ment closed.

i You can remove the ashtray insert anduse the resulting compartment for stow-age.

Rear-compartment ashtray

X To open: pull cover; out by its top edge.X To remove the insert: push ribbing=from the left side and pull insert:upwards.

X To install the insert: install insert: fromabove into the holder and press down intothe holder until it engages.

Cigarette lighter

G WARNINGYou can burn yourself if you touch the hotheating element or the socket of the cigarettelighter.In addition, flammable materials can ignite if:Rthe hot cigarette lighter fallsRa child holds the hot cigarette lighter toobjects, for example

There is a risk of fire and injury.Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob.Always make sure that the cigarette lighter isout of reach of children. Never leave childrenunsupervised in the vehicle.

Your attentionmust always be focused on thetraffic conditions. Only use the cigarettelighter when road and traffic conditions per-mit.

Features 309

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 157).

X To open: open the stowage compartment(Y page 299).

X Press in cigarette lighter;.Cigarette lighter; will pop out automati-cally when the heating element is red-hot.

X To close: push cover: of the stowagecompartment closed.

12 V sockets

General notesX Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 157).

The sockets can be used for accessories witha maximum draw of 180 W (15 A). Accesso-ries include such items as lamps or chargersfor mobile phones.If you use the sockets for long periods whenthe engine is switched off, the battery maydischarge.An emergency cut-out ensures that the on-board voltage does not drop too low. If the on-board voltage is too low, the power to thesockets is automatically cut. This ensuresthat there is sufficient power to start theengine.If you have connected a device to the 12 Vsocket, leave the cover of the stowage com-partment open. This prevents the cover frombeing blocked.

Socket in the front-compartment centerconsole

X To open: open the stowage compartment(Y page 299).

X Lift up the cover of socket;.X To close: push cover: of the stowagecompartment closed.

Socket in the rear-compartment centerconsole

X Pull cover; out by its top edge.X Lift up the cover of socket:.

mbrace

General notesThe mbrace system is only available in theUSA.You must have a license agreement to acti-vate the mbrace service. Make sure that yoursystem is activated and operational. To log in,press the ï MB Info call button. If any of

310 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

the steps mentioned are not carried out, thesystem may not be activated.If you have questions about the activation,contact one of the following telephone hot-lines:Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Centerat 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372)or 1-866-990-9007Shortly after successfully registering with thembrace service, a user ID and password willbe sent to you by mail. You can use this pass-word to log onto thembrace area under "Own-ers Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.The system is available if:Rit has been activated and is operationalRthe correspondingmobile phone network isavailable for transmitting data to the Cus-tomer CenterRa service subscription is availableRthe starter battery is sufficiently chargedDetermining the location of the vehicle on amap is only possible if:RGPS reception is available.Rthe vehicle position can be forwarded tothe Customer Assistance Center.

The mbrace systemTo adjust the volume during a call, proceed asfollows:X Press theW orX button on the mul-tifunction steering wheel.

orX Use the COMAND/Audio 20 volume con-trol.

The system offers various services, e.g.:RAutomatic and manual emergency callRRoadside Assistance callRMB Info callYou can find information and a description ofall available features under "Owners Online"at http://www.mbusa.com.

System self-testAfter you have switched on the ignition, thesystem carries out a self-diagnosis.A malfunction in the system has been detec-ted if one of the following occurs:RThe indicator lamp in the SOS button doesnot come on during the system self-test.RThe indicator lamp in the F RoadsideAssistance button does not light up duringself-diagnosis of the system.RThe indicator lamp in the ï MB Info callbutton does not light up during self-diag-nosis of the system.RThe indicator lamp in one or more of thefollowing buttons continues to light up redafter the system self-diagnosis:- SOS button- F Roadside Assistance call button- ï MB Info call buttonRThe InoperativeInoperative or the Service NotService NotActivatedActivated message appears in the multi-function display after the system self-diag-nosis.

If a malfunction is indicated as outlinedabove, the systemmay not operate as expec-ted. In the event of an emergency, help willhave to be summoned by other means.Have the system checked at the nearestauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center or contactthe following service hotlines:Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Centerat 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372)or 1-866-990-9007

Features 311

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Emergency call

Important safety notesG WARNINGIt can be dangerous to remain in the vehicle,even if you have pressed the SOS button in anemergency if:Ryou see smoke inside or outside of the vehi-cle, e.g. if there is a fire after an accidentRthe vehicle is on a dangerous section ofroadRthe vehicle is not visible or cannot easily beseen by other road users, particularly whendark or in poor visibility conditions

There is a risk of an accident and injury.Leave the vehicle immediately in this or simi-lar situations as soon as it is safe to do so.Move to a safe location along with other vehi-cle occupants. In such situations, secure thevehicle in accordance with national regula-tions, e. g. with a warning triangle.

General notesObserve the notes on system activation(Y page 310).An emergency call is dialed automatically if anair bag or Emergency Tensioning Device istriggered. You cannot end an automaticallytriggered emergency call yourself.An emergency call can also be initiated man-ually.As soon as the emergency call has been ini-tiated, the indicator lamp in the SOS buttonflashes. The Connecting CallConnecting Call messageappears in the multifunction display.The audio output is muted.Once the connection has been made, theCall ConnectedCall Connected message appears in themultifunction display.

All important information on the emergency istransmitted, for example:Rcurrent location of the vehicle (as deter-mined by the GPS system)Rvehicle identification numberRinformation on the severity of the accidentShortly after the emergency call has been ini-tiated, a voice connection is automaticallyestablished between the Customer Assis-tance Center and the vehicle occupants.RIf the vehicle occupants respond, theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen-ter attempts to getmore information on theemergency.RIf there is no response from the vehicleoccupants, an ambulance is immediatelysent to the vehicle.

If no voice connection can be established tothe Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter, the systemhas been unable to initiatean emergency call.This can occur, for example, if the relevantmobile phone network is not available. Theindicator lamp in the SOS button flashes con-tinuously.The Call FailedCall Failed message appears in themultifunction display and must be confirmed.In this case, summon assistance by othermeans.

Making an emergency call

312 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

X To initiate an emergency call manually:press cover: briefly to open.

X Press SOS button; briefly.The indicator lamp in SOS button;flashes until the emergency call is conclu-ded.

X Wait for a voice connection to theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen-ter.

X After the emergency call, close cover:.If the mobile phone network is unavailable,mbrace will not be able to make the emer-gency call. If you leave the vehicle immedi-ately after pressing the SOS button, you willnot know whether mbrace placed the emer-gency call. In this case, always summon assis-tance by other means.

Roadside Assistance button

X To call Roadside Assistance: press but-ton: for Roadside Assistance.This initiates a call to the Mercedes-BenzCustomer Assistance Center.The indicator lamp in Roadside Assistancebutton: flashes while the call is active.The ConnectingConnecting CallCallmessage appears inthe multifunction display. The audio outputis muted.

If a connection can be made, the Call Con‐Call Con‐nectednectedmessage appears in themultifunctiondisplay.

If a mobile phone network and GPS receptionare available, the system transfers data to theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center,for example:Rcurrent location of the vehicleRvehicle identification numberThe COMAND/Audio 20 display indicatesthat a call is active. During the call, you canchange to the navigation menu by pressingthe NAVI button in COMAND/Audio 20, forexample.Voice output is not available in this case.A voice connection is established betweenthe Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter and the vehicle occupants.From the vehicle remote malfunction diagno-sis, the Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter can ascertain the nature of the prob-lem (Y page 317).The Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter either sends a qualified Mercedes-Benz technician or makes arrangements foryour vehicle to be transported to the nearestauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.You may be charged for services such asrepair work and/or towing.You can findmore information in the separatembrace manual.The system has not been able to initiate aRoadside Assistance call, if:Rthe indicator lamp for Roadside Assistancecall button F is flashing continuously.Rno voice connection to the Mercedes-BenzCustomer Assistance Center was estab-lished.

This can occur if the relevant mobile phonenetwork is not available, for example.The Call FailedCall Failed message appears in themultifunction display.X To end a call: press the~ button on themultifunction steering wheel.

orX Press the corresponding COMAND/Audio20 button for ending a phone call.

Features 313

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

MB Info call button

X To call MB Info: press MB Info call but-ton:.This initiates a call to the Mercedes-BenzCustomer Assistance Center.The indicator lamp inMB Info call button:flasheswhile the connection is beingmade.The ConnectingConnecting CallCallmessage appears inthe multifunction display. The audio outputis muted.

If a connection can be made, the Call Con‐Call Con‐nectednectedmessage appears in themultifunctiondisplay.If a mobile phone network and GPS receptionare available, the system transfers data to theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center,for example:Rcurrent location of the vehicleRvehicle identification numberThe COMAND/Audio 20 display indicatesthat a call is active. During the call, you canchange to the navigation menu by pressingthe NAVI button in COMAND/Audio 20, forexample.Voice output is not available in this case.A voice connection is established betweenthe Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter and the vehicle occupants.You receive information about operating yourvehicle, about the nearest authorizedMercedes-Benz Center and about other prod-ucts and services from Mercedes-Benz.

You can find further information on thembrace system under "Owners Online" athttp://www.mbusa.com.The system has not been able to initiate anMB Info call, if:Rthe indicator lamp in MB Info call button

ï is flashing continuously.Rno voice connection to the Mercedes-BenzCustomer Assistance Center was estab-lished.

This can occur if the relevant mobile phonenetwork is not available, for example.The Call FailedCall Failed message appears in themultifunction display.X To end a call: press the~ button on themultifunction steering wheel.

orX Press the corresponding COMAND/Audio20 button for ending a phone call.

Call priorityWhen service calls are active, e.g. RoadsideAssistance or MB Info calls, an emergencycall can still be initiated. In this case, an emer-gency call will take priority and override allother active calls.The indicator lamp of the respective buttonflashes until the call is ended.An emergency call can only be terminated bythe Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter.All other calls can be ended by pressing:Rthe~ button on themultifunction steer-ing wheelRthe corresponding button in COMAND/Audio 20 to end the voice call

When a call is initiated, the audio system ismuted.The mobile phone is no longer connected toCOMAND/Audio 20.However, if you want to use your mobilephone, do so only when the vehicle is station-ary and in a safe location.

314 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

Downloading destinations

Downloading destinationsDownloading destinations gives you accessto a database with over 15 million points ofinterest (POIs). These can be downloaded onthe navigation system in your vehicle. If youknow the destination, the address can bedownloaded. Alternatively, you can obtain thelocation of Points of Interest (POIs)/impor-tant destinations in the vicinity.Furthermore, you can download routes withup to four way points.You are prompted to confirm route guidanceto the address entered.X Select YesYes by turning cVd or sliding XVYthe controller and confirm withW.The system calculates the route and sub-sequently starts the route guidance withthe address entered.If you select NoNo the address can be stored inthe address book.

The destination download function is availa-ble if:Rthe vehicle is equipped with a navigationsystem.Rthe relevant mobile phone network is avail-able and data transfer is possible.

Route AssistanceThis service is part of the mbrace PLUS Pack-age and cannot be purchased separately.You can use the route assistance functioneven if the vehicle is not equipped with a nav-igation system.Within the framework of this service, youreceive a professional and reliable form ofnavigation support without having to leaveyour vehicle.The customer service representative finds asuitable route depending on your vehicle'scurrent position and the desired destination.You will then be guided live through the cur-rent route section.

Search & Send

General notesTo use "Search & Send", your vehicle must beequipped with mbrace and a navigation sys-tem. Additionally, an mbrace service sub-scription must be completed."Search & Send" is a destination entry ser-vice. A destination address which is found onGoogle Maps® can be transferred via mbracedirectly to your vehicle's navigation system.

Specifying and sending the destinationaddressX Go to the website http://maps.google.com and enter a destinationaddress into the entry field.

X To send the destination address to thee-mail address of your mbrace account:click on the corresponding button on thewebsite.Example:If you select 'Send to vehicle' and then'Mercedes-Benz', the destination addresswill be sent to your vehicle.

X When the "Send" dialog window appears:Enter the e-mail address you specifiedwhen setting up your mbrace account intothe corresponding field.

X Click "Send".Information on specific commands such as"Address entry" or "Send" can be found on thewebsite.

Calling up a transmitted destinationaddressX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 157).The transmitted destination address is loa-ded into the vehicle's navigation system.

Features 315

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

A display message appears, askingwhether navigation should be started.

X Select YesYes by turning cVd or sliding XVYthe controller and confirm withW.The system calculates the route and sub-sequently starts the route guidance withthe address entered.If you select NoNo the address can be stored inthe address book.If you have sent more than one destinationaddress, each individual destination mustbe confirmed separately.

Destination addresses are loaded in the sameorder as the order in which they were sent.If you own multiple Mercedes-Benz vehicleswith mbrace and activated mbrace accounts:If multiple vehicles are registered under thesame e-mail address, the destination will besent to all the vehicles.

Vehicle remote openingYou can use the vehicle remote opening if youhave unintentionally locked your vehicle anda replacement SmartKey is not available.The vehicle can be opened by the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center.The vehicle can be immediately openedremotely within four days of the ignition beingturned off. After this time, the remote unlock-ingmay be delayed by 15 to 60minutes. After30 days, the vehicle can no longer be openedremotely.The vehicle remote unlocking feature is avail-able if the relevant mobile phone network isavailable and a data connection is possible.X Contact the following service hotlines:Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen-ter at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007You will be asked for your password.

X Return to your vehicle at the time agreedupon with the Mercedes-Benz CustomerAssistance Center.

Alternatively, the vehicle can be opened via:Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online"sectionRthe telephone application (e.g. for iPhone®,Android)

To do this, you will need your identificationnumber and password.

Vehicle remote closingThe vehicle remote-closing feature can beused when you have forgotten to lock thevehicle and you are no longer nearby.The vehicle can then be locked by theMercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter.The vehicle can be immediately remotelylocked within four days of the ignition beingturned off. After this time, remote closingmaybe delayed by 15 to 60minutes. After 30 daysthe vehicle can no longer be locked remotely.The vehicle remote closing feature is availa-ble if the relevant mobile phone network isavailable and a data connection is possible.X Contact the following service hotlines:Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen-ter at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007You will be asked for your password.

The next time you are inside the vehicle andyou switch on the ignition, the DoorsDoorsLocked RemotelyLocked Remotely message appears in themultifunction display.Alternatively, the vehicle can be locked via:Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online"sectionRthe telephone application (e.g. for iPhone®,Android)

To do this, you will need your identificationnumber and password.

316 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

Stolen vehicle recovery serviceIf your vehicle has been stolen:X Notify the police.The police will issue a numbered incidentreport.

X This number will be forwarded to theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen-ter together with your PIN.The Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter then tries to locate the system. TheMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen-ter contacts you and the local law enforce-ment agency if the vehicle is located.However, only the law enforcement agencyis informed of the location of the vehicle.

If the anti-theft alarm system is activated forlonger than 30 seconds, the Mercedes-BenzCustomer Assistance Center is automaticallynotified.

Vehicle remote malfunction diagnosisWith the vehicle remote malfunction diagno-sis, the Customer Assistance Center can pro-vide improved support for problems with yourvehicle. During an existing call, vehicle data istransferred to the Customer Assistance Cen-ter.The customer service representative can usethe received data to decide what kind ofassistance is required. You are then, forexample, guided to the nearest authorizedMercedes-Benz Center or a recovery vehicleis called.If vehicle data needs to be transferred duringan MB Info call or a Roadside Assistance call,this is initiated by the Customer AssistanceCenter.You will see the following message in theCOMAND display: Roadside AssistanceRoadside AssistanceConnectedConnected. If the remote malfunction diag-nosis can be started, the Request forRequest forVehicle Diagnostics Received StartVehicle Diagnostics Received Startvehiclevehicle diagnostics?diagnostics?message appears inthe display.

X Press the YesYes button to confirm the mes-sage.

X When the Vehicle DiagnosticsVehicle DiagnosticsPlease Start IgnitionPlease Start Ignition messageappears: turn the SmartKey to position 2 inthe ignition lock (Y page 157).

X If the Please follow the instruc‐Please follow the instruc‐tions received by phone and movetions received by phone and moveyour vehicle to a safe position.your vehicle to a safe position.message appears: please follow theinstructions received by phone and moveyour vehicle to a safe position.The message in the display disappears.The vehicle operating state check begins.During this procedure, you will see theVehicleVehicle DiagnosticsDiagnostics ActiveActivemessage.If you select CancelCancel the vehicle remotemalfunction diagnosis is canceled com-pletely.

When the check is complete, the SendingSendingvehicle diagnostics data. (Voicevehicle diagnostics data. (Voiceconnection may be interrupted dur‐connection may be interrupted dur‐inging datadata transfer)transfer)message appears. Thevehicle data can now be sent.X Press the OKOK button to confirm the mes-sage.The voice connection with the CustomerAssistance Center is terminated.The Vehicle Diagnostics: Transfer‐Vehicle Diagnostics: Transfer‐ring Data...ring Data... message appears.The vehicle data is sent to the CustomerAssistance Center.

Depending on what the customer service rep-resentative agreed with you, the voice con-nection is re-established after the transfer iscomplete. If necessary, you will be contactedat a later time by another means, e.g. by e-mail or phone.Another function of the vehicle remote mal-function diagnosis is the transfer of servicedata to the Customer Assistance Center. If aservice is overdue, the COMAND displayshows amessage about various special offersat your workshop.

Features 317

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

This information can also be called up under"Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.Information on the data stored in the vehicle(Y page 28).Information on Roadside Assistance(Y page 24).

Downloading routesDownloading routes allows you to transferand save predefined routes in the navigationsystem.A route can be prepared and sent by either acustomer service representative or under"Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.Each route can include up to four way points.Once a route has been received by the navi-gation system, you will see the TheThe "Route"Routename"name" externalexternal routeroute hashas beenbeen savedsavedto "Previous Destinations". Wouldto "Previous Destinations". Wouldyou like to start navigation?you like to start navigation? mes-sage. The route is saved to the hard disk.X To start route guidance: select YesYes.An overview of the route is shown in thedisplay.If you select NoNo the saved route can becalled up later in the navigation menu.

X StartStart.Route guidance is started.

Downloaded and saved data can be called upagain via COMAND.You can find further information in the sepa-rate COMAND Operating Instructions.

Speed alertYou can define the upper speed limit, whichmust not be exceeded by the vehicle.If this selected speed is exceeded by the vehi-cle, a message will be sent to the CustomerAssistance Center. The Customer AssistanceCenter then forwards this information to you.You can select the way in which you receivethis information beforehand. Possible optionsinclude text message, e-mail or an automatedcall.

The data you receive contains the followinginformation:Rthe location where the speed limit wasexceededRthe time at which the speed limit wasexceededRthe selected speed limit which was excee-ded

Geo fencingGeo fencing allows you to select areas whichthe vehicle should not enter or leave. You willbe informed if the vehicle crosses the boun-daries of the selected areas. You can selectthe way in which you receive this informationbeforehand. Possible options include textmessage, e-mail or an automated call.The area can be determined as either a circleor a polygon with a maximum of ten corners.You can specify up to ten areas simultane-ously. Different settings are possible for eacharea.These settings can be called up under "Own-ers Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.Alternatively, you can trigger an MB Info calland inform the customer service representa-tive that you wish to activate geo fencing.Currently inactive areas can be activated bytext message.

Triggering the vehicle alarmWith this function, you can trigger the vehi-cle's panic alarm via text message. An alarmsounds and the exterior lighting flashes.Depending on the setting, the panic alarmlasts five or ten seconds. Afterwards, thealarm switches off.

Garage door opener

General notes

The HomeLink® garage door opener integra-ted in the rear-viewmirror allows you to oper-

318 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

ate up to three different door and gate sys-tems.Use the integrated garage door opener onlyon garage doors that:Rhave safety stop and reverse features andRmeet current U.S. federal safety standardsOnce programed, the integrated garage dooropener in the rear-viewmirror will assume thefunction of the garage door system's remotecontrol. Please also read the operatinginstructions for the garage door system.When programing a garage door opener, parkthe vehicle outside the garage. Do not run theengine while programing.Certain garage door drives are incompatiblewith the integrated garage door opener. If youhave difficulty programing the integratedgarage door opener, contact an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.Alternatively, you can call the following tele-phone assistance services:RUSA:Mercedes-BenzCustomer AssistanceCenter at 1-800-FOR-MERCedesRCanada: Customer Service at1-800-387-0100RHomeLink® hotline 1-800-355-3515 (freeof charge)

More information on HomeLink® and/orcompatible products is also available onlineat http://www.homelink.com.Notes on the declaration of conformity(Y page 26).USA: FCC ID: CB2HMIHL4Canada: IC: 279B-HMIHL4

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen you operate or program the garage doorwith the integrated garage door opener, per-sons in the range of movement of the garagedoor can become trapped or struck by thegarage door. There is a risk of injury.

When using the integrated garage dooropener, always make sure that nobody iswithin the range of movement of the garagedoor.

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Inhalingthese exhaust gases leads to poisoning. Thereis a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leavethe engine running in enclosed spaces with-out sufficient ventilation.

Programming

Programming buttonsPay attention to the "Important safety notes"(Y page 319).

Garage door remote controlA is not inclu-ded with the integrated garage door opener.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 157).

X Select one of buttons; to? to use tocontrol the garage door drive.

X To start programming mode: press andhold one of buttons; to? on the inte-grated garage door opener.The garage door opener is now in program-ming mode. After a short time, indicatorlamp: lights up yellow.Indicator lamp: lights up yellow as soonas button;,= or? is programmed forthe first time. If the selected button hasalready been programmed, indicator

Features 319

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

lamp: will only light up yellow after tenseconds have elapsed.

X Release button;,= or?. Indicatorlamp: flashes yellow.

X To program the remote control: pointgarage door remote controlA towardsbuttons; to? on the rear-view mirror ata distance of 2 to 8 inches (5 to 20 cm).

X Press and hold buttonB on remote controlA until indicator lamp: lights up green.When indicator lamp: lights up green:programming is finished.When indicator lamp: flashes green: pro-gramming was successful. The next step isto synchronize the rolling code.

X Release buttonB on remote controlA forthe garage door drive system.If indicator lamp: lights up red: repeat theprograming procedure for the correspond-ing button on the rear-view mirror. Whendoing so, vary the distance between remotecontrolA and the rear-view mirror.The required distance between remotecontrolA and the integrated garage dooropener depends on the garage door drivesystem. Several attempts might be neces-sary. You should test every position for atleast 25 seconds before trying anotherposition.

Synchronizing the rolling codePay attention to the "Important safety notes"(Y page 319).If the garage door system uses a rolling code,you will also have to synchronize the garagedoor system with the integrated garage dooropener in the rear-view mirror. To do this youwill need to use the programming button onthe door drive control panel. The program-ming button may be positioned at differentlocations depending on the manufacturer. Itis usually located on the door drive unit on thegarage ceiling.Familiarize yourself with the garage doordrive operating instructions, e.g. under "Pro-

gramming of additional remote controls",before carrying out the following steps.Your vehicle must be within reach of thegarage door or gate opener drive. Make surethat neither your vehicle nor any persons/objects are present within the sweep of thedoor or gate.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 157).

X Get out of the vehicle.X Press the programming button on the doordrive unit.Usually, you now have 30 seconds to ini-tiate the next step.

X Get into the vehicle.X Press previously programmed button;,= or? on the integrated garage dooropener until the door closes.The rolling code synchronization is thencomplete.

Notes on programming the remote con-trolCanadian radio frequency laws require a"break" (or interruption) of the transmissionsignals after broadcasting for a few seconds.Therefore, these signals may not last longenough for the integrated garage dooropener. The signal is not recognized duringprogramming. Comparable with Canadianlaw, some U.S. garage door openers also fea-ture a "break".Proceed as follows:Rif you live in CanadaRif you have difficulties programming thegarage door opener (regardless of whereyou live) when using the programmingsteps.

X Press and hold one of buttons; to? onthe integrated garage door opener.After a short time, indicator lamp: lightsup yellow.

X Release the button.Indicator lamp: flashes yellow.

320 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

X Press buttonB of garage door remotecontrolA for two seconds, then release itfor two seconds.

X Press buttonB again for two seconds.X Repeat this sequence on buttonB ofremote controlA until indicator lamp:lights up green.When indicator lamp: lights up green:programming is finished.When indicator lamp: flashes green: pro-gramming was successful. The next step isto synchronize the rolling code.

X Release buttonB of remote controlA ofthe garage door drive.If indicator lamp: lights up red: repeat theprogramming process for the correspond-ing button on the rear-view mirror. Whendoing so, vary the distance between remotecontrolA and the rear-view mirror.The required distance between remotecontrolA and the integrated garage dooropener depends on the garage door drivesystem. Several attempts might be neces-sary. You should test every position for atleast 25 seconds before trying anotherposition.

Problems when programmingIf you are experiencing problems programingthe integrated garage door opener on therear-view mirror, take note of the followinginstructions:RCheck the transmitter frequency used bygarage door drive remote controlA andwhether it is supported. The transmitterfrequency can usually be found on the backof the garage door drive remote control.The integrated garage door opener is com-patible with devices that have units whichoperate in the frequency range of 280 to433 MHz.RReplace the batteries in garage doorremote controlA. This increases the like-lihood that garage door remote controlAwill transmit a strong and precise signal tothe integrated garage door opener.

RWhen programming, hold remote controlA at varying distances and angles from thebuttonwhich you are programming. Try var-ious angles at a distance between 2and12 inches (5to 30 cm) or at the same anglebut at varying distances.RIf another remote control is available for thesame garage door drive, repeat the sameprogramming steps with this remote con-trol. Before performing these steps, makesure that new batteries have been installedin garage door drive remote controlA.RNote that some remote controls only trans-mit for a limited amount of time (the indi-cator lamp on the remote control goes out).Press buttonB on remote controlA againbefore transmission ends.RAlign the antenna cable of the garage dooropener unit. This can improve signal recep-tion/transmission.

Opening/closing the garage doorAfter it has been programmed, the integratedgarage door opener performs the function ofthe garage door system remote control.Please also read the operating instructionsfor the garage door system.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 157).

X Press button;,= or? which you haveprogrammed to operate the garage door.Garage door system with a fixed code: indi-cator lamp: lights up green.Garage door system with a rolling code:indicator lamp: flashes green.

The transmitter will transmit a signal as longas the button is pressed. The transmission ishalted after a maximum of ten seconds andindicator lamp: lights up yellow. Press but-ton;,= or? again if necessary.

Clearing the memoryMake sure that you clear the memory of theintegrated garage door opener before sellingthe vehicle.

Features 321

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 157).

X Press and hold buttons; and?.The indicator lamp initially lights up yellowand then green.

X Release buttons; and?.The memory of the integrated garage dooropener in the rear-view mirror is cleared.

Floormats

G WARNINGObjects in the driver's footwell can restrict thepedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.The operating and road safety of the vehicle isjeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.Make sure that all objects in the vehicle arestowed correctly, and that they cannot enterthe driver's footwell. Install the floormatssecurely and as specified in order to ensuresufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not useloose floormats and do not place floormats ontop of one another.

X Slide the relevant seat back.X To install: place the floormat in the foot-well.

X Press studs: onto retainers;.X To remove: pull the floormat off retain-ers;.

X Remove the floormat.

322 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

Useful information ............................ 324Engine compartment ........................ 324ASSYST PLUS .................................... 328Care .................................................... 329

323

Maintenance

andcare

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optional equip-ment of your vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's Manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions.

i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops (Y page 26).

Engine compartment

Hood

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the hood is unlatched, it may open up whenthe vehicle is in motion and block your view.There is a risk of an accident.Never unlatch the hood while driving.

G WARNINGWhen opening and closing the hood, it maysuddenly fall into the closed position. There isa risk of injury to persons within range ofmovement of the hood.Open and close the hood only when no one iswithin its range of movement.

G WARNINGOpening the hood when the engine is over-heated or when there is a fire in the enginecompartment could expose you to hot gasesor other service products. There is a risk ofinjury.Let an overheated engine cool down beforeopening the hood. If there is a fire in theengine compartment, keep the hood closedand contact the fire department.

G WARNINGThe engine compartment contains movingcomponents. Certain components, such asthe radiator fan, may continue to run or startagain suddenly when the ignition is off. Thereis a risk of injury.If you need to do any work inside the enginecompartment:Rswitch off the ignitionRnever reach into the area where there is arisk of danger from moving components,such as the fan rotation areaRremove jewelry and watchesRkeep items of clothing and hair, for exam-ple, away from moving parts

G WARNINGThe ignition system and the fuel injection sys-tem work under high voltage. If you touchcomponents which are under voltage, youcould get an electric shock. There is a risk ofinjury.Never touch components of the ignition sys-tem or fuel injection system when the ignitionis switched on.

Opening the hood

G WARNINGCertain components in the engine compart-ment, such as the engine, radiator and partsof the exhaust system, can become very hot.Working in the engine compartment poses arisk of injury.Where possible, let the engine cool down andtouch only the components described in thefollowing.

G WARNINGWhen the hood is open and the windshieldwipers are set inmotion, you can be injured bythe wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andthe ignition before opening the hood.

324 Engine compartmentMaintenance

andcare

! Make sure that the windshield wipers arenot folded away from the windshield. Youcould otherwise damage the windshieldwipers or the hood.

ExampleX Make sure that the windshield wipers areturned off.

X Pull release lever: on the hood.The hood is released.

X Reach into the gap, pull hood catch han-dle; up and lift the hood.If you lift the hood by approximately 15 in(40 cm), the hood is opened and held openautomatically by the gas-filled strut.

Closing the hoodX Lower the hood and let it fall from a heightof approximately 8 in (20 cm).

X Check that the hood has engaged properly.If the hood can be raised slightly, it is notproperly engaged. Open it again and closeit with a little more force.

RadiatorDo not cover up the radiator, such as with athermal mat or insect protection cover. Thereadings of the on-board-diagnostic systemmay otherwise be inaccurate. Some of thesereadings are required by law and must beaccurate at all times.

Engine oil

General notesDepending on your driving style, the vehicleconsumes up to 0.9 US qt (0.8 liters) of oil per600 miles (1,000 km). The oil consumptionmay be higher than this when the vehicle isnew or if you frequently drive at high enginespeeds.Depending on the engine, the oil dipstick maybe in a different location.When checking the oil level:Rpark the vehicle on a level surface.Rthe engine should be switched off forapproximately five minutes if the engine isat normal operating temperature.Rif the engine is not at normal operatingtemperature, e.g. if the engine was onlystarted briefly, wait about 30 minutesbefore carrying out the measurement.

Checking the oil level using the oil dip-stick

G WARNINGCertain components in the engine compart-ment, such as the engine, radiator and partsof the exhaust system, can become very hot.Working in the engine compartment poses arisk of injury.Where possible, let the engine cool down andtouch only the components described in thefollowing.

Engine compartment 325

Maintenance

andcare

Z

ExampleX Pull oil dipstick: out of the dipstick guidetube.

X Wipe off oil dipstick:.X Slowly slide oil dipstick: into the guidetube to the stop, and take it out again.If the level is between MIN mark= andMAX mark;, the oil level is correct.

X If the oil level has dropped to MIN mark=or below, add 1.0 l of engine oil.

X If the oil level has dropped to MIN mark=or below, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter) of engineoil.

Adding engine oil

G WARNINGCertain components in the engine compart-ment, such as the engine, radiator and partsof the exhaust system, can become very hot.Working in the engine compartment poses arisk of injury.Where possible, let the engine cool down andtouch only the components described in thefollowing.

G WARNINGIf engine oil comes into contact with hot com-ponents in the engine compartment, it mayignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.Make sure that engine oil is not spilled next tothe filler neck. Let the engine cool down andthoroughly clean the engine oil off the com-ponents before starting the engine.

H Environmental noteWhen adding oil, take care not to spill any. Ifoil enters the soil or waterways, it is harmful tothe environment.

! Only use engine oils and oil filters thathave been approved for vehicles with a ser-vice system. You can obtain a list of theengine oils and oil filters tested andapproved in accordance with theMercedes-Benz Specifications for ServiceProducts at any Mercedes-Benz Servicecenter.Damage to the engine or exhaust system iscaused by the following:Rusing engine oils and oil filters that havenot been specifically approved for theservice systemRreplacing engine oil and oil filters afterthe interval for replacement specified bythe service system has been exceededRusing engine oil additives.

! Do not add toomuch oil. adding toomuchengine oil can result in damage to theengine or to the catalytic converter. Haveexcess engine oil siphoned off.

ExampleX Turn cap: counter-clockwise and removeit.

X Add engine oil.If the oil level is at or below theMINmark onthe oil dipstick, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 l) ofengine oil.

326 Engine compartmentMaintenance

andcare

X Replace cap: on the filler neck and turnclockwise.Ensure that the cap locks into placesecurely.

X Check the oil level again with the oil dip-stick (Y page 325).

Further information on engine oil(Y page 400).

Additional service products

Checking coolant level

G WARNINGCertain components in the engine compart-ment, such as the engine, radiator and partsof the exhaust system, can become very hot.Working in the engine compartment poses arisk of injury.Where possible, let the engine cool down andtouch only the components described in thefollowing.

G WARNINGThe engine cooling system is pressurized, par-ticularly when the engine is warm. Whenopening the cap, you could be scalded by hotcoolant spraying out. There is a risk of injury.Let the engine cool down before opening thecap. Wear eye and hand protection whenopening the cap. Open the cap slowly half aturn to allow pressure to escape.

X Park the vehicle on a level surface.

Only check the coolant level when the vehi-cle is on a level surface and the engine hascooled down.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 157).

orX On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, press theStart/Stop button twice (Y page 157).

X Check the coolant temperature display inthe instrument cluster.The coolant temperature must be below158 ‡ (70 †).

X Turn the SmartKey to position0 (Y page 157) in the ignition lock.

orX On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, pull theStart/Stop button from the ignition lock(Y page 157).

X Slowly turn cap: half a turn counter-clockwise to allow excess pressure toescape.

X Turn cap: further counter-clockwise andremove it.If the coolant is at the level ofmarker bar=in the filler neck when cold, there is enoughcoolant in coolant expansion tank;.If the coolant level is approximately 0.6 in(1.5 cm) above marker bar= in the fillerneck when warm, there is enough coolantin expansion tank;.

X If necessary, add coolant that has been tes-ted and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

X Replace cap: and turn it clockwise as faras it will go.

For further information on coolant, see(Y page 401).

Adding washer fluid to the windshieldwasher system

G WARNINGCertain components in the engine compart-ment, such as the engine, radiator and partsof the exhaust system, can become very hot.

Engine compartment 327

Maintenance

andcare

Z

Working in the engine compartment poses arisk of injury.Where possible, let the engine cool down andtouch only the components described in thefollowing.

G WARNINGWindshield washer concentrate could ignite ifit comes into contact with hot engine compo-nents or the exhaust system. There is a risk offire and injury.Make sure that no windshield washer con-centrate is spilled next to the filler neck.

X To open: pull cap: upwards by the taband open.

X Add the premixed washer fluid.X To close: press cap: onto the filler neckuntil it engages.

If the washer fluid level drops below the rec-ommended minimum of 1 liter, a messageappears in the multifunction display prompt-ing you to add washer fluid (Y page 282).Further information on windshield washerfluid/antifreeze (Y page 402).

ASSYST PLUS

Service messageThe ASSYST PLUS service interval displayinforms you of the next service due date.Information on the type of service and serviceintervals (see the separate MaintenanceBooklet).

You can obtain further information from anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center or athttp://www.mbusa.com (USA only).

i The ASSYST PLUS service interval displaydoes not show any information on theengine oil level. Observe the notes on theengine oil level (Y page 325).

The multifunction display shows a servicemessage for several seconds, e.g.:RService A in .. DaysService A in .. DaysRService A DueService A DueRService A Overdue by .. DaysService A Overdue by .. DaysDepending on the operating conditions of thevehicle, the remaining time or distance untilthe next service due date is displayed.The letter AA or BB, possibly in connection with anumber or another letter, indicates the typeof service. AA stands for a minor service and BBfor a major service.You can obtain further information from anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.The ASSYST PLUS service interval displaydoes not take into account any periods oftime during which the battery is disconnec-ted.Maintaining the time-dependent serviceschedule:X Note down the service due date displayedin the multifunction display before discon-necting the battery.

orX After reconnecting the battery, subtractthe battery disconnection periods from theservice date shown on the display.

Hiding a service messageX Press theaor%button on the steer-ing wheel.

328 ASSYST PLUSMaintenance

andcare

Displaying service messagesX Switch on the ignition.X Useò on the steering wheel to call upthe list of menus.

X Press the9or:button on the steer-ing wheel to select the ServiceService menu andpressa to confirm.

X Press the9or:button on the steer-ing wheel to select the ASSYST PLUSASSYST PLUS sub-menu and pressa to confirm.The service due date appears in the multi-function display.

Information about Service

Resetting the ASSYST PLUS serviceinterval display

! If the ASSYST PLUS service interval dis-play has been inadvertently reset, this set-ting can be corrected at a qualified special-ist workshop.Have service work carried out as describedin the Maintenance Booklet. This may oth-erwise lead to increased wear and damageto the major assemblies or the vehicle.

A qualified specialist workshop, e.g. anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center, will resetthe ASSYST PLUS service interval displayafter the service work has been carried out.You can also obtain further information onmaintenance work, for example.

Special service requirementsThe specifiedmaintenance interval takes onlythe normal operation of the vehicle intoaccount. Under arduous operating conditionsor increased load on the vehicle, mainte-nance work must be carried out more fre-quently, for example:Rregular city driving with frequent intermedi-ate stopsRif the vehicle is primarily used to travelshort distances

Ruse in mountainous terrain or on poor roadsurfacesRif the engine is often left idling for long peri-ods

Under these or similar conditions, have, forexample, the air filter, engine oil and oil filterreplaced or changed more frequently. Underarduous operating conditions, the tires mustbe checked more often. Further informationcan be obtained at a qualified specialist work-shop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-ter.

Driving abroadAnextensiveMercedes-Benz Service networkis also available in other countries. You canobtain further information from any author-ized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Care

General notes

H Environmental noteDispose of empty packaging and cleaningcloths in an environmentally responsibleman-ner.

! For cleaning your vehicle, do not use anyof the following:Rdry, rough or hard clothsRabrasive cleaning agentsRsolventsRcleaning agents containing solventsDo not scrub.Do not touch the surfaces or protectivefilms with hard objects, e.g. a ring or icescraper. You could otherwise scratch ordamage the surfaces and protective film.

! Do not park the vehicle for an extendedperiod straight after cleaning it, particularlyafter having cleaned the wheels with wheelcleaner. Wheel cleaners could causeincreased corrosion of the brake discs andbrake pads/linings. For this reason, you

Care 329

Maintenance

andcare

Z

should drive for a few minutes after clean-ing. Braking heats the brake discs and thebrake pads/linings, thus drying them. Thevehicle can then be parked.

Regular care of your vehicle is a condition forretaining the quality in the long term.Use care products and cleaning agents rec-ommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Washing the vehicle and cleaning thepaintwork

Automatic car wash

G WARNINGBraking efficiency is reduced after washingthe vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.After the vehicle has been washed, brakecarefully while paying attention to the trafficconditions until full braking power is restored.

! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD functionis activated, the vehicle brakes automati-cally in certain situations. To prevent dam-age to the vehicle, deactivate DISTRONICPLUS and the HOLD function in the follow-ing or other similar situations:Rwhen towing the vehicleRin the car wash

! Never clean your vehicle in a TouchlessAutomatic Car Wash as these use specialcleaning agents. These cleaning agents candamage the paintwork or plastic parts.

! Make sure that:Rthe side windows and the sliding sunroofare fully closed.Rthe ventilation/heating is switched off(the OFF button has been pressed).Rthe windshield wiper switch is at position0.Rthe 360° camera or rear view camera isswitched off.

The vehicle may otherwise be damaged.

! If the SmartKey is within the rear detec-tion range of KEYLESS-GO, the followingsituations, for example, could lead to theunintentional opening of the trunk:Rusing a car washRusing a power washerMake sure that the SmartKey is at least10 ft (3 m) away from the vehicle.

! Make sure that the automatic transmis-sion is in neutral position N when washingyour vehicle in a tow-through car wash. Thevehicle may otherwise be damaged.ROperating with the SmartKey:Do not remove the SmartKey from theignition lock. Do not open the driver'sdoor when the engine is switched off orat very low speeds. Otherwise, when intransmission position D or R the auto-matic transmission will automaticallyswitch to park position P and block thewheels.ROperating with the Start/Stop button:Do not open the driver's door when theengine is switched off or at very lowspeeds. Otherwise, when in transmissionposition D or R the automatic transmis-sion will automatically switch to parkposition P and block the wheels.

Observe the following to make sure that theautomatic transmission stays in position Nneutral:Operating with the SmartKey:X Make sure that the ignition is switched on.X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary.X Depress and hold the brake pedal.X Shift to neutral N.X Release the brake pedal.X Release the electric parking brake, if nec-essary.

X Switch off the ignition and leave the Smart-Key in the ignition lock.

330 CareMaintenance

andcare

Operating with the Start/Stop button:X Make sure that the ignition is switched on.X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary.X Depress and hold the brake pedal.X Engage park position P.X Release the brake pedal.X Remove Start/Stop button from ignitionlock (Y page 157).

X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.X Switch on the ignition.X Depress and hold the brake pedal.X Shift to neutral N.X Release the brake pedal.X Release the electric parking brake, if nec-essary.

X Switch off the ignition and leave the Smart-Key in the ignition lock.

You can wash the vehicle in an automatic carwash from the very start.If the vehicle is very dirty, pre-wash it beforecleaning it in an automatic car wash.After using an automatic car wash, wipe offwax from the windshield and the wiperblades. This will prevent smears and reducewiping noises caused by residue on the wind-shield.

Washing by handIn some countries, washing by hand is onlyallowed at specially equipped washing bays.Observe the legal requirements in each coun-try.X Do not use hot water and do not wash thevehicle in direct sunlight.

X Use a soft sponge to clean.X Use a mild cleaning agent, such as a carshampoo approved by Mercedes-Benz.

X Thoroughly hose down the vehicle with agentle jet of water.

X Do not point the water jet directly towardsthe air inlet.

X Use plenty of water and rinse out thesponge frequently.

X Rinse the vehicle with clean water and drythoroughly with a chamois.

X Do not let the cleaning agent dry on thepaintwork.

Carefully remove all deposits of road salt assoon as possible when driving in winter.

Power washers

G WARNINGThe water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirtblasters) can cause invisible exterior damageto the tires or chassis components. Compo-nents damaged in this way may fail unexpect-edly. There is a risk of an accident.Do not use power washers with circular jetnozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damagedtires or chassis components replaced imme-diately.

! Always maintain a distance of at least11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicle and thepower washer nozzle. Information aboutthe correct distance is available from theequipment manufacturer.Move the power washer nozzle aroundwhen cleaning your vehicle.Do not aim directly at any of the following:RtiresRdoor gaps, roof gaps, joints, etc.Relectrical componentsRbatteryRconnectorsRlightsRsealsRtrimRventilation slotsDamaged seals or electrical componentscan lead to leaks or failures.

Care 331

Maintenance

andcare

Z

! If the SmartKey is within the rear detec-tion range of KEYLESS-GO, the followingsituations, for example, could lead to theunintentional opening of the trunk:Rusing a car washRusing a power washerMake sure that the SmartKey is at least10 ft (3 m) away from the vehicle.

Cleaning the paintwork

! Do not affix:RstickersRfilmsRmagnetic plates or similar itemsto painted surfaces. You could otherwisedamage the paintwork.

Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affectedby corrosion and damage caused by inade-quate care cannot always be completelyrepaired. In such cases, visit a qualified spe-cialist workshop.X Remove dirt immediately, where possible,while avoiding rubbing too hard.

X Soak insect remains with insect removerand rinse off the treated areas afterwards.

X Soak bird droppings with water and rinseoff the treated areas afterwards.

X Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resin,oils, fuels and greases by rubbing gentlywith a cloth soaked in petroleum ether orlighter fluid.

X Use tar remover to remove tar stains.X Use silicone remover to remove wax.If water no longer forms "beads" on the paintsurface, use the paint care products recom-mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.This is the case approximately every three tofive months, depending on the climate con-ditions and the care product used.If dirt has penetrated the paint surface or ifthe paint has become dull, the paint cleanerrecommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz should be used.

Do not use these care products in the sun oron the hood while the hood is hot.X Use a suitable touch-up stick, e.g. MBTouch-Up Stick, to repair slight damage tothe paintwork quickly and provisionally.

Matte finish care

! Never polish the vehicle or the light alloywheels. Polishing causes the finish toshine.

! The following may cause the paint tobecome shiny and thus reduce the matteeffect:RVigorous rubbing with unsuitable mate-rials.RFrequent use of car washes.RWashing the vehicle in direct sunlight.

! Never use paint cleaner, buffing or pol-ishing products, or gloss preserver, e.g.wax. These products are only suitable forhigh-gloss surfaces. Their use on vehicleswith matte finish leads to considerable sur-face damage (shiny, spotted areas).Always have paintwork repairs carried outat a qualified specialist workshop.

! Do not use wash programs with a hot waxtreatment under any circumstances.

Observe these notes if your vehicle has aclear matte finish. This will help you to avoiddamage to the paintwork due to incorrecttreatment.These notes also apply to light alloy wheelswith a clear matte finish.The vehicle should preferably be washed byhand using a soft sponge, car shampoo andplenty of water.Use only insect remover and car shampoofrom the range of approved Mercedes-Benzcare products.

332 CareMaintenance

andcare

Cleaning the vehicle parts

Cleaning the wheels

G WARNINGThe water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirtblasters) can cause invisible exterior damageto the tires or chassis components. Compo-nents damaged in this way may fail unexpect-edly. There is a risk of an accident.Do not use power washers with circular jetnozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damagedtires or chassis components replaced imme-diately.

! Donot use acidicwheel cleaning productsto remove brake dust. This could damagewheel bolts and brake components.

! Do not park the vehicle for an extendedperiod straight after cleaning it, particularlyafter having cleaned the wheels with wheelcleaner. Wheel cleaners could causeincreased corrosion of the brake discs andbrake pads/linings. For this reason, youshould drive for a few minutes after clean-ing. Braking heats the brake discs and thebrake pads/linings, thus drying them. Thevehicle can then be parked.

Cleaning the windows

G WARNINGYou could become trapped by the windshieldwipers if they start moving while cleaning thewindshield or wiper blades. There is a risk ofinjury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andthe ignition before cleaning the windshield orwiper blades.

! Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products,solvents or cleaning agents containing sol-vents to clean the inside of thewindows.Donot touch the insides of the windows withhard objects, e.g. an ice scraper or ring.There is otherwise a risk of damaging thewindows.

! Clean the water drainage channels of thewindshield and the rear window at regularintervals. Deposits such as leaves, petalsand pollen may under certain circumstan-ces prevent water from draining away. Thiscan lead to corrosion damage and damageto electronic components.

X Clean the inside and outside of the win-dows with a damp cloth and a cleaningproduct that is recommended andapproved by Mercedes-Benz.

Cleaning wiper blades

G WARNINGYou could become trapped by the windshieldwipers if they start moving while cleaning thewindshield or wiper blades. There is a risk ofinjury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andthe ignition before cleaning the windshield orwiper blades.

! Do not pull the wiper blade. Otherwise,the wiper blade could be damaged.

! Do not clean wiper blades too often anddo not rub them too hard. Otherwise, thegraphite coating could be damaged. Thiscould cause wiper noise.

! Hold the wiper arm securely when foldingback. The windshield could be damaged ifthe wiper arm smacks against it suddenly.

X Fold the windshield wiper arms away fromthe windshield.

X Carefully clean the wiper blades with adamp cloth.

X Fold the windshield wiper arms back againbefore switching on the ignition.

Cleaning the exterior lighting

! Only use cleaning agents or cleaningcloths which are suitable for plastic lightlenses. Unsuitable cleaning agents orcleaning cloths could scratch or damagethe plastic light lenses.

Care 333

Maintenance

andcare

Z

X Clean the plastic lenses of the exteriorlightswith awet sponge and amild cleaningagent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz car shampoo orcleaning cloths.

Cleaning the mirror turn signals

! Only use cleaning agents or cleaningcloths that are suitable for plastic lenses.Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaningcloths could scratch or damage the plasticlenses of the mirror turn signals.

X Clean the plastic lenses of the mirror turnsignals in the exterior mirror housing usinga wet sponge and mild cleaning agent, e.g.Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or cleaningcloths.

Cleaning AIRPANEL

! If you clean the sensors with a powerwasher, make sure that you keep a dis-tance of at least 11.8 in (30 cm) betweenthe vehicle and the power washer nozzle.Information about the correct distance isavailable from the equipment manufac-turer.

Vehicles with AIRPANEL have shutters in theradiator trim. If the vehicle is very dusty, theadjustment range of the shutters may berestricted. The actuation mechanics of theradiator trim must then be cleaned with apower washer.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock.Shutters: open automatically afterapproximately 120 seconds.

X Clean the location points of shutters; inthe radiator trim with a power washer.

Cleaning the sensors

! If you clean the sensors with a powerwasher, make sure that you keep a dis-tance of at least 11.8 in (30 cm) betweenthe vehicle and the power washer nozzle.Information about the correct distance isavailable from the equipment manufac-turer.

X Clean sensors: of the driving systemswith water, car shampoo and a soft cloth.

Cleaning the rear view camera

! Do not clean the camera lens and the areaaround the rear view camera with a powerwasher.

334 CareMaintenance

andcare

X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary andthat the SmartKey is in position 2 in theignition lock.

X To open the cover of the rear view cam-era: with COMAND or Audio 20 activated,call up the vehicle menu: press theÑbutton.

X To switch to the menu bar: slide¬ thecontroller.

X To select System SettingsSystem Settings: turn andpress the controller.

X To select Rear view cameraRear view camera: turn andpress the controller.

X To select Open camera coverOpen camera cover: turn andpress the controller.The rear view camera cover opens.

X To clean the rear view camera: use clearwater and a soft cloth to clean cameralens:.

Cleaning the 360° camera

! Do not clean the camera lens and the areaaround the 360° camera with a powerwasher.360

X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary andthat the SmartKey is in position 2 in theignition lock.

X To open the cover of the 360° camera:with COMAND or Audio 20 activated, callup the vehicle menu: press theÑ but-ton.

X To switch to the menu bar: slide¬ thecontroller.

X To select System SettingsSystem Settings: turn andpress the controller.

X To select the 360°360° cameracamera: turn and pressthe controller.

X To select Open camera coverOpen camera cover: turn andpress the controller.The cover of the 360° camera opens.

X To clean the 360° camera: clean cameralens: with clean water and a soft cloth.

If you drive at speeds above 20 mph(30 km/h) or with the SmartKey in position 0or 1 in the ignition lock, the cover of the 360°camera closes automatically.

Cleaning the exhaust pipes

G WARNINGThe exhaust tail pipe and tail pipe trim canbecome very hot. If you come into contactwith these parts of the vehicle, you could burnyourself. There is a risk of injury.Always be particularly careful around theexhaust tail pipe and the tail pipe trim. Allowthese components to cool down before touch-ing them.

! Do not clean the exhaust pipe with acid-based cleaning agents such as sanitarycleansers or wheel cleaners.

Impurities combined with the effects of roadgrit and corrosive environmental factors maycause flash rust to form on the surface. Youcan restore the original shine of the exhaustpipe by cleaning it regularly, especially in win-ter and after washing.

Care 335

Maintenance

andcare

Z

X Clean the exhaust pipe with a care producttested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Interior care

Cleaning the display

! For cleaning, do not use any of the fol-lowing:Ralcohol-based thinner or gasolineRabrasive cleaning agentsRcommercially-available household clean-ing agents

These may damage the display surface. Donot put pressure on the display surfacewhen cleaning. This could lead to irrepara-ble damage to the display.

X Before cleaning the display, make sure thatit is switched off and has cooled down.

X Clean the display surface using a commer-cially available microfiber cloth andTFT/LCD display cleaner.

X Dry the display surface using a dry micro-fiber cloth.

Cleaning the plastic trim

G WARNINGCare products and cleaning agents containingsolvents cause surfaces in the cockpit tobecome porous. As a result, plastic parts maycome loose in the event of air bag deploy-ment. There is a risk of injury.Do not use any care products and cleaningagents to clean the cockpit.

! Do not affix the following to plastic surfa-ces:RstickersRfilmsRscented oil bottles or similar itemsYou can otherwise damage the plastic.

! Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellentor sunscreen to come into contact with the

plastic trim. This maintains the high-qualitylook of the surfaces.

X Wipe the plastic trim with a damp, lint-freecloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth.

X Heavy soiling: use care and cleaning prod-ucts recommended and approved byMercedes-Benz.The surface may change color temporarily.Wait until the surface is dry again.

Cleaning the steering wheel and gear orselector leverX Thoroughly wipe with a damp cloth or useleather care agents that have been recom-mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Cleaning genuine wood and trim ele-ments

! Do not use solvent-based cleaning agentssuch as tar remover, wheel cleaners, pol-ishes or waxes. There is otherwise a risk ofdamaging the surface.

! Do not use chrome polish on trim pieces.The trim pieces have a chrome look but aremostly made of anodized aluminum andcan lose their shine if chrome polish isused. Use a damp, lint-free cloth insteadwhen cleaning the trim pieces.If the chrome-plated trim pieces are verydirty, you can use a chrome polish. If youare unsure as to whether the trim piecesare chrome-plated or not, consult anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

X Wipe the wooden trim and trim pieces witha damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfibercloth.

X Heavy soiling: use care and cleaning prod-ucts recommended and approved byMercedes-Benz.

336 CareMaintenance

andcare

Cleaning the seat covers

General notes! Do not usemicrofiber cloths to clean gen-uine leather, artificial leather or DINAMICAcovers. If used often, these can damage thecover.

Note that regular care is essential to ensurethat the appearance and comfort of the cov-ers is retained over time.

Genuine leather seat covers! To retain the natural appearance of theleather, observe the following cleaninginstructions:RClean genuine leather covers carefullywith a damp cloth and then wipe the cov-ers down with a dry cloth.RMake sure that the leather does notbecome soaked. It may otherwisebecome rough and cracked.ROnly use leather care agents that havebeen tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. You can obtain these from a quali-fied specialist workshop.

Leather is a natural product.It exhibits natural surface characteristics, forexample:Rdifferences in the textureRmarks caused by growth and injuryRslight nuances of colorThese are characteristics of leather and notmaterial defects.

Seat covers of other materials! Observe the following when cleaning:Rclean artificial leather covers with a clothmoistened with a solution containing 1%detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid).Rclean cloth covers with amicrofiber clothmoistened with a solution containing 1%detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid). Rubcarefully and alwayswipe entire seat sec-tions to avoid leaving visible lines. Leavethe seat to dry afterwards. Cleaning

results depend on the type of dirt andhow long it has been there.Rclean DINAMICA covers with a dampcloth. Make sure that you wipe entireseat sections to avoid leaving visiblelines.

Cleaning the seat belts

G WARNINGSeat belts can become severely weakened ifbleached or dyed. This could cause the seatbelts to tear or fail, for instance, in the event ofan accident. This poses an increased risk ofinjury or fatal injury.Never bleach or dye the seat belts.

! Donot clean the seat belts using chemicalcleaning agents. Do not dry the seat beltsby heating at temperatures above 176 ‡(80 †) or in direct sunlight.

X Use clean, lukewarm water and soap solu-tion.

Cleaning the headliner and carpetsX Headliner: if it is very dirty, use a soft brushor dry shampoo.

X Carpets: use the carpet and textile clean-ing agents recommended and approved byMercedes-Benz.

Care 337

Maintenance

andcare

Z

338

Useful information ............................ 340Where will I find...? ........................... 340Flat tire .............................................. 341Battery (vehicle) ................................ 345Jump-starting .................................... 349Towing and tow-starting .................. 351Fuses .................................................. 354

339

Roadside

Assistance

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optional equip-ment of your vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's Manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions.

i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops (Y page 26).

Where will I find...?

Vehicle tool kit

General notesThe towing eye is located in the stowage wellunder the trunk floor.In vehicles with MOExtended tires (tires withrun-flat characteristics) the towing eye islocated in a bracket under the parcel shelf.Apart from certain country-specific varia-tions, the vehicles are not equipped with atire-change tool kit. Some tools for changinga wheel are specific to the vehicle. For moreinformation on which tire changing tools arerequired and approved to perform a wheelchange on your vehicle, consult a qualifiedspecialist workshop.Tools required for changing a wheel mayinclude, for example:RJackRWheel chockRLug wrenchRRatchet wrenchRAlignment bolt

Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit

(Example): Tire inflation compressor; Tire sealant filler bottle= Towing eyeX Open the trunk lid.X Lift the trunk floor upwards (Y page 305).X Use the TIREFIT kit (Y page 342).

Vehicles with MOExtended tires (tireswith run-flat characteristics)

: Towing eyeX To remove the towingeye: open the trunklid.

X Pull towing eye: to the left and remove it.X To replace the towing eye: slide towingeye: with the thread into the rear end ofthe bracket.

X Push towing eye: on the eyelet towardsthe right until it engages in the bracket.

340 Where will I find...?Roadside

Assistance

Flat tire

Preparing the vehicleYour vehicle may be equipped with:RMOExtended tires (tires with run-flat prop-erties) (Y page 341)Vehicle preparation is not necessary onvehicles with MOExtended tiresRa TIREFIT kit (Y page 340)Information on changing/mounting a wheel(Y page 381).X Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery andlevel ground, as far away as possible fromtraffic.

X Switch on the hazard warning lamps.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away(Y page 174).

X If possible, bring the front wheels into thestraight-ahead position.

X Switch off the engine.X Remove the SmartKey from the ignitionlock.

or, in vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-func-tion or KEYLESS‑GOX Open the driver's door.The on-board electronics now have status0. This is the same as the SmartKey havingbeen removed.

X Remove the Start/Stop button from theignition lock (Y page 157).

X All occupants must get out of the vehicle.Make sure that they are not endangered asthey do so.

X Make sure that no one is near the dangerarea while a wheel is being changed. Any-one who is not directly assisting in thewheel change should, for example, standbehind the barrier.

X Get out of the vehicle. Pay attention to traf-fic conditions when doing so.

X Close the driver's door.

MOExtended tires (tires with run-flatproperties)

General notesWith MOExtended tires (tires with run flatcharacteristics), you can continue to driveyour vehicle even if there is a total loss ofpressure in one or more tires. The affectedtiremust not showany clearly visible damage.You can recognize MOExtended tires by theMOExtended marking which appears on thesidewall of the tire. You will find this markingnext to the tire size designation, the load-bearing capacity and the speed index(Y page 375).MOExtended tires may only be used in con-junction with an active tire pressure losswarning systemorwith an active tire pressuremonitor.If the pressure loss warning messageappears in the multifunction display:RObserve the instructions in the displaymessages (Y page 277).RCheck the tire for damage.RIf driving on, observe the following notes.The maximum driving distance is approx-imately 50 miles (80 km) when the vehicle ispartially laden and approximately 18 miles(30 km) when the vehicle is fully laden.In addition to the vehicle load, the driving dis-tance possible depends upon:RSpeedRRoad conditionROutside temperatureThe driving distance possible in run-flat modemay be reduced by extreme driving condi-tions/maneuvers, or it can be increasedthrough a moderate style of driving.The maximum permissible distance whichcan be driven in run-flatmode is counted fromthe moment the tire pressure loss warningappears in the multifunction display.You must not exceed a maximum speed of50 mph (80 km/h).

Flat tire 341

Roadside

Assistance

When replacing one or all tires, make surethat you use only tires:Rof the size specified for the vehicle andRmarked "MOExtended"If a tire has gone flat and cannot be replacedwith a MOExtended tire, a standard tire maybe used as a temporary measure. Make surethat you use the proper size and type (sum-mer or winter tire).Vehicles equippedwithMOExtended tires arenot equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory.It is therefore recommended that you addi-tionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit ifyou mount tires that do not feature run-flatproperties, e.g. winter tires. A TIREFIT kit maybe obtained from a qualified specialist work-shop.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen driving in emergency mode, the drivingcharacteristics deteriorate, e.g. when corner-ing, accelerating quickly and when braking.There is a risk of an accident.Do not exceed the stated maximum speed.Avoid abrupt steering and driving maneuvers,and driving over obstacles (curbs, potholes,off-road). This applies in particular to a ladenvehicle.Stop driving in emergency mode if:Ryou hear banging noises.Rthe vehicle starts to shake.Ryou see smoke and smell rubber.RESP® is intervening constantly.Rthere are tears in the sidewalls of the tire.After driving in emergency mode, have thewheel rims checked at a qualified specialistworkshop with regard to their further use. Thedefective tire must be replaced in every case.

TIREFIT kit

Important safety notesTIREFIT is a tire sealant.You can use TIREFIT to seal punctures of up to0.16 in (4 mm), particularly those in the tiretread. You can use TIREFIT at outside tem-peratures down to Ò4 ‡ (Ò20 †).

G WARNINGIn the following situations, the tire sealant isunable to provide sufficient breakdown assis-tance, as it is unable to seal the tire properly:Rthere are cuts or punctures in the tire largerthan those mentioned above.Rthe wheel rim is damaged.Ryou have driven at very low tire pressures oron a flat tire.

There is a risk of an accident.Do not drive the vehicle. Contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

G WARNINGThe tire sealant is harmful and causes irrita-tion. It must not come into contact with yourskin, eyes or clothing or be swallowed. Do notinhale TIREFIT fumes. Keep tire sealant awayfrom children. There is a risk of injury.If you come into contact with the tire sealant,observe the following:RRinse off the tire sealant from your skinimmediately with water.RIf the tire sealant comes into contact withyour eyes, immediately rinse them thor-oughly with clean water.RIf tire sealant is swallowed, immediatelyrinse your mouth out thoroughly and drinkplenty of water. Do not induce vomiting,and seek medical attention immediately.RImmediately change out of clothing whichhas come into contact with tire sealant.RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek medicalattention immediately.

342 Flat tireRoadside

Assistance

! Do not operate the tire inflation compres-sor for longer than eight minutes at a timewithout a break. It may otherwise overheat.The tire inflation compressor can be oper-ated again once it has cooled down.

Comply with the manufacturer’s safetyinstructions on the sticker on the tire inflationcompressor.

Using the TIREFIT kit

X Do not remove any foreign objects whichhave penetrated the tire, e.g. screws ornails.

X Remove the tire sealant bottle, the accom-panying TIREFIT sticker and the tire infla-tion compressor from the stowage wellunderneath the trunk floor (Y page 340).

X Affix part: of the TIREFIT sticker withinthe driver's field of vision.

X Affix part; of the TIREFIT sticker near thevalve on the wheel with the defective tire.

X Pull plug?with the cable and hoseA outof the housing.

X Screw hoseA onto flangeB of tire seal-ant bottle:.

X Place tire sealant bottle: head down-wards into recess; of the tire inflationcompressor.

X Remove the cap from valveC on the faultytire.

X Screw filler hoseD onto valveC.X Insert connector? into a 12 V socket(Y page 310) in your vehicle.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 157).

X Press on/off switch= on the tire inflationcompressor to I.The tire inflation compressor is switchedon. The tire is inflated.First, tire sealant is pumped into the tire.The pressure can briefly rise to approx-imately 500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi).Do not switch off the tire inflation com-pressor during this phase.

X Allow the tire inflation compressor to runfor five minutes. The tire should then haveattained a pressure of at least 180 kPa(1.8 bar/26 psi).

If a pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) hasbeen attained after five minutes, see "Tirepressure reached" (Y page 344).If a tire pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi)has not been attained after five minutes, see"Tire pressure not reached" (Y page 344).

Flat tire 343

Roadside

Assistance

Z

If tire sealant leaks out, allow it to dry. It canthen be removed like a layer of film.If your clothes are soiled with tire sealant,have them cleaned with perchloroethylene ata dry cleaner as soon as possible.

Tire pressure not reachedIf a pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) hasnot been attained after five minutes:X Switch off the tire inflation compressor.X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve ofthe faulty tire.

X Very slowly drive forwards or reverseapproximately 30 ft (10 m).

X Pump up the tire again.After a maximum of five minutes the tirepressuremust be at least 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi).

G WARNINGIf the required tire pressure is not reachedafter the specified time, the tire is too badlydamaged. The tire sealant cannot repair thetire in this instance. Damaged tires and a tirepressure that is too low can significantlyimpair the vehicle's braking and driving char-acteristics. There is a risk of accident.Do not continue driving. Contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Tire pressure reached

G WARNINGA tire temporarily sealed with tire sealantimpairs the driving characteristics and is notsuitable for higher speeds. There is a risk ofaccident.You should therefore adapt your driving styleaccordingly and drive carefully. Do not exceedthe specified maximum speed with a tire thathas been repaired using tire sealant.

The maximum speed for a tire sealed with tiresealant is 50 mph (80 km/h). The upper partof the TIREFIT sticker must be affixed to the

instrument cluster in the driver's field ofvision.

! Residue from the tire sealant may comeout of the filler hose after use. This couldcause stains.Therefore, place the filler hose in the plasticbag which contained the TIREFIT kit.

H Environmental noteHave the used tire sealant bottle disposed ofprofessionally, e.g. at a qualified specialistworkshop.

If a tire pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi)has been attained after five minutes:X Switch off the tire inflation compressor.X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve ofthe faulty tire.

X Stow the tire sealant bottle and the tireinflation compressor.

X Pull away immediately.X Stop after driving for approximately tenminutes and check the tire pressure withthe tire inflation compressor.The tire pressure must now be at least130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi).

G WARNINGIf the required tire pressure is not reachedafter driving for a short period, the tire is toobadly damaged. The tire sealant cannot repairthe tire in this instance. Damaged tires and atire pressure that is too low can significantlyimpair the vehicle's braking and driving char-acteristics. There is a risk of accident.Do not continue driving. Contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

i In cases such as the one mentionedabove, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(in the USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Can-ada).

X Correct the tire pressure if it is still at least130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). See the Tire andLoading Information placard on the driver's

344 Flat tireRoadside

Assistance

side B-pillar or the tire pressure table in thefuel filler flap for values.

X To increase the tire pressure: switch onthe tire inflation compressor.

X To reduce the tire pressure: depresspressure release buttonE next to pres-sure gaugeF.

X When the tire pressure is correct, unscrewthe filler hose from the valve of the sealedtire.

X Screw the valve cap onto the tire valve ofthe sealed tire.

X Pull the tire sealant bottle out of the tireinflation compressor.The filler hose remains attached to the tiresealant bottle.

X Stow the tire sealant bottle and the tireinflation compressor.

X Drive to the nearest qualified specialistworkshop and have the tire changed there.

X Have the tire sealant bottle replaced assoon as possible at a qualified specialistworkshop.

X Have the tire sealant bottle replaced everyfour years at a qualified specialist work-shop.

Battery (vehicle)

Important safety notesSpecial tools and expert knowledge arerequired when working on the battery, e.g.removal and installing. You should therefore

have all work involving the battery carried outat a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGWork carried out incorrectly on the batterycan lead, for example, to a short circuit andthus damage the vehicle electronics. This canlead to function restrictions applying tosafety-relevant systems, e.g. the lighting sys-tem, ABS (anti-lock braking system) or ESP®(Electronic Stability Program). The operatingsafety of your vehicle may be restricted. Youcould lose control of the vehicle, for example:RbrakingRin the event of abrupt steering maneuverand/or when the vehicle's speed is notadapted to the road conditions

There is a risk of an accident.In the event of a short circuit or a similar inci-dent, contact a qualified specialist workshopimmediately. Do not drive any further. Youshould have all work involving the battery car-ried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

i For further information about ABS andESP®, see (Y page 66) and (Y page 71).

G WARNINGElectrostatic build-up can lead to the creationof sparks, which could ignite the highly explo-sive gases of a battery. There is a risk of anexplosion.Before handling the battery, touch the vehiclebody to remove any existing electrostaticbuild-up.

The highly flammable gasmixture formswhencharging the battery as well as when jump-starting.Always make sure that neither you nor thebattery is electrostatically charged. A build-up of electrostatic charge can be caused, forexample:Rby wearing clothing made from syntheticfibersRdue to friction between clothing and seats

Battery (vehicle) 345

Roadside

Assistance

Z

Rif you push or pull the battery across thecarpet or other synthetic materialsRif you wipe the battery with a cloth

G WARNINGDuring the charging process, a battery produ-ces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs orsparks are created, the hydrogen gas canignite. There is a risk of an explosion.RMake sure that the positive terminal of aconnected battery does not come into con-tact with vehicle parts.RNever placemetal objects or tools on a bat-tery.RIt is important that you observe the descri-bed order of the battery terminals whenconnecting and disconnecting a battery.RWhen jump-starting, make sure that thebattery poles with identical polarity areconnected.RIt is particularly important to observe thedescribed order when connecting and dis-connecting the jumper cables.RNever connect or disconnect the batteryterminals while the engine is running.

G WARNINGBattery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing.Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not leanover the battery. Keep children away frombatteries. Wash battery acid immediately withwater and seek medical attention.

H Environmental noteBatteries contain dangeroussubstances. It is against thelaw to dispose of them withthe household rubbish. Theymust be collected separatelyand recycled to protect theenvironment.Dispose of batteries in anenvironmentally friendlymanner. Take dischargedbatteries to a qualified spe-

cialist workshop or a specialcollection point for used bat-teries.

! Have the battery checked regularly at aqualified specialist workshop.Observe the service intervals in the Main-tenance Booklet or contact a qualified spe-cialist workshop for more information.

! You should have all work involving thebattery carried out at a qualified specialistworkshop. In the exceptional case that it isnecessary for you to disconnect the batteryyourself, make sure that:Rsecure the vehicle to prevent it from roll-ing away.Ryou switch off the engine and remove theSmartKey. Make sure the ignition isswitched off. Check that all the indicatorlamps in the instrument cluster are off.Otherwise, electronic components, suchas the alternator, may be damaged.Ryou first remove the negative terminalclamp and then the positive terminalclamp. Never swap the terminal clamps.Otherwise, the vehicle's electronic sys-tem may be damaged.Rthe transmission is locked in position Pafter disconnecting the battery. The vehi-cle is secured against rolling away. Youcan then no longer move the vehicle.

The battery and the cover of the positiveterminal clamp must be installed securelyduring operation.

Comply with safety precautions and take pro-tective measures when handling batteries.

Risk of explosion.

Fire, open flames and smoking areprohibited when handling the bat-tery. Avoid creating sparks.

346 Battery (vehicle)Roadside

Assistance

Battery acid is caustic. Avoid con-tact with skin, eyes or clothing.Wear suitable protective clothing,especially gloves, apron and face-guard.Rinse any acid spills immediatelywith clear water. Contact a physi-cian if necessary.Wear eye protection.

Keep children away.

Observe this Operator's Manual.

For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-mends that you only use batteries which havebeen tested and approved for your vehicle byMercedes-Benz. These batteries provideincreased impact protection to prevent vehi-cle occupants from suffering acid burnsshould the battery be damaged in the event ofan accident.In order for the battery to achieve the maxi-mum possible service life, it must always besufficiently charged.The vehicle battery, like other batteries, candischarge over time if you do not use thevehicle. In this case, have the battery discon-nected at a qualified specialist workshop. Youcan also charge the battery with a chargerrecommended by Mercedes-Benz. Contact aqualified specialist workshop for further infor-mation.Have the battery condition of charge checkedmore frequently if you use the vehicle mainlyfor short trips or if you leave it standing idlefor a lengthy period. Consult a qualified spe-cialist workshop if you wish to leave yourvehicle parked for a long period of time.Remove the SmartKey if you park the vehicleand do not require any electrical consumers.

The vehicle will then use very little energy,thus conserving battery power.

Charging the battery

G WARNINGDuring charging and jump-starting, explosivegases can escape from the battery. There is arisk of an explosion.Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creatingsparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficientventilation while charging and jump-starting.Do not lean over a battery.

G WARNINGBattery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing.Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not leanover the battery. Keep children away frombatteries. Wash battery acid immediately withwater and seek medical attention.

G WARNINGA discharged battery can freeze at tempera-tures below freezing point. When jump-start-ing the vehicle or charging the battery, gasescan escape from the battery. There is a risk ofan explosion.Allow the frozen battery to thaw out beforecharging it or jump-starting.

! Only use battery chargers with a maxi-mum charging voltage of 14.8 V.

! Only charge the battery using the jump-starting connection point.

The jump-starting connection point is in theengine compartment (Y page 349).X Open the hood.X Connect the battery charger to the positiveterminal and ground point in the sameorder as when connecting the donor bat-tery in the jump-starting procedure(Y page 349).

Battery (vehicle) 347

Roadside

Assistance

Z

Never charge the battery if it is still installed inthe vehicle, unless you use a battery chargerwhich has been tested and approved byMercedes-Benz. A battery charger unit spe-cially adapted for Mercedes-Benz vehiclesand tested and approved by Mercedes-Benzis available as an accessory. It permits thecharging of the battery in its installed posi-tion. Contact an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter for further information and availabil-ity. Read the battery charger's operatinginstructions before charging the battery.If, at low temperatures, the indicator lamps/warning lamps in the instrument cluster donot light up, it is highly likely that the dis-charged battery has frozen. In this case youmay neither jump-start the vehicle nor chargethe battery. The service life of a thawed-outbattery may be shorter. The starting charac-teristics can be impaired, particularly at lowtemperatures. Have the thawed-out batterychecked at a qualified specialist workshop.

348 Battery (vehicle)Roadside

Assistance

Jump-starting

For the jump-starting procedure, use only the jump-starting connection point, consisting of apositive terminal and a ground point, in the engine compartment.

G WARNINGBattery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over thebattery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash battery acid immediately with water and seekmedical attention.

G WARNINGDuring charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a riskof an explosion.Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient ven-tilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery.

G WARNINGDuring the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or sparksare created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion.RMake sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact withvehicle parts.RNever place metal objects or tools on a battery.RIt is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connectingand disconnecting a battery.RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected.RIt is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnectingthe jumper cables.RNever connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running.

G WARNINGA discharged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point. When jump-starting thevehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion.Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting.

! Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Otherwise, the catalytic converter could bedamaged by the non-combusted fuel.

If, at low temperatures, the indicator lamps/warning lamps in the instrument cluster do notlight up, it is highly likely that the discharged battery has frozen. In this case, you may neithercharge the battery nor jump-start the vehicle. The service life of a thawed-out battery may beshorter. The starting characteristics can be impaired, particularly at low temperatures. Havethe thawed-out battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Jump-starting 349

Roadside

Assistance

Z

Do not start the vehicle using a rapid charging device. If your vehicle's battery is discharged,the engine can be jump-started from another vehicle or from a second battery using jumpercables. Observe the following points:RThe battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If the other vehicle's battery is not accessible,jump-start the vehicle using a second battery or a jump-starting device.RYou may only jump-start the vehicle when the engine and exhaust system are cold.RDo not start the engine if the battery is frozen. Let the battery thaw first.ROnly jump-start from batteries with a 12 V voltage rating.ROnly use jumper cables which have a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps.RIf the battery is fully discharged, leave the battery that is being used to jump-start connectedfor a few minutes before attempting to start. This charges the battery slightly.RMake sure that the two vehicles do not touch.Make sure that:Rthe jumper cables are not damaged.Rwhen the jumper cables are connected to the battery, uninsulated sections of the terminalclamp do not come into contact with other metal sections.Rthe jumper cables cannot come into contact with parts which can move when the engine isrunning, such as the V-belt pulley or the fan.

X Secure the vehicle by applying the electric parking brake.X Shift the transmission to position P.X Make sure that the ignition is switched off (Y page 157). All indicator lamps in the instrumentclustermust be off. When using the SmartKey, turn the SmartKey to position0 in the ignitionlock and remove it (Y page 157).

X Switch off all electrical consumers, e.g. rear window defroster, lighting, etc.X Open the hood.

Position numberB identifies the charged battery of the other vehicle or an equivalent jump-starting device.

350 Jump-startingRoadside

Assistance

X Slide coverA of positive terminal: in the direction of the arrow.X Connect positive terminal: on your vehicle to positive terminal; of donor batteryBusing the jumper cable. Always begin with positive terminal: on your own vehicle first.

X Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed.X Connect negative terminal= of donor batteryB to ground point? of your vehicle usingthe jumper cable, connecting the jumper cable to donor batteryB first.

X Start the engine.X Before disconnecting the jumper cables, let the engine run for several minutes.X First, remove the jumper cables from ground point? and negative terminal=, then frompositive clamp: and positive terminal;. Begin each time at the contacts on your ownvehicle first.

X Close coverA of positive clamp: after removing the jumper cables.X Have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.Jump-starting is not considered to be a normal operating condition.

i Jumper cables and further information regarding jump-starting can be obtained at anyqualified specialist workshop.

Towing and tow-starting

Important safety notes

G WARNINGFunctions relevant to safety are restricted orno longer available if:Rthe engine is not running.Rthe brake system or the power steering ismalfunctioning.Rthere is a malfunction in the voltage supplyor the vehicle's electrical system.

If your vehicle is being towed, much moreforce may be necessary to steer or brake.There is a risk of an accident.In such cases, use a tow bar. Before towing,make sure that the steering moves freely.

G WARNINGYou can no longer steer the vehicle if thesteering wheel lock has been engaged. Thereis a risk of an accident.Always switch off the ignitionwhen towing thevehicle with a tow cable or a tow bar.

G WARNINGWhen towing or tow-starting another vehicleand its weight is greater than the permissiblegross weight of your vehicle, the:Rthe towing eye could detach itselfRthe vehicle/trailer combination could roll-over.

There is a risk of an accident.When towing or tow-starting another vehicle,its weight should not be greater than the per-missible gross weight of your vehicle.

! When COLLISION PREVENTION ASSISTPLUS, DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD func-tion is activated, the vehicle brakes auto-matically in certain situations. To avoiddamage to the vehicle, deactivate thesesystems in the following or similar situa-tions:Rwhen towing the vehicleRin the car wash

! Make sure that the electric parking brakeis released. If the electric parking brake isfaulty, visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Towing and tow-starting 351

Roadside

Assistance

Z

! Secure the tow rope or tow bar to thetowing eye only. Otherwise, the vehiclecould become damaged.

! Do not use the towing eyes for recoverypurposes as this could damage the vehicle.If in doubt, recover the vehicle with a crane.

! When towing, pull away slowly andsmoothly. If the tractive power is too high,the vehicles could be damaged.

! Shift the automatic transmission toN anddo not open the driver's or front passeng-er's door during towing. The automatictransmission may otherwise shift to posi-tion P, which could damage the transmis-sion.

! Do not tow with sling-type equipment.This could damage the vehicle.

! The vehicle can be towed a maximum of30 miles (50km). The towing speed of30 mph (50 km/h) must not be exceeded.If the vehicle has to be towed more than30miles (50km), the entire vehicle must beraised and transported.

! If you tow or tow-start another vehicle, itsweight must not exceed the maximum per-missible gross vehicle weight of your vehi-cle.

Details on the permissible gross vehicleweight of your vehicle can be found on thevehicle identification plate (Y page 396).It is better to have the vehicle transportedthan to have it towed away.If the vehicle has suffered transmission dam-age, have it transported on a transporter ortrailer.The automatic transmission must be in posi-tion N when the vehicle is being towed. If theautomatic transmission cannot be shifted toposition N, have the vehicle transported on atransporter or trailer.

The battery must be connected and charged.Otherwise, you:Rcannot turn the SmartKey to position 2 inthe ignition lockRcannot release the electric parking brakeRcannot shift the automatic transmission toposition N

Disarm the automatic locking feature beforethe vehicle is towed (Y page 88). You couldotherwise be locked out when pushing ortowing the vehicle.

Installing/removing the towing eye

Installing the towing eye

The brackets for the screw-in towing eyes arelocated in the bumpers. They are at the rearand at the front, under covers:.X Remove the towing eye from the vehicletool kit/stowage tray (Y page 340).

X Press the mark on cover: inwards andremove.

X Screw in and tighten the towing eye clock-wise to the stop.

352 Towing and tow-startingRoadside

Assistance

Removing the towing eyeX Unscrew and remove the towing eye.X Attach cover: to the bumper and pressuntil it engages.

X Place the towing eye in the vehicle tool kit/stowage tray.

Towing the vehicle with the rear axleraisedOnly vehicles without 4MATIC can betowed with the rear axle raised.

! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towedwith either the front or the rear axle raised,as doing so will damage the transmission.

Vehicles with 4MATIC may either be towedaway with both axles on the ground or be loa-ded up and transported.

! The ignition must be switched off if youare towing the vehicle with the rear axleraised. Intervention by ESP® could other-wise damage the brake system.

X Switch on the hazard warning lamps(Y page 127).

X Bring the front wheels into the straight-ahead position.

X If necessary, turn the SmartKey in the igni-tion lock to position 0 and remove theSmartKey from the ignition lock.

X Take the SmartKeywith youwhen you leavethe vehicle.

When towing your vehicle with the rear axleraised, it is important that you observe thesafety instructions (Y page 351).

Towing a vehicle with both axles onthe groundThe automatic transmission automaticallyshifts to positionPwhen you open the driver'sor front-passenger door or when you removethe SmartKey from the ignition lock. In orderto ensure that the automatic transmissionstays in position N when towing the vehicle,you must observe the following points:X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock.

X Depress and hold the brake pedal.X Shift the automatic transmission to posi-tion N.

X Leave the SmartKey in position 2 in theignition lock.

X Release the brake pedal.X Release the electric parking brake.X Switch on the hazard warning lamps(Y page 127).

In order to signal a change of direction whentowing the vehicle with the hazard warninglamps switched on, use the combinationswitch as usual. In this case, only the indica-tor lamps for the direction of travel flash.After resetting the combination switch, thehazard warning lamp starts flashing again.

Transporting the vehicle! You may only secure the vehicle by thewheels, not by parts of the vehicle such asaxle or steering components. Otherwise,the vehicle could be damaged.

The towing eye can be used to pull the vehicleonto a trailer or transporter for transportingpurposes.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock.

X Shift the automatic transmission to posi-tion N.

Towing and tow-starting 353

Roadside

Assistance

Z

As soon as the vehicle has been loaded:X Prevent the vehicle from rolling away byapplying the electric parking brake.

X Shift the automatic transmission to posi-tion P.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the igni-tion lock and remove it.

X Secure the vehicle.

Notes on 4MATIC vehicles! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towedwith either the front or the rear axle raised,as doing so will damage the transmission.

Vehicles with 4MATIC may either be towedaway with both axles on the ground or be loa-ded up and transported.If the vehicle's transmission, front, or rearaxle is damaged, have the vehicle transportedon a truck or trailer.In the event of damage to the electricalsystem: if the battery is defective, the auto-matic transmission will be locked in positionP. To shift the automatic transmission to posi-tion N, you must provide power to the vehi-cle's electrical system in the same way aswhen jump-starting (Y page 349).Have the vehicle transported on a transporteror trailer.

Tow-starting (emergency enginestarting)! Vehicles with automatic transmissionmust not be tow-started. You could other-wise damage the automatic transmission.

i You can find information on "Jump-start-ing" under (Y page 349).

Fuses

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or ifyou replace it with a fuse with a higher amper-age, the electric cables could be overloaded.This could result in a fire. There is a risk of anaccident and injury.Always replace faulty fuses with the specifiednew fuses having the correct amperage.

Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses ofthe same rating, which you can recognize bythe color and value. The fuse ratings are listedin the fuse allocation chart.If a newly inserted fuse also blows, have thecause traced and rectified at a qualified spe-cialist workshop, e.g. an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

! Only use fuses that have been approvedfor Mercedes-Benz vehicles and whichhave the correct fuse rating for the systemconcerned. Otherwise, components or sys-tems could be damaged.

The fuses in your vehicle serve to close downfaulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all the compo-nents on the circuit and their functions stopoperating.

Before changing a fuseX Secure the vehicle against rolling away(Y page 174).

X Switch off all electrical consumers.X Make sure that the ignition is switched off(Y page 157).

orX When using the SmartKey, turn the Smart-Key to position 0 in the ignition lock andremove it (Y page 157).

All indicator lamps in the instrument clustermust be off.

354 FusesRoadside

Assistance

The fuses are located in various fuse boxes:RFuse box on the driver's side of the dash-boardRFuse box in the front-passenger footwellRFuse box in the engine compartment on thedriver's sideRFuse box under the trunk floor on the right-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed in thedirection of travel

The fuse allocation chart is on the fuse box inthe trunk (Y page 356).

Dashboard fuse box! Do not use a pointed object such as ascrewdriver to open the cover in the dash-board. You could damage the dashboard orthe cover.

! Make sure that no moisture can enter thefuse box when the cover is open.

! When closing the cover, make sure that itis lying correctly on the fuse box. Moistureseeping in or dirt could otherwise impairthe operation of the fuses.

X Open the driver's door.X To open: pull out cover: slightly at thebottom in the direction of arrow=.

X Fold cover: outwards in the direction ofarrow;.

X To close: fold in cover: until it engages.

Fuse box in the front-passenger foot-well! Make sure that no moisture can enter thefuse box when the cover is open.

! When closing the cover, make sure that itis lying correctly on the fuse box. Moistureseeping in or dirt could otherwise impairthe operation of the fuses.

X Open the front-passenger door.

X Open the front-passenger door.X To open: fold cover: out towards the rearand remove it.

X To close: clip in cover: at the rear.X Fold cover: forwards until it engages.

Fuse box in the engine compartment

G WARNINGWhen the hood is open and the windshieldwipers are set inmotion, you can be injured bythe wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andthe ignition before opening the hood.

! Make sure that no moisture can enter thefuse box when the cover is open.

! When closing the cover, make sure that itis lying correctly on the fuse box. Moistureseeping in or dirt could otherwise impairthe operation of the fuses.

Fuses 355

Roadside

Assistance

Z

X Open the hood.X To open: press safety clips: on the covertogether.

X Remove fuse box cover; upwards.

X Use a dry cloth to remove any moisturefrom the fuse box.

X Loosen screws=, fold up fuse box lid?and remove it.

X To close: check whether the seal is posi-tioned correctly in the lid?.

X Insert lid? into the bracket at the rear ofthe fuse box.

X Fold down lid? of the fuse box and tightenscrews=.

Fuse box in the trunk! Make sure that no moisture can enter thefuse box when the cover is open.

! When closing the cover, make sure that itis lying correctly on the fuse box. Moistureseeping in or dirt could otherwise impairthe operation of the fuses.

X Open the trunk lid.X Lift the trunk floor upwards (Y page 305).X To open: swing cover: upwards in thedirection of the arrow.

X To close: fold down cover: in the oppo-site direction to the arrow.Make sure that the cover is in the recessprovided for it.

i The fuse allocation chart is located in arecess at the side of the fuse box. You canfind the corresponding fuse rating and fusetype on the fuse allocation chart.

356 FusesRoadside

Assistance

Useful information ............................ 358Important safety notes .................... 358Operation ........................................... 358Winter operation ............................... 360Check ................................................. 361Loading the vehicle .......................... 369All about wheels and tires ............... 373Changing a wheel ............................. 381Wheel and tire combinations ........... 386

357

Wheelsandtires

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optional equip-ment of your vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's Manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions.

i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops (Y page 26).

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf wheels and tires of the wrong size are used,the wheel brakes or suspension componentsmay be damaged. There is a risk of an acci-dent.Always replace wheels and tires with thosethat fulfill the specifications of the originalpart.When replacing wheels, make sure to use thecorrect:RdesignationRmodelWhen replacing tires, make sure to use thecorrect:RdesignationRmanufacturerRmodel

G WARNINGA flat tire severely impairs the driving, steer-ing and braking characteristics of the vehicle.There is a risk of accident.Tires without run-flat characteristics:Rdo not drive with a flat tire.Rimmediately replace the flat tire with youremergency spare wheel or spare wheel, orconsult a qualified specialist workshop.

Tires with run-flat characteristics:Rpay attention to the information and warn-ing notices on MOExtended tires (tires withrun-flat characteristics).

Accessories that are not approved for yourvehicle by Mercedes-Benz or are not beingused correctly can impair the operatingsafety.Before purchasing and using non-approvedaccessories, visit a qualified specialist work-shop and inquire about:RsuitabilityRlegal stipulationsRfactory recommendationsInformation on the dimensions and types ofwheels and tires for your vehicle can be foundin the "Wheel/tire combinations" section(Y page 386).Information on air pressure for the tires onyour vehicle can be found:Ron the vehicle's Tire and Loading Informa-tion placard on the B-pillar (Y page 369)Ron the tire pressure label on the fuel fillerflap (Y page 172)Runder "Tire pressure" (Y page 361)

Operation

Information on drivingIf the vehicle is heavily loaded, check the tirepressures and correct them if necessary.While driving, pay attention to vibrations,noises and unusual handling characteristics,e.g. pulling to one side. This may indicate thatthe wheels or tires are damaged. If you sus-pect that a tire is defective, reduce yourspeed immediately. Stop the vehicle as soonas possible to check the wheels and tires fordamage. Hidden tire damage could also becausing the unusual handling characteristics.If you find no signs of damage, have the tiresand wheels checked at a qualified specialistworkshop.

358 OperationWheelsandtires

When parking your vehicle, make sure thatthe tires do not get deformed by the curb orother obstacles. If it is necessary to drive overcurbs, speed humps or similar elevations, tryto do so slowly and at an obtuse angle. Oth-erwise, the tires, particularly the sidewalls,may be damaged.

Regular checking of wheels and tires

G WARNINGDamaged tires can cause tire inflation pres-sure loss. As a result, you could lose control ofyour vehicle. There is a risk of accident.Check the tires regularly for signs of damageand replace any damaged tires immediately.

Regularly check the wheels and tires of yourvehicle for damage at least once a month, aswell as after driving off-road or on roughroads. Damaged wheels can cause a loss oftire pressure. Pay particular attention to dam-age such as:Rcuts in the tiresRpuncturesRtears in the tiresRbulges on tiresRdeformation or severe corrosion on wheelsRegularly check the tire tread depth and thecondition of the tread across the whole widthof the tire (Y page 359). If necessary, turn thefront wheels to full lock in order to inspect theinner side of the tire surface.All wheels must have a valve cap to protectthe valve against dirt and moisture. Do notmount anything onto the valve other than thestandard valve cap or other valve capsapproved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle.Do not use any other valve caps or systems,e.g. tire pressure monitoring systems.Regularly check the pressure of all the tiresparticularly prior to long trips. Adjust the tirepressure as necessary (Y page 361).

The service life of tires depends, among otherthings, on the following factors:RDriving styleRTire pressureRDistance covered

Important safety notes on the tiretread

G WARNINGInsufficient tire tread will reduce tire traction.The tire is no longer able to dissipate water.This means that on wet road surfaces, the riskof hydroplaning increases, in particular wherespeed is not adapted to suit the driving con-ditions. There is a risk of accident.If the tire pressure is too high or too low, tiresmay exhibit different levels of wear at differ-ent locations on the tire tread. Thus, youshould regularly check the tread depth andthe condition of the tread across the entirewidth of all tires.Minimum tire tread depth for:RSummer tires:â in (3 mm)RM+S tires:ã in (4 mm)For safety reasons, replace the tires beforethe legally prescribed limit for the minimumtire tread depth is reached.

Bar indicator: for tread wear is integratedinto the tire tread.Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required bylaw. Six indicators are positioned on the tiretread. They are visible once a tread depth of

Operation 359

Wheelsandtires

Z

approximatelyá in (1.6 mm) has beenreached. If this is the case, the tire is so wornthat it must be replaced.

Selecting, mounting and replacingtiresROnly mount tires and wheels of the sametype and make.Exception: it is permissible to install a dif-ferent type or make in the event of a flattire. Observe the "MOExtended tires (tireswith run-flat characteristics" section(Y page 341).ROnly mount tires of the correct size ontothe wheels.RBreak in new tires at moderate speeds forthe first 60miles (100 km). They only reachtheir full performance after this distance.RDo not drive with tires which have too littletread depth, as this significantly reducesthe traction on wet roads (hydroplaning).RReplace the tires after six years at the lat-est, regardless of wear.

MOExtended tires (tires with run-flatproperties)With MOExtended tires (tires with run flatcharacteristics), you can continue to driveyour vehicle even if there is a total loss ofpressure in one or more tires.MOExtended tires may only be used in con-junction with an active tire pressure losswarning systemorwith an active tire pressuremonitor and on wheels specifically tested byMercedes-Benz.Notes on driving with MOExtended tires witha flat tire (Y page 341).

i Vehicles equippedwithMOExtended tiresare not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at thefactory. It is therefore recommended thatyou additionally equip your vehicle with aTIREFIT kit if you mount tires that do notfeature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tires.

A TIREFIT kit can be obtained from a quali-fied specialist workshop.

Winter operation

General notesHave your vehicle winter-proofed at a quali-fied specialist workshop at the onset of win-ter.Observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel"section (Y page 381).

Driving with summer tiresAt temperatures below 45‡ (+7†), summertires lose elasticity and therefore traction andbraking power. Change the tires on your vehi-cle to M+S tires. Using summer tires at verycold temperatures could cause cracks toform, thereby damaging the tires perma-nently. Mercedes-Benz cannot acceptresponsibility for this type of damage.

G WARNINGDamaged tires can cause tire inflation pres-sure loss. As a result, you could lose control ofyour vehicle. There is a risk of accident.Check the tires regularly for signs of damageand replace any damaged tires immediately.

M+S tires

G WARNINGM+S tires with a tire tread depth of less thanã in (4 mm) are not suitable for use in winterand do not provide sufficient traction. There isa risk of an accident.M+S tires with a tread depth of less thanã in(4 mm) must be replaced immediately.

At temperatures below 45‡ (+7†), use win-ter tires or all-season tires. Both types of tireare identified by the M+S marking.Only winter tires bearing thei snowflakesymbol in addition to the M+S marking pro-

360 Winter operationWheelsandtires

vide the best possible grip in wintry road con-ditions. Only these tires will allow drivingsafety systems such as ABS and ESP® tofunction optimally in winter. These tires havebeen developed specifically for driving insnow.UseM+S tires of the samemake and tread onall wheels to maintain safe handling charac-teristics.Always observe the maximum permissiblespeed specified for the M+S tires you havemounted.When you have mounted the M+S tires:X Check the tire pressures (Y page 365).X Vehicles for Canada: restart the tire pres-sure loss warning system (Y page 369).

X Restart the tire pressure monitor(Y page 367).

Snow chains

G WARNINGIf snow chains are installed to the frontwheels, they may drag against the vehiclebody or chassis components. This couldcause damage to the vehicle or the tires.There is a risk of an accident.To avoid hazardous situations:Rnever install snow chains to the frontwheelsRalways install snow chains in pairs to therear wheels.

! Vehicles with steel wheels: if youmount snow chains on steel wheels, youmay damage the hub caps. Remove the hubcaps from the relevant wheels beforemounting the snow chains.

For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-mends that you only use snow chains thathave been specially approved for your vehicleby Mercedes-Benz, or are of a correspondingstandard of quality.

If you intend to mount snow chains, pleasebear the following points in mind:RSnow chains may not be mounted on allwheel/tire combinations. Permissiblewheel-tire combinations (Y page 386).ROnly use snow chains when driving onroads completely covered by snow.Remove the snow chains as soon as possi-ble when you come to a road that is notsnow-covered.RLocal regulations may restrict the use ofsnow chains. Observe the appropriate reg-ulations if you wish to mount snow chains.RDo not exceed the maximum permissiblespeed of 30 mph (50 km/h).ROn vehicles with AIRMATIC, you must driveat raised vehicle level if snow chains havebeen installed (Y page 197).

You may wish to deactivate ESP® when pull-ing away with snow chains installed(Y page 72). You can thereby allow thewheelsto spin in a controlled manner, achieving anincreased driving force (cutting action).

Check

Tire pressure specifications

Important safety notes

G WARNINGUnderinflated or overinflated tires pose thefollowing risks:Rthe tires may burst, especially as the loadand vehicle speed increase.Rthe tires may wear excessively and/orunevenly, which may greatly impair tiretraction.Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steer-ing and braking, may be greatly impaired.

There is a risk of an accident.

Check 361

Wheelsandtires

Z

Follow recommended tire inflation pressuresand check the pressure of all the tires includ-ing the spare wheel:Rmonthly, at leastRif the load changesRbefore beginning a long journeyRunder different operating conditions, e.g.off-road driving

If necessary, correct the tire pressure.

The specifications on the sample Tire andLoading Information placard and tire pressuretables are examples. Tire pressure specifica-tions are vehicle-specific and may deviatefrom the data shown here. The tire pressurespecifications that are valid for your vehiclecan be found on the Tire and Loading Infor-mation placard and tire pressure table on thevehicle.

General notesThe recommended tire pressures for the tiresmounted at the factory can be found on thelabels described here.Further information on tire pressures can beobtained at a qualified specialist workshop.

Tire and Loading Information placard

: Recommended tire pressuresThe Tire and Loading Information placard ison the B-pillar on the driver's side(Y page 369).The Tire and Loading Information placard con-tains the recommended tire pressures for

cold tires. The recommended tire pressuresare valid for the maximum permissible loadand up to the maximum permissible vehiclespeed.

Tire pressure tableThe tire pressure table is on the inside of thefuel filler flap.

Example: tire pressure table for all tires permittedfor this vehicle by the factory

The tire pressure table contains the recom-mended pressures for cold tires for variousoperating conditions, i.e. differing load andspeed conditions.

Example: tire pressure table with tire dimensions

If a tire size precedes a tire pressure, the tirepressure information following is only validfor that tire size. The load conditions "partiallyladen" and "fully laden" are defined in thetable for different numbers of occupants andamounts of luggage. The actual number ofseats may differ.

362 CheckWheelsandtires

Some tire pressure tables show only the rimdiameters instead of the full tire size, e.g.R18. Rim diameter is part of the tire size andcan be found on the tire sidewall(Y page 375).If the tire pressures have been set to thelower values for lighter loads and/or lowerroad speeds, the pressures should be reset tothe higher values:Rif you want to drive with an increased loadand/orRif you want to drive at higher road speedsThe tire pressures for increased loads and/orhigher road speeds, shown in the tire pres-sure table, may have a negative effect on driv-ing comfort.If the tire pressure is not set correctly, thiscan lead to an excessive build up of heat anda sudden loss of pressure.Formore information, contact a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Important notes on tire pressure

G WARNINGIf the tire pressure drops repeatedly, thewheel, valve or tire may be damaged. Tirepressure that is too low may result in a tireblow-out. There is a risk of an accident.RCheck the tire for foreign objects.RCheck whether the wheel is losing air or thevalve is leaking.

If you are unable to rectify the damage, con-tact a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGIf you fit unsuitable accessories onto tirevalves, the tire valves may be overloaded andmalfunction, which can cause tire pressureloss. Due to their design, retrofitted tire pres-sure monitors keep the tire valve open. Thiscan also result in tire pressure loss. There is arisk of an accident.Only screw the standard valve cap or othervalve caps approved by Mercedes-Benz foryour vehicle onto the tire valve.

Use a suitable pressure gauge to check thetire pressure. The outer appearance of a tiredoes not permit any reliable conclusion aboutthe tire pressure. On vehicles equipped withthe electronic tire pressure monitor, the tirepressure can be checked in the on-boardcomputer.The tire temperature and pressure increasewhen the vehicle is in motion. This is depend-ent on the driving speed and the load.Therefore, you should only correct tire pres-sures when the tires are cold.The tires are cold:Rif the vehicle has been parked withoutdirect sunlight on the tires for at least threehours andRif the vehicle has not been driven furtherthan 1 mile (1.6 km)

The tire temperature changes depending onthe outside temperature, the vehicle speedand the tire load. If the tire temperaturechanges by 18 ‡ (10 †), the tire pressurechanges by approximately 10 kPa (0.1 bar/1.5 psi). Take this into account when check-ing the pressure of warm tires. Only correctthe tire pressure if it is too low for the currentoperating conditions. If you check the tirepressure when the tires are warm, the result-ing value will be higher than if the tires werecold. This is normal. Do not reduce the tirepressure to the value specified for cold tires.The tire pressure would otherwise be too low.

Check 363

Wheelsandtires

Z

Observe the recommended tire pressures forcold tires:Ron the Tire and Loading Information placardon the B-pillar on the driver's sideRin the tire pressure table on the inside of thefuel filler flap

Underinflated or overinflated tires

Underinflated tires

G WARNINGTires with pressure that is too low can over-heat and burst as a consequence. In addition,they also suffer from excessive and/or irreg-ular wear, which can severely impair the brak-ing properties and the driving characteristics.There is a risk of an accident.Avoid tire pressures that are too low in all thetires, including the spare wheel.

Underinflated tires may:Roverheat, leading to tire defectsRadversely affect handlingRwear excessively and/or unevenlyRhave an adverse effect on fuel consumption

Overinflated tires

G WARNINGTires with excessively high pressure can burstbecause they are damaged more easily byroad debris, potholes etc. In addition, theyalso suffer from irregular wear, which canseverely impair the braking properties and thedriving characteristics. There is a risk of anaccident.Avoid tire pressures that are too high in all thetires, including the spare wheel.

Overinflated tires may:Rincrease the braking distanceRadversely affect handlingRwear excessively and/or unevenly

Rhave an adverse effect on ride comfortRbe more susceptible to damage

Maximum tire pressures

: Example: maximum permissible tire pres-sure

Never exceed the maximum permissible tireinflation pressure. Always observe the rec-ommended tire pressure for your vehiclewhen adjusting the tire pressure(Y page 361).

i The actual values for tires are vehicle-specific and may deviate from the values inthe illustration.

Checking the tire pressures

Important safety notesObserve the notes on tire pressure(Y page 361).Information on air pressure for the tires onyour vehicle can be found:Ron the vehicle's Tire and Loading Informa-tion placard on the B-pillarRon the tire pressure label on the fuel fillerflapRin the "Tire pressure" section

364 CheckWheelsandtires

Checking tire pressures manuallyTo determine and set the correct tire pres-sure, proceed as follows:X Remove the valve cap of the tire that is tobe checked.

X Press the tire pressure gauge securely ontothe valve.

X Read the tire pressure and compare it withthe recommended value on the Tire andLoading Information placard (Y page 361).

X If the tire pressure is too low, increase it tothe recommended value.

X If the tire pressure is too high, release air bypressing down the metal pin in the valve.Use the tip of a pen, for example. Then,check the tire pressure again using the tirepressure gauge.

X Screw the valve cap onto the valve.X Repeat these steps for the other tires.

Tire pressure monitor

General notesIf a tire pressuremonitor is installed, the vehi-cle's wheels have sensors that monitor thetire pressures in all four tires. The tire pres-sure monitor warns you if the pressure dropsin one or more of the tires. The tire pressuremonitor only functions if the correct sensorsare installed on all wheels.Information on tire pressures is displayed inthe multifunction display. After a fewminutesof driving, the current tire pressure of eachtire is shown in the ServiceServicemenu of the mul-tifunction display; see illustration (example).

For information on the message display, referto the "Checking the tire pressure electroni-cally" section (Y page 367).

Important safety notes

G WARNINGEach tire, including the spare (if provided),should be checked at least once every twoweeks when cold and inflated to the pressurerecommended by the vehicle manufactureron the Tire and Loading Information placardon the driver's door B-pillar or the tire pres-sure label on the inside of the fuel filler flap. Ifyour vehicle has tires of a different size thanthe size indicated on the Tire and LoadingInformation placard or, if available, the tirepressure label, you should determine theproper tire pressure for those tires.As an added safety feature, your vehicle hasbeen equippedwith a tire pressuremonitoringsystem (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres-sure telltale when one or more of your tiresare significantly underinflated. Accordingly,when the low tire pressure telltale lights up,you should stop and check your tires as soonas possible, and inflate them to the properpressure. Driving on a significantly underin-flated tire causes the tire to overheat and canlead to tire failure.Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiencyand tire tread life, andmay affect the vehicle'shandling and stopping ability. Please note thatthe TPMS is not a substitute for proper tiremaintenance, and it is the driver's responsi-bility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if

Check 365

Wheelsandtires

Z

underinflation has not reached the level totrigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pres-sure telltale.Your vehicle has also been equipped with aTPMS malfunction indicator to indicate whenthe system is not operating properly. TheTPMS malfunction indicator is combined withthe low tire pressure telltale. When the sys-tem detects a malfunction, the warning lampwill flash for approximately a minute and thenremain continuously illuminated. Thissequencewill be repeated every time the vehi-cle is started as long as the malfunctionexists. When the malfunction indicator is illu-minated, the systemmay not be able to detector signal low tire pressure as intended.TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety ofreasons, including the installation of incom-patible replacement or alternate tires orwheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMSfrom functioning properly. Always check theTPMS malfunction telltale after replacing oneor more tires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement or alternate Tiresand wheels allow the TPMS to continue tofunction properly.

It is the driver's responsibility to set the tirepressure to that recommended for cold tireswhich is suitable for the operating situation(Y page 361). Note that the correct tire pres-sure for the current operating situation mustfirst be taught-in to the tire pressure monitor.If there is a substantial loss of pressure, thewarning threshold for the warning message isaligned to the reference values taught-in.Restart the tire pressuremonitor after adjust-ing the pressure of the cold tires(Y page 367). The current pressures aresaved as new reference values. As a result, awarning message will appear if the tire pres-sure drops significantly.The tire pressure monitor does not warn youof an incorrectly set tire pressure. Observethe notes on the recommended tire pressure(Y page 361).

The tire pressure monitor is not able to warnyou of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if thetire is penetrated by a foreign object. In theevent of a sudden loss of pressure, bring thevehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoidabrupt steering maneuvers.The tire pressure monitor has a yellow warn-ing lamp in the instrument cluster for indicat-ing a pressure loss or malfunction. Whetherthe warning lamp flashes or lights up indi-cates whether a tire pressure is too low or thetire pressure monitor is malfunctioning:Rif the warning lamp is lit continuously, thetire pressure on one or more tires is signif-icantly too low. The tire pressure monitor isnot malfunctioning.Rif the warning lamp flashes for around aminute and then remains lit constantly, thetire pressure monitor is malfunctioning.

In addition to the warning lamp, a messageappears in the multifunction display. Furtherinformation can be found on (Y page 277).If the tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning,it may take more than ten minutes for the tirepressure warning lamp to inform you of themalfunction by flashing for approximately oneminute and then remaining lit. When the mal-function has been rectified, the tire pressurewarning lamp goes out after a few minutes ofdriving.The tire pressure values indicated by the on-board computer may differ from those meas-ured at a gas station with a pressure gauge.The tire pressures shown by the on-boardcomputer refer to those measured at sealevel. At high altitudes, the tire pressure val-ues indicated by a pressure gauge are higherthan those shown by the on-board computer.In this case, do not reduce the tire pressures.The operation of the tire pressuremonitor canbe affected by interference from radio trans-mitting equipment (e.g. radio headphones,two-way radios) that may be being operatedin or near the vehicle.

366 CheckWheelsandtires

Checking the tire pressure electroni-callyX Make sure that the SmartKey is in position2 in the ignition lock (Y page 157).

X Useò on the steering wheel to call upthe list of menus.

X Press the9or:button on the steer-ing wheel to select the ServiceService menu.

X Press thea button.X Press the9 or: button to selectTire PressureTire Pressure.

X Press thea button.The current tire pressure of each tire isshown in the multifunction display.

If the vehicle has been parked for over20 minutes, the Tire pressure will beTire pressure will bedisplayed after driving a fewdisplayed after driving a fewminutesminutes message appears.After a teach-in process, the tire pressuremonitor automatically detects new wheels ornew sensors. As long as a clear allocation ofthe tire pressure value to the individualwheels is not possible, the Tire PressureTire PressureMonitor ActiveMonitor Active display message is showninstead of the tire pressure display. The tirepressures are already being monitored.

Tire pressure monitor warning mes-sagesIf the tire pressuremonitor detects a pressureloss in one or more tires, a warning messageis shown in the multifunction display and theyellow tire pressure monitor warning lampcomes on.RIf the Please Correct Tire PressurePlease Correct Tire Pressuremessage appears in the multifunction dis-play, the tire pressure in at least one tire istoo low and must be corrected at the nextopportunity.RIf the CheckCheck TiresTiresmessage appears in themultifunction display, the tire pressure in

one or more tires has dropped significantlyand the tires must be checked.RIf the Caution Tire MalfunctionCaution Tire Malfunctionappears in the multifunction display, thetire pressure in one or more tires has drop-ped suddenly and the tires must bechecked.

Observe the instructions and safety notes inthe display messages in the "Tires" section(Y page 277).If the wheel positions on the vehicle are rota-ted, the tire pressures may be displayed forthe wrong positions for a short time. This isrectified after a few minutes of driving, andthe tire pressures are displayed for the cor-rect positions.

Restarting the tire pressure monitorWhen you restart the tire pressuremonitor, allexisting warning messages are deleted andthe warning lamps go out. The monitor usesthe currently set tire pressures as the refer-ence values formonitoring. Inmost cases, thetire pressure monitor will automaticallydetect the new reference values after youhave changed the tire pressure. However, youcan also define reference values manually asdescribed here. The tire pressure monitorthen monitors the new tire pressure values.X Set the tire pressure to the value recom-mended for the corresponding driving sit-uation on the Tire and Loading Informationplacard on the driver's sideB-pillar (Y page 361).Additional tire pressure values for differentloads can also be found on the tire pressuretable on the inside of the fuel filler flap(Y page 361).

X Make sure that the tire pressure is correcton all four wheels.

X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position2 in the ignition lock (Y page 157).

X Useò on the steering wheel to call upthe list of menus.

Check 367

Wheelsandtires

Z

X Press the9or:button on the steer-ing wheel to select the ServiceService menu.

X Press thea button.X Press the9 or: button to selectTire PressureTire Pressure.

X Press thea button.The multifunction display shows the cur-rent tire pressure for the individual tires orthe TireTire pressurepressure willwill bebe displayeddisplayedafter driving a few minutesafter driving a few minutes mes-sage.

X Press the: button.The Use Current Pressures as NewUse Current Pressures as NewReference ValuesReference Values message appears inthe multifunction display.

If you wish to confirm the restart:X Press thea button.The Tire Press. Monitor RestartedTire Press. Monitor Restartedmessage appears in the multifunction dis-play.After driving for a few minutes, the systemchecks whether the current tire pressuresare within the specified range. The new tirepressures are then accepted as referencevalues and monitored.

If you wish to cancel the restart:X Press the% button.The tire pressure values stored at the lastrestart will continue to be monitored.

Radio type approval for the tire pres-sure monitor

Country Radio type approval number

USA FCC ID: MRXMW2433AFCC ID: MRXGG4FCC ID: MRXMC34MA4

Canada IC: 2546A-MW2433AIC: 2546A-GG4IC: 2546A-MC34MA4

Tire pressure loss warning system

General notesWhile the vehicle is in motion, the tire pres-sure loss warning system monitors the settire pressure using the rotational speed of thewheels. This enables the system to detectsignificant pressure loss in a tire. If the speedof rotation of a wheel changes as a result of aloss of pressure, a corresponding warningmessage will appear in the multifunction dis-play.You can recognize the tire pressure losswarn-ing by the Run Flat Indicator ActiveRun Flat Indicator ActivePress 'OK' to RestartPress 'OK' to Restart message whichappears in the ServiceService menu of the multi-function display. Information on the messagedisplay can be found in the "Restarting the tirepressure loss warning system" section(Y page 369).

Important safety notesThe tire pressure warning system does notwarn you of an incorrectly set tire pressure.Observe the notes on the recommended tirepressure (Y page 361).The tire pressure loss warning does notreplace the need to regularly check the tirepressure. An even loss of pressure on severaltires at the same time cannot be detected bythe tire pressure loss warning system.The tire pressure monitor is not able to warnyou of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if thetire is penetrated by a foreign object. In theevent of a sudden loss of pressure, bring thevehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoidabrupt steering maneuvers.The function of the tire pressure loss warningsystem is limited or delayed if:Rsnow chains are mounted on your vehicle'stires.Rroad conditions are wintry.Ryou are driving on sand or gravel.

368 CheckWheelsandtires

Ryou adopt a very sporty driving style (cor-nering at high speeds or driving with highrates of acceleration).Ryou are driving with a heavy load (in thevehicle or on the roof).

Restarting the tire pressure loss warn-ing systemRestart the tire pressure loss warning systemif you have:Rchanged the tire pressureRchanged the wheels or tiresRmounted new wheels or tiresX Before restarting, make sure that the tirepressures are set properly on all four tiresfor the respective operating conditions.The recommended tire pressure can befound on the Tire and Loading Informationplacard on the B-pillar. Additionally, a tirepressure table is attached to the fuel fillerflap. The tire pressure loss warning systemcan only give reliable warnings if you haveset the correct tire pressure. If an incorrecttire pressure is set, these incorrect valueswill be monitored.

X Also observe the notes in the section on tirepressures (Y page 361).

X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position2 in the ignition lock (Y page 157).

X Useò on the steering wheel to call upthe list of menus.

X Press the9or:button on the steer-ing wheel to select the ServiceService menu.

X Press thea button.X Press the9 or: button to selectTire PressureTire Pressure.

X Press thea button.The Run Flat Indicator ActiveRun Flat Indicator ActivePress 'OK' to RestartPress 'OK' to Restart messageappears in the multifunction display.

If you wish to confirm the restart:X Press thea button.The Tire Pressure Now OK?Tire Pressure Now OK? messageappears in the multifunction display.

X Press the9 or: button to selectYesYes.

X Press thea button.The Run Flat Indicator RestartedRun Flat Indicator Restartedmessage appears in the multifunction dis-play.After a teach-in period, the tire pressureloss warning system will monitor the settire pressures of all four tires.

If you wish to cancel the restart:X Press the% button.orX If the Tire Pressure Now OK?Tire Pressure Now OK? messageappears, use the9 or: button toselect CancelCancel.

X Press thea button.The tire pressure values stored at the lastrestart will continue to be monitored.

Loading the vehicle

Instruction labels for tires and loads

G WARNINGOverloaded tires can overheat, causing ablowout. Overloaded tires can also impair thesteering and driving characteristics and leadto brake failure. There is a risk of accident.Observe the load rating of the tires. The loadrating must be at least half of the GAWR ofyour vehicle. Never overload the tires byexceeding the maximum load.

Two instruction labels on your vehicle showthe maximum possible load.(1) The Tire and Loading Information placard

is on the B-pillar on the driver's side. TheTire and Loading Information placardshows themaximum permissible numberof occupants and the maximum permis-

Loading the vehicle 369

Wheelsandtires

Z

sible vehicle load. It also contains detailsof the tire sizes and corresponding pres-sures for tires mounted at the factory.

(2) The vehicle identification plate is on theB-pillar on the driver's side. The vehicleidentification plate informs you of thegross vehicle weight rating. It is made upof the vehicle weight, all vehicle occu-pants, the fuel and the cargo. You canalso find information about themaximumgross axle weight rating on the front andrear axle.The maximum gross axle weight rating isthe maximum weight that can be carriedby one axle (front or rear axle). Neverexceed the maximum load or the maxi-mum gross axle weight rating for thefront or rear axle.

: B-pillar, driver's side

Maximum permissible gross vehicleweight rating

X Specification for maximum gross vehicleweight: is listed in the Tire and Loading

Information placard: "The combined weightof occupants and cargo should neverexceed XXX kilograms or XXX lbs."

The gross weight of all vehicle occupants,load and luggage must not exceed the speci-fied value.

i The specifications shown on the Tire andLoading Information placard in the illustra-tion are examples. The maximum permis-sible gross vehicle weight rating is vehicle-specific and may differ from that in theillustration. You can find the validmaximumpermissible gross vehicle weight rating foryour vehicle on the Tire and Loading Infor-mation placard.

Number of seats

Maximum number of seats: indicates themaximum number of occupants allowed totravel in the vehicle. This information can befound on the Tire and Loading Informationplacard.

i The specifications shown on the Tire andLoading Information placard in the illustra-tion are examples. The number of seats isvehicle-specific and can differ from thedetails shown. The number of seats in yourvehicle can be found on the Tire and Load-ing Information placard.

370 Loading the vehicleWheelsandtires

Determining the correct load limit

Step-by-step instructionsThe following steps have been developed asrequired of all manufacturers under Title 49,Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575pursuant to the "National Traffic and MotorVehicle Safety Act of 1966".X Step 1: Locate the statement "The com-bined weight of occupants and cargoshould never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." onyour vehicle’s Tire and Loading Informationplacard.

X Step 2: Determine the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers that will be ridingin your vehicle.

X Step 3: Subtract the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers from XXX kilo-grams or XXX lbs.

X Step 4: The resulting figure equals theavailable amount of cargo and luggage loadcapacity. For example, if the "XXX" amountequals 1400 lbs and there will be five150-lb passengers in your vehicle, theamount of available cargo and luggage loadcapacity is 650 lbs (1400 - 750 (5 x 150) =650 lbs).

X Step 5:Determine the combined weight ofluggage and cargo being loaded on thevehicle. That weight may not safely exceedthe available cargo and luggage load capa-city calculated in step 4.

Loading the vehicle 371

Wheelsandtires

Z

Example: steps 1 to 3The following table shows examples on how to calculate total and cargo load capacities withvarying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. The following examples usea load limit of 1500 lbs (680 kg). This is for illustration purposes only. Make sure you areusing the actual load limit for your vehicle stated on your vehicle's Tire and Loading Informationplacard (Y page 369).The greater the combined weight of the occupants, the lower the maximum luggage load.Step 1

Example 1 Example 2 Example 3

Combined maximumweight of occupantsand cargo (data fromthe Tire and LoadingInformation placard)

1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg)

Step 2

Example 1 Example 2 Example 3

Number of people inthe vehicle (driverand occupants)

5 3 1

Distribution of theoccupants

Front: 2Rear: 3

Front: 1Rear: 2

Front: 1

Weight of the occu-pants

Occupant 1: 150 lbs(68 kg)Occupant 2: 180 lbs(82 kg)Occupant 3: 160 lbs(73 kg)Occupant 4: 140 lbs(63 kg)Occupant 5: 120 lbs(54 kg)

Occupant 1: 200 lbs(91 kg)Occupant 2: 190 lbs(86 kg)Occupant 3: 150 lbs(68 kg)

Occupant 1: 150 lbs(68 kg)

Gross weight of alloccupants

750 lbs (340 kg) 540 lbs (245 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg)

372 Loading the vehicleWheelsandtires

Step 3

Example 1 Example 2 Example 3

Permissible load(maximum gross vehi-cleweight rating fromthe Tire and LoadingInformation placardminus the grossweight of all occu-pants)

1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò750 lbs (340 kg) =750 lbs (340 kg)

1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò540 lbs (245 kg)=960 lbs (435 kg)

1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò150 lbs (68 kg) =1350 lbs (612 kg)

Vehicle identification plateEven if you have calculated the total cargocarefully, you should still make sure that thegross vehicle weight rating and the gross axleweight rating are not exceeded. Details canbe found on the vehicle identification plate onthe B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehicle(Y page 369).Permissible Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR): the gross weight of the vehicle, allpassengers, load and trailer load/noseweight(if applicable) must not exceed the permissi-ble gross vehicle weight.Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): themaximum permissible weight that can be car-ried by one axle (front or rear axle).To ensure that your vehicle does not exceedthe maximum permissible values (gross vehi-cle weight and maximum gross axle weightrating), have your loaded vehicle (includingdriver, occupants, cargo, and full trailer load ifapplicable) weighed on a suitable vehicleweighbridge.

All about wheels and tires

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Stand-ards

Overview of Tire Quality Grading Stand-ards

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards areU.S. government specifications. Their pur-pose is to provide drivers with uniform relia-ble information on tire performance data. Tiremanufacturers have to grade tires using threeperformance factors:: treadwear grade,;traction grade and= temperature grade.These regulations do not apply to Canada.Nevertheless, all tires sold in North Americaare provided with the corresponding qualitygrading markings on the sidewall of the tire.Quality grades can be found, where applica-ble, on the tire sidewall between the treadshoulder and maximum tire width.

All about wheels and tires 373

Wheelsandtires

Z

Example:RTreadwear grade: 200RTraction grade: AARTemperature grade: AAll passenger car tires must conform to thestatutory safety requirements in addition tothese grades.

i The actual values for tires are vehicle-specific and may deviate from the values inthe illustration.

TreadwearThe treadwear grade is a comparative ratingbased on thewear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on a specifiedU.S. government course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one and one-halftimes as well on the government course as atire graded 100.The relative performance of tires dependsupon the actual conditions of their use, how-ever, and may depart significantly from thenorm due to variations in driving habits, ser-vice practices and differences in road char-acteristics and climate conditions.

Traction

G WARNINGThe traction grade assigned to this tire isbased on straight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not include acceleration, cor-nering, hydroplaning, or peak traction char-acteristics.

! Avoid wheelspin. This can lead to damageto the drive train.

The traction grades – from highest to lowest –are AA, A, B and C. Those grades representthe tire's ability to stop on wet pavement asmeasured under controlled conditions onspecified government test surfaces of asphaltand concrete. A tire marked C may have poortraction performance.

The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icyroad is always lower than on dry road surfa-ces.You should pay special attention to road con-ditions when temperatures are around freez-ing point.Mercedes-Benz recommends a minimumtread depth ofã in (4 mm) on all four wintertires. Observe the legally required minimumtire tread depth (Y page 359).Winter tires canreduce the braking distance on snow-coveredsurfaces in comparison with summer tires.The braking distance is still much further thanon surfaces that are not icy or covered withsnow. Take appropriate care when driving.Further information on winter tires (M+Stires) (Y page 360).

Temperature

G WARNINGThe temperature grade for this tire is estab-lished for a tire that is properly inflated andnot overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla-tion, or excessive loading, either separately orin combination, can cause excessive heatbuild-up and possible tire failure.

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,and C. They represent the tire's resistance tothe generation of heat and its ability to dissi-pate heat when tested under controlled con-ditions on a specified indoor laboratory testwheel. Sustained high temperature can causethe material of the tire to degenerate andreduce tire life, and excessive temperaturecan lead to sudden tire failure. The grade Ccorresponds to a level of performance whichall passenger car tires must meet under theFederal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No.109. Grades B and A represent higher levelsof performance on the laboratory test wheelthan the minimum required by law.

374 All about wheels and tiresWheelsandtires

Tire labeling

Overview

: Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standard(Y page 379)

; DOT, Tire Identification Number(Y page 378)

= Maximum tire load (Y page 377)? Maximum tire pressure (Y page 364)A ManufacturerB Tire material (Y page 378)C Tire size designation, load-bearing capa-

city and speed rating (Y page 375)D Load index (Y page 377)E Tire nameThe markings described above are on the tirein addition to the tire name (sales designa-tion) and the manufacturer's name.

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi-ate from the data in the example.

Tire size designation, load-bearingcapacity and speed rating

G WARNINGExceeding the stated tire load-bearing capa-city and the approved maximum speed couldlead to tire damage or the tire bursting. Thereis a risk of accident.

Therefore, only use tire types and sizesapproved for your vehicle model. Observe thetire load rating and speed rating required foryour vehicle.

: Tire width; Nominal aspect ratio in %= Tire code? Rim diameterA Load bearing indexB Speed ratingGeneral: depending on the manufacturer'sstandards, the size imprinted in the tire wallmay not contain any letters or may containone letter that precedes the size description.If there is no letter preceding the size descrip-tion (as shown above): these are passengervehicle tires according to European manufac-turing standards.If "P" precedes the size description: these arepassenger vehicle tires according to U.S.manufacturing standards.If "LT" precedes the size description: theseare light truck tires according to U.S. manu-facturing standards.If "T" precedes the size description: these arecompact emergency spare wheels at high tirepressure, to be used only temporarily in anemergency.Tire width: tire width: shows the nominaltire width in millimeters.Height-width ratio: aspect ratio; is thesize ratio between the tire height and tirewidth and is shown in percent. The aspect

All about wheels and tires 375

Wheelsandtires

Z

ratio is calculated by dividing the tire width bythe tire height.Tire code: tire code= specifies the tire type."R" represents radial tires; "D" representsdiagonal tires; "B" represents diagonal radialtires.Optionally, tires with a maximum speed ofover 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" inthe size description, depending on the man-ufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR 18).Rim diameter: rim diameter? is the diam-eter of the bead seat, not the diameter of therim flange. The rim diameter is specified ininches (in).Load-bearing index: load-bearing indexAis a numerical code that specifies the maxi-mum load-bearing capacity of a tire.Do not overload the tires by exceeding thespecified load limit. The maximum permissi-ble load can be found on the vehicle's Tire andLoading Information placard on the B-pillar onthe driver's side (Y page 369).Example:Load-bearing index 91 indicates a maximumload of 1,356 lb (615 kg) that the tires canbear. For further information on themaximumtire load in kilograms and lbs, see(Y page 377).For further information on the load bearingindex, see "Load index" (Y page 377).Speed rating: speed ratingB specifies theapproved maximum speed of the tire.

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi-ate from the data in the example.

Regardless of the speed rating, alwaysobserve the speed limits. Drive carefully andadapt your driving style to the traffic condi-tions.Summer tires

Index Speed rating

Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h)

R up to 106 mph (170 km/h)

Index Speed rating

S up to 112 mph (180 km/h)

T up to 118 mph (190 km/h)

H up to 130 mph (210 km/h)

V up to 149 mph (240 km/h)

W up to 168 mph (270 km/h)

Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)

ZR...Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)

ZR...(..Y) over 186 mph (300 km/h)

ZR over 149 mph (240 km/h)

ROptionally, tires with a maximum speed ofover 149mph (240 km/h)may have "ZR" inthe size description, depending on themanufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR18).The service specification is made up ofload-bearing indexA and speed ratingB.RIf the size description of your tire includes"ZR" and there are no service specifica-tions, ask the tire manufacturer in order tofind out the maximum speed.If a service specification is available, themaximum speed is limited according to thespeed rating in the service specification.Example: 245/40 ZR18 97 Y. In this exam-ple, "97 Y" is the service specification. Theletter "Y" represents the speed rating. Themaximum speed of the tire is limited to186 mph (300 km/h).RThe size description for all tires with maxi-mum speeds of over 186 mph (300 km/h)must include "ZR", and the service specifi-cationmust be given in parentheses. Exam-ple: 275/40 ZR 18 (99 Y). Speed rating"(Y)" indicates that the maximum speed ofthe tire is over 186 mph (300 km/h). Askthe tire manufacturer about the maximumspeed.

376 All about wheels and tiresWheelsandtires

All-weather tires and winter tires

Index Speed rating

Q M+S1 up to 100 mph (160 km/h)

T M+S1 up to 118 mph (190 km/h)

H M+S1 up to 130 mph (210 km/h)

V M+S1 up to 149 mph (240 km/h)

i Not all tires with theM+Smarking providethe driving characteristics of winter tires. Inaddition to the M+S marking, winter tiresalso have thei snowflake symbol onthe tire wall. Tires with this marking fulfillthe requirements of the Rubber Manufac-turers Association (RMA) and the RubberAssociation of Canada (RAC) regarding thetire traction on snow. They have been espe-cially developed for driving on snow.

An electronic speed limiter prevents yourvehicle from exceeding a speed of 130mph(210km/h).The speed rating of tires mounted at the fac-tory may be higher than the maximum speedthat the electronic speed limiter permits.Make sure that your tires have the requiredspeed rating, e.g. when buying new tires. Therequired speed rating for your vehicle can befound in the "Tires" section (Y page 386).Further information about reading tire datacan be obtained from any qualified specialistworkshop.

Load index

In addition to the load-bearing index, loadindex: may also be imprinted on the side-wall of the tire. You will find this after the let-ter that identifies the speed rating(Y page 375).RIf no specification is given: no text (as in theexample above), represents a standardload (SL) tireRXL or Extra Load: represents a reinforcedtireRLight Load: represents a light load tireRC, D, E: represents a load range thatdepends on the maximum load that the tirecan carry at a certain pressure

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi-ate from the data in the example.

Maximum load rating

Maximum tire load: is the maximum per-missible weight for which the tire is approved.

1 Or M+Si for winter tires.

All about wheels and tires 377

Wheelsandtires

Z

Do not overload the tires by exceeding thespecified load limit. The maximum permissi-ble load can be found on the vehicle's Tire andLoading Information placard on the B-pillar onthe driver's side (Y page 369).

i The actual values for tires are vehicle-specific and may deviate from the values inthe illustration.

DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)US tire regulations stipulate that every tiremanufacturer or retreader must imprint a TINin or on the sidewall of each tire produced.

The TIN is a unique identification number. TheTIN enables the tiremanufacturers or retread-ers to inform purchasers of recalls and othersafety-relevant matters. It makes it possiblefor the purchaser to easily identify the affec-ted tires.The TIN is made up of manufacturer identifi-cation code;, tire size=, tire type code?and manufacturing dateA.DOT (Department of Transportation): tiresymbol: marks that the tire complies withthe requirements of the U.S. Department ofTransportation.Manufacturer identification code: manu-facturer identification code; providesdetails on the tire manufacturer. New tireshave a code with two symbols. Retreadedtires have a code with four symbols.For further information about retreaded tires,see (Y page 358).Tire size: identifier= describes the tire size.

Tire type code: tire type code? can be usedby the manufacturer as a code to describespecific characteristics of the tire.Date of manufacture: date of manufactureA provides information about the age of atire. The first and second positions representthe week of manufacture, starting with "01"for the first calendar week. Positions threeand four represent the year of manufacture.For example, a tire that is marked with"3208", was manufactured in week 32 in2008.

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi-ate from the data in the example.

Tire characteristics

This information describes the type of tirecord and the number of layers in sidewall:and under tire tread;.

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi-ate from the data in the example.

Definition of terms for tires and loading

Tire ply composition and material usedDescribes the number of plies or the numberof layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tiretread and sidewall. These are made of steel,nylon, polyester and other materials.

BarMetric unit for tire pressure. 14.5038 poundsper square inch (psi) and 100 kilopascals(kPa) are the equivalent of 1 bar.

378 All about wheels and tiresWheelsandtires

DOT (Department of Transportation)DOT-marked tires fulfill the requirements ofthe U S Department of Transportation.

Normal occupant weightThe number of occupants for which the vehi-cle is designed multiplied by 68 kilograms(150 lbs).

Uniform Tire Quality Grading StandardsA uniform standard to grade the quality oftireswith regards to tread quality, tire tractionand temperature characteristics. The qualitygrading assessment is made by the manufac-turer following specifications from the U.S.government. The ratings are molded into thesidewall of the tire.

Recommended tire pressuresThe recommended tire pressure applies tothe tires mounted at the factory.The Tire and Loading Information placard con-tains the recommended tire pressures forcold tires on a fully loaded vehicle and for themaximum permissible vehicle speed.The tire pressure table contains the recom-mended pressures for cold tires for variousoperating conditions, i.e. differing load andspeed conditions.

Increased vehicle weight due to optionalequipmentThe combined weight of all standard andoptional equipment available for the vehicle,regardless of whether it is actually installedon the vehicle or not.

RimThis is the part of the wheel on which the tireis mounted.

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)The GAWR is the maximum gross axle weightrating. The actual load on an axle must neverexceed the gross axle weight rating. Thegross axle weight rating can be found on thevehicle identification plate on the B-pillar onthe driver's side.

Speed ratingThe speed rating is part of the tire identifica-tion. It specifies the speed range forwhich thetire is approved.

GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)The gross vehicle weight includes the weightof the vehicle including fuel, tools, the sparewheel, accessories installed, occupants, lug-gage and the drawbar noseweight, if applica-ble. The gross vehicleweightmust not exceedthe gross vehicle weight rating GVWR asspecified on the vehicle identification plate onthe B-pillar on the driver's side.

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)The GVWR is the maximum permissible grossweight of a fully loaded vehicle (the weight ofthe vehicle including all accessories, occu-pants, fuel, luggage and the drawbar nose-weight, if applicable). The gross vehicleweight rating is specified on the vehicle iden-tification plate on the B-pillar on the driver'sside.

Maximum loaded vehicle weightThe maximum weight is the sum of:Rthe curb weight of the vehicleRthe weight of the accessoriesRthe load limitRthe weight of the factory installed optionalequipment

Kilopascal (kPa)Metric unit for tire pressure. 6.9 kPa corre-sponds to 1 psi. Another unit for tire pressureis bar. 100 kilopascals (kPa) are the equiva-lent of 1 bar.

Load indexIn addition to the load-bearing index, the loadindexmay also be imprinted on the sidewall ofthe tire. This specifies the load-bearing capa-city more precisely.

All about wheels and tires 379

Wheelsandtires

Z

Curb weightThe weight of a vehicle with standard equip-ment including themaximum capacity of fuel,oil and coolant. It also includes the air-condi-tioning system and optional equipment ifthese are installed in the vehicle, but does notinclude passengers or luggage.

Maximum load ratingThe maximum load rating is the maximumpermissible weight in kilograms or lbs forwhich a tire is approved.

Maximum permissible tire pressureMaximum permissible tire pressure for onetire.

Maximum load on one tireMaximum load on one tire. This is calculatedby dividing themaximum axle load of one axleby two.

PSI (pounds per square inch)A standard unit of measure for tire pressure.

Aspect ratioRelationship between tire height and tirewidth in percent.

Tire pressureThis is pressure inside the tire applying anoutward force to each square inch of the tire'ssurface. The tire pressure is specified inpounds per square inch (psi), in kilopascal(kPa) or in bar. The tire pressure should onlybe corrected when the tires are cold.

Cold tire pressureThe tires are cold:Rif the vehicle has been parked withoutdirect sunlight on the tires for at least threehours andRif the vehicle has not been driven furtherthan 1 mile (1.6 km)

TreadThe part of the tire that comes into contactwith the road.

BeadThe tire bead ensures that the tire sitssecurely on the wheel. There are several steelwires in the bead to prevent the tire fromcoming loose from the wheel rim.

SidewallThe part of the tire between the tread and thebead.

Weight of optional extrasThe combined weight of those optional extrasthat weigh more than the replaced standardparts and more than 5 lbs (2.3 kg). Theseoptional extras, such as high-performancebrakes, level control, a roof rack or a high-performance battery, are not included in thecurb weight and the weight of the accesso-ries.

TIN (Tire Identification Number)This is a unique identifier which can be usedby a tire manufacturer to identify tires, forexample for a product recall, and thus identifythe purchasers. The TIN is made up of themanufacturer's identity code, tire size, tiretype code and the manufacturing date.

Load bearing indexThe load bearing index (also load index) is acode that contains themaximum load bearingcapacity of a tire.

TractionTraction is the result of friction between thetires and the road surface.

Treadwear indicatorsNarrow bars (tread wear bars) that are dis-tributed over the tire tread. If the tire tread islevel with the bars, the wear limit ofá in(1.6 mm) has been reached.

380 All about wheels and tiresWheelsandtires

Occupant distributionThe distribution of occupants in a vehicle attheir designated seating positions.

Total load limitNominal load and luggage load plus 68 kg(150 lbs) multiplied by the number of seats inthe vehicle.

Changing a wheel

Flat tireThe "Breakdown assistance" section(Y page 341) contains information and noteson how to deal with a flat tire. Information ondriving with MOExtended tires in the event ofa flat tire can be found under "MOExtendedtires (tires with run-flat characteristics"(Y page 341).

Rotating the wheels

G WARNINGInterchanging the front and rear wheels mayseverely impair the driving characteristics ifthe wheels or tires have different dimensions.The wheel brakes or suspension componentsmay also be damaged. There is a risk of acci-dent.Rotate front and rearwheels only if thewheelsand tires are of the same dimensions.

! On vehicles equipped with a tire pressuremonitor, electronic components are loca-ted in the wheel.Tire-mounting tools should not be usednear the valve. This could damage the elec-tronic components.Only have tires changed at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Always observe the instructions and safetynotes in the "Mounting a wheel" section(Y page 381).The wear patterns on the front and rear tiresdiffer, depending on the operating conditions.

Rotate the wheels before a clear wear patternhas formed on the tires. Front tires typicallywear more on the shoulders and the rear tiresin the center.If your vehicle's tire configuration allows, youcan rotate the wheels according to the inter-vals in the tire manufacturer's warranty bookin your vehicle documents. If no warrantybook is available, the tires should be rotatedevery 3,000 to 6,000 miles (5,000 to10,000 km), or earlier if tire wear requires.Ensure the direction of rotation ismaintained.Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel andthe brake disc thoroughly every time a wheelis rotated. Check the tire pressure and, if nec-essary, restart the tire pressure loss warningsystem (Y page 369) or the tire pressuremonitor (Y page 367).

Direction of rotationTires with a specified direction of rotationhave additional benefits, e.g. if there is a riskof hydroplaning. You will only gain these ben-efits if the correct direction of rotation ismaintained.An arrow on the sidewall of the tire indicatesits correct direction of rotation.

Storing wheelsStorewheels that are not being used in a cool,dry and preferably dark place. Protect thetires from oil, grease, gasoline and diesel.

Mounting a wheel

Preparing the vehicleX Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery andlevel ground.

X Apply the electric parking brake manually.X Bring the front wheels into the straight-ahead position.

X Shift the transmission to position P.

Changing a wheel 381

Wheelsandtires

Z

X Make sure that in vehicles with AIRMATIC,the vehicle level is set to "Normal"(Y page 197).

X Switch off the engine.X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: removethe SmartKey from the ignition lock.

X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-func-tion or KEYLESS-GO: open the driver'sdoor.The on-board electronics now have status0. This is the same as the SmartKey havingbeen removed.

X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-func-tion or KEYLESS-GO: remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock(Y page 157).

X If included in the vehicle equipment,remove the tire-change tool kit from thevehicle.

X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rollingaway.

Securing the vehicle to prevent it fromrolling away

If your vehicle is equippedwith awheel chock,it can be found in the tire-change tool kit(Y page 340).The folding wheel chock is an additionalsafety measure to prevent the vehicle fromrolling away, for example when changing awheel.

X Fold both plates upwards:.X Fold out lower plate;.X Guide the lugs on the lower plate fully intothe openings in base plate=.

Securing the vehicle on level groundX On level ground: place chocks or othersuitable items under the front and rear ofthe wheel that is diagonally opposite thewheel you wish to change.

Securing the vehicle on slight downhill gradientsX On light downhill gradients: placechocks or other suitable items in front ofthe wheels of the front and rear axle.

Raising the vehicle

G WARNINGIf you do not position the jack correctly at theappropriate jacking point of the vehicle, thejack could tip over with the vehicle raised.There is a risk of injury.Only position the jack at the appropriate jack-ing point of the vehicle. The base of the jack

382 Changing a wheelWheelsandtires

must be positioned vertically, directly underthe jacking point of the vehicle.

! The jack is designed exclusively for jack-ing up the vehicle at the jacking points.Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged.

Observe the following when raising thevehicle:RTo raise the vehicle, only use the vehicle-specific jack that has been tested andapproved by Mercedes-Benz. If used incor-rectly, the jack could tip over with the vehi-cle raised.RThe jack is designed only to raise and holdthe vehicle for a short time while a wheelis being changed. It is not suited for per-forming maintenance work under the vehi-cle.RAvoid changing the wheel on uphill anddownhill slopes.RBefore raising the vehicle, secure it fromrolling away by applying the parking brakeand inserting wheel chocks. Do not disen-gage the parking brake while the vehicle israised.RThe jack must be placed on a firm, flat andnon-slip surface. On a loose surface, alarge, flat, load-bearing underlay must beused. On a slippery surface, a non-slipunderlay must be used, e.g. rubber mats.RDo not use wooden blocks or similarobjects as a jack underlay. Otherwise, thejack will not be able to achieve its load-bearing capacity due to the restrictedheight.RMake sure that the distance between theunderside of the tires and the ground doesnot exceed 1.2 in (3 cm).RNever place your hands and feet under theraised vehicle.RDo not lie under the vehicle.RDo not start the engine when the vehicle israised.

RDo not open or close a door or the trunk lidwhen the vehicle is raised.RMake sure that no persons are present inthe vehicle when the vehicle is raised.

Vehicles with alloy wheels and hub caps:the wheel bolts are covered by a hub cap.Before you can unscrew the wheel bolts, youmust remove the hub cap. Two different var-iants can be installed.

Alloy wheel with plastic hub capVehicles with plastic hub cap:X To remove: turn the center cover of hubcap: counter-clockwise and remove.

X To install: before installing, ensure thathub cap: is in the open position. To do so,turn the center cover counter-clockwise.

X Put hub cap: in position and turn thecenter cover clockwise until you feel andhear hub cap: engage.

X Make sure that hub cap: is installedsecurely.

Alloy wheel with aluminum hub capVehicles with aluminum hub cap:

Changing a wheel 383

Wheelsandtires

Z

X To remove: take socket; and lug wrench= from the vehicle tool kit (Y page 340).

X Position socket; on hub cap:.X Attach lug wrench= to socket; andloosen hub cap: counter-clockwise.

X Remove hub cap:.X To install: before installing, check hubcap: and the wheel area for soiling andclean if necessary.

X Put hub cap: in position and turn until it isin the right position.

X Position socket; on hub cap:.X Attach lug wrench= to socket; andtighten hub cap:.The tightening torque must be18 lb-ft (25 Nm).

i Note that the hub cap should be tight-ened to the specified torque of 18 lb-ft(25 Nm). Mercedes-Benz recommendsthat you have the hub cap installed at aqualified specialist workshop.

X Using a lug wrench=, loosen the bolts onthe wheel you wish to change by about onefull turn. Do not unscrew the bolts com-pletely.

The jacking points are located just behind thefront wheel housings and just in front of therear wheel housings (arrows).Vehicles with AMG equipment: the vehiclehas covers installed to protect the vehiclebody next to the jacking points on the outersills.

X Vehicles with AMG equipment: foldcover? upwards.

X Position jackB at jacking pointA.

384 Changing a wheelWheelsandtires

X Make sure the foot of the jack is directlybeneath the jacking point.

X Turn crankC clockwise until jackB sitscompletely on jacking pointA and thebase of the jack lies evenly on the ground.

X Turn crankC until the tire is raised a max-imum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from the ground.

Removing a wheel

! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on adirty surface. The bolt and wheel hubthreads could otherwise be damaged whenyou screw them in.

When mounting/removing wheels, and for aslong as the wheels are removed, avoid apply-ing any external force on the brake disks. Thiscould impair the level of comfort when brak-ing.

X Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt com-pletely.

X Screw alignment bolt: into the threadinstead of the wheel bolt.

X Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts fully.X Remove the wheel.

Mounting a new wheel

G WARNINGOiled or greased wheel bolts or damagedwheel bolts/hub threads can cause the wheelbolts to come loose. As a result, you couldlose a wheel while driving. There is a risk ofaccident.Never oil or greasewheel bolts. In the event ofdamage to the threads, contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop immediately. Have thedamaged wheel bolts or hub threadsreplaced/renewed. Do not continue driving.

G WARNINGIf you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nutswhen the vehicle is raised, the jack could tipover. There is a risk of injury.Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nutswhen the vehicle is on the ground.

Always pay attention to the instructions andsafety notes in the "Changing a wheel" sec-tion (Y page 381).Only use wheel bolts that have been designedfor the wheel and the vehicle. For safety rea-sons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that youonly use wheel bolts which have beenapproved forMercedes-Benz vehicles and therespective wheel.

! To prevent damage to the paintwork, holdthe wheel securely against the wheel hubwhile screwing in the first wheel bolt.

Changing a wheel 385

Wheelsandtires

Z

X Clean the wheel and wheel hub contactsurfaces.

X Slide the wheel to be mounted onto thealignment bolt and push it on.

X Tighten the wheel bolts until they are fin-ger-tight.

X Unscrew the alignment bolt.X Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is finger-tight.

Lowering the vehicle

G WARNINGThe wheels could work loose if the wheel nutsand bolts are not tightened to the specifiedtightening torque. There is a risk of accident.Have the tightening torque immediatelychecked at a qualified specialist workshopafter a wheel is changed.

X Turn the crank of the jack counter-clock-wise until the vehicle is once again standingfirmly on the ground.

X Place the jack to one side.

X Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a cross-wise pattern in the sequence indicated (:toA). The specified tightening torque is96 lb-ft (130 Nm).

X Turn the jack back to its initial position.X Stow the jack and the rest of the vehicletools in the trunk again.

X VehicleswithAMGequipment: insert thecover into the outer sill.

X Check the tire pressure of the newly moun-ted wheel and adjust it if necessary.Observe the recommended tire pressure(Y page 361).

When you are driving with the collapsiblespare wheel mounted, the tire pressure losswarning system or the tire pressure monitorcannot function reliably. Only restart the tirepressure loss warning system/the tire pres-sure monitor when the damaged wheel hasbeen replaced with a new wheel.Vehicles with a tire pressure control sys-tem: all installed wheels must be equippedwith functioning sensors.When you are driving with the emergencyspare wheel mounted, the tire pressure losswarning system cannot function reliably. Onlyrestart the tire pressure loss warning systemwhen the defective wheel has been replacedwith a new wheel.

Wheel and tire combinations

General notes! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz rec-ommends that you only use tires andwheels which have been approved byMercedes-Benz specifically for your vehi-cle.

386 Wheel and tire combinationsWheelsandtires

These tires have been specially adapted foruse with the control systems, such as ABSor ESP®, and are marked as follows:RMO = Mercedes-Benz OriginalRMOE=Mercedes-BenzOriginal Extended(tires featuring run-flat characteristics)RMO1=Mercedes-Benz Original (only cer-tain AMG tires)

Mercedes-Benz Original Extended tiresmay only be used on wheels that have beenspecifically approved by Mercedes-Benz.Only use tires, wheels or accessories tes-ted and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Cer-tain characteristics, e.g. handling, vehiclenoise emissions or fuel consumption, mayotherwise be adversely affected. In addi-tion, when driving with a load, tire dimen-sion variations could cause the tires tocome into contact with the bodywork andaxle components. This could result in dam-age to the tires or the vehicle.Mercedes-Benz accepts no liability fordamage resulting from the use of tires,wheels or accessories other than those tes-ted and approved.Information on tires, wheels and approvedcombinations can be obtained from anyqualified specialist workshop.

Overview of abbreviations used in the follow-ing tire tables:RBA: both axlesRFA: front axleRRA: rear axleThe recommended pressures for variousoperating conditions can be found:Ron the Tire and Loading Information placardwith the recommended tire pressures onthe B-pillar on the driver's sideRin the tire pressure table on the inside of thefuel filler flap

Observe the notes on recommended tirepressures under various operating conditions(Y page 361).

Check tire pressures regularly, and only whenthe tires are cold. Comply with the mainte-nance recommendations of the tire manufac-turer in the vehicle document wallet.Notes on the vehicle equipment – alwaysequip the vehicle with:Rtires of the same size on a given axle (left/right)Rthe same type of tires at a given time (sum-mer tires, winter tires, MOExtended tires)Exception: it is permissible to install a dif-ferent type or make in the event of a flattire. Observe the "MOExtended tires (tireswith run-flat characteristics" section(Y page 341).

Vehicles equippedwithMOExtended tires arenot equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory.It is therefore recommended that you addi-tionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit ifyou mount tires that do not feature run-flatproperties, e.g. winter tires. A TIREFIT kit maybe obtained from a qualified specialist work-shop.

i Not all wheel and tire combinations areavailable at the factory for all countries.

i On the following pages, you can find infor-mation on approved wheel rims and tiresizes for equipping your vehicle with wintertires. Winter tires are not available at thefactory as standard equipment or optionalextras.If you would like to equip your vehicle withapproved winter tires, you may also, in cer-tain circumstances, require rims of theappropriate size. The size of the approvedwinter tires may deviate from that of thestandard tires. This is dependent on themodel and the equipment installed at thefactory.The tires and wheel rims, as well as furtherinformation, can be obtained at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Wheel and tire combinations 387

Wheelsandtires

Z

Tires

C 300

Summer tiresR 17

Tires Wheels

BA: 225/50 R17 94 W BA: 7.0 J x 17 H2Wheel offset: 1.91 in (48.5 mm)

R 18

Tires Wheels

FA: 225/45 R18 95 Y XL2

RA: 245/40 R18 97 Y XL2FA: 7.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.73 in (44 mm)RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 2.20 in (56 mm)

FA: 225/45 R18 95 Y XL2

RA: 245/40 R18 97 Y XL2, 3FA: 7.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.73 in (44 mm)RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.93 in (49 mm)

R 19

Tires Wheels

FA: 225/40 R19 93 Y XL2

RA: 245/35 R19 93 Y XL2, 3FA: 7.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.73 in (44 mm)RA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 2.22 in (56.5 mm)

FA: 225/40 R19 93 Y XL2

RA: 255/35 R19 96 Y XL2, 3FA: 7.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.73 in (44 mm)RA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 2.05 in (52 mm)

2 Available as MOExtended.3 Additional measures necessary (additional wheel-arch extension on rear wheel arch).

388 Wheel and tire combinationsWheelsandtires

All-weather tiresR 17

Tires Wheels

BA: 225/50 R17 94 H2 BA: 7.0 J x 17 H2Wheel offset: 1.91 in (48.5 mm)

R 18

Tires Wheels

FA: 225/45 R18 95 H XL2

RA: 245/40 R18 97 H XL2FA: 7.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.73 in (44 mm)RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 2.20 in (56 mm)

FA: 225/45 R18 95 Y XL2

RA: 245/40 R18 97 Y XL2FA: 7.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.73 in (44 mm)RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.93 in (49 mm)

Winter tiresR 17

Tires Wheels

BA: 225/50 R17 94 H M+Si2 BA: 7.0 J x 17 H2Wheel offset: 1.91 in (48.5 mm)

R 18

Tires Wheels

BA: 225/45 R18 95 H XL M+Si2 BA: 7.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.73 in (44 mm)

C 300 4MATIC

Summer tiresR 17

Tires Wheels

BA: 225/50 R17 94 W BA: 7.0 J x 17 H2Wheel offset: 1.91 in (48.5 mm)

2 Available as MOExtended.

Wheel and tire combinations 389

Wheelsandtires

Z

R 18

Tires Wheels

FA: 225/45 R18 95 Y XL2

RA: 245/40 R18 97 Y XL2FA: 7.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.73 in (44 mm)RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 2.20 in (56 mm)

FA: 225/45 R18 95 Y XL2

RA: 245/40 R18 97 Y XL2, 3FA: 7.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.73 in (44 mm)RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.93 in (49 mm)

R 19

Tires Wheels

FA: 225/40 R19 93 Y XL2

RA: 245/35 R19 93 Y XL2, 3FA: 7.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.73 in (44 mm)RA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 2.22 in (56.5 mm)

FA: 225/40 R19 93 Y XL2

RA: 255/35 R19 96 Y XL2, 3FA: 7.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.73 in (44 mm)RA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 2.05 in (52 mm)

All-weather tiresR 17

Tires Wheels

BA: 225/50 R17 94 H2 BA: 7.0 J x 17 H2Wheel offset: 1.91 in (48.5 mm)

2 Available as MOExtended.3 Additional measures necessary (additional wheel-arch extension on rear wheel arch).

390 Wheel and tire combinationsWheelsandtires

R 18

Tires Wheels

FA: 225/45 R18 95 H XL2

RA: 245/40 R18 97 H XL2FA: 7.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.73 in (44 mm)RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 2.20 in (56 mm)

FA: 225/45 R18 95 Y XL2

RA: 245/40 R18 97 Y XL2FA: 7.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.73 in (44 mm)RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.93 in (49 mm)

Winter tiresR 17

Tires Wheels

BA: 225/50 R17 94 H M+Si2 BA: 7.0 J x 17 H2Wheel offset: 1.91 in (48.5 mm)

R 18

Tires Wheels

BA: 225/45 R18 95 H XL M+Si2 BA: 7.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.73 in (44 mm)

C 400 4MATIC

Summer tiresR 17

Tires Wheels

BA: 225/50 R17 94 W BA: 7.0 J x 17 H2Wheel offset: 1.91 in (48.5 mm)

2 Available as MOExtended.

Wheel and tire combinations 391

Wheelsandtires

Z

R 18

Tires Wheels

FA: 225/45 R18 95 Y XL2

RA: 245/40 R18 97 Y XL2FA: 7.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.73 in (44 mm)RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 2.20 in (56 mm)

FA: 225/45 R18 95 Y XL2

RA: 245/40 R18 97 Y XL2, 3FA: 7.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.73 in (44 mm)RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.93 in (49 mm)

R 19

Tires Wheels

FA: 225/40 R19 93 Y XL2

RA: 245/35 R19 93 Y XL2, 3FA: 7.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.73 in (44 mm)RA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 2.22 in (56.5 mm)

FA: 225/40 R19 93 Y XL2

RA: 255/35 R19 96 Y XL2, 3FA: 7.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.73 in (44 mm)RA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 2.05 in (52 mm)

All-weather tiresR 17

Tires Wheels

BA: 225/50 R17 94 H2 BA: 7.0 J x 17 H2Wheel offset: 1.91 in (48.5 mm)

2 Available as MOExtended.3 Additional measures necessary (additional wheel-arch extension on rear wheel arch).

392 Wheel and tire combinationsWheelsandtires

R 18

Tires Wheels

FA: 225/45 R18 95 H XL2

RA: 245/40 R18 97 H XL2FA: 7.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.73 in (44 mm)RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 2.20 in (56 mm)

FA: 225/45 R18 95 Y XL2

RA: 245/40 R18 97 Y XL2FA: 7.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.73 in (44 mm)RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.93 in (49 mm)

Winter tiresR 17

Tires Wheels

BA: 225/50 R17 94 H M+Si2 BA: 7.0 J x 17 H2Wheel offset: 1.91 in (48.5 mm)

R 18

Tires Wheels

BA: 225/45 R18 95 H XL M+Si2 BA: 7.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.73 in (44 mm)

2 Available as MOExtended.

Wheel and tire combinations 393

Wheelsandtires

Z

394

Useful information ............................ 396Information regarding technicaldata .................................................... 396Identification plates ......................... 396Service products and filling capaci-ties ..................................................... 397Vehicle data ...................................... 403

395

Technicaldata

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optional equip-ment of your vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's Manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions.

i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops (Y page 26).

Information regarding technical data

i The data stated here specifically refers toa vehicle with standard equipment. Consultan authorized Mercedes-Benz Center forthe data for all vehicle variants and trimlevels.

Identification plates

Vehicle identification plate with vehi-cle identification number (VIN)

X Open the driver's door.You will see vehicle identification plate:.

Example: vehicle identification plate (USA only); VIN= Vehicle model

Example: vehicle identification plate (Canada only); VIN= Paint code

i The data shown on the vehicle identifica-tion plate is used only as an example. Thisdata is different for every vehicle and candeviate from the data shown here. You canfind the data applicable to your vehicle onthe vehicle identification plate.

396 Identification platesTechnicaldata

VIN

X Slide the right-hand front seat to its rear-most position.

X Fold floor covering; upwards.The VIN is visible:.

The VIN can also be found on the vehicleidentification plate (Y page 396).The VIN can also be found at the lower edge ofthe windshield (Y page 397).

Engine number

: Emission control information plate,including the certification of both federaland Californian emissions standards

; Engine number (stamped into the crank-case)

= VIN (on the lower edge of the windshield)

Service products and filling capaci-ties

Important safety notes

G WARNINGService products may be poisonous and haz-ardous to health. There is a risk of injury.Comply with instructions on the use, storageand disposal of service products on the labelsof the respective original containers. Alwaysstore service products sealed in their originalcontainers. Always keep service products outof the reach of children.

H Environmental noteDispose of service products in an environ-mentally responsible manner.

Service products include the following:RFuelsRLubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil)RCoolantRBrake fluidRWindshield washer fluidRClimate control system refrigerantComponents and service products must bematched. Only use products recommendedby Mercedes-Benz. Damage which is causedby the use of products which have not beenrecommended is not covered by theMercedes-Benz warranty or goodwill ges-tures. They are listed in this Mercedes-BenzOperator'sManual in the appropriate section.Information on tested and approved productscan be obtained at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or on the Internet athttp://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.You can recognize service products approvedby Mercedes-Benz by the following inscrip-tion on the containers:RMB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51)RMB Approval (e.g. MB Approval 229.51)Other designations or recommendations indi-cate a level of quality or a specification in

Service products and filling capacities 397

Technicaldata

Z

accordance with an MB Sheet Number (e.g.MB 229.5). They have not necessarily beenapproved by Mercedes-Benz.Other identifications, for example:R0 W-30R5 W-30R5 W-40

Fuel

Important safety notes

G WARNINGFuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuelincorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explo-sion.You must avoid fire, open flames, creatingsparks and smoking. Switch off the engineand, if applicable, the auxiliary heating beforerefueling.

G WARNINGFuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.There is a risk of injury.You must make sure that fuel does not comeinto contact with your skin, eyes or clothingand that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuelvapors. Keep fuel away from children.If you or others come into contact with fuel,observe the following:RWash away fuel from skin immediatelyusing soap and water.RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes,immediately rinse them thoroughly withclean water. Seek medical assistance with-out delay.RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assis-tance without delay. Do not induce vomit-ing.RImmediately change out of clothing whichhas come into contact with fuel.

Tank capacity

Model Total capacity

All models 17.4 US gal(66.0 l)

Model Of whichreserve

All models Approx.1.8 US gal(7.0 l)

Gasoline

Fuel grade! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with agasoline engine. Do not switch on the igni-tion if you accidentally refuel with thewrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enterthe fuel system. Even small amounts of thewrong fuel could result in damage to thefuel system and the engine. Notify a quali-fied specialist workshop and have the fueltank and fuel lines drained completely.

! Only refuel using unleaded premiumgrade gasoline with at least 91 AKI/95 RON.

! Only use the fuel recommended. Operat-ing the vehicle with other fuels can lead toengine failure.

! Do not use the following:RE85 (gasoline with 85% ethanol)RE100 (100% ethanol)RM15 (gasoline with 15% methanol)RM30 (gasoline with 30% methanol)RM85 (gasoline with 85% methanol)RM100 (100% methanol)RGasoline with metalliferous additivesRDieselDo not mix such fuels with the fuel recom-mended for your vehicle. Do not use addi-tives. Otherwise, engine damage may

398 Service products and filling capacitiesTechnicaldata

occur. This does not include cleaning addi-tives for the removal and prevention of res-idue build-up. Gasoline may only be mixedwith cleaning additives recommended byMercedes-Benz; see "Additives". You canobtain further information from any author-ized Mercedes-Benz Center.

! To ensure the longevity and full perform-ance of the engine, only premium-gradeunleaded gasoline must be used.If standard unleaded gasoline is unavaila-ble and you have to refuel with unleadedgasoline of a lower grade, observe the fol-lowing precautions:ROnly fill the fuel tank to half full with reg-ular unleaded gasoline and fill the restwith premium-grade unleaded gasolineas soon as possible.RDo not drive at the maximum speed.RAvoid sudden acceleration and enginespeeds over 3,000 rpm.

Youwill usually find information about the fuelgrade on the pump. If you cannot find thelabel on the pump, ask the staff for assis-tance.

i For further information, consult a quali-fied specialist workshop or visithttp://www.mbusa.com (USA only).

i E10 fuel contains up to 10% bioethanol.Your vehicle is E10-compatible. You canrefuel your vehicle using E10 fuel.

C 300 4MATIC: as a temporary measure, ifthe recommended fuel is not available, youmay also use regular unleaded gasoline withan octane rating of 88 AKI/93 RON.All othermodels: as a temporary measure, ifthe recommended fuel is not available, youmay also use regular unleaded gasoline withan octane rating of 87 AKI/91 RON. This mayreduce engine performance and increase fuelconsumption. Avoid driving at full throttle andsudden acceleration. Never refuel using fuelwith a lower AKI.Information on refueling (Y page 172).

Additives! Operating the engine with fuel additivesadded later can lead to engine failure. Donot mix fuel additives with fuel. This doesnot include additives for the removal andprevention of residue buildup. gasolinemust only be mixed with additives recom-mended by Mercedes-Benz. Comply withthe instructions for use on the productlabel. More information about recommen-ded additives can be obtained from anyauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you usebranded fuels that have additives.The quality of the fuel available in some coun-tries may not be sufficient. Residue couldbuild up in the injection system as a result. Insuch cases, and in consultation with anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center, the gaso-line may be mixed with the cleaning additiverecommended by Mercedes-Benz. You mustobserve the notes and mixing ratios specifiedon the container.

Fuel consumption information

H Environmental noteCO2 (carbon dioxide) is the gas which scien-tists believe to be principally responsible forglobal warming (the greenhouse effect). Yourvehicle's CO2 emissions are directly related tofuel consumption and therefore depend on:Refficient use of the fuel by the engineRdriving styleRother non-technical factors, such as envi-ronmental influences, road conditions ortraffic flow

You can minimize your vehicle's CO2 emis-sions by driving carefully and having it serv-iced regularly.

The vehiclewill usemore fuel than usual in thefollowing situations:Rat very low outside temperaturesRin city traffic

Service products and filling capacities 399

Technicaldata

Z

Ron short journeysRin mountainous terrain

Engine oil

General notes

! Never use engine oil or an oil filter of aspecification other than is necessary to ful-fill the prescribed service intervals. Do notchange the engine oil or oil filter in order toachieve longer replacement intervals thanthose prescribed. You could otherwisecause engine damage or damage to theexhaust gas aftertreatment.Follow the instructions in the service inter-val display regarding the oil change. Other-wise, you may damage the engine and theexhaust gas aftertreatment.

When handling engine oil, observe the impor-tant safety notes on service products(Y page 397).The engine oils are matched to the perform-ance of Mercedes-Benz engines and serviceintervals. You should therefore only useengine oils and oil filters that are approved forvehicles with maintenance systems.For a list of approved engine oils and oil filters,consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-ter. Or visit the websitehttp://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.The table shows which engine oils have beenapproved for your vehicle.

Model Engine

model

MB Approval

C 300C 300 4MATIC

274 229.3, 229.5,229.51,229.52

C 400 4MATIC 276 229.5

AMG vehicles 177 229.5

i MB approval is indicated on the oil con-tainers.

Filling capacitiesThe following values refer to an oil changeincluding the oil filter.

Model Capacity

C 300C 300 4MATIC

7.4 qt (7.0 l)

C 400 4MATIC 6.9 qt (6.5 l)

Additives

! Do not use any additives in the engine oil.This could damage the engine.

Engine oil viscosity

Viscosity describes the flow characteristicsof a fluid. If an engine oil has a high viscosity,this means that it is thick; a low viscositymeans that it is thin.Select an engine oil with an SAE classification(viscosity) suitable for the prevailing outsidetemperatures. The table shows you whichSAE classifications are to be used. The low-temperature characteristics of engine oilscan deteriorate significantly, e.g. as a resultof aging, soot and fuel deposits. It is thereforestrongly recommended that you carry out reg-ular oil changes using an approved engine oilwith the appropriate SAE classification.

400 Service products and filling capacitiesTechnicaldata

Brake fluid

G WARNINGThe brake fluid constantly absorbs moisturefrom the air. This lowers the boiling point ofthe brake fluid. If the boiling point of the brakefluid is too low, vapor pockets may form in thebrake system when the brakes are appliedhard. This would impair braking efficiency.There is a risk of an accident.You should have the brake fluid renewed atthe specified intervals.

When handling brake fluid, observe theimportant safety notes on service products(Y page 397).The brake fluid change intervals can be foundin the Maintenance Booklet.Only use brake fluid approved by Mercedes-Benz according to MB Approval 331.0.Information about approved brake fluid canbe obtained at any qualified specialist work-shop or on the Internet athttp://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.

i Have the brake fluid regularly replaced ata qualified specialist workshop and thereplacement confirmed in theMaintenanceBooklet.

Coolant

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf antifreeze comes into contact with hot com-ponents in the engine compartment, it mayignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.Let the engine cool down before you add anti-freeze.Make sure that antifreeze is not spillednext to the filler neck. Thoroughly clean theantifreeze from components before startingthe engine.

! Only add coolant that has been premixedwith the desired antifreeze protection. Youcould otherwise damage the engine.

Further information on coolants can befound in the Mercedes-Benz Specificationsfor Service Products, MB BeVo 310.1, e.g.on the Internet athttp://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. Or con-tact a qualified specialist workshop.

! Always use a suitable coolant mixture,even in countries where high temperaturesprevail.Otherwise, the engine cooling system is notsufficiently protected from corrosion andoverheating.

i Have the coolant regularly replaced at aqualified specialist workshop and thereplacement confirmed in theMaintenanceBooklet.

The coolant is a mixture of water and anti-freeze/corrosion inhibitor. It performs thefollowing tasks:Rcorrosion protectionRantifreeze protectionRraising the boiling pointIf the coolant has antifreeze protection downto -35‡ (-37†), the boiling point of the cool-ant during operation is approximately 266 ‡(130 †).The antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concentra-tion in the engine cooling system should:Rbe at least 50%. This will protect the enginecooling system against freezing down toapproximately -35 ‡ (-37 †).Rnot exceed 55% (antifreeze protectiondown to -49 ‡ [-45 †]). Otherwise, heatwill not be dissipated as effectively.

Mercedes-Benz recommends an antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concentrate in accord-ance with MB Specifications for Service Prod-ucts 310.1.The coolant is checked with every mainte-nance interval at a qualified specialist work-shop.

i When the vehicle is first delivered, it is fil-led with a coolant mixture that ensures

Service products and filling capacities 401

Technicaldata

Z

adequate antifreeze and corrosion protec-tion.

i The coolant is checked with every main-tenance interval at a qualified specialistworkshop.

Filling capacities

Model Capacity

C 300C 300 4MATIC

8.5 US qt (8.0 l)

C 400 4MATIC 11.5 US qt (10.9 l)

i Use MB 325.0 or MB 326.0 corrosioninhibitor/antifreeze.

Windshield/headlamp cleaning sys-tem

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWindshield washer concentrate could ignite ifit comes into contact with hot engine compo-nents or the exhaust system. There is a risk offire and injury.Make sure that no windshield washer con-centrate is spilled next to the filler neck.

! Only use washer fluid that is suitable forplastic lamp lenses, e.g. MB SummerFit orMB WinterFit. Unsuitable washer fluidcould damage the plastic lenses of theheadlamps.

! Do not add distilled or de-ionized water tothe washer fluid container. Otherwise, thelevel sensor may be damaged.

! Only MB SummerFit and MB WinterFitwasher fluid should be mixed together. Thespray nozzles may otherwise becomeblocked.

At temperatures above freezing:X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with amixtureof water and windshield washer fluid, e.g.MB SummerFit.

Add 1 part MB SummerFit to 100 parts water.At temperatures below freezing:X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with amixtureof water and washer fluid, e.g. MB Winter-Fit.For the correct mixing ratio refer to theinformation on the antifreeze reservoir.

i Add windshield washer fluid, e.g. MBSummerFit or MB WinterFit, to the washerfluid all year round.

Climate control system refrigerant

Important safety notesThe climate control system of your vehicle isfilled with refrigerant R‑134a.The instruction label regarding the refrigeranttype used can be found on the radiator crossmember.

! Only the refrigerant R‑134a and the PAGoil approved by Mercedes-Benz may beused. The approved PAG oil may not bemixed with any other PAG oil that is notapproved for R-134a refrigerant. Other-wise, the climate control system may bedamaged.

Service work, such as topping up refrigerantor replacing components, may only be carriedout by a qualified specialist workshop. Allapplicable regulations must be adhered to,SAE standard J639 included.Always have work on the climate control sys-tem carried out at a qualified specialist work-shop.

402 Service products and filling capacitiesTechnicaldata

Refrigerant instruction label

Example: refrigerant instruction label: Warning symbol; Refrigerant filling capacity= Applicable standards? PAG oil part numberA Type of refrigerantWarning symbol: advises you about:Rpossible dangersRhaving service work carried out at a quali-fied specialist workshop

Filling capacities

Model Refrigerant

All models 22.2 ± 0.4 oz(630 ± 10 g)

Model PAG oil

All models 2.8 oz(80 g)

Vehicle data

General notesPlease note that for the specified vehicledata:Rthe heights specified may vary as a resultof:- tires- load- condition of the suspension- optional equipmentRoptional equipment reduces the maximumpayload.

Dimensions and weights

Model :: Opening height

C 300 69.6 in (1768 mm)

All other models 69.8 in (1774 mm)

All models

Vehicle length 184.5 in (4686mm)

Vehicle widthincluding exteriormirrors

79.5 in (2020 mm)

Wheelbase 111.8 in (2840mm)

Turning radius 36.8 ft (11.22 m)

Vehicle data 403

Technicaldata

Z

All models

Maximum roof load 165 lb (75 kg)

Maximum trunkload

220 lb (100 kg)

Model Vehicle height

C 300 57.0 in (1447 mm)

All other models 57.2 in (1452 mm)

404 Vehicle dataTechnicaldata